1830 pss16 PDF

Title page
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS

PHOTONIC SERVICE SWITCH 36/32/16/4 (PSS-36/PSS-
32/PSS-16/PSS-4) | Release 3.6.0 and 3.6.1
MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLE-CLEARING USER GUIDE
8DG60888CAAA
Issue 1
June 2011
Legal notice
Legal notice
Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of their respective
owners.
The information presented is subject to change without notice. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies contained herein.
Copyright © 2011 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved.
Conformance statements
Interference Information: Part 15 of FCC Rules
Security statement
In rare instances, unauthorized individuals make connections to the telecommunications network through the use of remote access features. In such an event,
applicable tariffs require that the customer pay all network charges for traffic. Alcatel-Lucent cannot be responsible for such charges and will not make any
allowance or give any credit for charges that result from unauthorized access.
Limited warranty
For terms and conditions of sale, contact your Alcatel-Lucent Account Team.
Ordering Information
For more ordering information, refer to "How to order" in the section titled "About this document."
Contents
About this document

Purpose ...................................................................................................................................................................................... xxxix
xxxix
Intended audience ................................................................................................................................................................. xxxix

xxxix
How to use this information product .............................................................................................................................. xxxix
Safety information ........................................................................................................................................................................ xl

xl
Conventions used .......................................................................................................................................................................... xl

xl
Related information ..................................................................................................................................................................... xl

xl
Information product support ................................................................................................................................................... xli

xli
Technical support ........................................................................................................................................................................ xli

xli
How to order ................................................................................................................................................................................. xli

xli
Packaging collection and recovery requirements ........................................................................................................... xlii
Recycling/take-back/disposal of product .......................................................................................................................... xlii
How to comment ....................................................................................................................................................................... xliii

xliii
1 Alarm and condition details
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-1

1-1
AISL .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-9

1-9
AIS - ODU .................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-9

1-9
AIS - OTU ................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-10

1-10
ALLCHANMISS .................................................................................................................................................................... 1-10

1-10
ALLCHANMISSOUT .......................................................................................................................................................... 1-11

1-11
AMPDISABLED .................................................................................................................................................................... 1-11

1-11
APRLine ................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-12

1-12
APRNODE .............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-13

1-13
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 iii
8DG60888CAAA Release 3.6.0 and 3.6.1
Issue 1 June 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APROSC .................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-13
1-13
APRSWITCH .......................................................................................................................................................................... 1-14

1-14
APRTOPO ............................................................................................................................................................................... 1-14

1-14
APRUNAVAIL ....................................................................................................................................................................... 1-15

1-15
APRUNAVAILOSC ............................................................................................................................................................. 1-15

1-15
APSB .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-16

1-16
APSCM ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-16

1-16
APSMM ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-17

1-17
AUTHFAIL .............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-18

1-18
AUTORESET .......................................................................................................................................................................... 1-18

1-18
AUTOSWTIMREF ................................................................................................................................................................ 1-20

1-20
B1SD ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-20

1-20
BASELine ................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-21

1-21
BDI .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-22

1-22
BDIEGR .................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-23

1-23
BDIODU .................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-23

1-23
CARDINIT .............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-25

1-25
CONFIGFAIL ......................................................................................................................................................................... 1-27

1-27
CONTCOM .............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-29

1-29
CONTEQPT ............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-31

1-31
CONTR ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-32

1-32
CONTR-OUT .......................................................................................................................................................................... 1-32

1-32
CRDINIT ................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-33

1-33
DATAERR ............................................................................................................................................................................... 1-35

1-35
DATAFLT ................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-37

1-37
DBBKUP-IP ............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-39

1-39
DBFL .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-39

1-39
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
iv 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DBFT .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-40
1-40
DBINVALID ........................................................................................................................................................................... 1-40

1-40
DBMEMTRF .......................................................................................................................................................................... 1-40

1-40
DBRSTR-IP ............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-41

1-41
DBUNSYNC ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1-41

1-41
DEGOTU .................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-41

1-41
DISCOVERMOD .................................................................................................................................................................. 1-42

1-42
DORMANTUSER ................................................................................................................................................................. 1-44

1-44
EBER .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-44

1-44
EBER-O ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-45

1-45
ETHCSF .................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-45

1-45
ENV [1-8] .................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-46

1-46
EQPT .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-46

1-46
EQPTBOOT ............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-48

1-48
EQPTDGR ................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-50

1-50
EQPTDGROCH ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1-51

1-51
EQPTDGROCH-OUT .......................................................................................................................................................... 1-52

1-52
EQPTDGR-OUT .................................................................................................................................................................... 1-53

1-53
EQPTPORT .............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-54

1-54
EXCESSLOAD ....................................................................................................................................................................... 1-55

1-55
FACTERM-DEV .................................................................................................................................................................... 1-56

1-56
FANSPEEDHIGH .................................................................................................................................................................. 1-57

1-57
FANSPEEDLOW ................................................................................................................................................................... 1-57

1-57
FANSPEEDMAN ................................................................................................................................................................... 1-58

1-58
FECECSD ................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-58

1-58
FECUBCSD ............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-58

1-58
FELANLFI ............................................................................................................................................................................... 1-59

1-59
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 v
Issue 1 June 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FELANLOS ............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-60
1-60
FELANLSS .............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-60

1-60
FELANRFI ............................................................................................................................................................................... 1-61

1-61
FELOS ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-62

1-62
FEPORTMISMATCH .......................................................................................................................................................... 1-62

1-62
FEPRLF ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-63

1-63
FPGAFAIL ............................................................................................................................................................................... 1-63

1-63
FPGAINIT ................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-65

1-65
FPGATIMEOUT .................................................................................................................................................................... 1-67

1-67
FRCDSWTIMREF ................................................................................................................................................................ 1-69

1-69
FRCDWKSWBK ................................................................................................................................................................... 1-69

1-69
FRCDWKSWPR .................................................................................................................................................................... 1-70

1-70
FRNGSYNC ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1-71

1-71
FWPENDINGOBSOLETE ............................................................................................................................................... 1-72

1-72
FWUPGRADEPENDING .................................................................................................................................................. 1-74

1-74
FWVERSIONNOTDEFAULT .......................................................................................................................................... 1-76

1-76
HIBER ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-77

1-77
HIGAIN ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-78

1-78
HLDOVRSYNC ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1-78

1-78
HWNOTSUPPORTED ........................................................................................................................................................ 1-79

1-79
INSERTMOD .......................................................................................................................................................................... 1-79

1-79
INTTEMPHIGH ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1-81

1-81
INTTEMPLOW ...................................................................................................................................................................... 1-83

1-83
INTTEMPOPT ....................................................................................................................................................................... 1-85

1-85
INTRUSION ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1-86

1-86
INTRUSIONEVT .................................................................................................................................................................. 1-86

1-86
INVALIDEGRESS ................................................................................................................................................................ 1-86

1-86
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
vi 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
INVALIDTHRESHOLD ..................................................................................................................................................... 1-87
1-87
INVENTORYERROR .......................................................................................................................................................... 1-87

1-87
LANLFI ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-89

1-89
LANLOS ................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-90

1-90
LANLSS .................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-91

1-91
LANRFI ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-92

1-92
LASEREOL ............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-92

1-92
LCK ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-93

1-93
LCKEGR ................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-94

1-94
LFD ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-94

1-94
LFIEGR ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-95

1-95
LINKDOWN ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1-95

1-95
LINKUP ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-96

1-96
LOAM ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-96

1-96
LOC ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-97

1-97
LOCKOUTOFPR ................................................................................................................................................................... 1-97

1-97
LOCKOUTOFTIMREF ....................................................................................................................................................... 1-98

1-98
LOF ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-98

1-98
LOFEGR ................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-100

1-100
LOF-O ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-101

1-101
LOGAIN ................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-102

1-102
LOM ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-103

1-103
LOS ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-104

1-104
LOSDCM ................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-108

1-108
LOSLDSig .............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-108

1-108
LOSOCM ................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-109

1-109
LOS-O ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-109

1-109
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 vii
Issue 1 June 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOS-OUT ............................................................................................................................................................................... 1-110
1-110
LOS-P ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-111

1-111
LPBKLine ............................................................................................................................................................................... 1-113

1-113
LPBKTERM .......................................................................................................................................................................... 1-114

1-114
LSPOW_ALM_W ............................................................................................................................................................... 1-115

1-115
LSTEMP_ALM_W ............................................................................................................................................................. 1-115

1-115
LSSEGR .................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-116

1-116
MAN ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-116

1-116
MANRESET .......................................................................................................................................................................... 1-120

1-120
MANSWTIMREF ............................................................................................................................................................... 1-122

1-122
MANSWTOINT ................................................................................................................................................................... 1-122

1-122
MANWKSWBK .................................................................................................................................................................. 1-123

1-123
MANWKSWPR ................................................................................................................................................................... 1-123

1-123
MISMATCH .......................................................................................................................................................................... 1-124

1-124
MISMATCHMOD ............................................................................................................................................................... 1-127

1-127
MIXEDPFUSED .................................................................................................................................................................. 1-128

1-128
MMG ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-128

1-128
MOD ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-128

1-128
MODOUTOOR .................................................................................................................................................................... 1-129

1-129
MODOUTOOR .................................................................................................................................................................... 1-130

1-130
MSIM ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-130

1-130
MTCESURV .......................................................................................................................................................................... 1-130

1-130
MTCESURVDGR ............................................................................................................................................................... 1-131

1-131
NET ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-132

1-132
NOTALLOWED .................................................................................................................................................................. 1-134

1-134
NTPOOSYNC ....................................................................................................................................................................... 1-134

1-134
OAPUMPBIASCURRHIGH .......................................................................................................................................... 1-134

1-134
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
viii 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OAPUMPTEMPHIGH ...................................................................................................................................................... 1-135
1-135
OCHCOLLISION ................................................................................................................................................................ 1-136

1-136
OCHCOLLISION-OUT .................................................................................................................................................... 1-137

1-137
OCHKEYDUP ...................................................................................................................................................................... 1-137

1-137
OCHKEYOVERLAP ......................................................................................................................................................... 1-138

1-138
OCHFDI .................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-139

1-139
OCHPDI .................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-140

1-140
OCHTRAILDUP ................................................................................................................................................................. 1-140

1-140
OCHTRAILUNKNOWN ................................................................................................................................................. 1-141

1-141
OCHUNKNOWN ................................................................................................................................................................ 1-142

1-142
OCHUNKNOWN-OUT .................................................................................................................................................... 1-143

1-143
OCI ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-144

1-144
OCIEGR .................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-145

1-145
OPR ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-145

1-145
OPRPWRHIGH .................................................................................................................................................................... 1-146

1-146
OPRPWRLOW ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1-147

1-147
OPRLOSSHIGH .................................................................................................................................................................. 1-148

1-148
OPRLOSSLOW ................................................................................................................................................................... 1-148

1-148
OPROOR ................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-149

1-149
OPR-OUT ............................................................................................................................................................................... 1-149

1-149
OPRTX .................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-150

1-150
OPRUNACHIEVE .............................................................................................................................................................. 1-151

1-151
OPTINTBASE ...................................................................................................................................................................... 1-152

1-152
OPTINTDET ......................................................................................................................................................................... 1-152

1-152
OPTINTSUSP ....................................................................................................................................................................... 1-153

1-153
OSCSSF .................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-154

1-154
PCSGENERATOR .............................................................................................................................................................. 1-154

1-154
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 ix
Issue 1 June 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PLM .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-155
1-155
PLMEGR ................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-156

1-156
PRCDRERR-TOPO ............................................................................................................................................................ 1-156

1-156
PWR ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-157

1-157
PWRADJCOMMS .............................................................................................................................................................. 1-158

1-158
PWRADJFAIL ...................................................................................................................................................................... 1-158

1-158
PWRADJREQ ....................................................................................................................................................................... 1-159

1-159
PWRMARGIN ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1-160

1-160
PWRMAXGAIN .................................................................................................................................................................. 1-161

1-161
PWRSUSP .............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-161

1-161
PWRTILTSUSP .................................................................................................................................................................... 1-162

1-162
RAMANSUSP (Raman Suppress - Line) ................................................................................................................... 1-163

1-163
RCVROPTPROG ............................................................................................................................................................... 1-163

1-163
RDI ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-164

1-164
REMOVEMOD ................................................................................................................................................................... 1-165

1-165
REPLUNITMISS ................................................................................................................................................................. 1-166

1-166
REPLUNITMISSMOD ..................................................................................................................................................... 1-170

1-170
RFIEGR ................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-171

1-171
RFIL ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-172

1-172
SDBER .................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-172

1-172
SDBER (RS) .......................................................................................................................................................................... 1-173

1-173
SDEG-O .................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-173

1-173
SDEGR .................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-174

1-174
SFMISMATCH ................................................................................................................................................................... 1-174

1-174
SLTMSIG ................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-176

1-176
SSF ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-176

1-176
SSFODU ................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-178

1-178
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
x 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SSFODUEGR ....................................................................................................................................................................... 1-179
1-179
SWEQPT ............................................................................................................................................................................... 1-179

1-179
SWFTDWN ........................................................................................................................................................................... 1-180

1-180
SWMTXMOD ...................................................................................................................................................................... 1-181

1-181
SWUPGCOMMIT ............................................................................................................................................................... 1-182

1-182
SWUPGFAIL ........................................................................................................................................................................ 1-183

1-183
SYNCOOS ............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-184

1-184
SYNCREFUNEQ ................................................................................................................................................................ 1-184

1-184
SYSBOOT .............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-185

1-185
TIM ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-185

1-185
TIMEGR ................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-186

1-186
TIMODU ................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-187

1-187
TRMT ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-188

1-188
TRMTMOD ........................................................................................................................................................................... 1-188

1-188
UNG/UNP .............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-190

1-190
UNKNOWN .......................................................................................................................................................................... 1-190

1-190
UNKNOWNMOD ............................................................................................................................................................... 1-192

1-192
UPM .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-194

1-194
USALS (rr) ............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-194

1-194
USLOS ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-196

1-196
USOCHCOLLISION ......................................................................................................................................................... 1-197

1-197
VCGLOA ................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-198

1-198
VCGSSF .................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-198

1-198
VOLTAGEHIGH ................................................................................................................................................................. 1-198

1-198
VOLTAGELOW .................................................................................................................................................................. 1-200

1-200
VTSFDI ................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-202

1-202
VTSOCI .................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-203

1-203
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 xi
Issue 1 June 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WKSWBK .............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-203
1-203
WKSWPR ............................................................................................................................................................................... 1-204

1-204
WTR ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-205

1-205
2 Trouble-clearing procedures
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1

2-1
Safety statements
Structure of safety statements ............................................................................................................................................ 2-18

2-18
Safety precautions .................................................................................................................................................................. 2-19

2-19
AISL
AIS Line/MS ............................................................................................................................................................................ 2-20

2-20
Client Port AISL ..................................................................................................................................................................... 2-21

2-21
AIS - ODU ................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-23

2-23
AIS - OTU ................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-24

2-24
ALLCHANMISS
ALLCHANMISS (C-Band Loss of signal); ALLCHANMISS-OUT ................................................................. 2-24

2-24
ALLCHANMISS (C-Band Loss of signal) .................................................................................................................. 2-26

2-26
ALLCHANMISS-OUT
ALLCHANMISS-OUT (C-Band Loss of signal) ....................................................................................................... 2-26

2-26
AMPDISABLED
AMPDISABLED (Amplifier Disabled) ......................................................................................................................... 2-29

2-29
APRLINE
APRLINE (APR Active - Line) ........................................................................................................................................ 2-30

2-30
APRNODE
APRNODE (APR Active - Node) .................................................................................................................................... 2-32

2-32
APROSC
APROSC (APR Limited - OSC SFP failure condition) ........................................................................................... 2-32

2-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xii 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APRSWITCH
APRSWITCH (APR Active – Port Switch) .................................................................................................................. 2-33

2-33
APRTOPO
APRTOPO (APR Active - Invalid Topology) .............................................................................................................. 2-34

2-34
APRUNAVAIL
APRUNAVAIL (APR unavailable - monitoring card booting) ............................................................................. 2-34

2-34
APRUNAVAILOSC
APRUNAVAILOSC (APR Limited - OSC SFP failure) .......................................................................................... 2-36

2-36
APSB
APSB (APS protection switching byte failure) ........................................................................................................... 2-36

2-36
APSCM
APSCM (APS Channel Mismatch) .................................................................................................................................. 2-38

2-38
APSMM
APSMM (APS Mode Mismatch) ..................................................................................................................................... 2-41

2-41
AUTHFAIL
AUTHFAIL (Authentication Failure) ............................................................................................................................. 2-43

2-43
AUTORESET
AUTORESET (Card Autonomous Reset) ..................................................................................................................... 2-44

2-44
AUTOSWTIMREF
AUTOSWTIMREF (Automatic Switch Timing Reference) .................................................................................. 2-45

2-45
B1SD
B1SD (B1 Signal Degrade) ................................................................................................................................................ 2-45

2-45
BASELINE
BASELINE ............................................................................................................................................................................... 2-46

2-46
BDI
Backward Defect Indication (BDI) - OTU .................................................................................................................... 2-47

2-47
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 xiii
Issue 1 June 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BDIEGR
BDIEGR (Egress Backward Defect Indication - ODU) ........................................................................................... 2-48

2-48
BDIODU
Backward Defect Indication (BDI) - ODU ................................................................................................................... 2-49

2-49
CARDINIT
CARDINIT (Card Initializing) .......................................................................................................................................... 2-50

2-50
CONFIGFAIL
CONFIGFAIL (Line Card Configuration Failed) ....................................................................................................... 2-51

2-51
CONTCOM
CONTCOM (Card Failure - Communication) ............................................................................................................ 2-52

2-52
CONTCOM (Inter-shelf loss of communication) ....................................................................................................... 2-53

2-53
CONTEQPT
CONTEQPT (Card Failure - Device) ............................................................................................................................. 2-54

2-54
CONTR
CONTR (Port degrade - wavelength tracker failure) ................................................................................................ 2-55

2-55
CONTR-OUT
CONTR-OUT (Port degrade - wavelength tracker detection failure) ................................................................. 2-57

2-57
CRDINIT
CRDINIT (Card Identification Event) ............................................................................................................................ 2-58

2-58
DATAERR
DATAERR (Data Error or Timeout) ................................................................................................................................ 2-59

2-59
DATAFLT
DATAFLT (Card Provisioning Failure) .......................................................................................................................... 2-60

2-60
DBBKUP-IP
DBBKUP-IP (Database Backup In-Progress) .............................................................................................................. 2-62

2-62
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xiv 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DBFL
DBFL (DB Failure Local - copy creation of processing failure) .......................................................................... 2-63
2-63
DBFT
DBFT (DB Failure Transport - file transport failure) ............................................................................................... 2-63

2-63
DBINVALID
DBINVALID (Database invalid) ...................................................................................................................................... 2-64

2-64
DBMEMTRF
DBMEMTRF (Database synchronization failure) ..................................................................................................... 2-65

2-65
DBRSTR-IP
DBRSTR-IP (Database Restore In Progress) ............................................................................................................... 2-67

2-67
DBUNSYNC
DBUNSYNC (The active and standby Main EC databases are not synchronized) ....................................... 2-68
2-68
DEGOTU
DEGOTU (Signal Degrade - OTU) ................................................................................................................................. 2-68

2-68
DISCOVERMOD
DISCOVERMOD (Pluggable Module Discovered) .................................................................................................. 2-69

2-69
DORMANTUSER
DORMANTUSER (User inactive) .................................................................................................................................. 2-71

2-71
ETHCSF
ETHCSF (Ethernet Client Signal Failure) .................................................................................................................... 2-71

2-71
EQPT
EQPT (Card Failure - Device) ........................................................................................................................................... 2-72

2-72
EQPT (Card Failure - Device) ........................................................................................................................................... 2-73

2-73
EQPTBOOT
EQPTBOOT (Card failure - boot failure) ...................................................................................................................... 2-74

2-74
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 xv
Issue 1 June 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EQPTDGR
EQPTDGR (Card Degrade - device) ............................................................................................................................... 2-75

2-75
EQPTDGR (Port Degrade - Wavelength Tracker Communication Failure) ..................................................... 2-77

2-77
EQPTDGROCH
EQPTDGROCH (Port Degrade - Wavelength Tracker Communication Failure) ......................................... 2-78

2-78
EQPTDGR-OUT
EQPTDGR-OUT (Port Degrade - Wavelength Tracker Communication Failure) ......................................... 2-80

2-80
EQPTDGROCH-OUT
EQPTDGROCH-OUT (Port Degrade - Wavelength Tracker Communication Failure) .............................. 2-81

2-81
EQPTPORT
EQPTPORT (Port Failure - Device): .............................................................................................................................. 2-83

2-83
EBER
EBER (Excessive BER) ....................................................................................................................................................... 2-84

2-84
EBER-O (Optical Supervision Channel Excessive BER) ....................................................................................... 2-86

2-86
ENV
ENV (Environmental Input [1-8] active) ....................................................................................................................... 2-88

2-88
EXCESSLOAD
EXCESSLOAD (Excessive Current Load) .................................................................................................................. 2-88

2-88
FACTERM-DEV
FACTERM-DEV (Pluggable Module SEEP Failure) ............................................................................................... 2-89

2-89
FANSPEEDHIGH
FANSPEEDHIGH (Fan Speed is too high) .................................................................................................................. 2-90

2-90
FANSPEEDLOW
FANSPEEDLOW (Fan speed is too low) ...................................................................................................................... 2-91

2-91
FANSPEEDMAN
FANSPEEDMAN (Fan speed manually set to maximum) ..................................................................................... 2-92

2-92
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xvi 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FECECSD
FECECSD (Pre-FEC Signal Degrade) ........................................................................................................................... 2-93

2-93
FECUBCSD
FECUBCSD (Post-FEC Signal Degrade) ..................................................................................................................... 2-93

2-93
FELANLFI
FELANLFI (Far End Local Fault) ................................................................................................................................... 2-94

2-94
FELANLOS
FELANLOS (Far End Loss of Signal) .......................................................................................................................... 2-95

2-95
FELANLSS
FELANLSS (Far End Loss of Synchronization) ....................................................................................................... 2-96

2-96
FELANRFI
FELANRFI (Far End Remote Fault) ............................................................................................................................... 2-97

2-97
FELOS
FELOS (Far End Loss of Synchronization) ................................................................................................................ 2-97

2-97
FEPORTMISMATCH
FEPORTMISMATCH (Far End Port Mapping Mismatch) .................................................................................... 2-98

2-98
FEPRLF
FEPRLF (Far End Protection Line Failure) .................................................................................................................. 2-99

2-99
FPGAFAIL
FPGAFAIL (FPGA Download or Programming Failure) ..................................................................................... 2-100

2-100
FPGAINIT
FPGAINIT (FPGA Initializing) ...................................................................................................................................... 2-101

2-101
FPGATIMEOUT
FPGATIMEOUT (FPGA Timeout) ............................................................................................................................... 2-102

2-102
FRCDSWTIMREF
FRCDSWTIMREF (Forced Switch Timing Reference) ........................................................................................ 2-102

2-102
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 xvii
Issue 1 June 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FRCDWKSWBK
FRCDWKSWBK (Forced switch to working) ......................................................................................................... 2-103

2-103
FRCDWKSWPR
FRCDWKSWPR (Forced switch to protection) ....................................................................................................... 2-104

2-104
FRNGSYNC
FRNGSYNC (System clock is in free running synchronization mode) .......................................................... 2-105

2-105
FWPENDINGOBSOLETE
FWPENDINGOBSOLETE (Firmware on this pack is about to become obsolete with the software
release upgrade) ............................................................................................................................................................ 2-106
2-106
FWUPGRADEPENDING
FWUPGRADEPENDING (Firmware upgrade pending) ..................................................................................... 2-106

2-106
FWVERSIONNOTDEFAULT
FWVERSIONNOTDEFAULT (Firmware version on this pack is not the default version for this
software release) .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-108
2-108
HIBER
HIBER (High BER) ............................................................................................................................................................ 2-109

2-109
HIGAIN
HIGAIN (Amplifier Out of Operational Range: Gain too High) ....................................................................... 2-110
2-110
HLDOVRSYNC
HLDOVRSYNC (System timing is in autonomous holdover synchronization mode) .............................. 2-112

2-112
HWNOTSUPPORTED
HWNOTSUPPORTED (Hardware not supported for current configuration) ............................................... 2-112

2-112
INSERTMOD
INSERTMOD (Pluggable Module Inserted) .............................................................................................................. 2-113

2-113
INTTEMPHIGH
INTTEMP (Card over temperature) .............................................................................................................................. 2-114

2-114
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xviii 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
INTTEMPLOW
INTTEMPLOW (Card under temperature) ................................................................................................................ 2-114

2-114
INTTEMPOPT
INTTEMP (Optics over temperature) ........................................................................................................................... 2-115

2-115
INTRUSION
INTRUSION ......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-116

2-116
INTRUSIONEVT (Excessive Invalid Login Attempts) ........................................................................................ 2-117

2-117
INVALIDEGRESS
INVALIDEGRESS (Invalid or no egress port defined) ......................................................................................... 2-118

2-118
INVALIDTHRESHOLD
INVALIDTHRESHOLD ................................................................................................................................................... 2-118

2-118
INVENTORYERROR
INVENTORYERROR (Card Inventory Error) ......................................................................................................... 2-119

2-119
LANLFI
LANLFI (Local Fault) ....................................................................................................................................................... 2-120

2-120
LANLOS
LANLOS (LAN port LOS) .............................................................................................................................................. 2-121

2-121
LANLSS
LANLSS (Loss of Synchronization) ............................................................................................................................. 2-122

2-122
LANRFI
LANRFI (Remote Fault Indication) .............................................................................................................................. 2-124

2-124
LASEREOL
LASEREOL (Laser end of life) ...................................................................................................................................... 2-125

2-125
LCK
LCK (Locked - OTU) ......................................................................................................................................................... 2-126

2-126
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 xix
Issue 1 June 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LCKEGR
LCKEGR (Egress Locked - ODU) ................................................................................................................................ 2-127

2-127
LFD
LFD (GFP Loss of Frame Delineation) ...................................................................................................................... 2-128

2-128
LFIEGR
LFIEGR (Remote Client Local Fault) .......................................................................................................................... 2-129

2-129
LINKDOWN
LINKDOWN (Link down) ............................................................................................................................................... 2-129

2-129
LINKUP
LINKUP (Link Up) ............................................................................................................................................................. 2-131

2-131
LOAM
LOAM (Loss of Alignment Marker Lock) ................................................................................................................. 2-132

2-132
LOC
LOC (Loss of Continuity) ................................................................................................................................................. 2-132

2-132
LOCKOUTOFPR
LOCKOUTOFPR (Lockout of protection) ................................................................................................................. 2-133

2-133
LOCKOUTOFTIMREF
.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-135
2-135
LOF
LOF (Loss Of Frame) ......................................................................................................................................................... 2-135

2-135
Transponder Client Port Loss of Frame ....................................................................................................................... 2-137

2-137
Transponder Network Port Loss of Frame ................................................................................................................. 2-139

2-139
LOF-O (Incoming SUPVY LOF) .................................................................................................................................. 2-142

2-142
LOFEGR
LOFEGR (Loss of Frame Egress) ................................................................................................................................. 2-144

2-144
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xx 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOGAIN
LOGAIN (Amplifier out of operational range - amplifier gain too low) ........................................................ 2-145
2-145
LOM
LOM (Loss of Multiframe - OTU) ................................................................................................................................ 2-146

2-146
LOS
LOS (Loss of Signal) .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-148

2-148
LOS (Channel Absent) ....................................................................................................................................................... 2-150

2-150
LD Input LOS ....................................................................................................................................................................... 2-153

2-153
CWR Input LOS ................................................................................................................................................................... 2-155

2-155
LOS (Loss of signal) ........................................................................................................................................................... 2-157

2-157
Input LOS ............................................................................................................................................................................... 2-160

2-160
OMD Input LOS .................................................................................................................................................................. 2-161

2-161
LOSDCM
LOSDCM (From DCM Input LOS) .............................................................................................................................. 2-162

2-162
LOSLDSIG
LOSLDSIG (LD SIG Input LOS) .................................................................................................................................. 2-164

2-164
LOSOCM
LOSOCM (WTOCM Input LOS) .................................................................................................................................. 2-166

2-166
LOS-O
LOS-O (Incoming SUPVY LOS) .................................................................................................................................. 2-167

2-167
LOS-OUT
LOS-OUT (Outgoing Loss of Signal) and (Outgoing Channel Absent) .......................................................... 2-169
2-169
LOS-P
LOS-P (Incoming Payload LOS) ................................................................................................................................... 2-172

2-172
LPBKLINE
LPBKLINE (Line [Facility] Loopback Active) ........................................................................................................ 2-173

2-173
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 xxi
Issue 1 June 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LPBKTERM
LPBKTERM (Diagnostic (Terminal) loopback active) ......................................................................................... 2-174

2-174
LSPOW_ALM_W
LSPOW_ALM_W (Laser Back-Facet Optical Power Cross Threshold) ........................................................ 2-175

2-175
LSTEMP_ALM_W
LSTEMP_ALM_W (Laser Cooling Current Cross Threshold) .......................................................................... 2-176

2-176
LSSEGR
LSSEGR (Remote Client Loss of Synchronization) .............................................................................................. 2-177

2-177
MAN
MAN (Manually caused abnormal condition - card in maintenance) / MAN (Manually caused
abnormal condition - Port in maintenance) / MAN (Logical removal performed on a timing
reference) ........................................................................................................................................................................ 2-177
2-177
MAN (Manually caused abnormal condition - card in maintenance) .............................................................. 2-179

2-179
MAN (Manually caused abnormal condition - port in maintenance) ............................................................... 2-180

2-180
MAN (Logical removal performed on a timing reference) .................................................................................. 2-180

2-180
MANRESET
MANRESET (Card Manual Reset) ............................................................................................................................... 2-181

2-181
MANSWTIMREF
MANSWTIMREF (Timing selection was switched by a manual command to a timing reference) ..... 2-182
2-182
MANSWTOINT
MANSWTOINT (Manual Switch to Internal Timing ) ......................................................................................... 2-182

2-182
MANWKSWBK
MANWKSWBK (Manual switch to working) ......................................................................................................... 2-183

2-183
MANWKSWPR
MANWKSWPR (Manual switch to protection) ....................................................................................................... 2-184

2-184
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxii 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MISMATCH
MISMATCH (Card Mismatch); MISMATCH (Power Filter Mismatch); MISMATCH (Shelf

Mismatch), .................................................................................................................................................................... 2-185
2-185
MISMATCH (Card Mismatch) ....................................................................................................................................... 2-186

2-186
MISMATCH (Power Filter Mismatch) ........................................................................................................................ 2-189

2-189
MISMATCH (Shelf Mismatch) ...................................................................................................................................... 2-191

2-191
MISMATCHMOD
MISMATCH (Pluggable Module Mismatch) ............................................................................................................ 2-192

2-192
MIXEDPFUSED
MIXEDPFUSED (Mixed types of power filters used) .......................................................................................... 2-193

2-193
MMG
MMG (Mismerge) ............................................................................................................................................................... 2-194

2-194
MOD
MOD (Card degrade - Wavelength Tracker Channel ID Insertion) ................................................................... 2-195

2-195
MODOUTOOR
MODOUTOOR (Modulator output power out of range) ...................................................................................... 2-197

2-197
MSIM
MSIM (Multiplex Structure Indication Mismatch) ................................................................................................. 2-198

2-198
MTCESURV
MTCESURV (Add power control failure) .................................................................................................................. 2-199

2-199
MTCESURVDGR
MTCESURVDGR (Port degrade - wavelength tracker encode degrade) ....................................................... 2-201

2-201
NET
NET (Link Down; Data Link Down) ............................................................................................................................ 2-202

2-202
NOTALLOWED
NOTALLOWED (Card not allowed) ........................................................................................................................... 2-205

2-205
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 xxiii
Issue 1 June 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NTPOOSYNC
NTPOOSYNC (Network Time Protocol is enabled, but no NTP server is reachable) .............................. 2-205
2-205
OAPUMPBIASCURRHIGH
OAPUMPBIASCURRHIGH (OA pump laser bias current high) ..................................................................... 2-207

2-207
OAPUMPTEMPHIGH
OAPUMPTEMPHIGH (OA pump laser temperature high) ................................................................................ 2-208

2-208
OCHCOLLISION
OCHCOLLISION (Channel collision) ........................................................................................................................ 2-208

2-208
OCHCOLLISION-OUT
OCHCOLLISION-OUT (Channel collision Output Direction) .......................................................................... 2-211

2-211
OCHFDI
OCHFDI (Optical Channel Forward Defect Indication) ....................................................................................... 2-213

2-213
OCHPDI
OCHPDI (Channel Payload Defect Indicator) .......................................................................................................... 2-215

2-215
OCHKEYDUP
OCHKEYDUP (Duplicate Wave Key) ........................................................................................................................ 2-217

2-217
OCHKEYOVERLAP
OCHKEYOVERLAP (Wave Key overlap) ................................................................................................................ 2-218

2-218
OCHTRAILDUP
OCHTRAILDUP (Duplicate OCH Trail name) ....................................................................................................... 2-219

2-219
OCHTRAILDUP (Duplicate OCh trail name) .......................................................................................................... 2-221

2-221
OCHTRAILUNKNOWN
OCHTRAILUNKNOWN (Unknown OCH Trail for x-connect) ....................................................................... 2-221

2-221
OCHUNKNOWN
OCHUNKNOWN (Channel Unexpected) .................................................................................................................. 2-223

2-223
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxiv 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCHUNKNOWN-OUT
OCHUNKNOWN-OUT (Channel Unexpected) ...................................................................................................... 2-225

2-225
OCI
OCI (Open Connection Indication - ODU) ................................................................................................................ 2-226

2-226
OCIEGR
OCIEGR (Egress Open Connection Indication - ODU) ........................................................................................ 2-227

2-227
OPR
OPR (Channel Optical Power Out of Range) ............................................................................................................ 2-228

2-228
OPRLOSSHIGH
OPRLOSSHIGH (Out of Operational Range – Loss Too High between DCM Ports of LD) ................. 2-230
2-230
OPRLOSSLOW
OPRLOSSLOW (Out of Operational Range - Loss Too Low) ........................................................................... 2-231

2-231
OPRPWRHIGH
OPRPWRHIGH (Out of Operational Range - Input Power Too High) ........................................................... 2-233
2-233
OPRPWRLOW
OPRPWRLOW (Out of Operational Range - Input Power Too Low) ............................................................. 2-235
2-235
OPROOR
OPROOR (Optical power received out of range) .................................................................................................... 2-237

2-237
OPR-OUT
OPR-OUT (Outgoing Channel Optical Power Out of Range) ............................................................................ 2-238

2-238
OPRTX
OPRTX (Channel Power Unstable) ............................................................................................................................... 2-239

2-239
OPRUNACHIEVE
OPRUNACHIEVE (Channel Power Unachievable) .............................................................................................. 2-241

2-241
OPTINTBASE
OPTINTBASE (Optical Intrusion Baseline Needed) ............................................................................................. 2-244

2-244
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 xxv
Issue 1 June 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OPTINTDET
OPTINTDET (Optical Intrusion — Detected) .......................................................................................................... 2-245

2-245
OPTINTSUSP
OPTINTSUSP (Optical Intrusion – Monitoring Suspended) .............................................................................. 2-245

2-245
OSCSSF
OSCSSF (Server Signal Failure - OSC) ...................................................................................................................... 2-247

2-247
PCSGENERATOR
PCSGENERATOR (PCS Generator active) ............................................................................................................... 2-248

2-248
PLM
PLM (Payload Mismatch Indication - ODU) ............................................................................................................ 2-248

2-248
PLMEGR
PLMEGR (Egress Payload Mismatch Indication - ODU) .................................................................................... 2-249

2-249
PRCDRERR
PRCDRERR .......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-250

2-250
PRCDRERR (Subtended shelf cannot be assigned a shelf id) ............................................................................ 2-251

2-251
PRCDRERR-TOPO (Invalid topology) ...................................................................................................................... 2-252

2-252
PRCDRERR-TOPO (Power management topology invalid) .............................................................................. 2-253

2-253
PWR
PWR ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-254

2-254
(Power Filter 1 breaker off or voltage low) PWR (Power Filter 2 breaker off or voltage low) 2-255
PWR............................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-255
PWRADJCOMMS
PWRADJFAIL (Inter NE communication timeout blocking power adjustment) ......................................... 2-256

2-256
PWRADJFAIL
PWRADJFAIL (Power Adjustment Failure); PWRADJFAIL (No through services in appropriate

state for adjustment) ................................................................................................................................................... 2-258
2-258
PWRADJFAIL (Power Adjustment Failure) ............................................................................................................. 2-259

2-259
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxvi 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PWRADJFAIL (No through services in appropriate state for adjustment) .................................................... 2-263
2-263
PWRADJREQ
PWRADJREQ (Power Adjust Required) .................................................................................................................... 2-265

2-265
PWRMARGIN
PWRMARGIN (Power Adjust Loss Margin Exceeded) ....................................................................................... 2-266

2-266
PWRMAXGAIN
PWRMAXGAIN (Gain Adjustment Exceeded Max Value) ................................................................................ 2-267

2-267
PWRSUSP
PWRSUSP- OT or SVAC - (Power management suspended); PWRSUSP- CWR8 (Power

management suspended) ........................................................................................................................................... 2-270
2-270
PWRSUSP - OT or SVAC (Power management suspended) .............................................................................. 2-272

2-272
PWRSUSP-CWR8 (Power management suspended) ............................................................................................. 2-274

2-274
PWRTILTSUSP
PWRTILTSUSP (Amplifier gain tilt adjustments suspended) ............................................................................ 2-276

2-276
RAMANSUP
RAMANSUP (Raman Suppress - Line) ...................................................................................................................... 2-276

2-276
RCVROPTPROG
RCVROPTPROG (Receiver Optimization in Progress) ....................................................................................... 2-278

2-278
RDI
RDI (Remote Defect Indication) .................................................................................................................................... 2-279

2-279
REMOVEMOD
REMOVEMOD (Pluggable Module Removed) ....................................................................................................... 2-280

2-280
REPLUNITMISS
REPLUNTMISS (Card Missing) ................................................................................................................................... 2-281

2-281
REPLUNITMISSMOD
REPLUNTMISS (Pluggable Module Missing) ........................................................................................................ 2-283

2-283
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 xxvii
Issue 1 June 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RFIEGR
RFIEGR (Remote Client Remote Fault) ..................................................................................................................... 2-284

2-284
RFIL
RFIL (Remote Fault Indication) ..................................................................................................................................... 2-285

2-285
SDBER
SDBER (Signal Degrade) ................................................................................................................................................. 2-287

2-287
SDBER (RS) (RS Signal Degrade) ............................................................................................................................... 2-288

2-288
SDEG-O
SDEG-O (SUPVY Signal Degrade) .............................................................................................................................. 2-288

2-288
SDEGR
SDEGR (Egress Signal Degrade - ODU) ................................................................................................................... 2-291

2-291
SFMISMATCH
SFMISMATCH (Software Version Mismatch) ......................................................................................................... 2-292

2-292
SLTMSIG
SLTMSIG (Timing reference frequency has moved off the required accuracy limits (not Protected
or Protection not Available)) .................................................................................................................................... 2-293
2-293
SSF
SSF (Server Signal Failure - OTU) .............................................................................................................................. 2-294

2-294
SSFODU
SSFODU (Server Signal Failure - ODU) ................................................................................................................... 2-295

2-295
SSFODUEGR
SSFODUEGR (Egress Signal Server Failure - ODU) ........................................................................................... 2-297

2-297
SWEQPT
SWEQPT (Equipment Controller redundancy is compromised); SWEQPT (Protection switching

equipment failure) ....................................................................................................................................................... 2-299
2-299
SWEQPT (Equipment Controller redundancy is compromised) ........................................................................ 2-300

2-300
SWEQPT (Protection Switching Equipment Failure) ............................................................................................ 2-304

2-304
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxviii 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SWFTDWN
SWFTDWN (Software Upgrade in Progress) ........................................................................................................... 2-305

2-305
Committing the Software Upgrade ................................................................................................................................ 2-306

2-306
Backing out the Software Upgrade ............................................................................................................................... 2-307

2-307
SWMTXMOD
SWMTXMOD ...................................................................................................................................................................... 2-307

2-307
SWMTXMOD (Switching Matrix Module Failure) ............................................................................................... 2-308

2-308
SWMTXMOD (Y-Cable Switchover Timer Expired) ............................................................................................ 2-310

2-310
SWUPGCOMMIT
SWUPGCOMMIT (No committed software load (Autoinstall disabled)) ..................................................... 2-310

2-310
SWUPGFAIL
SWUPGFAIL (Software Upgrade Failed) .................................................................................................................. 2-311

2-311
SYNCOOS
SYNCOOS (Timing reference failed (Not Protected or Protection not Available)) / SYNCOOS
(Timing reference failed--system going into holdover) ................................................................................. 2-316
2-316
SYNCOOS (Timing reference failed (Not Protected or Protection not Available)) .................................... 2-317
2-317
SYNCOOS (Timing reference failed--system going into holdover) ................................................................. 2-318

2-318
SYNREFFAIL
SYNREFFAIL (Timing reference failed, (not Protected or Protection not Available)) ............................. 2-318
2-318
SYNREFUNEQ
SYNREFUNEQ (Timing reference unassigned) ...................................................................................................... 2-319

2-319
SYSBOOT
SYSBOOT (Cold Start); SYSBOOT (Warm Start) ................................................................................................. 2-319

2-319
TIM
TIM (Trace Identifier Mismatch) .................................................................................................................................. 2-321

2-321
TIM (Client Ports) ............................................................................................................................................................... 2-322

2-322
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 xxix
Issue 1 June 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch (Network Ports) ..................................................................................................... 2-324
2-324
TIMEGR
TIMEGR (Egress Trail Identifier Mismatch - ODU) ............................................................................................. 2-325

2-325
TIMODU
TIMODU (Trace Identifier Mismatch - ODU) ......................................................................................................... 2-327

2-327
TRMT
TRMT (Port Transmit Failure) ........................................................................................................................................ 2-328

2-328
TRMTMOD
TRMTMOD (Pluggable Module Transmit Failure) ................................................................................................ 2-330

2-330
UNG/UNP
UNG/UNP .............................................................................................................................................................................. 2-331

2-331
UNKNOWN
UNKNOWN (Card Unknown) ....................................................................................................................................... 2-332

2-332
UNKNOWNMOD
UNKNOWNMOD (Pluggable Module Unknown) ................................................................................................. 2-334

2-334
UPM
UPM (GFP User Payload Mismatch) ........................................................................................................................... 2-336

2-336
URU
URU (Underlying Resource Unavailable) .................................................................................................................. 2-337

2-337
URU-OCH-LOS (Underlying resource unavailable - OTS) ................................................................................ 2-338

2-338
URU-OTS-LOS (Underlying resource unavailable - OTS [Loss of Signal]) ................................................ 2-338

2-338
URU-OTS-RX (Underlying resource unavailable - OTS [Receive]) ............................................................... 2-338

2-338
URU-OTS-TX (Underlying resource unavailable - OTS [Transmit]) .............................................................. 2-339

2-339
URU-OTU (Underlying resource unavailable - OTU) .......................................................................................... 2-339

2-339
URU-S (Underlying Resource Unavailable - Card Failure) ................................................................................ 2-339

2-339
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxx 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
USALS
USALS (Auto Laser Shutoff Due to Upstream Fault) ........................................................................................... 2-341

2-341
USLOS
USLOS (Upstream Channel Absent) ............................................................................................................................ 2-343

2-343
USOCHCOLLISION
USOCHCOLLISION (Upstream Channel Collision Input Direction) ............................................................. 2-345

2-345
VCGLOA
VCGLOA (Loss of alignment) ........................................................................................................................................ 2-346

2-346
VCGSSF
VCGSSF (VCG Server Signal Failure) ....................................................................................................................... 2-348

2-348
VOLTAGEHIGH
VOLTAGEHIGH [High input voltage defect] .......................................................................................................... 2-349

2-349
VOLTAGELOW
VOLTAGELOW [Low input voltage defect] ............................................................................................................ 2-350

2-350
VTSFDI
VTSFDI (VTS Forward Defect Indication) ............................................................................................................... 2-352

2-352
VTSOCI
VTSOCI (VTS Open Connection Indication) ........................................................................................................... 2-352

2-352
WKSWBK
WKSWBK (Automatic switch to working) ............................................................................................................... 2-353

2-353
WKSWPR
WKSWPR (Automatic switch to protection) ............................................................................................................ 2-356

2-356
WTR
WTR (Wait to restore timer in effect) .......................................................................................................................... 2-357

2-357
3 Supporting procedures
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-1

3-1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 xxxi
Issue 1 June 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarms and Logs
Viewing Alarms and Logs ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-4

3-4
WebUI Procedure ...................................................................................................................................................................... 3-5

3-5
Configuring alarm severity
Configuring the Alarm Severity Using the WebUI ....................................................................................................... 3-5

3-5
Configuring Alarm Severity Using the 1354 RM-PhM .............................................................................................. 3-7

3-7
Path Power Trace
Procedure ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-8

3-8
Determining the Far End of a Service
Procedure ................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-10

3-10
Checking for Services on a Port
Procedure ................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-11

3-11
User Panel Switch Settings
Resolving Ethernet Connectivity Issues ........................................................................................................................ 3-12

3-12
Database Backup and Restore
Backing Up a Database ........................................................................................................................................................ 3-13

3-13
Restoring a Database ............................................................................................................................................................. 3-14

3-14
Firmware
Selecting a Specific Firmware Version ........................................................................................................................... 3-14

3-14
Software Upgrades
Software Download in Network with GNEs and RNEs ......................................................................................... 3-16

3-16
Restoring an NE in DBINVALID State ......................................................................................................................... 3-17

3-17
Rebooting Components
Cold Restart of a Pack with Traffic ................................................................................................................................. 3-18

3-18
Reseating a Card
Procedure ................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-19

3-19
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxxii 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Replacing System Components
Slot Equipage Requirement ................................................................................................................................................ 3-20

3-20
Replacing a Card (General) ................................................................................................................................................ 3-22

3-22
Replacing a 100G A/D CFP ............................................................................................................................................... 3-25

3-25
Replacing a DCM ................................................................................................................................................................... 3-26

3-26
Replacing an SFP Module ................................................................................................................................................... 3-27

3-27
Replacing an XFP Module .................................................................................................................................................. 3-30

3-30
Replacing an OSC SFP Module ........................................................................................................................................ 3-33

3-33
Replacing the User Panel ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-35

3-35
Replacing an Equipment Controller in a Redundant Shelf .................................................................................... 3-40

3-40
Replacing an Equipment Controller in a Nonredundant Shelf ............................................................................. 3-42

3-42
Replacing the Air Filter ........................................................................................................................................................ 3-50

3-50
Replacing the Fan .................................................................................................................................................................. 3-53

3-53
Provisioning an SFD40/SFD40B in a FOADM node
Procedure ................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-55

3-55
Performing loopbacks
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-56

3-56
Loopback Variation on OTs ................................................................................................................................................ 3-57

3-57
High Temperature Troubleshooting
High Temperature Threshold Exceeded ......................................................................................................................... 3-70

3-70
Changing the Equipment Controller Configuration in an NE
Changing an NE from a Nonredundant to a Redundant Equipment Controller Configuration ................. 3-71

3-71
Changing an NE From a Redundant to a Nonredundant Equipment Controller Configuration ................ 3-74

3-74
Card-Specific Troubleshooting
4DPA4 Signal Rates .............................................................................................................................................................. 3-76

3-76
Egress Adjustment Failure and Clock Source (WTOCM and PF) ....................................................................... 3-77
3-77
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 xxxiii
Issue 1 June 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Nonredundant PSS-36 and MT0C Clock Source ....................................................................................................... 3-79
3-79
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxxiv 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
List of tables
2-1 Corrective Actions for Equipment Controller Demerits ......................................................................... 2-301
2-2 Software upgrade status and actions .............................................................................................................. 2-312
3-1 Database Backup and Restore Parameters ..................................................................................................... 3-13
3-2 FTP Server Parameters .......................................................................................................................................... 3-44

3-44
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 xxxv
Issue 1 June 2011
List of tables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxxvi 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
List of figures
3-1 Push in wedge ........................................................................................................................................................... 3-27

3-27
3-2 Pull out SFP .............................................................................................................................................................. 3-28

3-28
3-3 XFP bail ...................................................................................................................................................................... 3-30

3-30
3-4 XFP bail pull ............................................................................................................................................................. 3-31

3-31
3-5 Service-Affecting Warning Window ................................................................................................................ 3-45
3-6 Unscrew Filter Retainer ........................................................................................................................................ 3-51

3-51
3-7 New Filter .................................................................................................................................................................. 3-51

3-51
3-8 New Filter Installed ................................................................................................................................................ 3-52

3-52
3-9 Fan Unit ...................................................................................................................................................................... 3-54

3-54
3-10 112SCX10 – Loopback Position ....................................................................................................................... 3-57
3-11 112SCA1 – Loopback Position .......................................................................................................................... 3-58
3-12 43STX4/43STX4P – Loopback Position ........................................................................................................ 3-59
3-13 43STA1P – Loopback Position .......................................................................................................................... 3-60
3-14 11DPE12 – Loopback Position .......................................................................................................................... 3-61
3-15 11DPE12E – Loopback Position ....................................................................................................................... 3-62
3-16 11DPM12 – Loopback Position ......................................................................................................................... 3-63
3-17 4DPA4 (No FEC) – Loopback Position .......................................................................................................... 3-64
3-18 4DPA4 – Loopback Position ............................................................................................................................... 3-65
3-19 11QPA4 – Loopback Position ............................................................................................................................. 3-66
3-20 11STAR1 – Loopback Position .......................................................................................................................... 3-67
3-21 11STMM10 – Loopback Position ..................................................................................................................... 3-68
3-22 11STGE12 – Loopback Position ....................................................................................................................... 3-69
3-23 Lightpath Trace ........................................................................................................................................................ 3-77

3-77
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 xxxvii
Issue 1 June 2011
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-24 Total Power at Monitored LD Power Level .................................................................................................. 3-77
3-25 WTOCM and LD Total Power .......................................................................................................................... 3-78
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxxviii 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
About this document
About this document
Purpose
This document provides information about managing the detection, isolation, and
correction of abnormal operation.
Intended audience
This document is intended for the following users of the 1830 PSS documentation library:
• network planners
• administrators
• operators
• maintenance personnel
1830 PSS products are meant to be installed, operated, and maintained by personnel who
have the knowledge, training, and qualifications required to safely perform the tasks
assigned to them. The information, processes, and procedures contained in the 1830
PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16/PSS-4 product documentation are intended for use by trained and
qualified personnel.
How to use this information product

The chapters in this document provide the following information:
Chapter 1, “Alarm and condition details”, provides an alphabetical listing of all of the
conditions generated by the 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16/PSS-4.
Chapter 2, “Trouble-clearing procedures” describes the trouble-clearing procedures
required to clear the conditions for the 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16/PSS-4.
Chapter 3, “Supporting procedures”, describes the troubleshooting procedures that are
used in more than one trouble-clearing procedure.
The “Glossary” provides a list of common terms and acronyms.
The “Index” provides page numbers for key words and subject names.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 xxxix
Issue 1 June 2011
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Safety information
For your safety, this document contains safety statements. Safety statements are given at
points where risks of damage to personnel, equipment, and operation may exist. Failure to
follow the directions in a safety statement may result in serious consequences.
Conventions used
The following typographical conventions are used throughout this document:
• Bold is used to identify CIT menu selections and button selections.
• Italic is used to identify NE messages
• Computer voice is used to identify system message text displayed by the CIT
Related information
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 3.6.0 Engineering and
Planning Tool (EPT) User Guide is part of a set of documents that support the 1830 PSS
product family. The following items are available:
Document Number Document Title

8DG60888AAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch Release 3.6.0 and
3.6.1 Product Information and Planning Guide
8DG60888BAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch Release 3.6.0 User
Provisioning Guide
8DG60888GAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 3.6.0
Engineering and Planning Tool (EPT) User Guide
8DG60888DAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch Release 36/32/16
(PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16) 3.6.0 Installation and System Turn-up
Guide
8DG60888EAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 3.6.0
and 3.6.1 TL1 Command and Messages Guide
8DG60888FAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 3.6.0
and 3.6.1 Command Line Interface Guide
8DG60888HAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 3.6.0
and 3.6.1 Safety Guide
3AL61308AAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM Release 8.6 Photonic Manager
EMS Reference Guide
8DG60888JAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 3.6.0
and 3.6.1 Quick Reference Guide
3KC13011AAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 4 (PSS-4) Release
1.5.1 Product Information and Planning Guide
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xl 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Document Number Document Title

8DG60888KAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 1.1.0
MSAH Edge Device User Guide
8DG60888LAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 1.8.0
MD4H Edge Device User Guide
8DG60777KAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 RAMAN Amplifier and EDFA Release
3.5.0 User Guide
8DG60888MAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 3.6.1
GMRE CLI Guide
8DG60888NAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 3.6.1
GMPLS/GMRE Guide
8DG60888PAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 3.6.1
Master GMRE CLI Guide
8DG60888QAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 3.6.0
Master GMPLS/GMRE User Guide
8DG60888RAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830PSS Release 3.6.0 and 3.6.1 Data
Communication Network (DCN) Planning Guide
8DG60889AAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Product
Family Release 3.5.2 CD-ROM
— 1830 PSS Software Release Description, Release 3.6.0 and 3.6.1
(on paper)
— Complete set of 1830 PSS customer documentation (on paper),
Release 3.6.0 and 3.6.1
Information product support

Alcatel-Lucent provides a referral telephone number for document support. Use this
number to report errors or to ask questions about the document. This is a non-technical
number. The referral number is 1 (888) 727-3615 (continental United States) or +1 (630)
713 5000 (for all countries).
Technical support
For technical support, contact your local customer support team. Reach them via the web
at http://alcatel-lucent.com/support at or the telephone number listed under the Technical
Assistance Center menu at http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/contact.
How to order
To order Alcatel-Lucent documents and courses, use the following websites, or the e-mail,
phone, and fax contacts linked from "Contact Us" on the following sites:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 xli
Issue 1 June 2011
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Documentation:
http://www.lucentdocs.com/
Training:
http://training.lucent.com/
Packaging collection and recovery requirements

Countries, states, localities, or other jurisdictions may require that systems be established
for the return and/or collection of packaging waste from the consumer, or other end user,
or from the waste stream. Additionally, reuse, recovery, and/or recycling targets for the
return and/or collection of the packaging waste may be established. For more information
regarding collection and recovery of packaging and packaging waste within specific
jurisdictions, please contact the Alcatel-Lucent Services - Environmental Health and
Safety organization.
For installations not performed by Alcatel-Lucent, please contact the Alcatel-Lucent
Customer Support Center at: Technical Support Services, within the United States: +1 630
224 4762, prompt 2
Recycling/take-back/disposal of product
Electronic products bearing or referencing the symbol shown below, when put on the
market within the European Union (EU), shall be collected and treated at the end of their
useful life in compliance with applicable EU and local legislation. They shall not be
disposed of as part of unsorted municipal waste. Due to materials that may be contained
in the product, such as heavy metals or batteries, the environment and human health may
be negatively impacted as a result of inappropriate disposal.
Note: In the EU, a solid bar under the crossed-out wheeled bin indicates that the
product was put on the market after 13 August 2005.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xlii 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Moreover, in compliance with legal requirements and contractual agreements, where
applicable, Alcatel-Lucent will offer to provide for the collection and treatment of
Alcatel-Lucent products at the end of their useful life. Alcatel-Lucent will also offer to
provide for the collection and treatment of existing products displaced by Alcatel-Lucent
equipment.
For information regarding take-back of equipment by Alcatel-Lucent, or for more
information regarding the requirements for recycling/disposal of product, please contact
your Alcatel-Lucent Account Manager or Alcatel-Lucent Take-Back Support at
takeback@alcatel-lucent.com.
How to comment
To comment on this document, go to the Online Comment Form (http://infodoc.alcatel-
lucent.com/comments/) or e-mail your comments to the Comments Hotline
(comments@alcatel-lucent.com).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 xliii
Issue 1 June 2011
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xliv 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
1 1 larm and condition
A
details
Overview
Purpose
This chapter provides an alphabetical listing of all of the alarm conditions generated by
the 1830 Photonic Service Switch 32/16/4. Basic summary information is in the alarm.
Additional details can be obtained by querying the relevant entities.
The following information is provided for each condition type:
• a description of the condition that includes the possible root cause.
• the alarm severity.
• whether or not the condition is service-affecting.
• the cards or systems to which the condition applies.
For a description and overview of alarm management, alarm severity, and alarm
reporting, refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch Release 3.6.0 User
Provisioning Guide.
For detailed information on TL1 AIDs for each pack, and rules for shelf and slot
assignments in the 1830 Photonic Service Switch 32/16/4, refer to the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 3.6.0 and 3.6.1 TL1 Command and
Messages Guide.
Contents
AISL 1-9
AIS - ODU 1-9
AIS - OTU 1-10
ALLCHANMISS 1-10
ALLCHANMISSOUT 1-11
AMPDISABLED 1-11
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-1
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APRLine 1-12
APRNODE 1-13
APROSC 1-13
APRSWITCH 1-14
APRTOPO 1-14
APRUNAVAIL 1-15
APRUNAVAILOSC 1-15
APSB 1-16
APSCM 1-16
APSMM 1-17
AUTHFAIL 1-18
AUTORESET 1-18
AUTOSWTIMREF 1-20
B1SD 1-20
BASELine 1-21
BDI 1-22
BDIEGR 1-23
BDIODU 1-23
CARDINIT 1-25
CONFIGFAIL 1-27
CONTCOM 1-29
CONTEQPT 1-31
CONTR 1-32
CONTR-OUT 1-32
CRDINIT 1-33
DATAERR 1-35
DATAFLT 1-37
DBBKUP-IP 1-39
DBFL 1-39
DBFT 1-40
DBINVALID 1-40
DBMEMTRF 1-40
DBRSTR-IP 1-41
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-2 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DBUNSYNC 1-41
DEGOTU 1-41
DISCOVERMOD 1-42
DORMANTUSER 1-44
EBER 1-44
EBER-O 1-45
ETHCSF 1-45
ENV [1-8] 1-46
EQPT 1-46
EQPTBOOT 1-48
EQPTDGR 1-50
EQPTDGROCH 1-51
EQPTDGROCH-OUT 1-52
EQPTDGR-OUT 1-53
EQPTPORT 1-54
EXCESSLOAD 1-55
FACTERM-DEV 1-56
FANSPEEDHIGH 1-57
FANSPEEDLOW 1-57
FANSPEEDMAN 1-58
FECECSD 1-58
FECUBCSD 1-58
FELANLFI 1-59
FELANLOS 1-60
FELANLSS 1-60
FELANRFI 1-61
FELOS 1-62
FEPORTMISMATCH 1-62
FEPRLF 1-63
FPGAFAIL 1-63
FPGAINIT 1-65
FPGATIMEOUT 1-67
FRCDSWTIMREF 1-69
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-3
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FRCDWKSWBK 1-69
FRCDWKSWPR 1-70
FRNGSYNC 1-71
FWPENDINGOBSOLETE 1-72
FWUPGRADEPENDING 1-74
FWVERSIONNOTDEFAULT 1-76
HIBER 1-77
HIGAIN 1-78
HLDOVRSYNC 1-78
HWNOTSUPPORTED 1-79
INSERTMOD 1-79
INTTEMPHIGH 1-81
INTTEMPLOW 1-83
INTTEMPOPT 1-85
INTRUSION 1-86
INTRUSIONEVT 1-86
INVALIDEGRESS 1-86
INVALIDTHRESHOLD 1-87
INVENTORYERROR 1-87
LANLFI 1-89
LANLOS 1-90
LANLSS 1-91
LANRFI 1-92
LASEREOL 1-92
LCK 1-93
LCKEGR 1-94
LFD 1-94
LFIEGR 1-95
LINKDOWN 1-95
LINKUP 1-96
LOAM 1-96
LOC 1-97
LOCKOUTOFPR 1-97
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-4 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOCKOUTOFTIMREF 1-98
LOF 1-98
LOFEGR 1-100
LOF-O 1-101
LOGAIN 1-102
LOM 1-103
LOS 1-104
LOSDCM 1-108
LOSLDSig 1-108
LOSOCM 1-109
LOS-O 1-109
LOS-OUT 1-110
LOS-P 1-111
LPBKLine 1-113
LPBKTERM 1-114
LSPOW_ALM_W 1-115
LSTEMP_ALM_W 1-115
LSSEGR 1-116
MAN 1-116
MANRESET 1-120
MANSWTIMREF 1-122
MANSWTOINT 1-122
MANWKSWBK 1-123
MANWKSWPR 1-123
MISMATCH 1-124
MISMATCHMOD 1-127
MIXEDPFUSED 1-128
MMG 1-128
MOD 1-128
MODOUTOOR 1-129
MODOUTOOR 1-130
MSIM 1-130
MTCESURV 1-130
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-5
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MTCESURVDGR 1-131
NET 1-132
NOTALLOWED 1-134
NTPOOSYNC 1-134
OAPUMPBIASCURRHIGH 1-134
OAPUMPTEMPHIGH 1-135
OCHCOLLISION 1-136
OCHCOLLISION-OUT 1-137
OCHKEYDUP 1-137
OCHKEYOVERLAP 1-138
OCHFDI 1-139
OCHPDI 1-140
OCHTRAILDUP 1-140
OCHTRAILUNKNOWN 1-141
OCHUNKNOWN 1-142
OCHUNKNOWN-OUT 1-143
OCI 1-144
OCIEGR 1-145
OPR 1-145
OPRPWRHIGH 1-146
OPRPWRLOW 1-147
OPRLOSSHIGH 1-148
OPRLOSSLOW 1-148
OPROOR 1-149
OPR-OUT 1-149
OPRTX 1-150
OPRUNACHIEVE 1-151
OPTINTBASE 1-152
OPTINTDET 1-152
OPTINTSUSP 1-153
OSCSSF 1-154
PCSGENERATOR 1-154
PLM 1-155
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-6 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PLMEGR 1-156
PRCDRERR-TOPO 1-156
PWR 1-157
PWRADJCOMMS 1-158
PWRADJFAIL 1-158
PWRADJREQ 1-159
PWRMARGIN 1-160
PWRMAXGAIN 1-161
PWRSUSP 1-161
PWRTILTSUSP 1-162
RAMANSUSP (Raman Suppress - Line) 1-163
RCVROPTPROG 1-163
RDI 1-164
REMOVEMOD 1-165
REPLUNITMISS 1-166
REPLUNITMISSMOD 1-170
RFIEGR 1-171
RFIL 1-172
SDBER 1-172
SDBER (RS) 1-173
SDEG-O 1-173
SDEGR 1-174
SFMISMATCH 1-174
SLTMSIG 1-176
SSF 1-176
SSFODU 1-178
SSFODUEGR 1-179
SWEQPT 1-179
SWFTDWN 1-180
SWMTXMOD 1-181
SWUPGCOMMIT 1-182
SWUPGFAIL 1-183
SYNCOOS 1-184
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-7
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SYNCREFUNEQ 1-184
SYSBOOT 1-185
TIM 1-185
TIMEGR 1-186
TIMODU 1-187
TRMT 1-188
TRMTMOD 1-188
UNG/UNP 1-190
UNKNOWN 1-190
UNKNOWNMOD 1-192
UPM 1-194
USALS (rr) 1-194
USLOS 1-196
USOCHCOLLISION 1-197
VCGLOA 1-198
VCGSSF 1-198
VOLTAGEHIGH 1-198
VOLTAGELOW 1-200
VTSFDI 1-202
VTSOCI 1-203
WKSWBK 1-203
WKSWPR 1-204
WTR 1-205
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-8 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details AISL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
AISL
Alarm Data Value/Meaning

Severity Level NR
AID Type 112SCX10-shelf-slot-{C1-10}
112SX10L-shelf-slot-{C1-10}
11STMM10-shelf-slot
43SCX4-shelf-slot-{C1-10}
Effect on Service NSA
Alarm Entity Type 112SCX10, 112SX10L and 43SCX4 (client
side only): OC192/STM64
11STMM10: CBR2G5, OC3/STM1,
OC12/STM4, OC48/STM16
Description AIS Line/MS
Corrective Action Proceed to “AISL” (p. 2-20).
AIS - ODU

Severity Level NR
AID Type 11QPA4-shelf-slot
43STX4P-shelf-slot
Alarm Entity Type ODU
Description AIS - ODU
Corrective Action Proceed to “AIS - ODU” (p. 2-23).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-9
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details AIS - OTU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
AIS - OTU

Severity Level CR
AID Type 11QPA4-shelf-slot
43STX4P-shelf-slot
Effect on Service SA
Alarm Entity Type ODU
Description AIS - OTU
Corrective Action Proceed to “AIS - OTU” (p. 2-24).
ALLCHANMISS

Severity Level CR
AID Type A2325A-shelf-slot-Line
AHPHG-shelf-slot-[Line, Sig]-freq
AHPLG-shelf-slot-(Sig, Line)
ALPHG-shelf-slot-[Line, Sig]-freq
ALPFGT-shelf-slot-Line
AM2017B-shelf-slot-Line
OSCT-shelf-slot-Line
Alarm Entity Type OTS
Description All Channels Missing
Corrective Action Proceed to “ALLCHANMISS” (p. 2-24).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-10 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details ALLCHANMISSOUT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ALLCHANMISSOUT

Severity Level NA
AID Type A2325-shelf-slot-Line
AHPHG-shelf-slot
AHPLG-shelf-slot-Sig
ALPHG-shelf-slot-Sig
AM2125A-shelf-slot-LineOut
AM2125B-shelf-slot-LineOut
Description All Outgoing Channels Missing
Corrective Action Proceed to “ALLCHANMISS-OUT”
(p. 2-26).
AMPDISABLED

Severity Level CR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-11
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details AMPDISABLED
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

AID Type A2325A-shelf-slot-Sig
AHPHG-shelf-slot-Sig
AM2017B-shelf-slot-Sig
CWR-shelf-slot-Sig
Description Amplifier Disabled
Corrective Action Proceed to “AMPDISABLED” (p. 2-29).
APRLine

Severity Level MJ
AID Type AHPHG-shelf-slot-Sig
RA2P-shelf-slot-LineIn
Description APR Active - Line
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-12 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details APRLine
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Corrective Action Proceed to “APRLINE” (p. 2-30).
APRNODE

Severity Level MJ
Description APR Active - Node
Corrective Action Proceed to “APRNODE” (p. 2-32).
APROSC

Severity Level MJ
Description APR Limited - OSC SFP failure condition
Corrective Action Proceed to “APROSC” (p. 2-32).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-13
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details APRSWITCH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APRSWITCH

Severity Level MJ
AID Type AM2125A-shelf-slot-LineOut
Description APR Active – Port Switch
Corrective Action Proceed to “APRSWITCH” (p. 2-33).
APRTOPO

Severity Level MJ
Description APR Active - Invalid Topology
Corrective Action Proceed to “APRTOPO” (p. 2-34).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-14 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details APRUNAVAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APRUNAVAIL

Severity Level MJ
Description APR unavailable - monitoring card booting
Corrective Action Proceed to “APRUNAVAIL” (p. 2-34).
APRUNAVAILOSC

Severity Level MJ
AM2125A-shelf-slot-OSCSFP
AM2125B-shelf-slot-OSCSFP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-15
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details APRUNAVAILOSC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description APR Limited - OSC SFP failure
Corrective Action Proceed to “APRUNAVAILOSC” (p. 2-36).
APSB

Severity Level Not alarmed
AID Type 11QPA4-shelf-slot-{C1-4}
11STAR1-shelf-slot-{C1}
11STGE12-shelf-slot-{C{1-10}}
11STMM10-shelf-slot-{C{1-10}}
Alarm Entity Type 11QPA4 and 11STAR1: FC1200,
OC192/STM64
11STMM10: 1GbE, CBR2G5, FC100, FC200,
FC400, OC3/STM1, OC12/STM4,
OC48/STM16, OTU1
11STGE12: 1GbE
Description APS protection switching byte failure
Corrective Action Proceed to “APSB” (p. 2-36).
APSCM

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-16 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details APSCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarm Entity Type 11QPA4 and 11STAR1: 10GbE, FC1200,
OC192/STM64
OC48/STM16, OTU1
11STGE12: 1GbE
Description APS channel mismatch
Corrective Action Proceed to “APSCM” (p. 2-38).
APSMM

Alarm Entity Type 11QPA4 and 11STAR1: 10GbE, FC1200,
OC192/STM64
OC48/STM16, OTU1
11STGE12: 1GbE
Description APS mode mismatch
Corrective Action Proceed to “APSMM” (p. 2-41).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-17
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details AUTHFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
AUTHFAIL

Severity Level TC
AID Type SYSTEM
Alarm Entity Type COM
Description Authentication Failure
Corrective Action Proceed to “AUTHFAIL” (p. 2-43).
AUTORESET

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-18 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details AUTORESET
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

AID Type 112SA1L-shelf-slot
112SCA1-shelf-slot
112SCX10-shelf-slot
112SX10L-shelf-slot
11DPE12E-shelf-slot
11DPM12-shelf-slot
11STAR1-shelf-slot
11STMM10-shelf-slot
11STGE12-shelf-slot
43SCX4-shelf-slot
43STA1P-shelf-slot
43STX4-shelf-slot
43STX4P-shelf-slot
4DPA2-shelf-slot
4DPA4-shelf-slot
A2325A-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
AHPLG-shelf-slot
ALPHG-shelf-slot
ALPFGT-shelf-slot
AM2017B-shelf-slot
AM2125A-shelf-slot
AM2125B-shelf-slot
AM2318A-shelf-slot
AM2325B-shelf-slot
CWR-shelf-slot
EC-shelf-slot
FLC-shelf-slot
MESH-shelf-slot
MT0C-shelf-slot
MVAC-shelf-slot
OPS-shelf-slot
OSCT-shelf-slot
RA2P-shelf-slot
SVAC-shelf-slot
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 WR-shelf-slot 1-19
Issue 1 June 2011 WTOCM-shelf-slot
Alarm and condition details AUTORESET
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarm Entity Type EQPT
Description Card Autonomous Reset
Corrective Action Proceed to “AUTORESET” (p. 2-44).
AUTOSWTIMREF

AID Type LINEREFSYS-shelf-slot-{0-3}
Alarm Entity Type LINEREF
Description Automatic switch timing reference
Corrective Action Proceed to “AUTOSWTIMREF” (p. 2-45).
B1SD

Severity Level MJ
11STAR1-shelf-slot
Alarm Entity Type 11QPA4 and 11STAR1: OC192/STM64
TDM
Description B1 Signal Degrade
Corrective Action Proceed to “B1SD” (p. 2-45)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-20 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details BASELine
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BASELine

Severity Level NR
AID Type 112SA1L-shelf-slot-{L1, C1}
112SCX10-shelf-slot-{L1, {C1-10}}
112SX10L-shelf-slot-{L1, {C1-10}}
11DPE12E-shelf-slot-{C{1-12},L{1-2},VA{1-
2}}
11STAR1-shelf-slot-{L1, C1}
11STMM10-shelf-slot-{L1, C1-C10}
11STGE12-shelf-slot-{L1, {C1-10}}
43STA1P-shelf-slot-{L1, C1}
43STX4-shelf-slot-{L1, {C1-C4}}
43STX4P-shelf-slot-{L1, C1-C4}
4DPA2-shelf-slot-{L{1-2}, C{1-2}}
4DPA4-shelf-slot- {L1, L2}
A2325A-shelf-slot-OSC
AHPHG-shelf-slot-OSC
AHPLG-shelf-slot-OSC
ALPHG-shelf-slot-OSC
ALPFGT-shelf-slot-OSCSFP
AM2017B-shelf-slot-OSC
OSCT-shelf-slot-OSCSFP
Description PM Baseline: {OPT, OPR} Value: value,
Reason: value
Corrective Action Proceed to “BASELINE” (p. 2-46)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-21
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details BDI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BDI

Severity Level NR
112SCA1-shelf-slot-{L1, C1}
112SCX10-shelf-slot-{L1, C1-C10}}
112SX10L-shelf-slot-{L1, C1-C10}}
11DPE12E-shelf-slot-{L1, L2}
11QPA4-shelf-slot-{L{1-4}, C{1-4}}
11DPE12-shelf-slot-{L1, L2}
11STMM10-shelf-slot-{L1, C1-C10}
11STGE12-shelf-slot-{L1}
43STA1P-shelf-slot-L1
43STX4-shelf-slot-L1
43STX4-shelf-slot- C{1-4}
43STX4P-shelf-slot-L1
43STX4P-shelf-slot-{C1-C4}
Alarm Entity Type 112SA1L, 112SCA1, 112SCX10 and
112SX10L: OTU4
43SCX4: OTU3
All other cards: OTU2
Description Backward Defect Indication - OTU
Corrective Action Proceed to “BDI” (p. 2-47)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-22 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details BDIEGR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BDIEGR

Severity Level NR
43STX4P-shelf-slot-C{1-4}
Alarm Entity Type ODU2
Description Egress Backward Defect Indication - ODU
Corrective Action Proceed to “BDIEGR” (p. 2-48)
BDIODU

Severity Level NR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-23
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details BDIODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

112SCX10-shelf-slot-{L1, C1-C10}
112SX10L-shelf-slot-{L1, C1-C10}
11STMM10-shelf-slot-{L1}
11STGE12-shelf-slot-L1
4DPA4-shelf-slot-{L1, L2}
112SX10L: OTU4
43SCX4: OTU3
All other cards: ODU2
Description Backward Defect Indication - ODU
Corrective Action Proceed to “BDIODU” (p. 2-49)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-24 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details CARDINIT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CARDINIT

Severity Level NR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-25
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

112SCA1-shelf-slot
112SCX10-shelf-slot
112SX10L-shelf-slot
11DPE12-shelf-slot
11DPE12E-shelf-slot
11DPM12-shelf-slot
11QPA4-shelf-slot
11STAR1-shelf-slot
11STMM10-shelf-slot
11STGE12-shelf-slot
43SCX4-shelf-slot
43STA1P-shelf-slot
43STX4-shelf-slot
43STX4P-shelf-slot
4DPA2-shelf-slot
4DPA4-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
AHPLG-shelf-slot
ALPHG-shelf-slot
ALPHG-shelf-slot
ALPFGT-shelf-slot
AM2017B-shelf-slot
AM2125A-shelf-slot
AM2125B-shelf-slot
AM2318A-shelf-slot
AM2325B-shelf-slot
CWR-shelf-slot
Equipment Controller-{1-8}-{1,18},
FLC-shelf-slot
MESH-shelf-slot
MT0C-shelf-slot
MVAC-shelf-slot
OPS-shelf-slot
OSCT-shelf-slot
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-26 RA2P-shelf-slot 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
SVAC-shelf-slot Issue 1 June 2011
WR-shelf-slot
WTOCM-shelf-slot
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description Card initializing
Corrective Action Proceed to “CARDINIT” (p. 2-50).
CONFIGFAIL

Severity Level TC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-27
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details CONFIGFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

112SCA1-shelf-slot
112SCX10-shelf-slot
112SX10L-shelf-slot
11DPE12-shelf-slot
11DPE12E-shelf-slot
11DPM12-shelf-slot
11QPA4-shelf-slot
11STAR1-shelf-slot
11STMM10-shelf-slot
11STGE12-shelf-slot
43SCX4-shelf-slot
43STA1P-shelf-slot
43STX4-shelf-slot
43STX4P-shelf-slot
4DPA2-shelf-slot
4DPA4-shelf-slot
A2325A-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
AHPLG-shelf-slot
ALPHG-shelf-slot
ALPHG-shelf-slot
ALPFGT-shelf-slot
AM2017B-shelf-slot
AM2125A-shelf-slot
AM2125B-shelf-slot
AM2318A-shelf-slot
AM2325B-shelf-slot
CWR-shelf-slot
MESH-shelf-slot
MVAC-shelf-slot
OPS-shelf-slot
OSCT-shelf-slot
RA2P-shelf-slot
SVAC-shelf-slot
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-28 WR-shelf-slot 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
WTOCM-shelf-slot Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details CONFIGFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description Line Card Configuration Failed
Corrective Action Proceed to “CONFIGFAIL” (p. 2-51).
CONTCOM

Severity Level CR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-29
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details CONTCOM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

AID Type SHELF-{2-40} to SHELF-{2-48}
112SA1L-shelf-slot
112SCA1-shelf-slot
112SCX10-shelf-slot
112SX10L-shelf-slot
11DPE12E-shelf-slot
11DPM12-shelf-slot
11STAR1-shelf-slot
11STMM10-shelf-slot
11STGE12-shelf-slot
43SCX4-shelf-slot
43STA1P-shelf-slot
43STX4-shelf-slot
43STX4P-shelf-slot
4DPA2-shelf-slot
4DPA4-1-{7, 8}
AHPHG-shelf-slot
AHPLG-shelf-slot
ALPHG-shelf-slot
ALPFGT-shelf-slot
AM2017B-shelf-slot
AM2125A-shelf-slot
AM2125B-shelf-slot
AM2325B-shelf-slot
CWR-shelf-slot
Equipment Controller-{1-8}-{1,18}
FAN-shelf-slot
FLC-shelf-slot
MESH-shelf-slot
MT0C-shelf-slot
MVAC-shelf-slot
OPS-shelf-slot
OSCT-shelf-slot
PF-{1-8}-{19,36}
RA2P-shelf-slot
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-30 SFD-shelf-slot 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
SFC-shelf-slot Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details CONTCOM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

AID Type (continued) SVAC-shelf-slot
USRPNL{1-8}
WR-shelf-slot
WTOCM-shelf-slot
Description Inter-shelf loss of communication (for shelf
AID)
Card failure - communication (for card AID)
Corrective Action Proceed to “CONTCOM” (p. 2-52).
CONTEQPT

Severity Level MJ
AID Type Equipment Controller-{1-8}-{1,18}
FLC-shelf-slot
Description Card failure - device
Corrective Action Proceed to “CONTEQPT” (p. 2-54).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-31
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details CONTR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CONTR

Severity Level MN
AID Type AHPHG-shelf-slot-[Line, Sig]-freq
AHPLG-shelf-slot-{Sig, Line}
CWR-shelf-slot-Sig
MESH-shelf-slot-SigIN
OPS-shelf-slot-[Sig, Ain, Bin]
WR-shelf-slot-{Sig, THRU}
WTOCM-shelf-slot-IN1
Description Port degrade - wavelength tracker detection
failure
Corrective Action Proceed to “CONTR” (p. 2-55).
CONTR-OUT

Severity Level MN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-32 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details CONTR-OUT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

AM2017B-shelf-slot-{Sig, Line}
CWR-shelf-slot-[Sig, ThruOut]
Description Port degrade - wavelength tracker detection
failure
Corrective Action Proceed to “CONTR-OUT” (p. 2-56).
CRDINIT

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-33
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details CRDINIT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

112SCA1-shelf-slot
112SCX10-shelf-slot
112SX10L-shelf-slot
11DPE12E-shelf-slot
11DPM12-shelf-slot
11STAR1-shelf-slot
11STMM10-shelf-slot
11STGE12-shelf-slot
43SCX4-shelf-slot
43STA1P-shelf-slot
43STX4-shelf-slot
43STX4P-shelf-slot
4DPA2-shelf-slot
4DPA4-shelf-slot
A2325A-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
AHPLG-shelf-slot
ALPHG-shelf-slot
ALPFGT-shelf-slot
AM2017B-shelf-slot
AM2125A-shelf-slot
AM2125B-shelf-slot
AM2318A-shelf-slot
AM2325B-shelf-slot
CWR-shelf-slot
MESH-shelf-slot
MT0C-shelf-slot
MVAC-shelf-slot
OPS-shelf-slot
OSCT-shelf-slot
RA2P-shelf-slot
SVAC-shelf-slot
WR-shelf-slot
WTOCM-shelf-slot
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-34 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details CRDINIT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description Card Identification Event
Corrective Action Proceed to “CRDINIT” (p. 2-58).
DATAERR

Severity Level MJ
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-35
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details DATAERR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

112SCA1-shelf-slot
112SCX10-shelf-slot
112SX10L-shelf-slot
11DPE12E-shelf-slot
11DPM12-shelf-slot
11STAR1-shelf-slot
11STMM10-shelf-slot
11STGE12-shelf-slot
43SCX4-shelf-slot
43STA1P-shelf-slot
43STX4-shelf-slot
43STX4P-shelf-slot
4DPA2-shelf-slot
4DPA4-shelf-slot
AHPHG-{1-8}- {2-17}
AHPLG-shelf-slot
ALPHG-shelf-slot
ALPFGT-shelf-slot
AM2017B-shelf-slot
AM2125A-shelf-slot
AM2125B-shelf-slot
AM2318A-shelf-slot
AM2325B-shelf-slot
CWR-shelf-slot
MESH-shelf-slot
MVAC-shelf-slot
OPS-shelf-slot
OSCT-shelf-slot
RA2P-shelf-slot
SVAC-shelf-slot
WR-shelf-slot
WTOCM-shelf-slot
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-36 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details DATAERR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description Data error or timeout
Corrective Action Proceed to “DATAERR” (p. 2-59).
DATAFLT

Severity Level MJ
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-37
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details DATAFLT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

112SCA1-shelf-slot
112SCX10-shelf-slot
112SX10L-shelf-slot
11DPE12E-shelf-slot
11DPM12-shelf-slot
11STAR1-shelf-slot
11STMM10-shelf-slot
11STGE12-shelf-slot
43SCX4-shelf-slot
43STA1P-shelf-slot
43STX4-shelf-slot
43STX4P-shelf-slot
4DPA2-shelf-slot
4DPA4-shelf-slot
AHPHG-{1-8}-{2-17}
AHPLG-shelf-slot
ALPHG-shelf-slot
ALPFGT-shelf-slot
AM2017B-shelf-slot
AM2125A-shelf-slot
AM2125B-shelf-slot
AM2318A-shelf-slot
AM2325B-shelf-slot
CWR-shelf-slot
FLC-shelf-slot
MESH-shelf-slot
MT0C-shelf-slot
MVAC-shelf-slot
OPS-shelf-slot
OSCT-shelf-slot
RA2P-shelf-slot
SVAC-shelf-slot
WR-shelf-slot
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-38 WTOCM-shelf-slot 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details DATAFLT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description Card provisioning failure
Corrective Action Proceed to “DATAFLT” (p. 2-60).
DBBKUP-IP

Severity Level NA
AID Type SYSTEM
Description Database Backup In-Progress
Action Proceed to “DBBKUP-IP” (p. 2-62).
DBFL

Severity Level MN
AID Type SYSTEM
Description DB Failure Local - copy creation of processing
failure
Corrective Action Proceed to “DBFL” (p. 2-63).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-39
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details DBFT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DBFT

Severity Level MN
AID Type SYSTEM
Description DB Failure Transport - file transport failure
Corrective Action Proceed to “DBFT” (p. 2-63).
DBINVALID

Severity Level MJ
AID Type EC, SYSTEM
Description Database invalid
Corrective Action Proceed to “DBINVALID” (p. 2-64)
DBMEMTRF

Severity Level MJ
AID Type EC, SYSTEM
Description Database Sychronization Failed
Corrective Action Proceed to “DBMEMTRF” (p. 2-65).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-40 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details DBRSTR-IP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DBRSTR-IP

Severity Level NA
AID Type SYSTEM
Description Database Restore In Progress
Action Proceed to “DBRSTR-IP” (p. 2-67).
DBUNSYNC

Severity Level MJ
AID Type SYSTEM
Description The active and standby Main Equipment
Controller databases are not synchronized.
Corrective Action Proceed to “DBUNSYNC” (p. 2-68).
DEGOTU

Severity Level MJ
AID Type 112SA1L-shelf-slot-L1
112SCA1-shelf-slot-L1
112SCX10-shelf-slot-{L1; C1-C10}
112SX10L-shelf-slot-{L1; C1-C10}
43SCX4-shelf-slot-{L1; C1-C10}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-41
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details DEGOTU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

112SX10L: OTU4
43SCX4: OTU3
Description Signal Degrade - OTU
Corrective Action Proceed to “DEGOTU” (p. 2-68).
DISCOVERMOD

Severity Level TC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-42 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details DISCOVERMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

AID Type 112SA1L-shelf-slot-C1
112SCA1-shelf-slot-C1
11DPE12-shelf-slot-{L{1-2},C{1-12}}
11STAR1-shelf-slot-C1
11STMM10-shelf-slot-{C1-10}
11STGE12-shelf-slot-{C1-C12}
43STX4-shelf-slot-{C1-C4}
43STA1P-shelf-slot-C1
OSC-shelf-slot-OSCSFP
Description Pluggable Module Discovered
Corrective Action Proceed to “DISCOVERMOD” (p. 2-69).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-43
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details DORMANTUSER
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DORMANTUSER

Severity Levels Not alarmed
AID Type SYSTEM
Description User inactive
Corrective Action Proceed to “DORMANTUSER” (p. 2-71).
EBER

Severity Level CR
11QPA4-shelf-slot-{C1-4}
Alarm Entity Type 112SCX10, 112SX10L, 11QPA4 and 43SCX4:
OC192/STM64
11STAR1: OC192/STM64
11STMM10: OC3/STM1, OC12/STM4,
OC48/STM16
Description Excessive BER
Corrective Action Proceed to “EBER” (p. 2-84).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-44 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details EBER-O
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EBER-O

AID Type AHPHG-shelf-slot-OSC
Description Optical supervision channel excessive BER
Corrective Action Proceed to “EBER-O (Optical Supervision
Channel Excessive BER)” (p. 2-86).
ETHCSF

Severity Level MJ
AID Type 11DPE12E-shelf-slot-{MD 1}-{MA1-
MA400}-MEP ID
Alarm Entity Type MEP
Description Ethernet client signal failure
Corrective Action Proceed to “ETHCSF” (p. 2-71).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-45
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details ENV [1-8]
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ENV [1-8]

Severity Level MN
AID Type USRPNL{1-8}-1-40
HOUSEKEEPING[1-8]
Alarm Entity Type ENV
Description Environmental Input [1-8] active
Corrective Action Proceed to “ENV” (p. 2-88).
EQPT
Card Failure - Device

Severity Level CR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-46 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details EQPT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

112SCA1-shelf-slot
112SCX10-shelf-slot
112SX10L-shelf-slot
11DPE12E-shelf-slot
11DPM12-shelf-slot
11STAR1-shelf-slot
11STMM10-shelf-slot
11STGE12-shelf-slot
43SCX4-shelf-slot
43STA1P-shelf-slot
43STX4-shelf-slot
43STX4P-shelf-slot
4DPA2-shelf-slot
4DPA4-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
AHPLG-shelf-slot
ALPHG-shelf-slot
ALPFGT-shelf-slot
AM2017B-shelf-slot
AM2125A-shelf-slot
AM2125B-shelf-slot
AM2318A-shelf-slot
AM2325B-shelf-slot
CWR-shelf-slot
FAN-shelf-slot
MESH-shelf-slot
MVAC-shelf-slot
OPS-shelf-slot
OSCT-shelf-slot
PF-shelf-slot
RA2P-shelf-slot
SFD-shelf-slot
SFC-shelf-slot
SVAC-shelf-slot
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 USRPNL-shelf-slot 1-47
Issue 1 June 2011 WR-shelf-slot
Alarm and condition details EQPT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description Card failure - device
Corrective Action Proceed to “EQPT” (p. 2-72).
EQPTBOOT

Severity Level CR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-48 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details EQPTBOOT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

AID Type 112SCA1-shelf-slot
112SCX10-shelf-slot
112SX10L-shelf-slot
11DPE12-shelf-slot
11QPA4-shelf-slot
11STAR1-shelf-slot
11STMM10-shelf-slot
11STGE12-shelf-slot
43SCX4-shelf-slot
43STA1P-shelf-slot
43STX4-shelf-slot
43STX4P-shelf-slot
4DPA2-shelf-slot
4DPA4-shelf-slot
A2325A-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
AHPLG-shelf-slot
ALPHG-shelf-slot
ALPFGT-shelf-slot
AM2017B-shelf-slot
AM2125A-shelf-slot
AM2125B-shelf-slot
AM2318A-shelf-slot
AM2325B-shelf-slot
CWR-shelf-slot
MESH-shelf-slot
MT0C-shelf-slot
MVAC-shelf-slot
OPS-shelf-slot
OSCT-shelf-slot
RA2P-shelf-slot
SVAC-shelf-slot
WR-shelf-slot
WTOCM-shelf-slot
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-49
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details EQPTBOOT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description Card failure - boot failure
Corrective Action Proceed to “EQPTBOOT” (p. 2-74).
EQPTDGR
Port Degrade: Communications with the Wavelength Tracker on this card are unreliable
and any Wavelength Tracker information sent or generated may be incorrect.

Severity Level MN
AID Type AHPHG-shelf-slot
ALPHG-shelf-slot
AM2125A-shelf-slot
AM2125B-shelf-slot
CWR-shelf-slot
MESH-shelf-slot
MVAC-shelf-slot
OPS-shelf-slot-{Sig, A, B}
RA2P-shelf-slot
WR-shelf-slot
Description Port degrade - wavelength tracker
communication failure
Corrective Action Proceed to “EQPTDGR” (p. 2-75).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-50 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details EQPTDGR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Card Degrade: A fault on the card has caused the system to declare a hardware failure.

Severity Level MN
AID Type ALPHG-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
AHPLG-shelf-slot
AM2017B-shelf-slot
AM2325B-shelf-slot
CWR-shelf-slot
OPS-shelf-slot
WTOCM-shelf-slot
Description Card degrade - device
Corrective Action Proceed to “EQPTDGR” (p. 2-75).
EQPTDGROCH

Severity Level MN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-51
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details EQPTDGROCH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

AHPHG-shelf-slot-Line
AHPLG-shelf-slot-Line
ALPHG-shelf-slot-Line
AM2125B-shelf-slot
CWR-shelf-slot-Sig
MESH-shelf-slot-SigIN
OSC-shelf-slot-Line
WR-shelf-slot-{Sig, THRU}
WTOCM-shelf-slot-IN1
Alarm Entity Type OCH
Corrective Action Proceed to “EQPTDGROCH” (p. 2-78).
EQPTDGROCH-OUT

Severity Level MN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-52 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details EQPTDGROCH-OUT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

AID Type A2325A-shelf-slot-{Sig, Line}
AHPHG-shelf-slot-{Sig, Line}
ALPHG-shelf-slot-{Sig, Line}
CWR-shelf-slot-{Sig, THRU}
OSC-shelf-slot-Line
Corrective Action Proceed to “EQPTDGROCH-OUT” (p. 2-81).
EQPTDGR-OUT

Severity Level MN
CWR-shelf-slot-[Sig, ThruOut]
WTOCM-shelf-slot
Corrective Action Proceed to “EQPTDGR-OUT” (p. 2-79).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-53
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details EQPTPORT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EQPTPORT
Port Failure - Device

Severity Level CR
11QPA4-shelf-slot-{L{1-4},C{1-4}}
11QPA4-shelf-slot-{VA{1-4}}
11DPE12-shelf-slot-{VA{1-2}}
4DPA4-shelf-slot-{L{1-2}, C{1-4}, VA{1-2}}
Description Port failure - device
Corrective Action Proceed to “EQPTPORT” (p. 2-82).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-54 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details EXCESSLOAD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EXCESSLOAD

Severity Level CR
112SCX10-shelf-slot
11DPE12E-shelf-slot
11DPM12-shelf-slot
11STAR1-shelf-slot
11STMM10-shelf-slot
11STGE12-shelf-slot
A2325A-shelf-slot
ALPHG-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
AHPLG-shelf-slot
AM2017B-shelf-slot
AM2325B-shelf-slot
CWR-{1-8}-{2-16}
OPS-{1-8}-{2-17, 20-35}
SVAC-shelf-slot
WTOCM-shelf-slot
Date Month/day/year that the condition was
detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition was
detected
Description Card would exceed Shelf Amperage limit
Action Proceed to “EXCESSLOAD” (p. 2-88).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-55
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details FACTERM-DEV
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FACTERM-DEV

Severity Level MJ
11DPE12E-shelf-slot-{L{1-2},C{1-12}}
11STMM10-shelf-slot-C{1-10}
11STGE12-shelf-slot-C{1-12}
11DPE12-shelf-slot-{VA{1-2}}
11QPA4-shelf-slot-{VA{1-4}}
MVAC-shelf-slot-G{1-8}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-56 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details FACTERM-DEV
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description Pluggable Module SEEP failure
Corrective Action Proceed to “FACTERM-DEV” (p. 2-89).
FANSPEEDHIGH

Severity Level MN
AID Type FAN-shelf-slot
Description Fan speed is too high
Corrective Action Proceed to “FANSPEEDHIGH” (p. 2-90).
FANSPEEDLOW

Severity Level MN
Description Fan speed is too low
Corrective Action Proceed to “FANSPEEDLOW” (p. 2-91).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-57
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details FANSPEEDMAN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FANSPEEDMAN

Severity Level MN
Description Fan speed manually set to maximum
Corrective Action Proceed to “FANSPEEDMAN” (p. 2-92).
FECECSD

Severity Level MN
AID Type 11STAR1-shelf-slot
11QPA4-shelf-slot
Alarm Entity Type OTU
Description Pre-FEC Signal Degrade
Corrective Action Proceed to “FECECSD” (p. 2-93).
FECUBCSD

Severity Level MJ
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-58 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details FECUBCSD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

AID Type 11DPE12E-shelf-slot-{L1,L2}
11DPM12-shelf-slot-{L1,L2}-OTU
43STX4P-shelf-slot-{L1; C1-C4}
Alarm Entity Type OTU2
Description Post-FEC Signal Degrade
Corrective Action Proceed to “FECUBCSD” (p. 2-93).
FELANLFI

Severity Level NA
11STAR1-shelf-slot

Alarm Entity Type 10GbE
Description Far end local fault
Corrective Action Proceed to “FELANLFI” (p. 2-94).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-59
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details FELANLOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FELANLOS

11QPA4-shelf-slot-{{L1-4}, {C1-4}}
4DPA4-shelf-slot-{C1- C4}
Alarm Entity Type 112SCX10, 112SX10L and 11QPA4: 10GbE,
FC800
11STAR1 and 43SCX4: 10GbE
11STMM10: 1GbE, 10GbE, FC100, FC200,
FC400
4DPA4: 1GbE
Description Far End Loss of Signal
Corrective Action Proceed to “FELANLOS” (p. 2-95).
FELANLSS

43STX4-shelf-slot
43STX4P-shelf-slot
4DPA4-shelf-slot-{C1-C4}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-60 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details FELANLSS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Date Month/day/year that the condition was
detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition was
detected
Alarm Entity Type 112SCX10, 112SX10L and 11QPA4: 10GbE,
FC800
11STAR1, 43SCX4, 43STX4 and 43STX4P, :
10GbE
11STMM10: 1GbE, 10GbE, FC100, FC200,
FC400
4DPA4: 1GbE
Description Far End Loss of Synchronization
Action Proceed to “FELANLSS” (p. 2-96)
FELANRFI

Alarm Entity Type 11STMM10: 1GbE
112SCX10, 112SX10L, 11QPA4, 11STAR1,
43SCX4, 43STX4.and 43STX4P: 10GbE
Description Far End Remote Fault
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-61
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details FELANRFI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Corrective Action Proceed to “FELANRFI” (p. 2-97).
FELOS

AID Type 11STAR1-shelf-slot-C1
Alarm Entity Type 4DPA4: CBRAR
Description Far End Loss of Synchronization
Corrective Action Proceed to “FELANLSS” (p. 2-96)
FEPORTMISMATCH

Severity Level CR
AID Type 11STMM10-shelf-slot
Alarm Entity Type 11STMM10: 1GbE, FC100, FC200, FC400,
OC3/STM1, OC12/STM4, OC48/STM16,
OTU1
4DPA4: 1GbE, CBRAR, FC100, FC200,
OC3/STM1, OC12/STM4, OC48/STM16
Description Far End Port Mapping Mismatch
Corrective Action Proceed to “FEPORTMISMATCH” (p. 2-98).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-62 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details FEPRLF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FEPRLF

Severity Level NA
11STMM10-shelf-slot- {C{1-10}}
11STGE12-shelf-slot- {C{1-10}}
Alarm Entity Type 11QPA4: FC1200, OC192/STM64
11STAR1: 10GbE, FC1200, OC192/STM64
OC48/STM16, OTU1
11STGE12: 1GbE
Description Far End Protection Line Failure
Corrective Action Proceed to “FEPRLF” (p. 2-99).
FPGAFAIL
Description

Severity Level CR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-63
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details FPGAFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

112SCA1-shelf-slot
112SCX10-shelf-slot
112SX10L-shelf-slot
11DPE12E-shelf-slot
11DPM12-shelf-slot
11STAR1-shelf-slot
11STMM10-shelf-slot
11STGE12-shelf-slot
43SCX4-shelf-slot
43STA1P-shelf-slot
43STX4-shelf-slot
43STX4P-shelf-slot
4DPA2-shelf-slot
4DPA4-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
AHPLG-shelf-slot
ALPHG-shelf-slot
ALPFGT-shelf-slot
AM2017B-shelf-slot
AM2125A-shelf-slot
AM2125B-shelf-slot
AM2318A-shelf-slot
AM2325B-shelf-slot
CWR-shelf-slot
MESH-shelf-slot
MVAC-shelf-slot
OPS-shelf-slot
OSCT-shelf-slot
RA2P-shelf-slot
SVAC-shelf-slot
WR-shelf-slot
WTOCM-shelf-slot
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-64 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details FPGAFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description FPGA download or programming failure
Corrective Action Proceed to “FPGAFAIL” (p. 2-100).
FPGAINIT
Description

Severity Level CR (when in service and not a scheduled
firmware upgrade; otherwise MN)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-65
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details FPGAINIT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

112SCA1-shelf-slot
112SCX10-shelf-slot
112SX10L-shelf-slot
11DPE12E-shelf-slot
11DPM12-shelf-slot
11STAR1-shelf-slot
11STMM10-shelf-slot
11STGE12-shelf-slot
43SCX4-shelf-slot
43STA1P-shelf-slot
43STX4-shelf-slot
43STX4P-shelf-slot
4DPA2-shelf-slot
4DPA4-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
AHPLG-shelf-slot
ALPHG-shelf-slot
ALPFGT-shelf-slot
AM2017B-shelf-slot
AM2125A-shelf-slot
AM2125B-shelf-slot
AM2318A-shelf-slot
AM2325B-shelf-slot
CWR-shelf-slot
MESH-shelf-slot
OPS-shelf-slot
OSCT-shelf-slot
RA2P-shelf-slot
SVAC-shelf-slot
WR-shelf-slot
WTOCM-shelf-slot
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-66 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details FPGAINIT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description FPGA initializing
Corrective Action Proceed to “FPGAINIT” (p. 2-101).
FPGATIMEOUT

Severity Level MN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-67
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details FPGATIMEOUT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

112SCA1-shelf-slot
112SCX10-shelf-slot
112SX10L-shelf-slot
11DPE12E-shelf-slot
11DPM12-shelf-slot
11STAR1-shelf-slot
11STMM10-shelf-slot
11STGE12-shelf-slot
43SCX4-shelf-slot
4DPA2-shelf-slot
4DPA4-shelf-slot
43STA1P-shelf-slot
43STX4-shelf-slot
43STX4P-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
AHPLG-shelf-slot
ALPHG-shelf-slot
ALPFGT-shelf-slot
AM2017B-shelf-slot
AM2125A-shelf-slot
AM2125B-shelf-slot
AM2318A-shelf-slot
AM2325B-shelf-slot
CWR-shelf-slot
MESH-shelf-slot
OPS-shelf-slot
OSCT-shelf-slot
RA2P-shelf-slot
SVAC-shelf-slot
WR-shelf-slot
WTOCM-shelf-slot
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-68 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details FPGATIMEOUT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description FPGA timeout
Corrective Action Proceed to “FPGAINIT” (p. 2-101).
FRCDSWTIMREF

Description Forced switch timing reference
Corrective Action Proceed to “FRCDSWTIMREF” (p. 2-102).
FRCDWKSWBK

AID Type 11DPE12-shelf-slot-{C1-C12}
11STGE12-shelf-slot-{C1-10}
OPS-shelf-slot-A,B
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-69
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details FRCDWKSWBK
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarm Entity Type 11DPE12: 1GbE
11QPA4: 10GbE, FC800, FC1200,
OC192/STM64
OC48/STM16, OTU1
11STGE12: 1GbE
4DPA2: 1GbE, OC48/STM16
OPS: OCH
Description Forced switch to working
Corrective Action Proceed to “FRCDWKSWBK” (p. 2-103).
FRCDWKSWPR

OPS-shelf-slot-A,B
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-70 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details FRCDWKSWPR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

11QPA4: 10GbE, FC800, FC1200,
OC192/STM64
OC48/STM16, OTU1
11STGE12: 1GbE
OPS: OCH
Description Forced switch to protection
Corrective Action Proceed to “FRCDWKSWPR” (p. 2-104).
FRNGSYNC

AID Type SYNC-shelf-slot-0
Alarm Entity Type SYNC
Description System clock is in free running
synchronization mode
Corrective Action Proceed to “FRNGSYNC” (p. 2-105).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-71
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details FWPENDINGOBSOLETE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FWPENDINGOBSOLETE

Severity Level NA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-72 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

112SCA1-shelf-slot
112SCX10-shelf-slot
112SX10L-shelf-slot
11DPE12E-shelf-slot
11DPM12-shelf-slot
11STAR1-shelf-slot
11STMM10-shelf-slot
11STGE12-shelf-slot
43SCX4-shelf-slot
43STA1P-shelf-slot
43STX4-shelf-slot 4
43STX4P-shelf-slot
4DPA2-shelf-slot
4DPA4-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
AHPLG-shelf-slot
ALPHG-shelf-slot
ALPFGT-shelf-slot
AM2017B-shelf-slot
AM2125A-shelf-slot
AM2125B-shelf-slot
AM2325B-shelf-slot
CWR-shelf-slot
MESH-shelf-slot
MVAC-shelf-slot
OPS-shelf-slot
OSCT-shelf-slot
RA2P-shelf-slot
SVAC-shelf-slot
WR-shelf-slot
WTOCM-shelf-slot
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-73
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description Firmware on this pack is about to become
obsolete with the software release upgrade
Corrective Action Proceed to “FWPENDINGOBSOLETE”
(p. 2-105).
FWUPGRADEPENDING

Severity Level NA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-74 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details FWUPGRADEPENDING
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

112SCA1-shelf-slot
112SCX10-shelf-slot
112SX10L-shelf-slot
11DPE12E-shelf-slot
11DPM12-shelf-slot
11STAR1-shelf-slot
11STMM10-shelf-slot
11STGE12-shelf-slot
43SCX4-shelf-slot
43STA1P-shelf-slot
43STX4-shelf-slot
43STX4P-shelf-slot
4DPA2-shelf-slot
4DPA4 (FlexMux and DualTran)
AHPHG-shelf-slot
AHPLG-shelf-slot
ALPHG-shelf-slot
ALPFGT-shelf-slot
AM2017B-shelf-slot
AM2325B-shelf-slot
CWR-shelf-slot
MESH-shelf-slot
MVAC-shelf-slot
OPS-shelf-slot
OSCT-shelf-slot
SVAC-shelf-slot
WR-shelf-slot
WTOCM-shelf-slot
Description Firmware upgrade pending
Corrective Action Proceed to “FWUPGRADEPENDING”
(p. 2-106).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-75
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details FWVERSIONNOTDEFAULT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FWVERSIONNOTDEFAULT

Severity Level NA
112SCA1-shelf-slot
112SCX10-shelf-slot
112SX10L-shelf-slot
11DPM12-shelf-slot
11DPE12E-shelf-slot
11STAR1-shelf-slot
11STMM10-shelf-slot
11STGE12-shelf-slot
43SCX4-shelf-slot
43STA1P-shelf-slot
43STX4-shelf-slot
43STX4P-shelf-slot
4DPA4 (FlexMux and DualTran)
AHPHG-shelf-slot
AHPLG-shelf-slot
ALPHG-shelf-slot
ALPFGT-shelf-slot
AM2017B-shelf-slot
AM2325B-shelf-slot
CWR-shelf-slot
MESH-shelf-slot
MVAC-shelf-slot
OPS-shelf-slot
OSCT-shelf-slot
SVAC-shelf-slot
WR-shelf-slot
WTOCM-shelf-slot
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-76 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details FWVERSIONNOTDEFAULT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description Firmware version on this pack is not the
default version for this software release
Corrective Action Proceed to “FWVERSIONNOTDEFAULT”
(p. 2-108).
HIBER
Description

Severity Level MJ
AID Type 11DPE12-shelf-slot-{L1, L2}
11STGE12-{1-8}-{2-17, 20-35}-L1
11QPA4: 10GbE, FC800, FC1200
11STAR1: 10GbE, FC1200
11STGE12, 43STX4, and 43STX4P: 10GbE
Description High BER
Corrective Action Proceed to “HIBER” (p. 2-109).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-77
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details HIGAIN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
HIGAIN

AM2125B-shelf-slot
Description Amplifier out of operational range - amplifier
gain too high
Corrective Action Proceed to “HIGAIN” (p. 2-110).
HLDOVRSYNC

Description System timing is in autonomous holdover
synchronization mode
Corrective Action Proceed to “HLDOVRSYNC” (p. 2-112).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-78 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details HWNOTSUPPORTED
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
HWNOTSUPPORTED

Severity Level MJ
AID Type EC-shelf-{1,18}
Description Hardware not supported for current
configuration
Corrective Action Proceed to “HWNOTSUPPORTED”
(p. 2-112).
INSERTMOD

Severity Level TC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-79
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details INSERTMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description Card incompatible with shelf fan
Corrective Action Proceed to “INSERTMOD” (p. 2-113).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-80 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details INTTEMPHIGH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
INTTEMPHIGH

Severity Level MN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-81
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

112SCA1-shelf-slot
112SCX10-shelf-slot
112SX10L-shelf-slot
11DPE12E-shelf-slot
11DPM12-shelf-slot
11STAR1-shelf-slot
11STMM10-shelf-slot
11STGE12-shelf-slot
43SCX4-shelf-slot
43STA1P-shelf-slot
43STX4-shelf-slot
43STX4P-shelf-slot
4DPA2-shelf-slot
4DPA4-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
AHPLG-shelf-slot
ALPHG-shelf-slot
ALPFGT-shelf-slot
AM2017B-shelf-slot
AM2125A-shelf-slot
AM2125B-shelf-slot
AM2325B-shelf-slot
CWR-shelf-slot
FLC-shelf-slot
MESH-shelf-slot
MT0C-shelf-slot
MVAC-shelf-slot
OPS-shelf-slot
OSCT-shelf-slot
PF-{1-8}-{19,36}
RA2P-shelf-slot
SVAC-shelf-slot
WR-shelf-slot
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-82 WTOCM-shelf-slot 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description Card over temperature
Corrective Action Proceed to “INTTEMPHIGH ” (p. 2-114).
INTTEMPLOW

Severity Level MN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-83
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details INTTEMPLOW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

112SCX10-shelf-slot
11DPE12E-shelf-slot
11DPM12-shelf-slot
11STAR1-shelf-slot
11STMM10-shelf-slot
11STGE12-shelf-slot
43STA1P-shelf-slot
43STX4-shelf-slot
43STX4P-shelf-slot
4DPA2-shelf-slot
4DPA4-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
AHPLG-shelf-slot
ALPHG-shelf-slot
ALPFGT-shelf-slot
AM2017B-shelf-slot
AM2125A-shelf-slot
AM2125B-shelf-slot
AM2325B-shelf-slot
CWR-shelf-slot
FLC-shelf-slot
MESH-shelf-slot
MT0C-shelf-slot
MVAC-shelf-slot
OPS-shelf-slot
OSCT-shelf-slot
PF-{1-8}-{19,36}
RA2P-shelf-slot
SVAC-shelf-slot
WR-shelf-slot
WTOCM-shelf-slot
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-84 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details INTTEMPLOW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description Card under temperature
Corrective Action Proceed to “INTTEMPLOW ” (p. 2-114).
INTTEMPOPT

Severity Level MN
AID Type AHPHG-shelf-slot
AHPLG-shelf-slot
ALPHG-shelf-slot
AM2017B-shelf-slot
AM2125A-shelf-slot
AM2125B-shelf-slot
AM2325B-shelf-slot
CWR-shelf-slot
MESH-shelf-slot
RA2P-shelf-slot
WR-shelf-slot
Description Optics over temperature
Corrective Action Proceed to “INTTEMPOPT ” (p. 2-115).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-85
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details INTRUSION
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
INTRUSION

AID Type SYSTEM
Description Excessive Invalid Login Attempts
Corrective Action Proceed to “INTRUSION” (p. 2-116).
INTRUSIONEVT

Severity Level Major
AID Type SYSTEM
Description Excessive Invalid Login Attempts
Corrective Action Proceed to “INTRUSIONEVT (Excessive
Invalid Login Attempts)” (p. 2-117).
INVALIDEGRESS

Severity Level CR
AID Type AM2125A-shelf-slot-LineIn
AM2125B-shelf-slot-LineIn
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-86 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details INVALIDEGRESS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description Invalid or no egress port defined
Corrective Action Proceed to “INVALIDEGRESS” (p. 2-117).
INVALIDTHRESHOLD

Severity Level MN
AID Type OPS-shelf-slot-{A, B}
Description Invalid Threshold
Corrective Action Proceed to “INVALIDTHRESHOLD”
(p. 2-118).
INVENTORYERROR

Severity Level MN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-87
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details INVENTORYERROR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

112SCA1-shelf-slot
112SCX10-shelf-slot
112SX10L-shelf-slot
11DPE12-shelf-slot
11DPE12E-shelf-slot
11DPM12-shelf-slot
11QPA4-shelf-slot
11STAR1-shelf-slot
11STAR1A-shelf-slot
11STGE12-shelf-slot
11STMM10-shelf-slot
43STA1P-shelf-slot
43STX4-shelf-slot
43STX4P-shelf-slot
4DPA2-shelf-slot
4DPA4-shelf-slot
A2325A-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
AHPLG-shelf-slot
ALPHG-shelf-slot
ALPFGT-shelf-slot
AM2017B-shelf-slot
AM2125A-shelf-slot
AM2125B-shelf-slot
AM2318A-shelf-slot
AM2325B-shelf-slot
BTC-shelf-slot
CWR-shelf-slot
DCM-shelf-1
EC-shelf-slot
FAN-bay-shelf
FAN-shelf-37
FLC-shelf-slot
ITLB-shelf-1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-88 ITLU-shelf-1 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
MESH-shelf-slot Issue 1 June 2011
MT0C-shelf-slot
MVAC-shelf-slot
Alarm and condition details INVENTORYERROR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description Card Inventory Error
Corrective Action Proceed to “INVENTORYERROR”
(p. 2-119)e.
LANLFI

Severity Level MJ
Alarm Entity Type 112SA1L, 112SCA1: 100GbE
112SCX10, 112SX10L, 11STAR1, 43SCX4,
43STX4, and 43STX4P: 10GbE
Description LAN Local Fault Indicator
Corrective Action Proceed to “LANLFI” (p. 2-120).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-89
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details LANLOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LANLOS

Severity Level CR
11DPE12E-shelf-slot-{C1-C12}
Alarm Entity Type 112SCA1 and 112SA1L: 100 GbE
112SCX10, 112SX10L: 10GbE, FC800
11QPA4: FC800, FC1200
11STAR1 and 43SCX4: 10GbE
11STMM10: 1GbE, FC100, FC200, FC400
11STGE12: 1GbE
43STX4/43STX4P: 10GbE
4DPA2: 1GbE
FC400
Description LAN Loss of Signal
Corrective Action Proceed to “LANLOS” (p. 2-121)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-90 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details LANLSS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LANLSS

Severity Level CR
Alarm Entity Type 112SCA1 and 112SA1L: 100 GbE
112SCX10, 112SX10L: 10GbE, FC800
11QPA4: FC800, FC1200
11DPE12, 11STAR1 43SCX4, 43STX4, and
43STX4P: 10GbE
11QPA4: 10GbE, FC800, FC1200
11STMM10: 1GbE, FC100, FC200, FC400
11STGE12: 1GbE
4DPA2: 1GbE
FC400
Description LAN Loss of Synchronization
Corrective Action Proceed to “LANLSS” (p. 2-122).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-91
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details LANRFI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LANRFI

Alarm Entity Type 11STAR1, 43STX4, and 43STX4P: 10GbE
Description LAN Remote Fault Indicator
Corrective Action Proceed to “LANRFI” (p. 2-123).
LASEREOL

Alarm Entity Type 11STAR1
Description Laser end of life
Corrective Action Proceed to “LASEREOL” (p. 2-125).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-92 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details LCK
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LCK
Description

Severity Level CR
112SCA1-shelf-slot-{L1 , C1}
112SCX10-shelf-slot-{L1, C1-C10} 1
11STMM10-shelf-slot-L1
112SX10L: OTU4
43SCX4: OTU3
Description Locked - ODU
Corrective Action Proceed to “LCK” (p. 2-126).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-93
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details LCKEGR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LCKEGR

Severity Level CR
AID Type 43STX4-shelf-slot- C{1-4}
Description Egress Locked - ODU
Corrective Action Proceed to “LCKEGR” (p. 2-127).
LFD

Severity Level CR
Alarm Entity Type 112SCX10, 112SX10L, 11QPA4: 10GbE,
FC800, FC1200
11STMM10: 1GbE, FC100, FC200, FC400
43SCX4, 43STX4 and 43STX4P: 10GbE
4DPA4: 1GbE
Description GFP Loss of Frame Delineation
Corrective Action Proceed to “LFD” (p. 2-127).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-94 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details LFIEGR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LFIEGR

Alarm Entity Type 112SCA1 and 112SA1L:100GbE
All other cards: 10GbE
Description Remote Client Local Fault
Corrective Action Proceed to “LFIEGR” (p. 2-129).
LINKDOWN

Severity Level CR
11STGE12-{1-8}-{2-17, 20-35}-{C1-10}
EC-1-{1,18}-CIT
Alarm Entity Type 11STGE12: 1GbE
EC: PLK
Description Link down
Corrective Action Proceed to “LINKDOWN” (p. 2-129).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-95
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details LINKUP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LINKUP
Description

Severity Level TC
AID Type FAN
Alarm Entity Type EC: PLK
Description Link Up
Corrective Action Proceed to “LINKUP” (p. 2-131).
LOAM

Severity Level CR
Description Loss of Alignment Marker Lock
Corrective Action Proceed to “LOAM” (p. 2-132).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-96 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details LOC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOC

Severity Level MJ
MA400}-MEP ID
Description Loss of continuity
Corrective Action Proceed to “LOC” (p. 2-132).
LOCKOUTOFPR

OPS-shelf-slot-A,B
Alarm Entity Type 11QPA4: 10GbE, FC800, FC1200,
OC192/STM64
OC48/STM16, OTU1
11STGE12: 1GbE
OPS: OCH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-97
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details LOCKOUTOFPR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description Lockout of protection
Corrective Action Proceed to “LOCKOUTOFPR” (p. 2-133).
LOCKOUTOFTIMREF

Description Lock out of a timing reference from selection
Corrective Action Proceed to “LOCKOUTOFTIMREF”
(p. 2-134).
LOF
1 of 2

Severity Level CR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-98 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details LOF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

112SX10L: OTU4
43SCX4: OTU3
Description Loss of Frame - OTU
Corrective Action Proceed to “LOF (Loss Of Frame)” (p. 2-135).
2 of 2

Severity Level CR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-99
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details LOF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarm Entity Type 112SCX10, 112SX10L and 43SCX4:
OC192/STM64 (client side only)
43STA1P: OC768/STM256
43STX4/43STX4P: OC192/STM64
4DPA2: OC48/STM16
4DPA4: OC3/STM1, OC12/STM4,
OC48/STM16
Description Loss of Frame
Corrective Action Proceed to “LOF (Loss Of Frame)” (p. 2-135).
LOFEGR

Severity Level MJ
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-100 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details LOFEGR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarm Entity Type 112SCX10, 112SX10L, 11STAR1 and
43SCX4: OC192/STM64
OC48/STM16
Description Loss of Frame Egress
Corrective Action Proceed to “LOFEGR” (p. 2-144).
LOF-O

Severity Level MJ
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-101
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details LOF-O
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

AID Type A2325A-shelf-slot-OSC
Description Incoming SUPVY LOF
Corrective Action Proceed to “LOF-O (Incoming SUPVY LOF)”
(p. 2-142).
LOGAIN

Severity Level MN
AID Type A2325-shelf-slot-Sig
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-102 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details LOGAIN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description Amplifier out of operational range - amplifier
gain too low
Corrective Action Proceed to “LOGAIN” (p. 2-145).
LOM

Severity Level MJ
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-103
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details LOM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

112SX10L: OTU4
43SCX4: OTU3
Description Loss of Multiframe - OTU
Corrective Action Proceed to “LOM (Loss of Multiframe -
OTU)” (p. 2-146).
LOS
1 of 6

Severity Level CR
AID Type A2325A-shelf-slot-Line-freq
AHPLG-shelf-slot-[Line, Sig]-freq
ALPFGT-shelf-slot-Line-freq
AM2017B-shelf-slot-Line-freq
CWR-shelf-slot-Sig-freq
CWR8-88-shelf-slot-Sig-freq
MESH-shelf-slot-SigIN-freq
OSCT-shelf-slot-Line-freq
WR-shelf-slot-{Sig, THRU}-freq
Description Channel absent
Corrective Action Proceed to “LOS (Loss of Signal)” (p. 2-148).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-104 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 of 6

Severity Level CR
AID Type CWR-shelf-slot-Sig
CWR8-88-shelf-slot-Sig
Description CWR Input LOS
Corrective Action Proceed to “CWR Input LOS” (p. 2-155).
3 of 6

Severity Level CR
AID Type MESH-shelf-slot-SigIN
Description Input LOS
Corrective Action Proceed to “Input LOS” (p. 2-160).
4 of 6

Severity Level CR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-105
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

AM2125A-shelf-slot-LineIn
Description LD Input LOS
Corrective Action Proceed to “LD Input LOS” (p. 2-153).
5 of 6

Severity Level CR
11DPE12E-shelf-slot-{VA{1-2}}
11QPA4-shelf-slot-{C1-4;{VA 1-4}}
4DPA2-shelf-slot-{L1-L2; C1-C2}
4DPA4-shelf-slot-{C1-C4; VA1, VA2}
MVAC-shelf-slot
SVAC-shelf-slot-ClientIn
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-106 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarm Entity Type 112SCX10, 112SX10L and 43SCX4:
OC192/STM64 (client side only)
11QPA4: OC192/STM64 (client side only),
OCH
4DPA2: OC48/STM16
OC48/STM16
Description Loss of Signal
Corrective Action Proceed to “LOS (Loss of Signal)” (p. 2-148).
Description
6 of 6

Severity Level CR
AID Type SFCn-shelf-slot-OMD
SFDn-shelf-slot-OMD
Description OMD Input LOS
Corrective Action Proceed to “OMD Input LOS” (p. 2-161).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-107
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details LOSDCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOSDCM

Severity Level CR
AID Type A2325A-shelf-slot-Dcm
AHPHG-shelf-slot-Dcm
AHPLG-shelf-slot-Dcm
ALPHG-shelf-slot-Dcm
AM2017B-shelf-slot-Dcm
AM2125A-shelf-slot-Dcm
Description From Dcm Input LOS
Corrective Action Proceed to “LOSDCM” (p. 2-162).
LOSLDSig

Severity Level CR
ALPFGT-shelf-slot-Sig
Description LD Sig Input LOS
Corrective Action Proceed to “LOSLDSIG” (p. 2-164).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-108 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details LOSOCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOSOCM

Severity Level MJ
AID Type WTOCM-shelf-slot-IN{1-4}
Description WTOCM Input LOS
Corrective Action Proceed to “LOSOCM” (p. 2-166).
LOS-O

Severity Level MN
Description Incoming SUPVY LOS
Corrective Action Proceed to “LOS-O” (p. 2-167).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-109
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details LOS-OUT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOS-OUT
1 of 2

Severity Level CR
Description Outgoing Loss of Signal
Corrective Action Proceed to “LOS-OUT” (p. 2-169).
2 of 2

Severity Level CR
AID Type AHPHG-shelf-slot- Sig-freq
AHPLG-shelf-slot-Sig-freq
ALPHG-shelf-slot-Sig-freq
AM2017B-shelf-slot-{Sig, Line}-freq
AM2125A-shelf-slot-LineOut-freq
AM2125B-shelf-slot-LineOut-freq
CWR-shelf-slot-ThruOut-freq
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-110 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details LOS-OUT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description Outgoing channel absent
Corrective Action Proceed to “LOS-OUT” (p. 2-169).
LOS-P

Severity Level CR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-111
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details LOS-P
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

AID Type 112SCA1-shelf-slot-{L1, C1}
11STMM10-shelf-slot-{L1, {C1-10}}
43STX4-shelf-slot-{L1, C1-C4}}
43STX4P-shelf-slot-{L1, C1-C4}}
4DPA4-shelf-slot-{L{1-2}}
A2325A-shelf-slot-Line
OSC-shelf-slot-Line
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-112 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details LOS-P
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarm Entity Type 112SCA1 and 112SCX10 (line side only):
OTU4
11STMM10 (client side only) and 4DPA4:
OTU1
43STA1P and 43STX4P: OTU3
OPS: OCH
All amplifiers: OTS
All other AIDs: OTU2
Description Incoming Payload
Corrective Action Proceed to “LOS-P” (p. 2-172).
LPBKLine

11STMM10-shelf-slot-{L1, C{1-10}}
11STGE12-shelf-slot-{L1, C{1-12}}
43STX4-shelf-slot-{L1, C1-C4}
43STX4P-shelf-slot-{L1, C1-C4}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-113
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details LPBKLine
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description Line (Facility) loopback active
Corrective Action Proceed to “LPBKLINE” (p. 2-173).
LPBKTERM

Description Diagnostic (Terminal) loopback active
Corrective Action Proceed to “LPBKTERM” (p. 2-174).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-114 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details LSPOW_ALM_W
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LSPOW_ALM_W

AID Type 43STA1P-shelf-slot-C1
43STX4P-shelf-slot-C1
Description Laser back-facet optical power cross threshold
Corrective Action Proceed to “LSPOW_ALM_W” (p. 2-175).
LSTEMP_ALM_W

AID Type 43STA1P-shelf-slot-C1
43STX4P-shelf-slot-C1
Description Laser cooling current cross threshold
Corrective Action Proceed to “LSTEMP_ALM_W” (p. 2-176).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-115
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details LSSEGR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LSSEGR

Description Remote Client Loss of Synchronization
Corrective Action Proceed to “LSSEGR” (p. 2-177).
MAN
1 of 3

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-116 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details MAN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

112SCA1-shelf-slot
112SCX10-shelf-slot
112SX10L-shelf-slot
11DPE12E-shelf-slot
11DPM12-shelf-slot
11STAR1-shelf-slot
11STMM10-shelf-slot
11STGE12-shelf-slot
43SCX4-shelf-slot
43STA1P-shelf-slot
43STX4-shelf-slot
43STX4P-shelf-slot
4DPA2-shelf-slot
4DPA4-shelf-slot
A2325A-shelf-slot
ALPHG-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
AHPLG-shelf-slot{Dcm, Sig, Line, OSC}
ALPFGT-shelf-slot- {Sig, Line, OSCSFP}
AM2017B-shelf-slot
AM2125A-shelf-slot
AM2125B-shelf-slot
AM2318A-shelf-slot
AM2325B-shelf-slot
CWR-shelf-slot
DCM-shelf-slot
FAN-shelf-slot
ITLB-shelf-1
MESH-shelf-slot
MVAC-shelf-slot
OPS-shelf-slot
OSCT-shelf-slot-{Sig, Line, OSCSFP}
RA2P-shelf-slot
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-117
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

AID Type (continued) SFC-shelf-slot
SFD-shelf-slot
SFD44-shelf-1
SFD44B-shelf-1
SVAC-shelf-slot
USRPNL-shelf
WR-shelf-slot
WTOCM-shelf-slot
Description Manually caused abnormal condition - card in
maintenance
Corrective Action Proceed to “MAN” (p. 2-177).
2 of 3

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-118 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

43STX4-shelf-slot- {L1, C{1-4}}
43STX4P-shelf-slot-{L1, {C1-C4}}
4DPA4-shelf-slot-{C1- C4, L1, L2, VA1,
VA2}
AM2325B-shelf-slot-{Dcm, Sig, Line, OSC}
AHPHG-shelf-slot-{Dcm, Sig, Line, OSC};
AHPLG-shelf-slot- {Dcm, Sig, Line, OSC}
ALPHG-shelf-slot-{Dcm, Sig, Line, OSC}
ALPFGT-shelf-slot-{Sig, Line, OSCSFP}
AM2125A-shelf-slot-{LineIn, LineOut,
OSCSFP, Dcm}
AM2125B-shelf-slot-{LineIn, LineOut,
OSCSFP, Dcm}
AM2318A-shelf-slot
AM2325B-shelf-slot-{Dcm, Sig, Line, OSC}
CWR-shelf-slot-{Sig, CLS[1-8], THRU,
OMD}
ITLU-shelf-slot
MESH-shelf-slot-{SIGIN, SIGOUT{1-4}}
OSCT-shelf-slot-{Sig, Line, OSCSFP}
OPS-shelf-slot-{Sig, A, B};
RA2P-shelf-slot-{LineIn, LineOut}
SFC-shelf-slot-OMD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-119
SFD-shelf-slot-OMD
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

WR-shelf-slot-{SIG, THRU, DROPOUT,
ADDIN{1-8}, MESHOUT{1-3}}
WTOCM-shelf-slot-IN{1-4}
Description Manually caused abnormal condition - port in
maintenance
3 of 3

Severity Level MN
Description A logical removal was performed on a timing
reference.
MANRESET

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-120 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details MANRESET
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

112SCA1-shelf-slot
112SCX10-shelf-slot
112SX10L-shelf-slot
11DPE12E-shelf-slot
11DPM12-shelf-slot
11STAR1-shelf-slot
11STMM10-shelf-slot
11STGE12-shelf-slot
43SCX4-shelf-slot
43STX4-shelf-slot
4DPA4-shelf-slot
A2325A-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
AHPLG-shelf-slot
ALPHG-shelf-slot
AM2017B-shelf-slot
AM2125A-shelf-slot
AM2125B-shelf-slot
AM2318A-shelf-slot
AM2325B-shelf-slot
CWR-shelf-slot
EC-shelf-{1,18}
FLC-shelf-slot
MESH-shelf-slot
MT0C-shelf-slot
MVAC-shelf-slot
OSC-shelf-slot
OPS-shelf-slot
RA2P-shelf-slot
SVAC-shelf-slot
WR-shelf-slot
WTOCM-shelf-slot
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-121
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details MANRESET
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description Card Manual Reset
Corrective Action Proceed to “MANRESET” (p. 2-181).
MANSWTIMREF

Description Timing selection was switched by a manual
command to a timing reference.
Corrective Action Proceed to “MANSWTIMREF ” (p. 2-182).
MANSWTOINT

Description A manual switch to Internal Timing (forced
Free-Running mode) has occurred
Corrective Action Proceed to “MANSWTOINT” (p. 2-182).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-122 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details MANWKSWBK
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MANWKSWBK

AID Type 11STAR1-shelf-slot-{C1}
OPS-shelf-slot-A,B
Alarm Entity Type 11STAR1: 10GbE, FC1200, OC192/STM64
OC48/STM16, OTU1
11STGE12: 1GbE
OPS: OCH
Description Manual switch to working
Corrective Action Proceed to “MANWKSWBK” (p. 2-183).
MANWKSWPR

OPS-shelf-slot-A,B
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-123
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details MANWKSWPR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

11QPA4: 10GbE, FC800, FC1200,
OC192/STM64
OC48/STM16, OTU1
11STGE12: 1GbE
OPS: OCH
Description Manual switch to protection
Corrective Action Proceed to “MANWKSWPR” (p. 2-184).
MISMATCH
Description
Card mismatch

Severity Level CR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-124 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details MISMATCH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

112SCA1-shelf-slot
112SCX10-shelf-slot
112SX10L-shelf-slot
11DPE12E-shelf-slot
11DPM12-shelf-slot
11STAR1-shelf-slot
11STMM10-shelf-slot
11STGE12-shelf-slot
43SCX4-shelf-slot
43STA1P-shelf-slot
43STX4-shelf-slot
43STX4P-shelf-slot
4DPA2-shelf-slot
4DPA4-shelf-slot
4DPA4-1-{7, 8}
ALPHG-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
AHPLG-shelf-slot
ALPFGT-shelf-slot
AM2017B-shelf-slot
AM2125A-shelf-slot
AM2125B-shelf-slot
AM2318A-shelf-slot
AM2325B-shelf-slot
CWR-shelf-slot
DCM-shelf-slot
FAN-shelf-slot
ITLB-shelf-slot
ITLU-shelf-slot
MESH-shelf-slot
MVAC-shelf-slot
OPS-shelf-slot
OSCT-shelf-slot
RA2P-shelf-slot
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-125
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details MISMATCH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

SFD-shelf-slot
SFD44-shelf-1
SFD44B-shelf-1
SVAC-shelf-slot
WR-shelf-slot
WTOCM-shelf-slot
Description Card mismatch
Corrective Action Proceed to “MISMATCH” (p. 2-185).
Description
Power filter mismatch

Severity Level CR
AID Type PF-{1-8}-{19,36}
Description Power filter mismatch
Corrective Action Proceed to “MISMATCH” (p. 2-185).
Shelf mismatch

Severity Level CR
AID Type SHELF-{1-40}
Description Shelf mismatch
Corrective Action Proceed to “MISMATCH (Shelf Mismatch)”
(p. 2-191).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-126 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details MISMATCHMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MISMATCHMOD

Severity Level MN
AHPLG-shelf-slot- OSC
Description SFP or XFP mismatch
Corrective Action Proceed to “MISMATCHMOD” (p. 2-192).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-127
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details MIXEDPFUSED
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MIXEDPFUSED
Description

Severity Level CR
AID Type SHELF
Alarm Entity Type
Description Mixed types of power filters used
Corrective Action Proceed to “MIXEDPFUSED” (p. 2-193).
MMG

Severity Level MJ
MA400}-MEP ID
Description Mismerge
Corrective Action Proceed to “MMG” (p. 2-194).
MOD

Severity Level MN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-128 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details MOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

AID Type 112SCA1-shelf-slot-L1
112SCX10-shelf-slot-L1
11STAR1-shelf-slot-Line
11STMM10-shelf-slot-Line
11STGE12-shelf-slot-Line
4DPA4-shelf-slot- {VA1, VA2}
SVAC-shelf-slot-Line
Description Card degrade - wavelength tracker channel id
insertion
Corrective Action Proceed to “MOD” (p. 2-195).
MODOUTOOR

Severity Level MN
11QPA4-shelf-slot
Alarm Entity Type
Description Modulator output power out of range
Corrective Action Proceed to “MODOUTOOR” (p. 2-197).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-129
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details MODOUTOOR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MODOUTOOR

Severity Level MN
11QPA4-shelf-slot
Alarm Entity Type
Description Modulator output power out of range
Corrective Action Proceed to “MODOUTOOR” (p. 2-197).
MSIM

Severity Level CR
AID Type 43STX4P-shelf-slot-L1
Description Multiplex Structure Indication Mismatch
Corrective Action Proceed to “MSIM” (p. 2-198).
MTCESURV

Severity Level CR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-130 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details MTCESURV
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description Add power control failure
Corrective Action Proceed to “MTCESURV” (p. 2-199).
MTCESURVDGR

Severity Level MJ
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-131
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details MTCESURVDGR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description Port degrade - wavelength tracker encode
degrade
Corrective Action Proceed to “MTCESURVDGR” (p. 2-200).
NET

Severity Level MJ
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-132 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details NET
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

EC-shelf-slot-{ES1, ES2}
FAN-shelf-slot-LAN1
FLC-1-slot-{CIT, OAMP}
MT0C-shelf-slot{VOIP, ES1, ES2, E1, E2}
USRPNL-shelf-slot-{OAMP, VOIP, E1, E2}
Alarm Entity Type 11DPE12, 11QPA4 and 11STAR1: OTU2
11STMM10: OTU1
4DPA4: OTU1
EC, FAN, and USRPNL: PLK
All Amplifiers: OTS
Description Link down
Corrective Action Proceed to “NET” (p. 2-202).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-133
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details NOTALLOWED
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NOTALLOWED

Severity Level CR
AID Type SLOT
Description Card not allowed
Corrective Action Proceed to “NOTALLOWED” (p. 2-205).
NTPOOSYNC

Severity Level CNA
AID Type SYSTEM
Description Network Time Protocol is enabled, but no
NTP server is reachable.
Corrective Action Proceed to “NTPOOSYNC” (p. 2-205).
OAPUMPBIASCURRHIGH

Severity Level MJ
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-134 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details OAPUMPBIASCURRHIGH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

AID Type A2325A-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
AHPLG-shelf-slot
ALPHG-shelf-slot
AM2017B-shelf-slot
AM2125A-shelf-slot
AM2125B-shelf-slot
AM2325B-shelf-slot
MESH-shelf-slot
RA2P-shelf-slot
WR-shelf-slot
Alarm Entity Type
Description OA pump laser bias current high
Corrective Action Proceed to “OAPUMPBIASCURRHIGH”
(p. 2-207).
OAPUMPTEMPHIGH

Severity Level MJ
AID Type A2325A-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
AHPLG-shelf-slot
ALPHG-shelf-slot
AM2017B-shelf-slot
AM2325B-shelf-slot
Alarm Entity Type
Description OA pump laser temperature high
Corrective Action Proceed to “OAPUMPTEMPHIGH”
(p. 2-208).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-135
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details OCHCOLLISION
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCHCOLLISION
Description

Severity Level CR
AM2125A-shelf-slot-Line-freq
CWR8-88A-shelf-slot-Sig-freq
Description Channel collision
Corrective Action Proceed to “OCHCOLLISION” (p. 2-208).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-136 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details OCHCOLLISION-OUT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCHCOLLISION-OUT

Severity Level CR
AID Type A2325A-shelf-slot-{Sig, Line}-freq
AHPHG-shelf-slot-{Sig, Line}-freq
AHPLG-shelf-slot-{Sig, Line}-freq
ALPHG-shelf-slot-{Sig, Line}-freq
Description Channel collision Output Direction
Corrective Action Proceed to “OCHCOLLISION-OUT”
(p. 2-211).
OCHKEYDUP

Severity Level MN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-137
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details OCHKEYDUP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description Duplicate Wave Key
Corrective Action Proceed to “OCHKEYDUP” (p. 2-217).
OCHKEYOVERLAP

Severity Level MN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-138 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details OCHKEYOVERLAP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description Wave Key overlap
Corrective Action Proceed to “OCHKEYOVERLAP” (p. 2-218).
OCHFDI

Severity Level NR
AHPHG-shelf-slot-Line, Sig]-freq
AHPLG-shelf-slot-Line-freq
ALPHG-shelf-slot-Line-freq
AM2125A-shelf-slot-LineIn-freq
AM2125B-shelf-slot-LineIn-freq
RA2P-shelf-slot-LineIn-freq
Description Optical Channel Forward Defect Indication
Corrective Action Proceed to “OCHFDI” (p. 2-213).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-139
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details OCHPDI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCHPDI

Severity Level NR
112SX10L-shelf-slot-L1
Description Optical Channel PayloadDefect Indication
Corrective Action Proceed to “OCHPDI” (p. 2-215).
OCHTRAILDUP

Severity Level MN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-140 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details OCHTRAILDUP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description Duplicate OCH Trail name
Corrective Action Proceed to “OCHTRAILDUP” (p. 2-219).
OCHTRAILUNKNOWN

Severity Level MN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-141
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details OCHTRAILUNKNOWN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

AHPHG-shelf-slot-Line-freq
ALPHG-shelf-slot-Line-freq
AM2125A-shelf-slot-LineIn-freq
AM2125B-shelf-slot-LineIn-freq
RA2P-shelf-slot-LineIn-freq
Description Unknown OCH Trail for xconnect
Corrective Action Proceed to “OCHTRAILUNKNOWN”
(p. 2-221)
OCHUNKNOWN

Severity Level MN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-142 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details OCHUNKNOWN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description Channel unexpected
Corrective Action Proceed to “OCHUNKNOWN” (p. 2-223).
OCHUNKNOWN-OUT

Severity Level MN
AHPHG-shelf-slot-Sig]-freq
AHPLG-shelf-slot- Sig-freq
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-143
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details OCHUNKNOWN-OUT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description Channel unexpected
Corrective Action Proceed to “OCHUNKNOWN-OUT”
(p. 2-225).
OCI
Description

Severity Level CR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-144 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details OCI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

112SX10L: OTU4
43SCX4 and 43STA1P: OTU3
All other AIDs: ODU2
Description Open Connection Indication - ODU
Corrective Action Proceed to “OCI” (p. 2-226).
OCIEGR

Severity Level CR
Description Egress Open Connection Indication - ODU
Corrective Action Proceed to “OCIEGR” (p. 2-227).
OPR
Description

Severity Level MN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-145
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details OPR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description Channel optical power out of range
Corrective Action Proceed to “OPR” (p. 2-228).
OPRPWRHIGH

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-146 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details OPRPWRHIGH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description Out of Operational Range - Loss Too High
Corrective Action Proceed to “OPRPWRHIGH” (p. 2-233).
OPRPWRLOW

Severity Level MN
OSC-shelf-slot-Line
Description Out of Operational Range - Loss Too Low
Corrective Action Proceed to “OPRPWRLOW” (p. 2-235).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-147
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details OPRLOSSHIGH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OPRLOSSHIGH
Description

Description Out of Operational Range – Loss Too High
between DCM Ports of LD
Corrective Action Proceed to “OPRPWRHIGH” (p. 2-233).
OPRLOSSLOW

Description Out Of Operational Range - Loss Too Low
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-148 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details OPRLOSSLOW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Corrective Action Proceed to “OPRLOSSLOW” (p. 2-231).
OPROOR

Severity Level MJ
Description Optical power received out of range
Corrective Action Proceed to “OPROOR” (p. 2-236).
OPR-OUT
Description

Severity Level MN
AHPHG-shelf-slot-Sig-freq
AHPLG-shelf-slot- Sig-freq
CWR-shelf-slot-ThruOut-freq measured
CWR-shelf-slot-Cls[1-8]Out-freq calculated

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-149
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details OPR-OUT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description Outgoing Channel Optical Power Out of
Range
Corrective Action Proceed to “OPR-OUT” (p. 2-238).
OPRTX
Description

Severity Level MN
Description Channel power unstable
Corrective Action Proceed to “OPRTX” (p. 2-239).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-150 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details OPRUNACHIEVE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OPRUNACHIEVE
Description

Severity Level MN
11DPE12E-shelf-slot-{VA{1-2}}
11QPA4-shelf-slot-{VA1-4}
Description Channel power unachievable
Corrective Action Proceed to “OPRUNACHIEVE” (p. 2-241).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-151
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details OPTINTBASE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OPTINTBASE

Severity Level MN
Description Optical intrusion baseline needed
Corrective Action Proceed to “OPTINTBASE” (p. 2-244).
OPTINTDET

Severity Level MJ
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-152 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details OPTINTDET
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description Optical Intrusion - Detected
Corrective Action Proceed to “OPTINTDET” (p. 2-245).
OPTINTSUSP

Severity Level MJ
Description Optical Intrusion - Monitoring Suspended
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-153
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details OPTINTSUSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Corrective Action Proceed to “OPTINTSUSP” (p. 2-245).
OSCSSF

Severity Level NR
Description Server signal failure - OSC
Corrective Action Proceed to “OSCSSF” (p. 2-247).
PCSGENERATOR
Description

Severity Level NA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-154 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details PCSGENERATOR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description PCS Generator active
Corrective Action Proceed to “PCSGENERATOR” (p. 2-248).
PLM
Description

Severity Level CR
112SX10L: OTU4
43SCX4: OTU3
Description Payload Mismatch Indication - ODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-155
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details PLM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Corrective Action Proceed to “PLM” (p. 2-248).
PLMEGR

Severity Level CR
Description Egress Payload Mismatch Indication - ODU
Corrective Action Proceed to “PLMEGR” (p. 2-249).
PRCDRERR-TOPO
Description
1 of 2

Severity Level MN
AID Type SYSTEM
Description Invalid topology
Corrective Action Proceed to “PRCDRERR” (p. 2-250).
2 of 2

Severity Level MN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-156 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details PRCDRERR-TOPO
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

AHPLG-shelf-slot- Line
Description Power management topology invalid
Corrective Action Proceed to “PRCDRERR” (p. 2-250).
PWR

Severity Level CR
AID Type PF-{1-8}-{19,36}
Description Power Filter 1 breaker off or voltage low;
Power Filter 2 breaker off or voltage low
Corrective Action Proceed to “PWR” (p. 2-254).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-157
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details PWRADJCOMMS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PWRADJCOMMS

Severity Level NR
AID Type A2325A-shelf-slot-{Sig, Lineout}
AM2017B-shelf-slot-{Sig}
AM2318A-shelf-slot-Lineout
AM2325B-shelf-slot-{Sig}
Description Inter NE communication timeout blocking
power adjustment
Corrective Action Proceed to “PWRADJCOMMS” (p. 2-256)
PWRADJFAIL

Severity Level MN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-158 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details PWRADJFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

OSC-shelf-slot-Line
Description Power Adjustment Failure
No through services in appropriate state for
adjustment
Corrective Action Proceed to “PWRADJFAIL” (p. 2-257)
PWRADJREQ

Severity Level MN
AHPLG-shelf-slot-(Sig, Line)
OSC-shelf-slot-Line
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-159
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details PWRADJREQ
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description Power Adjustment Required
Corrective Action Proceed to “PWRADJREQ” (p. 2-265).
PWRMARGIN

Severity Level MN
OSC-shelf-slot-Line
Description Power Adjustment Margin Exceeded
Corrective Action Proceed to “PWRMARGIN” (p. 2-266).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-160 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details PWRMAXGAIN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PWRMAXGAIN

Severity Level MN
ALPFGT-shelf-slot-Sig
OSCT-shelf-slot-Sig
Description Gain Adjustment Exceeded Max Value
Corrective Action Proceed to “PWRMAXGAIN” (p. 2-267)
PWRSUSP
Description

Severity Level MN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-161
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details PWRSUSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description Power management suspended
Corrective Action Proceed to “PWRSUSP” (p. 2-270).
PWRTILTSUSP
Description

Severity Level MN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-162 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details PWRTILTSUSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description Amplifier gain tilt adjustments suspended
Corrective Action Proceed to “PWRTILTSUSP” (p. 2-276).
RAMANSUSP (Raman Suppress - Line)

Severity Level MJ
AID Type AHPHG-shelf-slot-Line
Description Raman Suppress - Line
Corrective Action Proceed to “RAMANSUP” (p. 2-276).
RCVROPTPROG

Severity Level MN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-163
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details RCVROPTPROG
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

112SCA1-shelf-slot
112SCX10-shelf-slot
112SX10L-shelf-slot
43SCX4-shelf-slot
43STA1P-shelf-slot
43STX4-shelf-slot
43STX4P-shelf-slot
Description Receiver Optimization in Progress
Corrective Action Proceed to “RCVROPTPROG” (p. 2-278).
RDI

Severity Level MJ
MA400}-MEP ID
Description Remote defect indication
Corrective Action Proceed to “RDI” (p. 2-279).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-164 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details REMOVEMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
REMOVEMOD

Severity Level TC
AID Type 112SCA1-shelf-slot-C1
Description Receiver Optimization in Progress
Corrective Action Proceed to “REMOVEMOD” (p. 2-280).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-165
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details REPLUNITMISS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
REPLUNITMISS
Description
Card missing

Severity Level CR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-166 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

112SCA1-shelf-slot
112SCX10-shelf-slot
112SX10L-shelf-slot
11DPE12E-shelf-slot
11DPM12-shelf-slot
11STAR1-shelf-slot
11STMM10-shelf-slot
11STGE12-shelf-slot
43SCX4-shelf-slot
43STA1P-shelf-slot
43STX4-shelf-slot
43STX4P-shelf-slot
4DPA2-shelf-slot
4DPA4-shelf-slot
A2325A-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
AHPLG-shelf-slot
ALPHG-shelf-slot
ALPFGT-shelf-slot
AM2017B-shelf-slot
AM2125A-shelf-slot
AM2125B-shelf-slot
AM2318A-shelf-slot
AM2325B-shelf-slot
BTC-shelf-slot
CWR-shelf-slot
DCM-shelf-slot
FAN-shelf-slot
ITLB-shelf-1
ITLU-shelf-slot
MT0C-shelf-slot
MESH-shelf-slot
MVAC-shelf-slot
OPS-shelf-slot
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 OSCT-shelf-slot 1-167
Issue 1 June 2011 PF-{1-8}-{19,36}
RA2P-shelf-slot
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

SFD-shelf-slot
SFD44-shelf-1
SFD44B-shelf-1
SVAC-shelf-slot
USRPNL-shelf
WR-shelf-slot
WTOCM-shelf-slot
Description Card missing
Corrective Action Proceed to “REPLUNITMISS” (p. 2-281).
Description
Card removal/unseat event

Severity Level CR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-168 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

112SCA1-shelf-slot
112SCX10-shelf-slot
112SX10L-shelf-slot
11DPE12-shelf-slot
11QPA4-shelf-slot
11STAR1-shelf-slot
11STMM10-shelf-slot
11STGE12-shelf-slot
43SCX4-shelf-slot
43STA1P-shelf-slot
43STX4-shelf-slot
43STX4P-shelf-slot
4DPA2-shelf-slot
4DPA4-shelf-slot
A2325A-shelf-slot
ALPHG-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
AHPLG-shelf-slot
ALPFGT-shelf-slot
AM2125A-shelf-slot
AM2125B-shelf-slot
AM2325B-shelf-slot
CWR-shelf-slot
EC-shelf-{1, 18}
FAN-shelf-slot
ITLB-shelf-1
OPS-shelf-slot
OSCT-shelf-slot
PF-{1-8}-{19,36}
RA2P-shelf-slot
SFC-shelf-slot
SFD-shelf-slot
SFD44-shelf-1
SFD44B-shelf-1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 SVAC-shelf-slot 1-169
Issue 1 June 2011 USRPNL-shelf
WR-shelf-slot
WTOCM-shelf-slot
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description Card removal/unseat event
Corrective Action Proceed to “REPLUNITMISS” (p. 2-281).
REPLUNITMISSMOD

Severity Level CR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-170 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details REPLUNITMISSMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description SFP or XFP missing
Corrective Action Proceed to “REPLUNITMISSMOD”
(p. 2-283).
RFIEGR
Description

Alarm Entity Type 112SCA1 and 112SA1L:100GbE
Description Remote Client Remote Fault
Corrective Action Proceed to “RFIEGR” (p. 2-284).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-171
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details RFIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RFIL

Severity Level NR
AID Type 11STMM10-shelf-slot-{C1-10}
Alarm Entity Type CBR2G5, OC3/STM1, OC12/STM4,
OC48/STM16
Description RFI Line/MS
Corrective Action Proceed to “RFIL” (p. 2-285).
SDBER

Severity Level MJ
Alarm Entity Type 112SCX10, 112SX10L, 11QPA4 and 43SCX4:
OC192/STM64
11STMM10: OC3/STM1, OC12/STM4,
OC48/STM16
Description Signal Degrade
Corrective Action Proceed to “SDBER” (p. 2-286).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-172 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details SDBER (RS)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SDBER (RS)

Severity Level MJ
Alarm Entity Type OC12; OC3; OC48; OC192; STM1; STM16;
STM4; STM64
Visible Indication
Corrective Action Proceed to “SDBER (RS) (RS Signal
Degrade)” (p. 2-288).
SDEG-O

Description SUPVY Signal Degrade
Corrective Action Proceed to “SDEG-O” (p. 2-288).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-173
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details SDEGR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SDEGR

Severity Level MJ
AID Type 43STX4-shelf-slot-{C1-C4}
Description Egress Signal Degrade - ODU
Corrective Action Proceed to “SDEGR” (p. 2-291).
SFMISMATCH

Severity Level CR (except EC)
MJ (EC only)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-174 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details SFMISMATCH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

112SCA1-shelf-slot
112SCX10-shelf-slot
112SX10L-shelf-slot
11DPE12-shelf-slot
11QPA4-shelf-slot
11DPE12E-shelf-slot
11DPM12-shelf-slot
11STAR1-shelf-slot
11STMM10-shelf-slot
11STGE12-shelf-slot
43SCX4-shelf-slot
43STA1P-shelf-slot
43STX4-shelf-slot
43STX4P-shelf-slot
4DPA2-shelf-slot
4DPA4-shelf-slot
A2325A-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
AHPLG-shelf-slot
ALPHG-shelf-slot
ALPFGT-shelf-slot
AM2017B-shelf-slot
AM2125A-shelf-slot
AM2125B-shelf-slot
AM2325B-shelf-slot
CWR-shelf-slot
FLC-shelf-slot
MESH-shelf-slot
MT0C-shelf-slot
MVAC-shelf-slot
OPS-shelf-slot
OSCT-shelf-slot
RA2P-shelf-slot
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-175
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details SFMISMATCH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

WR-shelf-slot
WTOCM-shelf-slot
Description Software version mismatch
Corrective Action Proceed to “SFMISMATCH” (p. 2-292).
SLTMSIG

Severity Level MN
Description Timing reference frequency has moved off the
required accuracy limits (not Protected or
Protection not Available)
Corrective Action Proceed to “ SLTMSIG” (p. 2-293).
SSF

Severity Level NR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-176 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details SSF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

112SX10L: OTU4
43SCX4 and 43STA1P: OTU3
All other AIDs: OTU2
Description Server Signal Failure - OTU
Corrective Action Proceed to “SSF” (p. 2-294).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-177
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details SSFODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SSFODU

Severity Level NR
11STGE12-shelf-slot-{L1},
112SX10L: OTU4
43SCX4: OTU3
Description Server Signal Failure - ODU
Corrective Action Proceed to “SSFODU” (p. 2-295).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-178 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details SSFODUEGR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SSFODUEGR
Description

Severity Level NR
AID Type 43STX4-shelf-slot-{C1-C4}

Description Egress Server Signal Failure - ODU
Corrective Action Proceed to “SSFODUEGR” (p. 2-297).
SWEQPT
1 of 2

Severity Level MN
AID Type SHELF-{1-8}
Description Equipment Controller redundancy is
compromised
Corrective Action Proceed to “SWEQPT” (p. 2-299).
Description
2 of 2

Severity Level MN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-179
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details SWEQPT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

112SCX10-shelf-slot
11DPE12E-shelf-slot
11DPM12-shelf-slot
11STAR1-shelf-slot
11STMM10-shelf-slot
11STGE12-shelf-slot
43SCX4-shelf-slot
43STA1P-shelf-slot
43STX4-shelf-slot
43STX4P-shelf-slot

Description Protection switching equipment failure
Corrective Action Proceed to “SWEQPT” (p. 2-299).
SWFTDWN
1 of 2

Severity Level MN
AID Type SYSTEM
Description Software Upgrade in Progress
Corrective Action Proceed to “SWFTDWN” (p. 2-305).
2 of 2

Severity Level MN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-180 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details SWFTDWN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

11STMM10-shelf-slot
11STGE12-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
AHPLG-shelf-slot
ALPHG-shelf-slot
CWR-shelf-slot
OPS-shelf-slot
SVAC-shelf-slot
Description Software Upgrade in Progress
Corrective Action Proceed to “SWFTDWN” (p. 2-305).
SWMTXMOD
1 of 2

Severity Level CR
AID Type CWR-shelf-slot-Sig
Description Switching matrix module failure
Corrective Action Proceed to “SWMTXMOD” (p. 2-307).
2 of 2

Severity Level CR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-181
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details SWMTXMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

43STA1P-shelf-slot-C1 OTU3
43STA1P-shelf-slot-C1 OC768/STM256
11QPA4: 10GbE, OC192/STM64
OC48/STM16, OTU1
11STGE12: 1GbE
43STA1P: OC768/STM256, OTU3
43STX4 and 43STX4P: 10GbE,
OC192/STM64, OTU2
Description Y-cable switchover timer expired
Corrective Action Proceed to “SWMTXMOD” (p. 2-307).
SWUPGCOMMIT

Severity Level MN
AID Type SYSTEM
Description No committed software load (Autoinstall
disabled)
Corrective Action Proceed to “SWUPGCOMMIT” (p. 2-310).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-182 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details SWUPGFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SWUPGFAIL
1 of 2

Severity Level MN
AID Type SYSTEM
Description Software Upgrade Failed
Corrective Action Proceed to “SWUPGFAIL” (p. 2-311).
2 of 2

Severity Level MN
11STMM10-shelf-slot
11STGE12-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
AHPLG-shelf-slot
ALPHG-shelf-slot
CWR-shelf-slot
OPS-shelf-slot
SVAC-shelf-slot
Description Software Upgrade Failed
Corrective Action Proceed to “SWUPGFAIL” (p. 2-311).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-183
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details SYNCOOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SYNCOOS
1 of 2

Severity Level MJ
Description Timing reference failed (not Protected or
Protection not Available)
Corrective Action Proceed to “SYNCOOS” (p. 2-316).
2 of 2

Severity Level MJ
Description All available timing reference have failed and
the system is going into holdover
Corrective Action Proceed to “SYNCOOS” (p. 2-316).
SYNCREFUNEQ

Description Timing reference is unassigned
Corrective Action Proceed to “SYNREFUNEQ” (p. 2-319).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-184 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details SYSBOOT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SYSBOOT

Severity Level CR
AID Type SYSTEM
Description Cold Start
Warm Start
Corrective Action Proceed to “SYSBOOT” (p. 2-319).
TIM

Severity Level CR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-185
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details TIM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

112SX10L (line side only): OTU4
112SCX10 and 112SX10L (client side only):
OC192/STM64
11QPA4: OC192/STM64 (client side only)
43SCX4 (line side only): OTU3
43SCX4 (client side only): OC192/STM64
Description Trace Identifier Mismatch - OTU
Corrective Action Proceed to “TIM” (p. 2-321).
TIMEGR

Severity Level CR
Description Egress Trace Identifier Mismatch - ODU
Corrective Action Proceed to “TIMEGR” (p. 2-325).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-186 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details TIMODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TIMODU

Severity Level CR
112SX10L: OTU4
43SCX4: OTU3
Description Trace Identifier Mismatch - ODU
Corrective Action Proceed to “TIMODU” (p. 2-327).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-187
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details TRMT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TRMT
Description

Severity Level CR
11STAR1-shelf-slot-L1
11STMM10-shelf-slot-L1
SVAC-shelf-slot-L1
Description Port transmit failure
Corrective Action Proceed to “TRMT” (p. 2-328) or “EQPT”
(p. 2-72).
TRMTMOD

Severity Level CR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-188 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details TRMTMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

11STAR1-shelf-slot
11STMM10-shelf-slot
11STGE12-shelf-slot
43STX4-shelf-slot
Description SFP or XFP transmit failure
Corrective Action Proceed to “TRMTMOD” (p. 2-330) or
“EQPT” (p. 2-72).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-189
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details UNG/UNP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
UNG/UNP

Severity Level MJ
MA400}-MEP ID
Description Unexpected MEP or unexpected periodicity
Corrective Action Proceed to “UNG/UNP” (p. 2-331).
UNKNOWN

Severity Level CR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-190 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details UNKNOWN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

112SCA1-shelf-slot
112SCX10-shelf-slot
112SX10L-shelf-slot
11DPE12E-shelf-slot
11DPM12-shelf-slot
11STAR1-shelf-slot
11STMM10-shelf-slot
11STGE12-shelf-slot
43SCX4-shelf-slot
43STA1P-shelf-slot
43STX4-shelf-slot
43STX4P-shelf-slot
4DPA2-shelf-slot
4DPA4-shelf-slot
ALPHG-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
AHPLG-shelf-slot
ALPFGT-shelf-slot
AM2017B-shelf-slot
AM2125A-shelf-slot
AM2125B-shelf-slot
AM2318A-shelf-slot
AM2325B-shelf-slot
BTC-shelf-slot
CWR-shelf-slot
DCM-shelf-slot
FAN-shelf-slot
FLC-shelf-slot
ITLB-shelf-slot
MESH-shelf-slot
MT0C-shelf-slot
MVAC-shelf-slot
OPS-shelf-slot
OSCT-shelf-slot
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 PF-{1-8}-{19,36} 1-191
Issue 1 June 2011 RA2P-shelf-slot
Alarm and condition details UNKNOWN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

SFD-shelf-slot
SFD44-shelf-1
SFD44B-shelf-1
SVAC-shelf-slot
USRPNL-shelf
WR-shelf-slot
WTOCM-shelf-slot
Description Card unknown
Corrective Action Proceed to “UNKNOWN” (p. 2-332).
UNKNOWNMOD

Severity Level CR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-192 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details UNKNOWNMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description SFP or XFP unknown
Corrective Action Proceed to “UNKNOWNMOD” (p. 2-334).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-193
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details UPM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
UPM

Severity Level CR
Alarm Entity Type 112SCX10 and 112SX10L: 10GbE, FC800
11QPA4: 10GbE, FC800, FC1200
11STAR1: FC1200
11STMM10: 1GbE, FC100, FC200, FC400
43SCX4: 10GbE
4DPA4: 1GbE
Description GFP User Payload Mismatch
Corrective Action Proceed to “UPM” (p. 2-336).
USALS (rr)

Severity Level NR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-194 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details USALS (rr)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4DPA2-shelf-slot-{C1,C2}
4DPA4-shelf-slot- {C1-4}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-195
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details USALS (rr)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarm Entity Type 112SCA1 and 112SA1L: 100GbE and OTU4
112SCX10 and 112SX10L: 10GbE, FC800
and OC192/STM64
43SCX4: 10GbE and OC192/STM64
11QPA4: 10GbE, FC800, FC1200,
OC192/STM64, OTU2
11STAR1: 10GbE, FC1200, OC192/STM64,
OTU2
OC48/STM16, OTU1
11STGE12: 1GbE
43STA1P: OTU3, OC768/STM256
43STX4 and 43STX4P: 10GbE,
OC192/STM64, OTU2
4DPA2: OC48/STM16
4DPA4: 1GbE, FC100, FC200, FC400,
OC3/STM1, OC12/STM4, OC48/STM16,
CBRAR
Description Auto laser off due to upstream condition
Corrective Action Proceed to “USALS” (p. 2-341).
USLOS

AHPHG-shelf-slot-port
ALPHG-shelf-slot-port
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-196 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details USLOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description Upstream Channel Absent
Corrective Action Proceed to “USLOS” (p. 2-343).
USOCHCOLLISION

AHPHG-shelf-slot-port
ALPHG-shelf-slot-port
Description Upstream Channel Collision Input Direction
Corrective Action Proceed to “USOCHCOLLISION” (p. 2-345).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-197
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details VCGLOA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VCGLOA

Severity Level CR
Alarm Entity Type 11STMM10: 1GbE, FC100, FC200, FC400
Description VCG Loss of Alignment
Corrective Action Proceed to “VCGLOA” (p. 2-346).
VCGSSF

Severity Level CR
Alarm Entity Type 11STMM10: 1GbE, FC100, FC200, FC400
Description VCG Server Signal Failure
Corrective Action Proceed to “VCGSSF” (p. 2-348).
VOLTAGEHIGH

Severity Level CR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-198 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details VOLTAGEHIGH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

112SCA1-shelf-slot
112SCX10-shelf-slot
112SX10L-shelf-slot
11DPE12E-shelf-slot
11DPM12-shelf-slot
11STAR1-shelf-slot
11STMM10-shelf-slot
11STGE12-shelf-slot
43SCX4-shelf-slot
43STA1P-shelf-slot
43STX4-shelf-slot
43STX4P-shelf-slot
4DPA2-shelf-slot
4DPA4-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
AHPLG-shelf-slot
ALPHG-shelf-slot
ALPFGT-shelf-slot
AM2017B-shelf-slot
AM2125A-shelf-slot
AM2125B-shelf-slot
AM2325B-shelf-slot
CWR-shelf-slot
FLC-shelf-slot
MESH-shelf-slot
MT0C-shelf-slot
MVAC-shelf-slot
OPS-shelf-slot
OSCT-shelf-slot
RA2P-shelf-slot
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-199
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details VOLTAGEHIGH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

USRPNL-shelf
WR-shelf-slot
WTOCM-shelf-slot
Description High input voltage defect
Corrective Action Proceed to “VOLTAGEHIGH” (p. 2-349).
VOLTAGELOW
Description

Severity Level CR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-200 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details VOLTAGELOW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

112SCA1-shelf-slot
112SCX10-shelf-slot
112SX10L-shelf-slot
11DPE12E-shelf-slot
11DPM12-shelf-slot
11STAR1-shelf-slot
11STMM10-shelf-slot
11STGE12-shelf-slot
43SCX4-shelf-slot
43STA1P-shelf-slot
43STX4-shelf-slot
43STX4P-shelf-slot
4DPA2-shelf-slot
4DPA4-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
AHPLG-shelf-slot
ALPHG-shelf-slot
ALPFGT-shelf-slot
AM2017B-shelf-slot
AM2125A-shelf-slot
AM2125B-shelf-slot
CWR-shelf-slot
FLC-shelf-slot
MESH-shelf-slot
MT0C-shelf-slot
MVAC-shelf-slot
OPS-shelf-slot
OSCT-shelf-slot
RA2P-shelf-slot
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-201
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details VOLTAGELOW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

USRPNL-shelf
WR-shelf-slot
WTOCM-shelf-slot
Description Low input voltage defect
Corrective Action Proceed to “VOLTAGELOW” (p. 2-350).
VTSFDI

Severity Level NA
AID Type 11DPE12-shelf-slot- {L1,L2}-{VTS1-VTS32}
11DPE12E-shelf-slot- {L1,L2}-{VTS1-
VTS100}
VTS
Description VTS Forward Defect Indication
Corrective Action Proceed to “VTSFDI” (p. 2-351).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-202 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details VTSOCI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VTSOCI

Severity Levels MJ
AID Type 11DPE12-shelf-slot- {L1,L2}-{VTS1-VTS32}
11DPE12E-shelf-slot- {L1,L2}-{VTS1-
VTS100}
VTS
Description VTS Open Connection Indication
Corrective Action Proceed to “VTSOCI” (p. 2-352).
WKSWBK

4DPA4-1-{7, 8}-C{1- 4}
OPS-shelf-slot-{A, B}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-203
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details WKSWBK
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

11QPA4: 10GbE, FC800, FC1200,
OC192/STM64
OC48/STM16, OTU1
11STGE12: 1GbE
OPS: OCH
Description Automatic switch to working
Corrective Action Proceed to “WKSWBK” (p. 2-353).
WKSWPR

4DPA4-1-{7, 8}-C{1- 4}
OPS-shelf-slot-{A, B}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-204 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details WKSWPR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

11QPA4: 10GbE, FC800, FC1200,
OC192/STM64
OC48/STM16, OTU1
11STGE12: 1GbE
OPS: OCH
Description Automatic switch to protection
Corrective Action Proceed to “WKSWPR” (p. 2-356).
WTR

Description Automatic Set on a timing reference and
defects have cleared and the Wait to Restore
timer is in effect
Corrective Action Proceed to “WTR” (p. 2-357).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-205
Issue 1 June 2011
Alarm and condition details WTR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-206 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
2 2rouble-clearing
T
procedures
Overview
Purpose
This chapter contains the trouble-clearing procedures required to clear the conditions for
the 1830 Photonic Service Switch 32/16/4.
Contents
Safety statements 2-18

Structure of safety statements 2-18
Safety precautions 2-19
AISL 2-20
AIS Line/MS 2-20
Client Port AISL 2-21
AIS - ODU 2-23
AIS - OTU 2-24
ALLCHANMISS 2-24
ALLCHANMISS (C-Band Loss of signal); ALLCHANMISS-OUT 2-24
ALLCHANMISS (C-Band Loss of signal) 2-26
ALLCHANMISS-OUT 2-26
ALLCHANMISS-OUT (C-Band Loss of signal) 2-26
AMPDISABLED 2-29
AMPDISABLED (Amplifier Disabled) 2-29
APRLINE 2-30
APRLINE (APR Active - Line) 2-30
APRNODE 2-32
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-1
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APRNODE (APR Active - Node) 2-32

APROSC 2-32
APROSC (APR Limited - OSC SFP failure condition) 2-32
APRSWITCH 2-33
APRSWITCH (APR Active – Port Switch) 2-33
APRTOPO 2-34
APRTOPO (APR Active - Invalid Topology) 2-34
APRUNAVAIL 2-34
APRUNAVAIL (APR unavailable - monitoring card booting) 2-34
APRUNAVAILOSC 2-36
APRUNAVAILOSC (APR Limited - OSC SFP failure) 2-36
APSB 2-36
APSB (APS protection switching byte failure) 2-36
APSCM 2-38
APSCM (APS Channel Mismatch) 2-38
APSMM 2-41
APSMM (APS Mode Mismatch) 2-41
AUTHFAIL 2-43
AUTHFAIL (Authentication Failure) 2-43
AUTORESET 2-44
AUTORESET (Card Autonomous Reset) 2-44
AUTOSWTIMREF 2-45
AUTOSWTIMREF (Automatic Switch Timing Reference) 2-45
B1SD 2-45
B1SD (B1 Signal Degrade) 2-45
BASELINE 2-46
BASELINE 2-46
BDI 2-47
Backward Defect Indication (BDI) - OTU 2-47
BDIEGR 2-48
BDIEGR (Egress Backward Defect Indication - ODU) 2-48
BDIODU 2-49
Backward Defect Indication (BDI) - ODU 2-49
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-2 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CARDINIT 2-50
CARDINIT (Card Initializing) 2-50
CONFIGFAIL 2-51
CONFIGFAIL (Line Card Configuration Failed) 2-51
CONTCOM 2-52
CONTCOM (Card Failure - Communication) 2-52
CONTCOM (Inter-shelf loss of communication) 2-53
CONTEQPT 2-54
CONTEQPT (Card Failure - Device) 2-54
CONTR 2-55
CONTR (Port degrade - wavelength tracker failure) 2-55
CONTR-OUT 2-56
CONTR-OUT (Port degrade - wavelength tracker detection failure) 2-57
CRDINIT 2-58
CRDINIT (Card Identification Event) 2-58
DATAERR 2-59
DATAERR (Data Error or Timeout) 2-59
DATAFLT 2-60
DATAFLT (Card Provisioning Failure) 2-60
DBBKUP-IP 2-62
DBBKUP-IP (Database Backup In-Progress) 2-62
DBFL 2-63
DBFL (DB Failure Local - copy creation of processing failure) 2-63
DBFT 2-63
DBFT (DB Failure Transport - file transport failure) 2-63
DBINVALID 2-64
DBINVALID (Database invalid) 2-64
DBMEMTRF 2-65
DBMEMTRF (Database synchronization failure) 2-65
DBRSTR-IP 2-67
DBRSTR-IP (Database Restore In Progress) 2-67
DBUNSYNC 2-68
DBUNSYNC (The active and standby Main EC databases are not synchronized) 2-68
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-3
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DEGOTU 2-68
DEGOTU (Signal Degrade - OTU) 2-68
DISCOVERMOD 2-69
DISCOVERMOD (Pluggable Module Discovered) 2-69
DORMANTUSER 2-71
DORMANTUSER (User inactive) 2-71
ETHCSF 2-71
ETHCSF (Ethernet Client Signal Failure) 2-71
EQPT 2-72
EQPT (Card Failure - Device) 2-72
EQPT (Card Failure - Device) 2-73
EQPTBOOT 2-74
EQPTBOOT (Card failure - boot failure) 2-74
EQPTDGR 2-75
EQPTDGR (Card Degrade - device) 2-75
EQPTDGR (Port Degrade - Wavelength Tracker Communication Failure) 2-77
EQPTDGROCH 2-78
EQPTDGROCH (Port Degrade - Wavelength Tracker Communication Failure) 2-78
EQPTDGR-OUT 2-79
EQPTDGR-OUT (Port Degrade - Wavelength Tracker Communication Failure) 2-80
EQPTDGROCH-OUT 2-81
EQPTDGROCH-OUT (Port Degrade - Wavelength Tracker Communication 2-81
Failure)
EQPTPORT 2-82
EQPTPORT (Port Failure - Device): 2-83
EBER 2-84
EBER (Excessive BER) 2-84
EBER-O (Optical Supervision Channel Excessive BER) 2-86
ENV 2-88
ENV (Environmental Input [1-8] active) 2-88
EXCESSLOAD 2-88
EXCESSLOAD (Excessive Current Load) 2-88
FACTERM-DEV 2-89
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-4 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FACTERM-DEV (Pluggable Module SEEP Failure) 2-89

FANSPEEDHIGH 2-90
FANSPEEDHIGH (Fan Speed is too high) 2-90
FANSPEEDLOW 2-91
FANSPEEDLOW (Fan speed is too low) 2-91
FANSPEEDMAN 2-92
FANSPEEDMAN (Fan speed manually set to maximum) 2-92
FECECSD 2-93
FECECSD (Pre-FEC Signal Degrade) 2-93
FECUBCSD 2-93
FECUBCSD (Post-FEC Signal Degrade) 2-93
FELANLFI 2-94
FELANLFI (Far End Local Fault) 2-94
FELANLOS 2-95
FELANLOS (Far End Loss of Signal) 2-95
FELANLSS 2-96
FELANLSS (Far End Loss of Synchronization) 2-96
FELANRFI 2-97
FELANRFI (Far End Remote Fault) 2-97
FELOS 2-97
FELOS (Far End Loss of Synchronization) 2-97
FEPORTMISMATCH 2-98
FEPORTMISMATCH (Far End Port Mapping Mismatch) 2-98
FEPRLF 2-99
FEPRLF (Far End Protection Line Failure) 2-99
FPGAFAIL 2-100
FPGAFAIL (FPGA Download or Programming Failure) 2-100
FPGAINIT 2-101
FPGAINIT (FPGA Initializing) 2-101
FPGATIMEOUT 2-102
FPGATIMEOUT (FPGA Timeout) 2-102
FRCDSWTIMREF 2-102
FRCDSWTIMREF (Forced Switch Timing Reference) 2-102
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-5
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FRCDWKSWBK 2-103
FRCDWKSWBK (Forced switch to working) 2-103
FRCDWKSWPR 2-104
FRCDWKSWPR (Forced switch to protection) 2-104
FRNGSYNC 2-105
FRNGSYNC (System clock is in free running synchronization mode) 2-105
FWPENDINGOBSOLETE 2-105
FWPENDINGOBSOLETE (Firmware on this pack is about to become obsolete 2-105
with the software release upgrade)
FWUPGRADEPENDING 2-106
FWUPGRADEPENDING (Firmware upgrade pending) 2-106
FWVERSIONNOTDEFAULT 2-108
FWVERSIONNOTDEFAULT (Firmware version on this pack is not the default 2-108
version for this software release)
HIBER 2-109
HIBER (High BER) 2-109
HIGAIN 2-110
HIGAIN (Amplifier Out of Operational Range: Gain too High) 2-110
HLDOVRSYNC 2-112
HLDOVRSYNC (System timing is in autonomous holdover synchronization 2-112
mode)
HWNOTSUPPORTED 2-112
HWNOTSUPPORTED (Hardware not supported for current configuration) 2-112
INSERTMOD 2-113
INSERTMOD (Pluggable Module Inserted) 2-113
INTTEMPHIGH 2-114
INTTEMP (Card over temperature) 2-114
INTTEMPLOW 2-114
INTTEMPLOW (Card under temperature) 2-114
INTTEMPOPT 2-115
INTTEMP (Optics over temperature) 2-115
INTRUSION 2-116
INTRUSION 2-116
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-6 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
INTRUSIONEVT (Excessive Invalid Login Attempts) 2-117

INVALIDEGRESS 2-117
INVALIDEGRESS (Invalid or no egress port defined) 2-118
INVENTORYERROR 2-119
INVENTORYERROR (Card Inventory Error) 2-119
LANLFI 2-120
LANLFI (Local Fault) 2-120
LANLOS 2-121
LANLOS (LAN port LOS) 2-121
LANLSS 2-122
LANLSS (Loss of Synchronization) 2-122
LANRFI 2-123
LANRFI (Remote Fault Indication) 2-124
LASEREOL 2-125
LASEREOL (Laser end of life) 2-125
LCK 2-126
LCK (Locked - OTU) 2-126
LCKEGR 2-127
LCKEGR (Egress Locked - ODU) 2-127
LFD 2-127
LFD (GFP Loss of Frame Delineation) 2-128
LFIEGR 2-129
LFIEGR (Remote Client Local Fault) 2-129
LINKDOWN 2-129
LINKDOWN (Link down) 2-129
LINKUP 2-131
LINKUP (Link Up) 2-131
LOAM 2-132
LOAM (Loss of Alignment Marker Lock) 2-132
LOC 2-132
LOC (Loss of Continuity) 2-132
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-7
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOCKOUTOFPR 2-133
LOCKOUTOFPR (Lockout of protection) 2-133
LOCKOUTOFTIMREF 2-134
2-135
LOF 2-135
LOF (Loss Of Frame) 2-135
Transponder Client Port Loss of Frame 2-137
Transponder Network Port Loss of Frame 2-139
LOF-O (Incoming SUPVY LOF) 2-142
LOFEGR 2-144
LOFEGR (Loss of Frame Egress) 2-144
LOGAIN 2-145
LOGAIN (Amplifier out of operational range - amplifier gain too low) 2-145
LOM 2-146
LOM (Loss of Multiframe - OTU) 2-146
LOS 2-148
LOS (Loss of Signal) 2-148
LOS (Channel Absent) 2-150
LD Input LOS 2-153
CWR Input LOS 2-155
LOS (Loss of signal) 2-157
Input LOS 2-160
OMD Input LOS 2-161
LOSDCM 2-162
LOSDCM (From DCM Input LOS) 2-162
LOSLDSIG 2-164
LOSLDSIG (LD SIG Input LOS) 2-164
LOSOCM 2-166
LOSOCM (WTOCM Input LOS) 2-166
LOS-O 2-167
LOS-O (Incoming SUPVY LOS) 2-167
LOS-OUT 2-169
LOS-OUT (Outgoing Loss of Signal) and (Outgoing Channel Absent) 2-169
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-8 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOS-P 2-172
LOS-P (Incoming Payload LOS) 2-172
LPBKLINE 2-173
LPBKLINE (Line [Facility] Loopback Active) 2-173
LPBKTERM 2-174
LPBKTERM (Diagnostic (Terminal) loopback active) 2-174
LSPOW_ALM_W 2-175
LSPOW_ALM_W (Laser Back-Facet Optical Power Cross Threshold) 2-175
LSTEMP_ALM_W 2-176
LSTEMP_ALM_W (Laser Cooling Current Cross Threshold) 2-176
LSSEGR 2-177
LSSEGR (Remote Client Loss of Synchronization) 2-177
MAN 2-177
MAN (Manually caused abnormal condition - card in maintenance) / MAN 2-177
(Manually caused abnormal condition - Port in maintenance) / MAN (Logical
removal performed on a timing reference)
MAN (Manually caused abnormal condition - card in maintenance) 2-179
MAN (Manually caused abnormal condition - port in maintenance) 2-180
MAN (Logical removal performed on a timing reference) 2-180
MANRESET 2-181
MANRESET (Card Manual Reset) 2-181
MANSWTIMREF 2-182
MANSWTIMREF (Timing selection was switched by a manual command to a 2-182
timing reference)
MANSWTOINT 2-182
MANSWTOINT (Manual Switch to Internal Timing ) 2-182
MANWKSWBK 2-183
MANWKSWBK (Manual switch to working) 2-183
MANWKSWPR 2-184
MANWKSWPR (Manual switch to protection) 2-184
MISMATCH 2-185
MISMATCH (Card Mismatch); MISMATCH (Power Filter Mismatch); 2-185
MISMATCH (Shelf Mismatch),
MISMATCH (Card Mismatch) 2-186
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-9
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MISMATCH (Power Filter Mismatch) 2-189

MISMATCH (Shelf Mismatch) 2-191
MISMATCHMOD 2-192
MISMATCH (Pluggable Module Mismatch) 2-192
MIXEDPFUSED 2-193
MIXEDPFUSED (Mixed types of power filters used) 2-193
MMG 2-194
MMG (Mismerge) 2-194
MOD 2-195
MOD (Card degrade - Wavelength Tracker Channel ID Insertion) 2-195
MODOUTOOR 2-197
MODOUTOOR (Modulator output power out of range) 2-197
MSIM 2-198
MSIM (Multiplex Structure Indication Mismatch) 2-198
MTCESURV 2-199
MTCESURV (Add power control failure) 2-199
MTCESURVDGR 2-200
MTCESURVDGR (Port degrade - wavelength tracker encode degrade) 2-200
NET 2-202
NET (Link Down; Data Link Down) 2-202
NOTALLOWED 2-205
NOTALLOWED (Card not allowed) 2-205
NTPOOSYNC 2-205
NTPOOSYNC (Network Time Protocol is enabled, but no NTP server is 2-205
reachable)
OAPUMPBIASCURRHIGH 2-207
OAPUMPBIASCURRHIGH (OA pump laser bias current high) 2-207
OAPUMPTEMPHIGH 2-208
OAPUMPTEMPHIGH (OA pump laser temperature high) 2-208
OCHCOLLISION 2-208
OCHCOLLISION (Channel collision) 2-208
OCHCOLLISION-OUT 2-211
OCHCOLLISION-OUT (Channel collision Output Direction) 2-211
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-10 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCHFDI 2-213
OCHFDI (Optical Channel Forward Defect Indication) 2-213
OCHPDI 2-215
OCHPDI (Channel Payload Defect Indicator) 2-215
OCHKEYDUP 2-217
OCHKEYDUP (Duplicate Wave Key) 2-217
OCHKEYOVERLAP 2-218
OCHKEYOVERLAP (Wave Key overlap) 2-218
OCHTRAILDUP 2-219
OCHTRAILDUP (Duplicate OCH Trail name) 2-219
OCHTRAILDUP (Duplicate OCh trail name) 2-221
OCHTRAILUNKNOWN 2-221
OCHTRAILUNKNOWN (Unknown OCH Trail for x-connect) 2-221
OCHUNKNOWN 2-223
OCHUNKNOWN (Channel Unexpected) 2-223
OCHUNKNOWN-OUT 2-225
OCHUNKNOWN-OUT (Channel Unexpected) 2-225
OCI 2-226
OCI (Open Connection Indication - ODU) 2-226
OCIEGR 2-227
OCIEGR (Egress Open Connection Indication - ODU) 2-227
OPR 2-228
OPR (Channel Optical Power Out of Range) 2-228
OPRLOSSHIGH 2-230
OPRLOSSHIGH (Out of Operational Range – Loss Too High between DCM 2-230
Ports of LD)
OPRLOSSLOW 2-231
OPRLOSSLOW (Out of Operational Range - Loss Too Low) 2-231
OPRPWRHIGH 2-233
OPRPWRHIGH (Out of Operational Range - Input Power Too High) 2-233
OPRPWRLOW 2-235
OPRPWRLOW (Out of Operational Range - Input Power Too Low) 2-235
OPROOR 2-236
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-11
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OPROOR (Optical power received out of range) 2-237

OPR-OUT 2-238
OPR-OUT (Outgoing Channel Optical Power Out of Range) 2-238
OPRTX 2-239
OPRTX (Channel Power Unstable) 2-239
OPRUNACHIEVE 2-241
OPRUNACHIEVE (Channel Power Unachievable) 2-241
OPTINTBASE 2-244
OPTINTBASE (Optical Intrusion Baseline Needed) 2-244
OPTINTDET 2-245
OPTINTDET (Optical Intrusion — Detected) 2-245
OPTINTSUSP 2-245
OPTINTSUSP (Optical Intrusion – Monitoring Suspended) 2-245
OSCSSF 2-247
OSCSSF (Server Signal Failure - OSC) 2-247
PCSGENERATOR 2-248
PCSGENERATOR (PCS Generator active) 2-248
PLM 2-248
PLM (Payload Mismatch Indication - ODU) 2-248
PLMEGR 2-249
PLMEGR (Egress Payload Mismatch Indication - ODU) 2-249
PRCDRERR 2-250
PRCDRERR 2-250
PRCDRERR (Subtended shelf cannot be assigned a shelf id) 2-251
PRCDRERR-TOPO (Invalid topology) 2-252
PRCDRERR-TOPO (Power management topology invalid) 2-253
PWR 2-254
PWR 2-254
PWR (Power Filter 1 breaker off or voltage low) PWR (Power Filter 2 breaker 2-255
off or voltage low)
PWRADJCOMMS 2-256
PWRADJFAIL (Inter NE communication timeout blocking power adjustment) 2-256
PWRADJFAIL 2-257
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-12 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PWRADJFAIL (Power Adjustment Failure); PWRADJFAIL (No through 2-257

services in appropriate state for adjustment)
PWRADJFAIL (Power Adjustment Failure) 2-259
PWRADJFAIL (No through services in appropriate state for adjustment) 2-263
PWRADJREQ 2-265
PWRADJREQ (Power Adjust Required) 2-265
PWRMARGIN 2-266
PWRMARGIN (Power Adjust Loss Margin Exceeded) 2-266
PWRMAXGAIN 2-267
PWRMAXGAIN (Gain Adjustment Exceeded Max Value) 2-267
PWRSUSP 2-270
PWRSUSP- OT or SVAC - (Power management suspended); PWRSUSP- 2-270
CWR8 (Power management suspended)
PWRSUSP - OT or SVAC (Power management suspended) 2-272
PWRSUSP-CWR8 (Power management suspended) 2-274
PWRTILTSUSP 2-276
PWRTILTSUSP (Amplifier gain tilt adjustments suspended) 2-276
RAMANSUP 2-276
RAMANSUP (Raman Suppress - Line) 2-276
RCVROPTPROG 2-278
RCVROPTPROG (Receiver Optimization in Progress) 2-278
RDI 2-279
RDI (Remote Defect Indication) 2-279
REMOVEMOD 2-280
REMOVEMOD (Pluggable Module Removed) 2-280
REPLUNITMISS 2-281
REPLUNTMISS (Card Missing) 2-281
REPLUNITMISSMOD 2-283
REPLUNTMISS (Pluggable Module Missing) 2-283
RFIEGR 2-284
RFIEGR (Remote Client Remote Fault) 2-284
RFIL 2-285
RFIL (Remote Fault Indication) 2-285
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-13
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SDBER 2-286
SDBER (Signal Degrade) 2-287
SDBER (RS) (RS Signal Degrade) 2-288
SDEG-O 2-288
SDEG-O (SUPVY Signal Degrade) 2-288
SDEGR 2-291
SDEGR (Egress Signal Degrade - ODU) 2-291
SFMISMATCH 2-292
SFMISMATCH (Software Version Mismatch) 2-292
SLTMSIG 2-293
SLTMSIG (Timing reference frequency has moved off the required accuracy 2-293
limits (not Protected or Protection not Available))
SSF 2-294
SSF (Server Signal Failure - OTU) 2-294
SSFODU 2-295
SSFODU (Server Signal Failure - ODU) 2-295
SSFODUEGR 2-297
SSFODUEGR (Egress Signal Server Failure - ODU) 2-297
SWEQPT 2-299
SWEQPT (Equipment Controller redundancy is compromised); SWEQPT 2-299
(Protection switching equipment failure)
SWEQPT (Equipment Controller redundancy is compromised) 2-300
SWEQPT (Protection Switching Equipment Failure) 2-304
SWFTDWN 2-305
SWFTDWN (Software Upgrade in Progress) 2-305
Committing the Software Upgrade 2-306
Backing out the Software Upgrade 2-307
SWMTXMOD 2-307
SWMTXMOD 2-307
SWMTXMOD (Switching Matrix Module Failure) 2-308
SWMTXMOD (Y-Cable Switchover Timer Expired) 2-310
SWUPGCOMMIT 2-310
SWUPGCOMMIT (No committed software load (Autoinstall disabled)) 2-310
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-14 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SWUPGFAIL 2-311
SWUPGFAIL (Software Upgrade Failed) 2-311
SYNCOOS 2-316
SYNCOOS (Timing reference failed (Not Protected or Protection not 2-316
Available)) / SYNCOOS (Timing reference failed--system going into holdover)
SYNCOOS (Timing reference failed (Not Protected or Protection not 2-317
Available))
SYNCOOS (Timing reference failed--system going into holdover) 2-318
SYNREFFAIL 2-318
SYNREFFAIL (Timing reference failed, (not Protected or Protection not 2-318
Available))
SYNREFUNEQ 2-319
SYNREFUNEQ (Timing reference unassigned) 2-319
SYSBOOT 2-319
SYSBOOT (Cold Start); SYSBOOT (Warm Start) 2-319
TIM 2-321
TIM (Trace Identifier Mismatch) 2-321
TIM (Client Ports) 2-322
Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch (Network Ports) 2-324
TIMEGR 2-325
TIMEGR (Egress Trail Identifier Mismatch - ODU) 2-325
TIMODU 2-327
TIMODU (Trace Identifier Mismatch - ODU) 2-327
TRMT 2-328
TRMT (Port Transmit Failure) 2-328
TRMTMOD 2-330
TRMTMOD (Pluggable Module Transmit Failure) 2-330
UNG/UNP 2-331
UNG/UNP 2-331
UNKNOWN 2-332
UNKNOWN (Card Unknown) 2-332
UNKNOWNMOD 2-334
UNKNOWNMOD (Pluggable Module Unknown) 2-334
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-15
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
UPM 2-336
UPM (GFP User Payload Mismatch) 2-336
URU 2-337
URU (Underlying Resource Unavailable) 2-337
URU-OCH-LOS (Underlying resource unavailable - OTS) 2-338
URU-OTS-LOS (Underlying resource unavailable - OTS [Loss of Signal]) 2-338
URU-OTS-RX (Underlying resource unavailable - OTS [Receive]) 2-338
URU-OTS-TX (Underlying resource unavailable - OTS [Transmit]) 2-339
URU-OTU (Underlying resource unavailable - OTU) 2-339
URU-S (Underlying Resource Unavailable - Card Failure) 2-339
USALS 2-341
USALS (Auto Laser Shutoff Due to Upstream Fault) 2-341
USLOS 2-343
USLOS (Upstream Channel Absent) 2-343
USOCHCOLLISION 2-345
USOCHCOLLISION (Upstream Channel Collision Input Direction) 2-345
VCGLOA 2-346
VCGLOA (Loss of alignment) 2-346
VCGSSF 2-348
VCGSSF (VCG Server Signal Failure) 2-348
VOLTAGEHIGH 2-349
VOLTAGEHIGH [High input voltage defect] 2-349
VOLTAGELOW 2-350
VOLTAGELOW [Low input voltage defect] 2-350
VTSFDI 2-351
VTSFDI (VTS Forward Defect Indication) 2-352
VTSOCI 2-352
VTSOCI (VTS Open Connection Indication) 2-352
WKSWBK 2-353
WKSWBK (Automatic switch to working) 2-353
WKSWPR 2-356
WKSWPR (Automatic switch to protection) 2-356
WTR 2-357
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-16 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WTR (Wait to restore timer in effect) 2-357
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-17
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures Structure of safety statements
Safety statements
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Safety statements
Structure of safety statements

Overview
This topic describes the components of safety statements that appear in this document.
General structure
Safety statements include the following structural elements:
B C D
CAUTION
MP L E
Lifting hazard E F
SA
Lifting this equipment by yourself can result in injury
due to the size and weight of the equipment.
G
Always use three people or a lifting device to transport
and position this equipment. [ABC123]
H
Item Structure element Purpose
1 Safety alert symbol Indicates the potential for personal injury
(optional)
2 Safety symbol Indicates hazard type (optional)
3 Signal word Indicates the severity of the hazard
4 Hazard type Describes the source of the risk of damage or
injury
5 Safety message Consequences if protective measures fail
6 Avoidance message Protective measures to take to avoid the hazard
7 Identifier The reference ID of the safety statement
(optional)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-18 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures Structure of safety statements
Safety statements
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Signal words
The signal words identify the hazard severity levels as follows:
Signal word Meaning

DANGER Indicates an extremely hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will
result in death or serious injury.
WARNING Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in
death or serious injury.
CAUTION Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in
minor or moderate injury.
NOTICE Indicates a hazardous situation not related to personal injury.
Safety precautions
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
Disconnecting cables and/or replacing circuit packs may disrupt service.
Before taking action, determine the extent of service disruption caused by disconnecting
cables or replacing a circuit pack. Then, perform the action(s) deemed appropriate in
light of the traffic being carried and the nature of the failure.
Many trouble-clearing procedures require actions that are service affecting. These actions
are indicated by a caution message indicating the extent of the service disruption as
shown above.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-19
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures AIS Line/MS
AISL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
AISL
AIS Line/MS
The card is receiving AISL from the equipment connected to the client receive port. This
condition on a network port occurs when some upstream line terminating equipment is
exhibiting a failure that sends an AISL signal to the downstream line terminating entity.
This is a non-reportable condition and the user must manually retrieve the condition from
the NE or card to view it. This alarm applies to transparent services.
Severity Not reported

Service affecting? No
Applicability 112SCX10, 112SX10L, 11STMM10, 43SCX4
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-20 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures Client Port AISL
AISL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Client Port AISL

Corrective Action
NOTICE
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure “Reseating a Card” (p. 3-19).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If it does not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Display the details of the condition by entering the following command:
CLI show condition

WEBUI Reports > Condition List
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check the equipment that is connected to the client port where the AISL condition is
being raised. Refer to the manufacturer's user manuals to determine if the equipment is
generating the AISL condition and resolve the condition. If the external equipment is not
transmitting the AISL condition then the problem is with the card where the AISL
condition is raised.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Perform a warm reset of the card on the local card where the AISL condition is raised.
CLI config card card type shelf slot reset warm

WEBUI Select the card, click the Reboot tab, select Warm Reboot >Submit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Perform a cold reset of the card.

Note: Refer to Caution at the beginning of this procedure.
CLI config card card_type shelf slot reset cold
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-21
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures Client Port AISL
AISL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WEBUI Select the card, click the Reboot tab, select Cold Reboot >Submit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Reseat the card. Refer to “Reseating a Card” (p. 3-19).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Replace the card. Refer to “Replacing System Components” (p. 3-20). Follow the return
and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to
an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-22 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures AIS - ODU
AISL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
AIS - ODU
The AIS – ODU condition indicates that the OT port has detected an ODU-AIS at the
ODUk level.
This condition may be caused by the following reasons:
• The far-end OT port has a LOS/LOF failure
• OTS/OMS layer failure on the OCh trail
• The local OT port receives a signal with ODU-AIS pattern

Applicability 11QPA4, 43STX4P
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform the procedure, “SSFODU” (p. 2-295).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-23
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures AIS - OTU
AISL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
AIS - OTU
The AIS – OTU condition indicates that the OT port has detected an OTU-AIS at the
ODUk level.
This condition may be caused by the following reasons:
• The input signal has OTU-AIS pattern
• The input signal is severely degraded
• The local OT port receives a signal with ODU-AIS pattern
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability 11QPA4, 43STX4P
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check if the connected equipment is provisioned to send OTU-AIS pattern. Provision the
connected equipment to send a normal OTU signal.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If the client equipment does not send OTU-AIS, perform the corrective actions in the
procedure “LOF (Loss Of Frame)” (p. 2-135).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
ALLCHANMISS
ALLCHANMISS (C-Band Loss of signal); ALLCHANMISS-OUT

The All channels missing defect (ALLCHANMISS and ALLCHANMISS-OUT) is
monitored at the OTS layer. ALLCHANMISS is raised when all cross connected optical
channels are reported missing by WaveTracker. This defect applies to all line driver (LD)
packs. It also applies to both ingress and egress amps.
At the ingress amp it is at {LD}-<shelf>-<slot>-LineIn. At the egress amp it is at
{LD}-<shelf>-<slot>-SigIn.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-24 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures ALLCHANMISS (C-Band Loss of signal); ALLCHANMISS-OUT
ALLCHANMISS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This defect is relative to those channels that have been provisioned and now, for whatever
reason, are no longer being detected. In order to look at the probable cause, by way of the
WEBUI or the PhM, retrieve all cross-connects and then look at the AZ , ZA or both
directions light path. If in CLI, enter sh xc * and then check the power levels for the
appropriate channels.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-25
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures ALLCHANMISS (C-Band Loss of signal)
ALLCHANMISS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ALLCHANMISS (C-Band Loss of signal)

No C-band channels are detected at the LD Line or Sig port, but the NE has at least one
service successfully launched and the LD link has been successfully received.
ALLCHANMISS is reported if no C-Band channels are detected coming into (received
by) the amplifier Line or Sig port.
Severity Critical
Applicability A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, ALPFGT, AM2017B,
AM2325B, OSCT
Corrective Action
This alarm is the result of a problem at an upstream NE or upstream span.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform the procedure “Path Power Trace” (p. 3-8) to identify the probable network
trouble point for the lightpath and resolve issues/alarms at the trouble point. This may
involve performing the steps in “ALLCHANMISS-OUT” (p. 2-26) at the NE containing
the trouble point(s).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If the problem persists, attempt an egress adjust on the egress amplifier on the NE
identified in Step 1.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 The gain range provisioned by the EPT for this amplifier is insufficient to accommodate
the unexpected change in loss in the network. Refer the problem to network planning.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
ALLCHANMISS-OUT
ALLCHANMISS-OUT (C-Band Loss of signal)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-26 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures ALLCHANMISS-OUT (C-Band Loss of signal)
ALLCHANMISS-OUT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
No C-Band channels are detected leaving from (transmitted by) the amplifier SIG port,
but the NE has at least one service successfully launched and the amplifier link has been
successfully received.
Severity Critical
AM2325B, OSCT
Corrective Action
NOTICE
This alarm is the result of a problem internal to this NE.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
trouble point for the lightpath. This will identify the cards and ports on this NE to look at
first during this procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Identify the cards that are in the NE through path and confirm that all ports and cards on
the through path are administratively up
1. To examine the card state, enter the following command. Observe the admin state and
operational state of each of the cards along the THRU path:
CLI show slot *
2. Set any of the cards that are administratively down to up. To bring a card Admin Up:
CLI config slot shelf slot state up
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-27
Issue 1 June 2011
ALLCHANMISS-OUT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3. To examine the port state, enter the following command. Observe the administrative
state and operational state of each of the ports along the THRU path:
CLI show interface brief

WEBUI From the Equipment Tree, select the card, and select the desired port.
4. Set any of the ports that are administratively down to up. To bring a port Admin Up:
CLI config interface <shelf slot port> state up
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Examine the status of the cross-connects that pass through the port
1. List the cross-connects:
CLI show xc brief

WEBUI Select Connections > Cross-Connects.
2. Confirm that all cross-connects are administratively up. To bring a cross-connect

Admin Up:
CLI config xc a-end shelf slot port z-end shelf slot port
band channelstate up
3. Check for any channel alarms and resolve.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Verify that the cards and ports upstream of the LD's DCM or Line In port (that is, within
the NE for Egress amp, line port faces external to the NE for Ingress amp) are alarm free.
Resolve any alarms on cards/ports that are upstream of the LD pack, using the
information gathered in Step 1.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Verify that there is a fiber properly plugged into the LD's DCM or Line In port, that the
fiber is the correct type, and that the other end of the fiber is connected properly.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Verify that the input power to the alarmed port is within limits:
CLI show interface card <shelf slot port>

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-28 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
ALLCHANMISS-OUT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the power is too low, verify that the fiber is not damaged or dirty, and clean or replace if
necessary.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 If the problem is not resolved, then replace the card. Refer to “Replacing System
Components” (p. 3-20).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
AMPDISABLED
AMPDISABLED (Amplifier Disabled)

The amplifier was disabled because of a temperature problem.
Severity Critical
AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2325A, OSCT
Corrective Action
NOTICE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-29
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures AMPDISABLED (Amplifier Disabled)
AMPDISABLED
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Determine if there are any temperature alarms on the shelf. If so, check the airflow of the
shelf, filler card presence, and ambient air temperature. Resolve any air flow obstructions
or air-conditioner issues.
CLI alm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform a warm reset of the card.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
APRLINE
APRLINE (APR Active - Line)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-30 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures APRLINE (APR Active - Line)
APRLINE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The automatic power reduction mode has been invoked on the optical line. The APRLINE
condition is reported against the egress amplifier when a LOS is detected on the ingress
amplifier, or as a result of OSC failure, when the span is equipped with an RA2P. The
APRLINE condition is raised against the output port of the egress amplifier. If the egress
is a unidirectional amplifier (AM2125A, AM2125B), the condition is raised against the
Line port. If the egress is a bidirectional amplifier, the condition is raised against the Sig
port.
Severity Major
Applicability ALPHG, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPFGT, AM2017B, AM2125A,
AM2125B, AM2325B, RA2P
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Determine the ingress amplifier that is connected to the egress amplifier reporting the
APR condition.
CLI show interface topology

WEBUI Select Connections > Physical Topology.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Confirm the LOS condition on the ingress amplifier.
CLI alm
TL1 RTRV-ALM-OTS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Check that the OSCs at both ends of the span are set to OC3.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Proceed to “LOS” (p. 2-148) to clear the LOS condition.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 The APRLINE condition will automatically clear up to 100 seconds after the ingress LOS
condition has been cleared.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-31
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures APRNODE (APR Active - Node)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APRNODE
APRNODE (APR Active - Node)

When an LD is used that contains a high-power optical amplifier (>20 dBm), if there is an
LOS condition within the node that could carry high power from the LD, then the output
power from the LD is reduced to a safe level. The condition will automatically clear up to
100 seconds after the LOS condition within the node has cleared. APRNODE can also
occur briefly after some other APR conditions clear.
After a condition that leads to the complete shutdown has cleared, the amplifier will
return to eye-safe level (≤ 10 dBm), then will go back up to the greater that 10 dBm level
before the failure. The software will check whether all monitored connections are
receiving power. APRNODE will be active during this time. Once the checks have been
completed, APRNODE will clear automatically.
Severity Major
Applicability A2325A, AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2325B
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Proceed to “LOS” (p. 2-148) to clear the LOS condition.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
APROSC
APROSC (APR Limited - OSC SFP failure condition)

The APROSC condition occurs when the SFP on the line-terminating LD is removed, or
if the SFP fails. An LD with a high-power optical amplifier (> 20 dBm) is either at an ILA
or at the egress position at an add/drop node, and launches into a span that has either (1)
OSC disabled or (2) OSC provisioned to 100base-FX.
Severity Major
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-32 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures APROSC (APR Limited - OSC SFP failure condition)
APROSC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Applicability A2325A, AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2325B
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the OSC provisioning at both ends of the span by looking at the connected ingress
LD for the A2325A or AM2325B, and also at the ingress LD at the far end of the span.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Set both OSCs to OC3. The condition will automatically clear within 100 seconds.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
APRSWITCH
APRSWITCH (APR Active – Port Switch)

Some EDFA and Raman amplifier circuit packs that are capable of producing high output
power, exceeding class 1M limits, are equipped with port switches on the high-power
ports. Before a fiber jumper can be disconnected from the high-power port, a cover must
be removed from the faceplate. A switch within the pack detects the cover removal and
shuts off the amplifier within the circuit pack. After the cover is reinstalled on the circuit
pack, the amplifier will restart and the alarm will clear automatically.
Severity Major
Applicability AM2125A, AM2125B, RA2P
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-33
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures APRTOPO (APR Active - Invalid Topology)
APRTOPO
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APRTOPO
APRTOPO (APR Active - Invalid Topology)

When an LD is used that contains a high-power optical amplifier (>20 dBm), certain ports
within the add/drop node or ILA must be monitored for possible fiber breaks. These
monitored ports check for LOS, and upon detecting LOS, cause an APRNODE condition.
Software checks that a valid topology is in place (including all necessary monitoring
ports) before allowing the LD to turn on. When a topology has been provisioned and
validated by software, the alarm will clear and the optical amplifier in the LD will be
allowed to turn on. When a topology is first being entered, the alarm will be present until
all topological connections that must be monitored have been entered. If the optical
amplifier is on, but a monitored topological connection is deleted, the optical amplifier
will shut down. It will remain off until after a new topology is created and validated by
software.
Severity Major
Applicability A2325A, AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2325B, RA2P
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Create a new topology.
CLI config interface topology

WEBUI Select Connections > Physical Topology > Create.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
APRUNAVAIL
APRUNAVAIL (APR unavailable - monitoring card booting)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-34 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures APRUNAVAIL (APR unavailable - monitoring card booting)
APRUNAVAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A card that is monitored for APRLINE or APRNODE undergoes a soft reboot. For
APRLINE, this means the line-terminating LD card, and only applies to ILAs or add/drop
nodes with egress LDs. For APRNODE, this means any card within a node that could
receive high power from an LD equipped with a high-power optical amplifier. The optical
amplifiers will remain turned on during this condition. Transmission is not affected, but
APR is not available until the reboot has been completed.
Severity Major
AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2325B
Corrective Action
The alarm clears automatically after the reboot has been completed. No corrective action
is required.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-35
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures APRUNAVAILOSC (APR Limited - OSC SFP failure)
APRUNAVAILOSC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APRUNAVAILOSC
APRUNAVAILOSC (APR Limited - OSC SFP failure)

The OSC SFP fails or is removed from a line terminating card. When this failure occurs,
APR will not function in all cases for span cuts, and recovery will not be possible. The
optical amplifiers will remain turned on during this condition. The alarm will clear when
the SFP is replaced.
Severity Major
AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2325B
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Replace the affected SFP.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
APSB
APSB (APS protection switching byte failure)

An APS Protection Switching Byte Failure can occur only when the protection group is
configured for bi-directional switching. This condition indicates that the protection
switching bytes received on the protection channel contain an invalid or inconsistent
value.
Severity Not alarmed

Applicability 11STAR1, 11STMM10, 11STGE12
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-36 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures APSB (APS protection switching byte failure)
APSB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Observe the protection information presented in the APSB condition. Note the protection
group information and the cards involved.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Login to the near end NE and perform the procedure “Determining the Far End of a
Service” (p. 3-10) to determine the NE and card that link directly to the (near-end) card
reporting the APSB alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Open a new window and log into the far-end NE identified in Step 2.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Enter the following commands on both the near-end and far-end NEs to confirm that the
protection group is configured as desired.
CLI config aps group <group_id> detail
1. Ensure that the near-end and far-end interfaces are in the same protection group.
2. Check the directionality of the protection group.
3. Validate that the protection group has a valid working and protection path.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Using the data obtained in Step 1 and Step 4, confirm that the working cards are paired up
and that the protection cards are paired up.
1. Confirm that the topology matches the programmed topology.
CLI show interface topology *

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-37
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures APSB (APS protection switching byte failure)
APSB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2. Verify that the optical patch cord to the protect interface at the near end is connected
to the protect interface at the far end. Reconfigure and reconnect the optical patch
cords to the protect members if they are not.
3. Verify that the optical patch cord to the working interface at the near end is connected
to the working interface at the far end. Reconfigure and reconnect the optical patch
cords to the working members if they are not.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Enter the following commands at both the near-end and far-end NEs to confirm that the
card types at the near end and far end are the same.
CLI show slot slot number
Log out of the far end NE if this solves the problem.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 If the problem persists, warm reset both protection cards:
CLI config cardcard_type shelf slot reset warm


E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
APSCM
APSCM (APS Channel Mismatch)

The expected channel has not bridged onto the protection channel at the far end as per the
switch request from the near end.
The APS channel mismatch alarm applies only to protection groups configured to perform
bidirectional switching. This alarm indicates that the far end is not responding to near-end
switch requests as expected. This can occur under any the following situations:
• the protection group is not fully configured at the far end.
• the working and protected fibers are misconnected.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-38 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures APSCM (APS Channel Mismatch)
APSCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• there is a service mismatch.
• the far end is currently performing a software upgrade.

Corrective Action
NOTICE
Replacing and reconnecting optical patch cords may be service affecting. It is
recommended to replace and reconnect optical patch cords during a maintenance
window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Observe the protection information presented in the APSCM condition. Note the
protection group information and the cards involved.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
reporting the APSCM alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Enter the following commands on both the near-end and far-end NEs to confirm that the
protection group is configured as desired.
CLI config aps group <group_id> detail
1. Ensure that the near-end and far-end interfaces are in the same protection group.
2. Check the direction of the protection group.
3. Validate that the protection group has a valid working and protection path.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-39
Issue 1 June 2011
APSCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Using the data obtained in Step 1 and Step 4, confirm that the working cards are paired up
and that the protection cards are paired up.
1. Confirm that the topology matches the programmed topology.

2. Verify that the optical patch cord to the protect interface at the near end is connected
to the protect interface at the far end. Reconfigure and reconnect the optical patch
cords to the protect members if they are not.
3. Verify that the optical patch cord to the working interface at the near end is connected
to the working interface at the far end. Reconfigure and reconnect the optical patch
cords to the working members if they are not.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Enter the following commands at both the near-end and far-end NEs to confirm that the
card types at the near end and far end are the same.
CLI show slot slot number
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Determine whether the card on the far-end NE is currently being upgraded.
CLI show software upgrade status brief

WEBUI Select Administration > Software > Upgrade and view the Status field.
If the card is in the upgrade state then wait for upgrade to complete. The upgrade is
complete when the action progress is 100% and the action status is complete. The near
end alarm should clear after the upgrade is complete.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 If the problem persists, invoke a manual switch onto the currently active line.
1. Determine the currently active line:
CLI config aps group [x] detail
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-40 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
APSCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2. Perform a manual switch to the active line. For example, if the working path is
currently active then the following commands would be used.
CLI config aps group [x] manualSwitchtoworking
If the protection path is currently active then the following commands would be used.
CLI config aps group [x] manualSwitchtoprotection
3. Clear the manual switch:
CLI config aps group [x] clear

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 If the problem persists, perform a warm reset on both protection cards:
CLI config card card_type shelf slot reset warm


E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
APSMM
APSMM (APS Mode Mismatch)

An APS Mode Mismatch failure occurs when there is a mismatch of the protection
switching settings at the two ends of the span. The alarm is raised if one end is configured
for bi-directional switching while the other end is configured for unidirectional switching.
The system behavior in the alarmed state is as follows:
• The NE configured for bi-directional switching raises the APS Mode Mismatch alarm.
• The protection group operates in uni-directional switching mode until the alarm is
cleared.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-41
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures APSMM (APS Mode Mismatch)
APSMM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The NEs must be provisioned to be either both uni-directional switching or both
bi-directional switching in order to remove the alarm.

Applicability 11STAR1, 11STMM10, 11STGE12.
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Determine the port that is reporting the APSMM alarm. This is the port at the end of the
protection group currently configured for bidirectional switching.
CLI alm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Display the protection group for the associated shelf/slot/port that is raising the Mode
Mismatch alarm:
CLI config aps group [x] detail
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Check the network plan to determine the desired directionality for the protection group.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If the desired directionality for the protection group is unidirectional, change the
protection mode at the near end to uni-directional:
CLI config aps group [x] direction uni
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If the desired directionality for the protection group is bi-directional, change the
protection mode at the far end to bi-directional:
1. Determine the NE and card that link directly to the (near-end) card reporting the
APSMM alarm. Perform the procedure “Determining the Far End of a Service”
(p. 3-10).
2. Login to the far-end NE.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-42 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures APSMM (APS Mode Mismatch)
APSMM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3. Display the protection group for the associated shelf/slot/port on the far end NE, as
determined in item1 above. This is the port at the end of the protection group
currently configured for uni-directional switching.
CLI config aps group [y] detail
4. Change the protection mode to bi-directional.
CLI config aps group [y] direction bi
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
AUTHFAIL
AUTHFAIL (Authentication Failure)

The AUTHFAIL autonomous message is issued after an invalid login attempt is detected.
Severity TC
Applicability SYSTEM
No corrective action is required. This is a normal report caused by an invalid login

attempt.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-43
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures AUTORESET (Card Autonomous Reset)
AUTORESET
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
AUTORESET
AUTORESET (Card Autonomous Reset)

The addressed card or slot is performing an autonomous reset.
The AUTORESET condition is issued as a transient condition to inform you that a reset
of a pack has started. There is no corrective action to perform. Any failures on the pack
will be reported after the reset completes.
Severity NA
Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 112SX10L, 11DPM12,
11STAR1, 11STMM10, 11STGE12, 43SCX4, 43STA1P, 43STX4,
43STX4P, 4DPA2, 4DPA4, A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG,
ALPFGT, AM2017B, AM2325A, AM2318A, AM2325B, CWR8,
CWR8-88, EC, FLC, OPS, OSCT, MESH4, MT0C, MVAC,
RA2P, SVAC, WR, WTOCM
Corrective Action
No corrective action is required for AUTORESET. However, if repeated AUTORESET
events are reported against a single card, reseat the card. If the condition persists, replace
the card.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-44 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures AUTOSWTIMREF (Automatic Switch Timing Reference)
AUTOSWTIMREF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
AUTOSWTIMREF
AUTOSWTIMREF (Automatic Switch Timing Reference)

The OT port has detected an AUTOSWTIMREF condition at the LINEREF layer. A
LINEREF detects LINEREF during the automatic switch of a timing reference due to
failure, or quality change/priority changes of timing references.
Severity NA
Applicability LINEREFSYS
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the timing reference quality and priority.
CLI show card 11dpe12e shelf/slot synce lineref {1-4}

WEBUI Select the 11DPE12E card in the Equipment Tree.
Select LINEREF {1-4}.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
B1SD
B1SD (B1 Signal Degrade)

The OT port has detected Excessive BER on the OC-n/STM-n port of the 11STAR1 card.
This defect indicates that a local OC-n/STM-n port has detected a BER that exceeds
selected threshold. The default value is 10-6 for STM-64 (also from STM-16, STM-4,
STM-1), and 10-7 for STM-256.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-45
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures B1SD (B1 Signal Degrade)
B1SD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This may be caused by the following reasons:
• Damaged or dirty fiber connected to the local receiver
• Received power may not be within the acceptable range on local port input
• Damaged or dirty receiver inside pluggable module
Severity Major
Applicability 11STAR1
This procedure details the corrective action for an B1SD against the OT port. At the end
of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform the steps in the procedure, “SDBER” (p. 2-286) to clear this alarm.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
BASELINE
BASELINE
The BASELINE autonomous message is a transient condition issued after a analog PM
baseline operation is executed.
• A misconnected, damaged or dirty fiber
• Received power may not be within the acceptable range
• The data rate may be inconsistent
Severity TC
Applicability A2325A, ALPHG, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPFGT, AM2017B,
AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2325B, OSCT, and OT cards
No corrective action is required. This is a normal report caused by an analog PM baseline

operation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-46 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures Backward Defect Indication (BDI) - OTU
BDI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BDI
Backward Defect Indication (BDI) - OTU

The OT port has detected a Backward Defect Indication at the OTUk Section layer. This
defect indicates that the peer OTUk port has detected a condition that is treated as Server
Signal Failure (conditions such as LOS, LOF or LOM would contribute to SSF)
• A misconnected, damaged or dirty fiber on the trail between the local OTUk port
transmitter and the far end receiver
• The received power may not be within the acceptable range on the Far end input
Severity NA
Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCX10, 112SX10L, 11DPE12, 11DPE12E,
11QPA4, 11STAR1, 11STMM10, 11STGE12, 43SCX4, 43STA1P,
43STX4, 43STX4P, 4DPA4
This procedure details the corrective action for a BDI against the OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the alarms/conditions along the OCh trail.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Identify the farthest upstream alarm/condition relative to the far end OTUk port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Follow the procedure for clearing the identified alarm/condition.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If the peer OTUk port is in a client domain (this would be the case when BDI is detected
on a client OT port provisioned as OTU2), request corrective action by client operators.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-47
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures BDIEGR (Egress Backward Defect Indication - ODU)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BDIEGR
BDIEGR (Egress Backward Defect Indication - ODU)

The OT port has detected a Backward Defect Indication at the OTUk Section layer
transmitting out of the client port. This defect indicates that the peer OTUk port has
detected a condition that is treated as Server Signal Failure (conditions such as LOS, LOF
or LOM would contribute to SSF).
Severity NR
Applicability 112SCX10, 112SX10L, 43SCX4, 43STX4, 43STX4P
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for a BDIEGR against the OT port. At the end
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-48 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures Backward Defect Indication (BDI) - ODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BDIODU
Backward Defect Indication (BDI) - ODU

The OT port has detected a Backward Defect Indication at the ODUk Path layer. This
defect indicates that the peer OTUk port has detected a condition that is treated as Server
Signal Failure (conditions such as LOS, LOF, LOM, TIM, ODU-AIS, ODU-OCI or
ODU-LCK would contribute to SSF).

Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 112SX10L, 11DPE12E,
43STX4P, 4DPA4
This procedure details the corrective action for a BDI against the OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-49
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures CARDINIT (Card Initializing)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CARDINIT
CARDINIT (Card Initializing)

The card is in the process of initializing.

Applicability All cards
Corrective Action
This condition should clear by itself, or be replaced by another card alarm. No corrective
action is required.
The condition clears or is replaced by a card alarm. If the alarm does not clear, then
follow the procedure “CONTEQPT (Card Failure - Device)” (p. 2-54).
Note: To get correct PM counts after an MSC cold reboot, initialize the PM registers.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-50 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures CONFIGFAIL (Line Card Configuration Failed)
CONFIGFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CONFIGFAIL
CONFIGFAIL (Line Card Configuration Failed)
Severity TC
No corrective action is required. This is a message caused by a card boot failure.

Troubleshoot the equipment alarms detected.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-51
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures CONTCOM (Card Failure - Communication)
CONTCOM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CONTCOM
CONTCOM (Card Failure - Communication)

The CONTCOM alarm is raised by the active EC when it cannot communicate to the
standby EC or any other card in the system that does not have a higher priority equipment
failure.
The NE has detected the presence of a card, but is unable to establish internal
communications with it. Possible causes for this alarm are:
• A faulty card
• A misconfigured/invalid shelf ID
• A problem with the backplane
• A cable has been cut or disconnected from one end or the other
• The subtended shelf has been turned off
• The user panel on the subtended shelf has been extracted
• Fan, OPS: card not communicating with the Equipment Controller
• LDs: sub-processor not communicating with main housekeeper processor on card
• Loss of power to 1/2 the shelf
This condition may be accompanied by system timing-related or card sanity conditions.
Severity Critical (Minor if inactive protected card)

Applicability All cards except Equipment Controller
Corrective Action
Refer to “CONTCOM (Inter-shelf loss of communication)” (p. 2-53).
Note: If this alarm is present on a card when the master shelf Equipment Controller
undergoes a reset or a switch of activity, this alarm re-appears as a Card missing
alarm. Refer to “REPLUNTMISS (Card Missing)” (p. 2-281).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-52 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures CONTCOM (Inter-shelf loss of communication)
CONTCOM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CONTCOM (Inter-shelf loss of communication)

The active master shelf Equipment Controller has determined that the communications
link to a provisioned subtended shelf is down. This alarm may be raised for any of the
following reasons:
• Failure of the intershelf timing and control cable
• Disconnected or missing intershelf timing and control cable
• Subtended shelf loss of power
• Both subtended shelf Equipment Controllers are either failed or missing
For more information, refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch Release
3.6.0 Installation Guide.
Severity Critical
Applicability SHELF-{2-8}
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 When adding a new subshelf , the rotary dial should be configured with valid shelf ids
(0x02 to 0x18). Check the rotary dial and set it to a valid shelf ID, if applicable.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Locate the intershelf timing and control cable on the active master shelf controller and
observe the link status LED on the connector.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If the cable is connected and the link status LED is off, verify that the cable is properly
connected at both ends and reconnect it if necessary.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If the link status LED remains off when the cable is reconnected, verify that the
subtended shelf is powered on.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If the subtended shelf is powered on and the cable is connected but the link status LED
remains off, ensure that there is at least one working Equipment Controller in the
subtended shelf (both Activity and Status LEDs should be green). Do not proceed until
there is a working Equipment Controller in the subtended shelf. Once there is at least one
working Equipment Controller in the subtended shelf, replace the intershelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-53
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures CONTCOM (Inter-shelf loss of communication)
CONTCOM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
communications and timing cable and see if the link comes back up.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
CONTEQPT
CONTEQPT (Card Failure - Device)

The CONTEQPT condition indicates a fault on the Equipment Controller that has caused
the system to declare a hardware failure. This condition may be declared due to a failure
in the SEEP or other unknown hardware failures. This is a major non-service affecting
alarm for the Equipment Controller and causes a redundancy switch to the mate.
Severity Major
Applicability Equipment Controller, FLC
Corrective Action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-54 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures CONTEQPT (Card Failure - Device)
CONTEQPT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
CONTR
CONTR (Port degrade - wavelength tracker failure)

The Wavelength Tracker on this card has detected an internal fault. The Wavelength
Tracker information generated may be inaccurate. Channels may be declared absent
and/or detected channels powers for this channel instance may not accurately represent
the actual channel power.
Severity Minor
Applicability AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, ALPFGT, AM2017B, AM2325B,
CWR, MESH4, OPS, OSCT, WR, WTOCM
Note: Until this alarm is cleared, Wavelength Tracker information for the detect points
on-card are invalid.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-55
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures CONTR (Port degrade - wavelength tracker failure)
CONTR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
CONTR-OUT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-56 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures CONTR-OUT (Port degrade - wavelength tracker detection
CONTR-OUT failure)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CONTR-OUT (Port degrade - wavelength tracker detection

failure)
The Wavelength Tracker on this card has detected an internal DSP fault. The Wavelength
Tracker information generated may be inaccurate. Channels may be declared absent
and/or detected channel powers for this channel instance may not accurately represent the
actual channel power.
Severity Minor
Applicability AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, ALPFGT, AM2017B, AM2125A,
AM2125B, AM2325B, CWR, OSCT
Note: Until this alarm is cleared, wavelength tracking information for the detect
points on the card are invalid.
Corrective Action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-57
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures CONTR-OUT (Port degrade - wavelength tracker detection
CONTR-OUT failure)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
CRDINIT
CRDINIT (Card Identification Event)

The CRDINIT transient condition indicates that a new card has been inserted in the 1830
PSS. It will be followed by the CARDINIT standing condition as the card begins
initialization.
Severity TC
No corrective action is required. This is a normal message.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-58 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures DATAERR (Data Error or Timeout)
DATAERR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DATAERR
DATAERR (Data Error or Timeout)

The Data Error or Timeout condition is raised when the card software's CM Agent
receives one of three errors from the lower level software:
• Timeout (ProvFailTimeout) - it timed out before receiving a response
• Bad parameters (ProvFailBadParams) - the lower level software thinks the values sent
are invalid
• Failure (ProvFail) - the lower level software returns an error (this is the type of error
that is not definitely a hardware failure)
Severity Major
11DPM12, 11STAR1, 11STMM10, 11STGE12, 43SCX4,
43STA1P, 43STX4, 43STX4P, 4DPA2, 4DPA4, AHPHG, AHPLG,
ALPHG, ALPFGT, AM2318A, CWR, CWR8-88, MESH4,
MVAC, OPS, OSCT, SVAC, WTOCM
Corrective Action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform a warm reset on the card that has the DATAERR condition raised against it:

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-59
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures DATAERR (Data Error or Timeout)
DATAERR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform a warm reset on the Equipment Controller. This will cause a Equipment
Controller switch in a redundant configuration.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Perform a cold reset on the alarmed card.

CLI config card card type shelf slot reset cold

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Delete the services and de-provision the alarmed card. Re-provision the card with the
same parameters as was previously done.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Reseat the alarmed card. Refer to “Reseating a Card” (p. 3-19).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Replace the alarmed card. Refer to “Replacing System Components” (p. 3-20).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
DATAFLT
DATAFLT (Card Provisioning Failure)

The Card Provisioning Failure may be raised if a card rejects the provisioning parameters
given to it by the Equipment Controller upon a reset or due to a user provisioning action.
This may indicate a discrepancy on the database of the Equipment Controller or may
indicate a problem with the software.
The card, against which the DATAFLT condition is raised, may not be able to provide
services since some or all of the provisioning parameters were rejected.
Severity Major
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-60 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures DATAFLT (Card Provisioning Failure)
DATAFLT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

ALPHG, ALPFGT, AM2017B, AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2318A,
CWR, CWR8-88, Equipment Controller, FLC, MESH4, MT0C,
MVAC, OPS, OSCT, RA2P, SVAC, WR, WTOCM
Corrective Action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Determine if there is a software mismatch on the NE. If so, resolve the software issue
first. The NE should be running with a committed software load.
CLI show software upgrade status

alm
WEBUI Select Administration > Software > Upgrade and view the Status field.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform a warm reset on the card that has the DATAFLT condition raised against it:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Perform a warm reset on the Equipment Controller. This will cause a Equipment
Controller switch in a redundant configuration.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-61
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures DATAFLT (Card Provisioning Failure)
DATAFLT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Perform a cold reset on the alarmed card.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Delete the services and de-provision the alarmed card. Re-provision the card with the
same parameters as was previously done.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Reseat the alarmed card. Refer to “Reseating a Card” (p. 3-19).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Replace the alarmed card. Refer to “Replacing System Components” (p. 3-20).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
DBBKUP-IP
DBBKUP-IP (Database Backup In-Progress)

The database backup is in-progress. The NE will raise the DBBKUP-IP standing
condition during database backup, at the start of the file transfer
Severity NA
Corrective Action
The NE will clear the DBBKUP-IP standing condition when the database backup file
transfer has completed successfully, failed, or been cancelled.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-62 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures DBFL (DB Failure Local - copy creation of processing failure)
DBFL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DBFL
DBFL (DB Failure Local - copy creation of processing failure)

A download of a database backup from the remote file server (part of the database restore
process) will fail if there is not enough free space on the Active Main Equipment
Controller’s flash memory. A database failure condition-local shall be raised (DBFL).
If the temporary database cannot be read (meaning that the database cannot be transported
to the RFS), a database failure condition-local shall be set.
Severity Minor
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Retry the database backup.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Contact your next level of support.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
DBFT
DBFT (DB Failure Transport - file transport failure)

If the file transfer of the database to the remote file server does not succeed, a database
failure condition-transport shall be set.
Severity Minor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-63
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures DBFT (DB Failure Transport - file transport failure)
DBFT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Retry the database backup.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
DBINVALID
DBINVALID (Database invalid)

When the DBINVALID condition is raised, the NE is not in a normal operating mode. As
a result, the NE does not boot normally and not all commands are allowed.
The DBINVALID condition may be raised as a result of the following:
• During initial installation, if the NE is not properly commissioned.
• The serial number in the database does not match that of the NE either because the
controller was replaced or the alarm card was replaced.
• A downgrade of NE software has occurred.
• EC is removed/reseated during a system process, causing file corruption.
• The database audit failed indicating some type of corruption of the database.
Severity Major
Applicability Equipment Controller, System
Corrective Action
Whenever possible, backup the database prior to unseating the Equipment Controller (see
“Backing Up a Database” (p. 3-13)).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 If this condition occurs after a downgrade, then perform the steps in “Restoring a
Database” (p. 3-14) to restore the pre-upgrade database to the Equipment Controller.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-64 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures DBINVALID (Database invalid)
DBINVALID
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The redundant Equipment Controller, if one is in its slot, will synchronize with
the active Equipment Controller.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If this condition occurs after user panel replacement, a database backup (previously saved
for this NE) must be restored to the NE from a remote database backup and restore server,
with the special keyword "force".
The steps are as follows:
1. Re-provision the user panel OADM port details for this NE.
2. Re-provision the static routing and gateway information for this NE.
3. Re-provision the database server information, perform the steps in “Backing Up a
Database” (p. 3-13) and “Restoring a Database” (p. 3-14) for the database backup and
restore procedures.
4. Enter the CLI command config database restore force to bring the database
from a remote server to the NE.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If this condition occurs after the replacement of a Equipment Controller, and there is no
protection (redundant Equipment Controller), then perform the steps in “Restoring a
Database” (p. 3-14) to restore the database to the Equipment Controller.
Note: It is crucial to have the backup database be a duplicate of the one running on
the NE prior to replacing the Equipment Controller. Any data not backed up will be
lost and may result in lost services and interruption in traffic.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Review of the NE logs may provide an indication of the corruption of the database by
way of a failed audit function resulting in CRC errors. If the DBINVALID condition is
present due to a corruption of the database, then perform the steps in “Restoring a
Database” (p. 3-14) to restore the database to the Equipment Controller from a valid
database backup file.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
DBMEMTRF
DBMEMTRF (Database synchronization failure)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-65
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures DBMEMTRF (Database synchronization failure)
DBMEMTRF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Active Equipment Controller is unable to synchronize its database with the inactive
Equipment Controller. This alarm may be raised under the following conditions:
• An incorrectly seated Equipment Controller
• The software loads on the active and inactive Equipment Controllers are not
compatible
• A hardware problem with one or both controllers
Severity Major
Applicability Equipment Controller, System
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the software load on each of the two Equipment Controllers and verify that they
match. If the loads are different, force the Equipment Controller with the incorrect load to
upgrade to the correct running load.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Remove the Equipment Controller with the condition and examine the connector on the
back of the card for damage, including bent or broken pins.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Examine the connector on the backplane for damage. If there is damage to the backplane
of the shelf, contact your service representative.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Re-insert the Equipment Controller into its original slot and allow the card to initialize.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Repeat Step 2 through Step 4 for the second Equipment Controller.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Replace the Equipment Controller with the DBMEMTRF condition with a new unit. If
the condition is not cleared, replace the second Equipment Controller with a new unit.
Follow the return and repair process to return the faulty card to an authorized repair
center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-66 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures DBRSTR-IP (Database Restore In Progress)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DBRSTR-IP
DBRSTR-IP (Database Restore In Progress)

The database restore is in-progress. The NE will raise the DBRSTR-IP standing condition
during database restoration, at the start of the file transfer.
Severity NA
Corrective Action
The NE will clear the DBRSTR-IP standing condition when the database restoration file
transfer has completed successfully, failed, or been cancelled.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-67
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures DBUNSYNC (The active and standby Main EC databases are
DBUNSYNC not synchronized)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DBUNSYNC
DBUNSYNC (The active and standby Main EC databases are not

synchronized)
The database on the active and standby equipment controllers are not in sync.
Severity Major
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform a warm reset of the standby controller.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
DEGOTU
DEGOTU (Signal Degrade - OTU)

The DEGOTU condition is raised when a high B1 error rate is detected on the OTU2/3/4
input line or client port.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-68 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures DEGOTU (Signal Degrade - OTU)
DEGOTU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• The received power may not be within the acceptable range on local port input
• The input optical signal is severely degraded by the optical noise
Severity Major
Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 112SX10L, 43SCX4
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for a DEG against the OT port. At the end of
each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Clean the input fiber at the receiver, and check if the input power is within the specified
range.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If it does not clear the alarm, check if there is any power management or optical channel
alarm reported on the link. Perform the corrective action for clearing these alarms on the
link.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Measure the optical signal noise ratio (OSNR) with at the received amplifier with an
optical spectrum analyzer. Check if the OSNR is within the range specified by the EPT.
Perform the actions to improve the system OSNR.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 For 40G and 100G coherent cards only: Retrieve the monitoring values for chromatic
dispersion (CD), Differential Group Delay (DGD), and Frequency offset. Check if the
values are in the normal range. If not, perform the actions to optimize the optical link.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
DISCOVERMOD
DISCOVERMOD (Pluggable Module Discovered)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-69
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures DISCOVERMOD (Pluggable Module Discovered)
DISCOVERMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The DISCOVERMOD condition indicates that an inserted pluggable module has been
booted and recognized.
Severity TC
MajorApplicability All cards
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-70 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures DORMANTUSER (User inactive)
DORMANTUSER
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DORMANTUSER
DORMANTUSER (User inactive)

The DORMANTUSER condition is a user login inactivity timeout (maximum interval
that the user is inactive, without logging into the NE, before the userID is disabled).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 This user may be deleted from the NE by using one of the following commands:
CLI config admin users delete

WEBUI Select Administration > Security> Users, select the user, and click Delete.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
ETHCSF
ETHCSF (Ethernet Client Signal Failure)

The OT port has detected the ETHCSF condition at the MEP layer. A MEP detects the
ETHCSF condition when it receives a CCM frame with a interface status TLV of
“Down.”
Severity Major
Applicability 11DPE12E
The alarm is cleared when the MEP receives a CCM frame with interface status TLV of
“Up.”
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the remote peer Ethernet client status. The remote peer client port LOS/LSS
triggers the local ETHCSF.
CLI alarm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-71
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures ETHCSF (Ethernet Client Signal Failure)
ETHCSF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WEBUI Select Reports > Alarm List > Total.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
EQPT
EQPT (Card Failure - Device)

The Card Failure - Device alarm text for the EQPT condition indicates a fault on the card
that has caused the system to declare a hardware failure. This condition may be declared
due to a failure in the SEEP or other unknown hardware failures depending on the card
type the alarm is raised against. This is a critical service affecting alarm for cards carrying
traffic and affects the traffic currently flowing through the failed device.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-72 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures EQPT (Card Failure - Device)
EQPT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EQPT (Card Failure - Device)
Severity Critical
43STA1P, 43STX4, 43STX4P, 4DPA2, 4DPA4, A2325A, AHPHG,
AHPLG, ALPHG, ALPFGT, AM2017B, AM2125A, AM2125B,
AM2318A, AM2325B, CWR, FAN, MESH4, MVAC, OPS, OSC,
OSCT, PF, RA2P, SFC, SFD, SVAC, USRPNL, WR, WTOCM
Corrective Action
NOTICE
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step. If
this condition is raised against the user panel or a fan tray, then after each step warm reset
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-73
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures EQPT (Card Failure - Device)
EQPT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
EQPTBOOT
EQPTBOOT (Card failure - boot failure)
Severity Critical
Applicability 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 112SX10L, 11DPE12, 11QPA4, 11STAR1,
11STMM10, 11STGE12, 43SCX4, 43STA1P, 43STX4, 43STX4P,
4DPA2,F 4DPA4, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, ALPFGT,
AM2017B, AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2318A, AM2325B, CWR,
MESH4, MT0C, MVAC, OPS, OSCT, RA2P, SVAC, WR,
WTOCM
Corrective Action
NOTICE
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step. If
this condition is raised against the user panel or a fan tray, then after each step warm reset
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-74 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures EQPTBOOT (Card failure - boot failure)
EQPTBOOT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
EQPTDGR
EQPTDGR (Card Degrade - device)

The Card Degrade-Device alarm text for the EQPTDGR condition indicates a fault on the
card that has caused the system to declare a hardware failure. This condition may be
declared due to a failure in the SEEP or other unknown hardware failures depending on
the card type the alarm is raised against.
The Card Degrade-Device alarm text indicates a lower priority fault on the card that does
not directly affect the traffic currently flowing through the device.
Severity Minor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-75
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures EQPTDGR (Card Degrade - device)
EQPTDGR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

AM2125B, CWR, OPS, OSCT MESH4, MVAC, OPS, OSCT,
RA2P, WR, WTOCM
Corrective Action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-76 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures EQPTDGR (Port Degrade - Wavelength Tracker
EQPTDGR Communication Failure)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EQPTDGR (Port Degrade - Wavelength Tracker Communication

Failure)
Communications with the Wavelength Tracker feature on this card are unreliable. This
means that any Wavelength Tracker information sent (for example, configuration
changes) or generated may be incorrect.
Note: Until this alarm is cleared, Wavelength Tracker provisioning and information
on the card are invalid.
Severity Minor
AM2325B, CWR, OSC, OSCT, WTOCM
Corrective Action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-77
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures EQPTDGR (Port Degrade - Wavelength Tracker
EQPTDGR Communication Failure)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
EQPTDGROCH
EQPTDGROCH (Port Degrade - Wavelength Tracker

Communication Failure)
Severity Minor
AM2325B, CWR, MESH4, OSC, OSCT, WR, WTOCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-78 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures EQPTDGROCH (Port Degrade - Wavelength Tracker
EQPTDGROCH Communication Failure)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
EQPTDGR-OUT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-79
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures EQPTDGR-OUT (Port Degrade - Wavelength Tracker
EQPTDGR-OUT Communication Failure)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EQPTDGR-OUT (Port Degrade - Wavelength Tracker

Severity Minor
AM2325B, CWR, OSC, OSCT, WTOCM
Corrective Action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-80 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures EQPTDGR-OUT (Port Degrade - Wavelength Tracker
EQPTDGR-OUT Communication Failure)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
EQPTDGROCH-OUT
EQPTDGROCH-OUT (Port Degrade - Wavelength Tracker

Severity Minor
AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2325B, CWR, OSC, OSCT, WTOCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-81
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures EQPTDGROCH-OUT (Port Degrade - Wavelength Tracker
EQPTDGROCH-OUT Communication Failure)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
EQPTPORT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-82 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures EQPTPORT (Port Failure - Device):
EQPTPORT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EQPTPORT (Port Failure - Device):

The Port Failure - Device alarm text indicates a port initialization failure on the network
ports (10G ports).
Severity Critical
Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 112SX10L, 11STAR1,
4DPA2, 4DPA4
Corrective Action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-83
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures EQPTPORT (Port Failure - Device):
EQPTPORT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Remove the pluggable module from the port on the card it is inserted in. Examine the
connector on the pluggable module and the receptacle connector on the card where the
pluggable module plugs into for any damage. If no damage is seen, reinsert the pluggable
module into its port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Remove and replace the pluggable module with another unit of the same type, being
careful with the connected fiber jumpers. Refer to “Replacing an SFP Module” (p. 3-27).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
EBER
EBER (Excessive BER)

The OT port has detected Excessive BER on the OC-n/STM-n port of the 11QPA4,
11STMM10 or 11STAR1 card. This defect indicates that local OC-M/STM-N port has
detected a BER that exceeds selected threshold (default 10-3).
Severity Critical
Applicability 112SCX10, 112SX10L, 11QPA4, 11STAR1, 11STMM10,
43SCX4
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for an EBER condition against the OT port.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-84 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures EBER (Excessive BER)
EBER
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Retrieve power level reading on the local port.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Clean the fiber.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If cleaning the fiber does not clear the problem, replace the fiber.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If the power level is within the operating range, check for pluggable module alarms.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Replace the pluggable module.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-85
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures EBER-O (Optical Supervision Channel Excessive BER)
EBER
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EBER-O (Optical Supervision Channel Excessive BER)

The OSC SFP receive port on one of the amplifier cards has detected an excessive BER.
The EBER-O alarm is raised if the SONET framer detects errors in the as per the SONET
specification.
• The received power may not be within the acceptable range

Applicability A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG
Corrective Action
NOTICE
This procedure details the corrective action for EBER-O against the OSC port. At the end
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Query for the OSC receive power on the port where the EBER-O conditions is present.
CLI show interface <shelf slot port>

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Verify that the fiber is the correct type (multimode/single-mode) and that the other end of
the fiber is connected properly.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Ensure that the administrative state of the port is Admin Up. If it is Up, then toggle the
administrative state from UP > DOWN > UP.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-86 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures EBER-O (Optical Supervision Channel Excessive BER)
EBER
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If... Then...
no active traffic is present on the system, remove the fiber from the receive port where
the EBER-O is raised and measure the optical
power.
the optical power is below the required using the standard optical fiber jumper
threshold for the type of pluggable module cleaning procedure, clean the fiber, and
installed, measure the power again.
the optical power is within the required limits, clean the receive connector on the card. If the
EBER-O condition is still present, the problem
may be with the card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Note: Refer to Caution at the beginning of this procedure.

Perform a warm reset of the card exhibiting the Loss of Frame.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Perform a cold reset of the card exhibiting the Loss of Frame.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Replace the OSC SFP located inside the amplifier. See “Replacing an SFP Module”
(p. 3-27). Follow the return and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide
to return the faulty pluggable module to an authorized repair center for replacement.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-87
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures ENV (Environmental Input [1-8] active)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ENV
ENV (Environmental Input [1-8] active)

The ENV condition relates to housekeeping. The ENV inputs are user-defined sensors
that can be arbitrarily configured to set an alarm for such as actions as opening a door, or
a smoke detector.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Define the environmental input defined by using one of the following commands:
CLI config alm

WEBUI Select Reports > Alarm List >Total.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
EXCESSLOAD
EXCESSLOAD (Excessive Current Load)

The EXCESSLOAD condition indicates the last card inserted draws an additional current
load on the shelf that exceeds the current limit of the equipped power filters. The pack in
the affected slot will not initialize and operate.
Severity Critical
Applicability 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 11DPE12E, 11DPM12, 11STAR1,
11STMM10, 11STGE12, 43STA1P, 43STX4, 43STX4P, 4DPA2,
4DPA4, A2325A, ALPHG, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPFGT,
AM2017B, AM2325B, CWR, Equipment Controller, OPS, OSCT,
SVAC, WTOCM
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Remove the pack that is reporting the alarm.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-88 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures EXCESSLOAD (Excessive Current Load)
EXCESSLOAD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Do one of the following:

• Remove load to a level below the capacity of the provisioned power entry cards, or
• Upgrade the power filters to a higher current capacity (if the supply wiring is
sufficiently rated for the current).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Reprovision the shelf capacity attribute (EXPECTED_AMPS) with the new value.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
FACTERM-DEV
FACTERM-DEV (Pluggable Module SEEP Failure)

The Pluggable Module SEEP Failure condition is raised when the system cannot
communicate with the pluggable module to determine such information as power level
and laser types. This condition is equivalent to a port degrade, and service is not impacted
until/unless a subsequent reset occurs.
Severity Major
43STX4P, 4DPA2, 4DPA4, ALPHG, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPFGT,
AM2017B, AM2125A, AM2125B, MVAC, OSCT
Corrective Action
NOTICE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-89
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures FACTERM-DEV (Pluggable Module SEEP Failure)
FACTERM-DEV
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Carefully remove and reseat the pluggable module that is reporting the FACTERM-DEV
condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Remove and cap the fiber jumpers connected to the pluggable module and replace the
pluggable module with another unit of the same type. Refer to “Replacing an SFP
Module” (p. 3-27). Reconnect the fiber jumpers as they were before.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
FANSPEEDHIGH
FANSPEEDHIGH (Fan Speed is too high)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-90 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures FANSPEEDHIGH (Fan Speed is too high)
FANSPEEDHIGH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This alarm indicates when the fan speed is too high based upon the current shelf cooling
requirements.
Severity Minor
Applicability FAN
Corrective Action
Fan Speed is Too High

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check for fan obstruction, and clear.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Reseat the fan tray.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If no problems are found, replace the fan tray.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
FANSPEEDLOW
FANSPEEDLOW (Fan speed is too low)

This alarm indicates when the fan speed is either too low based upon the current shelf
cooling requirements.
Severity Minor
Applicability FAN
Corrective Action
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-91
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures FANSPEEDLOW (Fan speed is too low)
FANSPEEDLOW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fan Speed is Too Low
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check for airflow blockage or a dirty filter, and clear.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If no problems are found, replace the fan tray.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
FANSPEEDMAN
FANSPEEDMAN (Fan speed manually set to maximum)

The FANSPEEDMAN condition is raised when you manually set the fan speed to its
maximum. If a shelf contains the 100G packs, it is recommended that you increase the
airflow through the shelf.
Note: In Release 3.5, any existing FANSPEEDMAN alarms may be suppressed by
new FANSPEEDHIGH or FANSPEEDLOW alarms.
Severity Minor
Applicability FAN
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Set the fanspeed parameter to the Normal setting.
CLI config fan normal

WEBUI Select the Provision/Info button, and view the Details tab. On the Card
Properties window, select Normalin the Fan Speed field and click Submit.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-92 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures FECECSD (Pre-FEC Signal Degrade)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FECECSD
FECECSD (Pre-FEC Signal Degrade)

The OT port has detected a Signal Degrade Path layer. This defect indicates that local
OTUk port has detected FEC BER which exceeds 10-5.
• The received power may not be within the acceptable range on local port input •
• Power level out of range on the associated OCh trail
Severity Minor
Applicability 11STAR1, 11QPA4
This procedure details the corrective action for an FECECSD against the OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform the procedure, “DEGOTU” (p. 2-68). Because it is FEC corrected BER, it does
not affect service unless another alarm exists on the port.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
FECUBCSD
FECUBCSD (Post-FEC Signal Degrade)

The OT port has detected uncorrectable bit errors after FEC. This defect indicates that
local OTUk port has detected FEC BER which exceeds 10-6.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-93
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures FECUBCSD (Post-FEC Signal Degrade)
FECUBCSD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• The input optical signal is severely degraded by the optical noise
Severity Major
Applicability 11DPE12E, 11DPM12, 11QPA4, 11STAR1, 43STA1P, 43STX4P
This procedure details the corrective action for an FECUBCSD against the OT port. At
the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If it does not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Clean the input fiber at the receiver, and check if the input power is within the specified
range.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check if there is any power management or optical channel alarm reported on the link.
Perform the corrective action for clearing these alarms on the link.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Measure the optical signal noise ratio (OSNR) with at the received amplifier with an
optical spectrum analyzer. Check if the OSNR is within the range specified by the EPT.
Perform the actions to improve the system OSNR.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
FELANLFI
FELANLFI (Far End Local Fault)

The Far End OT port has detected a LAN Local Fault Indication ordered set at its input.
This condition typically indicates Ethernet link down condition on the client equipment
connected to the far-end port.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-94 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures FELANLFI (Far End Local Fault)
FELANLFI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Damaged or dirty fiber connected to the far-end client equipment receiver
• Damaged or dirty transmitter inside pluggable module on the far end
• Problem at the client equipment connected to the far-end OT

Applicability 112SCX10, 112SX10L, 11QPA4, 11STAR1, 43SCX4
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for FELANLFI against the OT port. At the
end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Locate the Far end client OT.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Proceed with the procedure for clearing LANLFI (see “LANLFI” (p. 2-120)).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
FELANLOS
FELANLOS (Far End Loss of Signal)

The Far End OT port has detected LAN LOS at its input.
• Damaged or dirty fiber connected to the far-end receiver
• Received power may not be within the acceptable range on far-end port input

43SCX4, 4DPA4
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-95
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures FELANLOS (Far End Loss of Signal)
FELANLOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing FELANLOS against the OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Locate far end client OT.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform the steps in the procedure “LANLOS” (p. 2-121).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
FELANLSS
FELANLSS (Far End Loss of Synchronization)

The Far End OT port has detected Loss of 64B/66B or 8B/10B block/character
synchronization on 10GbE, 1GbE or FC facility.

43SCX4, 43STX4, 43STX4P, 4DPA4
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing FELANLSS against the OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Locate the far end client OT.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform the steps in the procedure, “LANLSS” (p. 2-122).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-96 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures FELANRFI (Far End Remote Fault)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FELANRFI
FELANRFI (Far End Remote Fault)

The Far End OT port has detected a LAN Remote Fault Indication ordered set at its input.
This condition typically indicates Ethernet link down condition on the client equipment
connected to the far-end port.

Applicability 11QPA4, 11STAR1, 11STMM10
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing FELOS against the OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform the steps in the procedure “LANRFI” (p. 2-123).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
FELOS
FELOS (Far End Loss of Synchronization)

Far End OT port has detected LAN Loss of 64B/66B block synchronization at its input.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-97
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures FELOS (Far End Loss of Synchronization)
FELOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Applicability 11STAR1, 11STMM10, 4DPA4
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing FELOS against the OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform the steps in the LANLSS procedure (see “LANLSS” (p. 2-122)).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
FEPORTMISMATCH
FEPORTMISMATCH (Far End Port Mapping Mismatch)

The Far End Port Mapping Mismatch alarm text for the FEPORTMISMATCH condition
indicates two client ports assigned to a Y-cable protection group are not provisioned the
same. Timeslot assignments are wrong, such that a service does not appear on the same
client ports at the two ends of a point-to-point link (applicable only to 11STMM10). Or
corresponding ports at the two ends are not provisioned for the same signal rate and
format. The condition is listed against the near end port.
Severity Critical
Applicability 11STAR1, 11STMM10, 11STGE12, 4DPA4
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-98 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures FEPORTMISMATCH (Far End Port Mapping Mismatch)
FEPORTMISMATCH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Identify the two ports in the protection group at the near end, and the two ports at the far
end.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Provision the near end and far end ports with the same signal rate and format.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Provision the timeslot assignments so that the same ports are used at both ends. For
example, the near end port C3 must be connected to far end port C3.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
FEPRLF
FEPRLF (Far End Protection Line Failure)

The FEPRLF condition is far end protection failure in Y-cable switching. The far end
node detects a problem on the protection side of a Y-cable protection group, and
communicates this fact to the near end node. The near end node raises the FEPRLF
condition. Troubleshooting should be done on the far end node.
Severity NA
Applicability 11QPA4, 11STAR1, 11STGE12, 11STMM10
Corrective Action
Do all steps at the far end node.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Determine which side is the working side and which side is the protection side.
CLI show aps
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-99
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures FEPRLF (Far End Protection Line Failure)
FEPRLF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check for faults on the protection side line port, or the protection side card.
CLI alm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If... Then...
faults are present, proceed to the appropriate procedure for
clearing the faults.
no faults are present, STOP! You are done with this procedure.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
FPGAFAIL
FPGAFAIL (FPGA Download or Programming Failure)

The FPGAFAIL alarm is raised when a corrupted firmware file is downloaded to the card
or the FPGA fails to program correctly.
Severity CR
11DPM12, 11STAR1, 11STMM10, 11STGE12, 4DPA2, 4DPA4,
43SCX4, 43STA1P, 43STX4, 43STX4P, ALPHG, AHPHG,
AHPLG, AM2017B, AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2318A, CWR8,
CWR8-88, MESH4, MVAC, OPS, RA2P, SVAC, WTOCM
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform a warm reset on the card where the FPGAFAIL condition is raised.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-100 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures FPGAFAIL (FPGA Download or Programming Failure)
FPGAFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
FPGAINIT
FPGAINIT (FPGA Initializing)

The FPGAINIT condition occurs when firmware for each programmable device on a card
is downloaded and FPGA programming is in progress.
Severity NA
Service affecting? No (However, a cold reset of the card issued to initiate FPGA
programming is service affecting if the card is currently carrying
services.)
43SCX4, 43STA1P, 43STX4, 43STX4P, AHPHG, AHPLG,
ALPFGT, AM2318A, CWR8, CWR8-88, MESH4, MVAC, OPS,
OSCT, SVAC, WTOCM
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 No steps are required to clear the FPGAINIT alarm. Some FPGA programming steps can
take as long as 45 minutes. Monitor progress using one of the following commands:
CLI show firmware upgrade

WEBUI Select Reports > Firmware.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-101
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures FPGATIMEOUT (FPGA Timeout)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FPGATIMEOUT
FPGATIMEOUT (FPGA Timeout)

The FPGATIMEOUT alarm is raised when the card fails to download firmware and
complete FPGA programming in a period of time (about 45 minutes).
Severity MN
43SCX4, 43STA1P, 43STX4, 43STX4P, ALPHG, AHPHG,
AHPLG, ALPFGT, AM2318A, CWR8, CWR8-88, MESH4,
MVAC, OPS, OSCT, SVAC, WTOCM
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform a warm reset on the card where the FPGATIMEOUT condition is raised.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
FRCDSWTIMREF
FRCDSWTIMREF (Forced Switch Timing Reference)

The OT port has detected an FRCDSWTIMREF condition at the LINEREF layer. A
LINEREF detects FRCDSWTIMREF when the timing selection is forced to a timing
reference.
Severity NA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-102 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures FRCDSWTIMREF (Forced Switch Timing Reference)
FRCDSWTIMREF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Clear force switch.
CLI show card 11dpe12e shelf/slot synce

Select System Timing.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
FRCDWKSWBK
FRCDWKSWBK (Forced switch to working)

This is a standing condition indicating that a forced switch back to the working is active.
The forced switch of working back to working condition occurs when a user initiates a
forced switch to work request within a protection group. A forced switch to working
forces traffic onto the working facility/equipment unless the working facility is in the
Signal-Fail state.
Clearing the manual switch clears the condition. In the absence of other outstanding
requests, a cleared forced switch back to work leaves the switch position on work.

Applicability 11STAR1, 11STMM10, 11STGE12, 4DPA4, OPS
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Display the protection group for the associated shelf/slot/port.
CLI show aps group <group> detail
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-103
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures FRCDWKSWBK (Forced switch to working)
FRCDWKSWBK
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Clear the forced switch.
CLI config aps group <group> clearSwitch
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
FRCDWKSWPR
FRCDWKSWPR (Forced switch to protection)

This is a standing condition indicating a forced switch to protect is active.
The forced switch of working facility/equipment to protection condition is raised when a
user initiates a forced switch to protect request within a protection group. A forced switch
to protect forces traffic onto the protect facility/equipment unless the protect facility is in
the signal fail state. A forced switch to protect also prevents reversion to the working path
from occurring. Clearing the forced switch clears the condition.
If reversion is enabled, a switch occurs to the work facility immediately after the forced
switch has cleared.

Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Display the protection group for the associated shelf slot/port.
CLI config aps group <group> detail
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-104 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures FRCDWKSWPR (Forced switch to protection)
FRCDWKSWPR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Clear the forced switch.
CLI config aps group <group> clearSwitch<group> clearSwitch
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
FRNGSYNC
FRNGSYNC (System clock is in free running synchronization

mode)
The OT port has detected an FRNGSYNC at the SYNC layer. A SYNC detects
FRNGSYNC when the system clock is in free running synchronization mode.
Severity Minor
Applicability SYNC
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check all references.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
FWPENDINGOBSOLETE
FWPENDINGOBSOLETE (Firmware on this pack is about to

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-105
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures FWPENDINGOBSOLETE (Firmware on this pack is about to
FWPENDINGOBSOLETE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
become obsolete with the software release upgrade)

The FWPENDINGOBSOLETE condition is raised against any pack which would be
running an obsolete firmware bundle version after the software release upgrade.
Severity NA
ALPHG, ALPFGT, AM2017B, AM2125A, AM2125B, CWR8,
CWR8-88, MESH4, MVAC, OPS, OSCT, RA2P, SVAC, WR,
WTOCM
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Provision a firmware bundle that will be valid after software upgrade or provision the
default firmware bundle for the card (see “Corrective Action” (p. 2-108)).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
FWUPGRADEPENDING
FWUPGRADEPENDING (Firmware upgrade pending)

A pack will have a FWUPGRADEPENDING active if the pack's firmware has been
provisioned, but not loaded. Thus, the provisioned firmware bundle is not the same as the
version currently in the FPGA.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-106 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures FWUPGRADEPENDING (Firmware upgrade pending)
FWUPGRADEPENDING
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The two 4DPA4 card modes (FlexMux and DualTran) each have their own separate
firmware lines. When card mode is provisioned, the default version of the appropriate
firmware line is loaded automatically. Thus, FWUPGRADEPENDING may also apply to
a mismatch between the provisioned 4DPA4 card mode value and the current FPGA
contents.
Severity NA
43STA1P, 43STX4, 43STX4P, 4DPA2, 4DPA4, ALPHG, AHPHG,
AHPLG, ALPFGT, CWR8, CWR8-88, MESH4, MVAC, OPS,
OSCT, SVAC, WTOCM
Corrective Action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 To initiate a cold reset to download the recommended firmware version for the affected
pack, perform a cold reset of the card.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-107
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures FWVERSIONNOTDEFAULT (Firmware version on this pack is
not the default version for this software release)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FWVERSIONNOTDEFAULT
FWVERSIONNOTDEFAULT (Firmware version on this pack is not

the default version for this software release)
The pack will have a FWVERSIONNOTDEFAULT active if any firmware bundle it is
running is not the latest default bundle version listed for that pack in the active (running)
software release. This alarm condition occurs when the firmware loaded on the pack is
not the default firmware bundle for this pack in this software release and also if the
software release is upgraded but the firmware has not been upgraded.
The two 4DPA4 cardmodes (FlexMux and DualTran) each have their own separate
firmware lines. When cardmode is provisioned, the default version of the appropriate
firmware line is loaded automatically. Thus, FWVERSIONNOTDEFAULT may also
apply to firmware that is not the default for the current cardmode value of the 4DPA4
pack.
This alarm condition clears when the default firmware bundle for the active software
release is loaded on the programmable devices.
Severity NA
Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCA1, 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 112SX10L,
11DPE12E, 11DPM12, 11STAR1, 11STMM10, 11STGE12,
43SCX4, 43STA1P, 43STX4, 43STX4P, 4DPA4, AHPHG,
AHPLG, ALPHG, ALPFGT, CWR8, CWR8-88, MESH4, MVAC,
OPS, OSCT, SVAC, WTOCM
Corrective Action
NOTICE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-108 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures FWVERSIONNOTDEFAULT (Firmware version on this pack is
FWVERSIONNOTDEFAULT not the default version for this software release)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check that the default firmware bundle is provisioned for the card.
CLI show firmware card card_type shelf slot detail
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If the default firmware bundle is not provisioned in the previous step, then provision the
default firmware bundle for the card.
CLI config firmware card card_type shelf slot config firmware card
card_type shelf slot
...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
HIBER
HIBER (High BER)

The OT port has detected a High BER on 10GbE LAN facility. This defect indicates that
local 10GbE LAN port has detected BER > 10-4 (high BER defect is triggered when
more than 16 invalid 64B/66B sync headers get detected within 125us).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-109
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures HIBER (High BER)
HIBER
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Severity Critical
Applicability 11DPE12, 11DPE12E, 11QPA4, 11STAR1, 11STGE12
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing a HIBER condition on an OT
port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Retrieve power level reading on the local OT port.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Clean the fiber.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
HIGAIN
HIGAIN (Amplifier Out of Operational Range: Gain too High)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-110 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures HIGAIN (Amplifier Out of Operational Range: Gain too High)
HIGAIN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
An amplifier is operating outside of the normal operating range. The ingress power to the
amplifier plus the programmed gain (both in dB's) has exceeded the maximum allowable
output power supported by the amplifier. This can occur only if the amplifier output
power limiting function and the output overload function have both failed.
Severity Minor
AM2325B
Corrective Action
None. This is a transitory alarm that is raised for a maximum of 30 seconds while the
amplifier attempts to limit the output power. If after 30 seconds the output power cannot
be limited, a “CONTEQPT (Card Failure - Device)” (p. 2-54) alarm is raised.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-111
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures HLDOVRSYNC (System timing is in autonomous holdover
HLDOVRSYNC synchronization mode)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
HLDOVRSYNC
HLDOVRSYNC (System timing is in autonomous holdover

synchronization mode)
The OT port has detected a HLDOVRSYNC at the SYNC layer. A SYNC detects
HLDOVRSYNC when system timing is in autonomous holdover synchronization mode.

Applicability SYNC
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check all references.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
HWNOTSUPPORTED
HWNOTSUPPORTED (Hardware not supported for current

configuration)
The HWNOTSUPPORTED condition is raised during insertion of an Equipment
Controller in slots 1 or 18, when R1.0.5 software active is detected on the 1830 PSS-32.
Severity Major
Applicability ECb
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-112 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures HWNOTSUPPORTED (Hardware not supported for current
HWNOTSUPPORTED configuration)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Replace the affected Equipment Controller (APN 8DG59241AB). Refer to “Replacing an

Equipment Controller in a Redundant Shelf ” (p. 3-40) for the complete trouble-clearing
procedure.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
INSERTMOD
INSERTMOD (Pluggable Module Inserted)

The INSERTMOD condition indicates that an pluggable module has been inserted into
the card.
Severity TC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-113
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures INTTEMP (Card over temperature)
INTTEMPHIGH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
INTTEMPHIGH
INTTEMP (Card over temperature)

A high temperature threshold on a card has been exceeded. There may be a fan failure,
fan blockage, site climate control failure, lack of filler cards in empty slots, or a failed
sensor. This alarm is raised when a card is over the specified operating temperature
(measured by temperature sensors on the card).
Severity Minor
ALPHG, ALPFGT, AM2017B, AM2125A, AM2125B, CWR,
Equipment Controller, FLC, MESH4, MT0C, MVAC, OPS,
OSCT, PF, RA2P, SVAC, WR, WTOCM
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform the steps in the procedure “High Temperature Troubleshooting” (p. 3-70).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
INTTEMPLOW
INTTEMPLOW (Card under temperature)

The card temperature is below operational limits. There may be a climate control or
sensor failure. This alarm is raised when the card is under the specified operating
temperature (measured by temperature sensors on the card). The network element
requires additional heating to bring it back to an acceptable operating temperature.
Severity Minor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-114 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures INTTEMPLOW (Card under temperature)
INTTEMPLOW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

OSCT, PF, RA2P, SVAC, WR, WTOCM
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Ensure that no environmental issues are present where the network element resides.
Resolve any existing issues.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Verify if other cards in the shelf report temperatures near their lower limit (within 10° C).
CLI show card <sh/sl>
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Replace the alarmed card. See “Replacing System Components” (p. 3-20).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
INTTEMPOPT
INTTEMP (Optics over temperature)

The optics on the card exceeded their high temperature limit, and the ability of the card to
provide service may be compromised.
Severity Minor
Applicability AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, AM2017B, AM2125A, AM2125B,
CWR8, MESH4, RA2P, WR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-115
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures INTTEMP (Optics over temperature)
INTTEMPOPT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform the steps in the procedure “High Temperature Troubleshooting” (p. 3-70).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
INTRUSION
INTRUSION
The INTRUSION alarm lists the user IDs of users currently locked-out of the 1830 PSS
due to intrusion violations whenever there is a change to the user database. Subsequent
login attempts by that user shall be denied until the user profile is unlocked (enabled).
Severity Major
To clear the INTRUSION alarm, perform the steps in “INTRUSIONEVT (Excessive

Invalid Login Attempts)” (p. 2-117) .
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-116 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures INTRUSIONEVT (Excessive Invalid Login Attempts)
INTRUSION
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
INTRUSIONEVT (Excessive Invalid Login Attempts)

The INTRUSIONEVT condition occurs when the maximum number of consecutive
invalid login attempts has been reached or two consecutive invalid login attempts
occurred before the minimum interval. The alarm is cleared when the user profile is
disabled or deleted.

Corrective action
To clear the INTRUSIONEVT alarm, complete either Step 1 OR Step 2.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Disable the user in the User Security Database.
CLI config admin users edit

WebUI Select Administration > Security > Users.
On the User Security Administration window, select the applicable User ID
and click Details.
On the Modify User Details window, select Disabled in the Status field.
Click Apply > Close.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Delete the user in the User Security Database.
CLI config admin users delete

WebUI Select Administration > Security > Users.
On the User Security Administration window, select the applicable User ID
and click Delete.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
INVALIDEGRESS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-117
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures INVALIDEGRESS (Invalid or no egress port defined)
INVALIDEGRESS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
INVALIDEGRESS (Invalid or no egress port defined)

The INVALIDEGRESS condition is raised when a unidirectional AM2125A, AM2125B
or RA2P has an external topology provisioned on LineIn port, but no associated opposite
direction port is defined.
Severity Critical
Applicability AM2125A, AM2125B, RA2P
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the topology between ingress and egress LD (if there is egress LD). Check the
external topology for the ingress LD line port. If the topology is missing, add the
topology and re-run the egress adjustment.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Ensure that Opposite Direction Port field is provisioned correctly for the egress LD
Lineout port.
CLI config interface shelf/slot/port oppDirection

WEBUI From the Equipment Tree, select the OPS card, and select the desired port (A
or B).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
INVALIDTHRESHOLD
INVALIDTHRESHOLD
The OPS pack currently has an invalid switch threshold value provisioned. The threshold
must be greater than -30 dBm to clear the condition.
When a cross-connect is added for the first time, the INVALIDTHRESHOLD alarm is
raised for ports A and B, and then clears after a few seconds. If the XC is deleted and
reentered, then the INVALIDTHRESHOLD alarms is not raised.
Severity Minor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-118 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures INVALIDTHRESHOLD
INVALIDTHRESHOLD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Applicability OPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Determine whether the threshold calculation is in automatic or manual mode.
CLI show interface opsa shelf/slot/port

WEBUI From the Equipment Tree, select the OPS card, and select the desired port (A
or B).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Is manual switch calculation mode is in effect? (The default is auto.)
If... Then...
no (auto is being used) proceed to Step 3.
yes proceed to Step 4.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Verify that no LOS alarms are present on the A or B input ports that would inhibit the
switch calculation. Proceed to Step 5.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Set the threshold to a value greater than -30 dBm based on engineering rules for the
incoming channel power levels.
CLI config interface opsa shelf/slot/port switch switchthresh
dBm value
TLI ED-OCH:::SWTHRESH
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 STOP! You have completed this procedure.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
INVENTORYERROR
INVENTORYERROR (Card Inventory Error)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-119
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures INVENTORYERROR (Card Inventory Error)
INVENTORYERROR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The INVENTORYERROR alarm is raised when the device installed in the shelf has an
EEPROM that does not contain the correct or recognizable information.
Severity Minor
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 To clear the INVENTORYERROR alarm, remove and replace the affected device.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
LANLFI
LANLFI (Local Fault)

A Local Fault (LANLFI) condition may be raised on a client or network port of an
Ethernet card and is attributed to a fault detected between the far-end transmitter and
near-end receiver. When an LANLFI is raised at the receive port, this serves to notify the
user of a fault somewhere upstream of the port where the LANLFI condition has been
raised.

Applicability 11DPE12, 11QPA4, 43STX4, SFP, XFP
Corrective Action
NOTICE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-120 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures LANLFI (Local Fault)
LANLFI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 If the LANLFI condition has been raised on a client port, verify that the source is
correctly transmitting the Ethernet signal. Refer to its manufacturer's documentation for
any corrective actions.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If the LANLFI condition has been raised on a Network port, retrieve the alarm
information from the upstream path to determine if any failure is present. If there is an
indication of failure upstream of the port where the LANLFI is raised, fix this problem
first.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Perform a warm reset on the card where the LANLFI condition is raised.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Perform a cold reset on the card where the LANLFI condition is raised.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Replace the card. Refer to “Replacing System Components” (p. 3-20).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
LANLOS
LANLOS (LAN port LOS)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-121
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures LANLOS (LAN port LOS)
LANLOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OT port has detected LOS on Ethernet LAN or Fibre Channel facility. This defect
indicates loss of optical power at the input of the local LAN port.
These conditions may be caused by the following reasons:
• Damaged, cut or dirty fiber connected to the local receiver
• Damaged or dirty transmitter inside pluggable module
Severity Critical
Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 112SX10L, 11DPE12,
11DPE12E, 11QPA4, 11STAR1, 11STMM10, 11STGE12,
43SCX4, 43STX4
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing a LANLOS condition on an OT
port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Examine fiber and connector to the local port input.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Clean the fiber.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If fiber is damaged or cleaning the fiber does not clear the problem, replace the fiber.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If there is a pluggable module alarm present on the local port follow procedure for
detected alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
LANLSS
LANLSS (Loss of Synchronization)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-122 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures LANLSS (Loss of Synchronization)
LANLSS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OT port has detected Loss of 64B/66B or 8B/10B block/character synchronization on
10GbE, 1GbE or FC facility.
• Damaged, cut or dirty fiber connected to the local receiver
• Damaged or dirty transmitter inside pluggable module
Severity Critical
Applicability 11DPE12, 11DPE12E, 11QPA4, 11STAR1, 11STMM10,
11STGE12, 43STX4
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing a LANLSS condition on an OT
port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Clean the fiber.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If power level is within the operating range, check for pluggable module alarms.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If there is a pluggable module alarm present on the local port follow procedure for
detected alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
LANRFI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-123
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures LANRFI (Remote Fault Indication)
LANRFI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LANRFI (Remote Fault Indication)

An LANRFI condition may be raised on a client or network port of a transponder card
and may be attributed to a fault on the remote device (the equipment connected to the
client or network port). The remote device is either detecting a problem on its receive link
or has some sort of local fault and is generating an LANRFI in the downstream direction.

11DPE12E, 11QPA4, 43SCX4, 43STX4
Corrective Action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Retrieve alarms and conditions for the local node that has the RFI condition on its receive
port. Examine them and identify faults on the services supporting the devices that have
the RFI condition. Resolve any issues with respect to these faults first.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Repeat Step 1 for the far end device. Examine the devices associated with the same
services as in Step 1.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Perform a warm reset on the local card where the LANRFI condition is raised.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-124 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures LANRFI (Remote Fault Indication)
LANRFI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Perform a cold reset on the upstream device that is sending the LANRFI condition.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Perform a cold reset on the local card where the LANRFI condition is raised.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Perform a cold reset on the upstream device that is sending the LANRFI condition
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Reseat the local card. If this does not fix the problem, reseat the far-end card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Replace the alarmed card. Follow the return and repair process to return the card to an
authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
LASEREOL
LASEREOL (Laser end of life)

The OT port has detected laser end of life.
Severity Major
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-125
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures LASEREOL (Laser end of life)
LASEREOL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 If another card failure is reported on the card, follow the procedure for that specific alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If the port is pluggable module, remove and reinsert the same module. If the alarm does
not clear, replace the module.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
LCK
LCK (Locked - OTU)

OT port has detected Locked condition at ODUk Path layer. This defect indicates that
network operator in an external multi-vendor OTN network has locked the ODUk
payload by user command. LCK maintenance signal is not sourced by 1830 PSS network.
This may be caused if the network operator in external OTN network has caused insertion
of LCK maintenance signal.
Severity Critical
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-126 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures LCK (Locked - OTU)
LCK
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing an LCK condition declared on an
OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Contact network operator(s) responsible for equipment that sources OTM-0.2 signal to
the affected client port to clear the LCK maintenance signal.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
LCKEGR
LCKEGR (Egress Locked - ODU)

OT port has detected Locked condition at ODUk Path layer. This defect indicates that
network operator in an external multi-vendor OTU network has locked the ODUk
payload by user command. LCK maintenance signal is not sourced by 1830 PSS network.
This may be caused if the network operator in external OTU network has caused insertion
of LCK maintenance signal.
Severity CR
Applicability 43STX4, 43STX4P
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing an LCKEGR condition declared
on an OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
the affected client port to clear the LCK maintenance signal.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
LFD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-127
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures LFD (GFP Loss of Frame Delineation)
LFD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LFD (GFP Loss of Frame Delineation)

OT port has detected Loss of GFP frame Delineation. This defect indicates that bit stream
in the payload area used for GFP transport has degraded transmission to the point where
boundaries of GFP frames can no longer be reliably detected.
• Failure in the OCh trail used for transporting GFP layer
• Malfunction of source or sink GFP functions
Severity SA
43SCX4, 4DPA4
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing an LFD condition declared on an
OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Inspect the OCh trail which is used as a server transport layer for GFP stream.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If any alarms are detected on OCh trail, locate the farthest upstream point and follow the
procedure for clearing this alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Locate the far end OT that sources the GFP stream.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Perform a soft reset of both local and far-end OT.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If Step 4 does not clear the problem replace far-end OT.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 If Step 5 does not clear the problem replace the local OT.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-128 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures LFIEGR (Remote Client Local Fault)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LFIEGR
LFIEGR (Remote Client Local Fault)

OT port has detected LFI ordered set on 10GBE LAN service transported over OTUk in
transmit direction.
This may be caused if the remote client equipment is generating LFI ordered set.
Severity NA
Applicability 11QPA4, 11STAR1, 43STX4
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing LFIEGR declared on an OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Locate far end OT.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform the steps in the procedure “LANLFI” (p. 2-120) on the far end port.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
LINKDOWN
LINKDOWN (Link down)

The Ethernet link between devices is out of service. This alarm is raised on Ethernet ports
when the Ethernet link is down.
Note: The LINKDOWN alarm is not raised if auto-negotiation is enabled on an OT
client port, but disabled on the directly connected ethernet port on client equipment.
Severity Critical
Applicability 11DPE12, 11DPE12E, 11STAR1, 11STMM10, 11STGE12, EC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-129
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures LINKDOWN (Link down)
LINKDOWN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Trace the source of the LINKDOWN condition to the associated card and port upstream.
Verify that the source is operationally up by checking the Admin state. If the Admin state
is Up, then toggle the administrative state from UP->DOWN->UP.
EMS Double-click the NE and then on the alarmed card's client receive port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Remove the fiber from the port where the LINKDOWN condition is raised and clean the
fiber and the bulkhead connector.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Repeat Step 2 for the other end of the fiber and port where it is connected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Replace the fiber jumper with a new one.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Perform a warm reset on the card that is the source of the Ethernet signal.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Perform a warm reset on the card where the LINKDOWN condition is raised.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-130 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures LINKDOWN (Link down)
LINKDOWN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Perform a cold reset on the card that is the source of the Ethernet signal.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Perform a cold reset on the card where the LINKDOWN condition is raised.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Reseat the card that is the source of the Ethernet signal.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Reseat the card where the LINKDOWN condition is present

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Replace the card that is the source of the Ethernet signal.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Replace the card where the LINKDOWN condition is present

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
LINKUP
LINKUP (Link Up)

The LINKUP autonomous message is issued after serial connection is established on the
CIT port.
Severity TC
Applicability FAN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-131
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures LOAM (Loss of Alignment Marker Lock)
LOAM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOAM
LOAM (Loss of Alignment Marker Lock)

The LOAM condition is raised when the system cannot detect the PCS lane marker, or the
marker has been displaced.
Severity Critical
Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCA1
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Replace the CFP.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
LOC
LOC (Loss of Continuity)

The OT port has detected a loss of continuity at the MEP layer. A MEP detects LOC with
a peer MEP when it stops receiving CCM frames from that peer ME. Such a defect
condition can be caused by hard failures such as a link failure/device failure, or soft
failures such as memory corruption, or misconfigurations.
Severity Major
This alarm is raised when an MEP receives CCM frames with an incorrect MEG ID. The
alarm is cleared when the MEP does not receive CCM frames with the correct MEG ID.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-132 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures LOC (Loss of Continuity)
LOC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the peer MEP mepcc is enable and the check the OCH the alarms/conditions along
the OCh trail.
CLI show card 11dpe12e shelf/slot ethoam md1ma{1-400} mep

WEBUI In the Equipment Tree, select the desired 11DPE12E card.
Select Ethernet OAM > Maintenance Domain > Maintenance Associations
> MEP.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
LOCKOUTOFPR
LOCKOUTOFPR (Lockout of protection)

The Lockout Of Protection condition occurs when a user initiates a lockout switch request
within a protection group.
A lockout forces traffic onto the working facility/equipment and prevents protection
switching from occurring. Clearing the lockout will again allow protection switching to
take place and will result in the lockout condition being cleared.

Applicability 11STAR1, 11STMM10, 11STGE12, 4DPA4
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Observe from the condition statement the location of the protection group member that
has the active condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
reporting the LOCKOUTOFPR alarm.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-133
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures LOCKOUTOFPR (Lockout of protection)
LOCKOUTOFPR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Enter the following commands on both the near-end and far-end NEs to determine the
identity of the protection group involved in the active condition.
CLI show aps group *
Note the APS group ID / AIDs of the APS group.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Enter the following command on both the near-end and far-end NEs and verify that the
protection path is alarm free. Use the group ID/AID identified in Step 4.
CLI show aps group <x>
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Determine if there are any outstanding alarms on the system pertaining to the service.
CLI alm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Clear all of the active alarms.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Clear the lockout request.
CLI config aps group [x] clear
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
LOCKOUTOFTIMREF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-134 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures
LOCKOUTOFTIMREF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Lock out of a Timing Reference from selection condition occurs when the OT port
has detected an LOCKOUTOFTIMREF at the LINEREF layer.
Severity NA
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
LOF
LOF (Loss Of Frame)

A receive port on one of the optical cards has detected a Loss Of Frame. The LOF alarm
is raised if:
• the SONET framer detects framing errors in the A1/A2 overhead bytes as per the
SONET specification
• the OTN framer detects corruption in the Framing Alignment Signal (FAS) bytes.
Severity Critical
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-135
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures LOF (Loss Of Frame)
LOF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-136 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures Transponder Client Port Loss of Frame
LOF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Transponder Client Port Loss of Frame

Corrective Action
NOTICE
This procedure details the corrective action for a LOF against the client port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Query for the optical receive power on the port where the LOF condition is present.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Ensure that the source is compatible with the port that it is connected to. Check that the
source is a compatible type with the same line rate as expected at the receive port. Also
verify that the fiber is the correct type (multi-mode / single mode) and that the other end
of the fiber is connected properly.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Query the source of the signal for a reading of its output power (refer to the source
equipment manufacturer's procedures). If this is not possible, carefully remove the fiber
from the transmit port of the source card and verify the output power using an optical
power meter. If the output power is within acceptable limits, continue with Step 4. If the
output power is not within acceptable limits, the problem is with the source. Follow the
instructions on debugging from the source equipment manufacturer.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
administrative state from UP-->DOWN-->UP.
CLI config interface OT pack <shelf slot port> state
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-137
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures Transponder Client Port Loss of Frame
LOF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Remove the fiber from the receive port where the LOF is raised and measure the optical
power.
If... Then...
the optical power is below the required using standard optical fiber jumper cleaning
threshold, procedure, clean the fiber, and measure the
power again.
the optical power is within the required limits, clean the receive connector on the card.
If the LOF condition is still present, the problem may be with the card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Perform a warm reset of the card exhibiting the Loss of Frame.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 If the client port has an pluggable module installed, verify the pluggable module (this
includes checking the pluggable module and replacing if necessary; do this before cold
reset or reseat as it does not affect other client signals).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-138 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures Transponder Network Port Loss of Frame
LOF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Transponder Network Port Loss of Frame

Corrective Action
NOTICE
The following procedure details the corrective action for an LOF against the network
port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
trouble-point for the light-path. The procedure guides the user through the investigation
and resolution of the problem tracing back through to the source of the light path.
If the problem is the head end of the path (the transponder card at the source) then:
1. Check the add NE for conditions against the OT port and resolve any issues.
2. Verify that the source card network-facing port is administratively UP and
transmitting.
3. Verify that the add path is correctly fibered. If the add element has no transponder,
verify that the light source is compatible.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Verify that the far end transponder port to which the alarmed port is connected is of the
same type, and that the configuration of both ports is the same (for example, that the
encapsulation mode is the same for both).
CLI show interface <shelf slot port>(perform at both the near and far
ends)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-139
Issue 1 June 2011
LOF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If encapsulation does not match, then configure the incorrect side to match up.
CLI config interface 11star1 <shelf slot>

shelf slot/C1 tengige encmode [ cbrlan11.049 |
cbrlan11.096 | gfp-f | gfp-p ]
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Ensure that there are no channel alarms or conditions for this channel on the near-end NE.
If there are, clear them.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Query for the optical receive power on the network port where the LOF condition is
present.
CLI sh int <shelf slot port>
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If... Then...
threshold, procedure, clean the fiber, and measure the
power again.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Confirm that the drop path is fibered correctly:

1. Confirm that the network port of the transponder is fibered to the appropriate port on
the appropriate OT.
2. Confirm that the mux port of the OT is fibered to the appropriate port on the
appropriate CWR8.
3. Verify that there is a fiber properly plugged into the alarmed port.
4. Verify that the fiber is the correct type (multi-mode / single mode) and that the other
end of the fiber is connected properly.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Perform a line loop-back on the far end network port. If this resolves the local (near-end)
alarm then the problem is associated with the far end card.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-140 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
LOF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Perform a warm reset of the card of the transponder card.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Perform a cold reset of the card of the transponder card.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-141
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures LOF-O (Incoming SUPVY LOF)
LOF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOF-O (Incoming SUPVY LOF)

The OSC SFP receive port on one of the amplifier cards has detected a Loss Of Frame.
The LOF-O alarm is raised if the SONET framer detects framing errors in the A1/A2
overhead bytes as per the SONET specification
Severity Major
AM2125B, AM2325B, OSCT
Corrective Action
NOTICE
This procedure details the corrective action for a LOF-O against the OSC port. At the end
of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If it does not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Query for the OSC receive power on the port where the LOF-O condition is present.

WEBUI From the Equipment Tree, select the card, and select the desired
port.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-142 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
LOF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Ensure that the adjacent node is provisioned for OC3 format of the OSC signal. Also
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If... Then...
no active traffic is present on the system remove the fiber from the receive port where
the LOF-O is raised and measure the optical
power.
threshold for the type of pluggable module procedure, clean the fiber, and measure the
installed power again.
the optical power is within the required limits clean the receive connector on the card. If the
LOF-O condition is still present, the problem
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-143
Issue 1 June 2011
LOF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
LOFEGR
LOFEGR (Loss of Frame Egress)

OT port has detected Loss of Frame on CBR2G5 (transparent OC48/STM16) or CBR10G
(transparent STM64) service transported over OTUk in transmit direction.
Severity NA
Applicability 112SCX10, 112SX10L, 11QPA4,11STAR1 11STMM10, 43SCX,
43STX4, 43STX4P, 43STA1P, 4DPA4
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing LOFEGR declared on an OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform the steps in the procedure “LOF (Loss Of Frame)” (p. 2-135) on the far end port.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-144 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures LOGAIN (Amplifier out of operational range - amplifier gain
too low)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOGAIN
LOGAIN (Amplifier out of operational range - amplifier gain

too low)
The ingress power to the amplifier added to the programmed gain (both in dB's) is lower
than the minimum allowable power supported by the amplifier.
Severity Minor
AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2325B
Corrective Action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform the procedure “Path Power Trace” (p. 3-8) and locate the likely point that is the
cause of the LOGAIN alarm. This may be on the upstream NE or the local one. Retrieve
alarms and conditions and, using the appropriate corrective actions, resolve these issues
first.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Attempt an egress or ingress amplifier adjust, depending on the type of amplifier that is
raising this alarm. If any adjust fails, there may be other optical power related alarms that
are raised as a result. Resolve these issues by following the appropriate procedure.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-145
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures LOGAIN (Amplifier out of operational range - amplifier gain
LOGAIN too low)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 It is possible that the gain range provisioned by the EPT for this amplifier is insufficient
to accommodate the unexpected change in loss in the network. Capture the current
operating state of the network, using the 1354 RM-PhM XML network export feature.
Refer the problem to network planning for analysis.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If this does not resolve the issue, then the problem may be with the card itself. Perform a
warm reset on the card where the OPR condition is raised.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
LOM
LOM (Loss of Multiframe - OTU)

This alarm is raised at an OT port when the OT receiver cannot synchronize to a
multiframe indicator of an incoming OTUk bit stream.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-146 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures LOM (Loss of Multiframe - OTU)
LOM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Received power may not be within the acceptable range on OT port input
• Damaged or dirty transmitter inside pluggable module on the OT
• Problem at the upstream OT
Severity Major
Corrective Action
NOTICE
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing the LOM declared on an OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Query the receive power on the port where the LOM condition is present.

If the power is below a minimum threshold, the problem may be upstream from that port.
Visually inspect the OT port connection. Ensure that there are no loose fibers. If so,
connect the fiber properly.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check the immediate upstream OT for any alarm conditions. If there are any, clear the
failures.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-147
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures LOM (Loss of Multiframe - OTU)
LOM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Perform a warm reset of the card exhibiting the LOM.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Perform a cold reset of the card exhibiting the LOM.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Reseat the OT. Refer to “Reseating a Card” (p. 3-19).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Replace the OT. Refer to “Replacing System Components” (p. 3-20). Follow the return
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
LOS
LOS (Loss of Signal)

A receive port on one of the optical cards has detected a loss of signal. The LOS condition
may be raised for the following reasons:
• a misconnected, damaged, or dirty fiber
• the received power may not be within the acceptable range
The procedures in this section are as follows:
• LOS (Channel Absent Alarm)
• LD Input LOS
• CWR Input LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-148 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures LOS (Loss of Signal)
LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• LOS (Loss of Signal)
• OMD Input LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-149
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures LOS (Channel Absent)
LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOS (Channel Absent)

Wavelength Tracker could not detect the provisioned channel. Possible reasons for this
alarm may be:
• the channel is missing
• the channel is outside the detectable range
• the Wavekeys are not being correctly applied at the source OT or SVAC
If the channel is missing it could be a provisioning error or fibering error.
At the end of each step wait for several seconds to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the
next step:
Note: It may take several seconds for channel power out of range and channel absent
alarms to clear when performing the corrective actions listed below.
Severity Critical
AM2325B, OPS, OSCT, CWR8, CWR8-88, MESH4, OPS, OSCT,
WR
Corrective Action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
trouble point for the lightpath. Resolve issues/alarms at the trouble point.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-150 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If resolving upstream alarms did not make the alarm clear on the local NE then the
problem may be with this NE. Find the source of the channel's service and ensure that the
add cross connect is administratively up and that there are no Wavelength Tracker or
Channel alarms/conditions for the associated OT or SVAC. If there are, clear those
alarms/conditions.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Retrieve the configured topology upstream from this port to the services' ingress point
into the NE. Ensure that the physical fiber topology matches.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If there are numerous instances of this condition occurring on a particular card, check to
see if these alarms are also occurring on the next downstream card. If they are, then
continue with Step 5. If they are not occurring at the next downstream card, then there
may be a problem with the indicated card. Reset the card, and wait for one minute. If the
alarms do not clear, continue with Step 5.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Verify that the loss in the fiber feeding the port is not higher than expected by comparing
the bulk powers ending and leaving the fiber. If the loss is higher than expected, clean the
fiber ends, and if this does not solve the problem, replace the fiber.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-151
Issue 1 June 2011
LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-152 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures LD Input LOS
LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LD Input LOS
The LINE port on one of the amplifier cards has detected a Loss Of Signal. The LOS
alarm is raised if the power measured at the port input drops below a threshold.
Severity Critical
Applicability AHPLG, AHPHG, ALPHG, ALPFGT, A2325A, AM2017B,
AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2325B, OSCT
Corrective Action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Query the receive power on the port where the LOS condition is present.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Verify that the fiber is the correct type (multi-mode / single mode) and that the other end
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-153
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures LD Input LOS
LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If... Then...
the LOS is raised and measure the optical
power.
installed: LINE Normal Range: -32.0 dBm measure the power again.
(LINE Normal Range)
LOS condition is still present, the problem
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Perform a warm reset of the card exhibiting the Loss of Signal.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Perform a cold reset of the card exhibiting the Loss of Signal.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-154 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures CWR Input LOS
LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CWR Input LOS

The SIG port on one of the CWR8 cards has detected a Loss Of Signal. The LOS alarm is
raised if the power measured at the port input drops below a threshold.
Severity Critical
Applicability CWR8, CWR8-88
Corrective Action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-155
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures CWR Input LOS
LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Remove the fiber from the receive port where the LOS is raised and measure the optical
power.
If... Then...
the optical power is below the threshold of using the standard optical fiber jumper
-4.0 to +20 dBm (SIG Normal Range) cleaning procedure, clean the fiber, and
measure the power again.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-156 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures LOS (Loss of signal)
LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOS (Loss of signal)

The corrective actions for the loss of signal condition are dependent upon the AID where
the condition is raised. The procedure addresses each of these. Perform the procedure
“Path Power Trace” (p. 3-8) to determine on which of the port types the LOS has
occurred.
• Transponder port LOS - go to procedure “Transponder Port Loss of Signal” (p. 2-157)
Severity Critical
Applicability 112SCX10, 112SX10L, 11DPE12E, 11QPA4, 11STAR1,
11STMM10, 11STGE12, 43SCX4, 43STX4, 4DPA4, MVAC,
SVAC
Transponder Port Loss of Signal
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Query the optical receive power on the port where the LOS condition is present.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If... Then...
the power is below the minimum threshold, the problem is upstream from that port.
Continue with Step 3.
the power is within acceptable limits, the problem is with the card itself. Proceed to
Step 5.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-157
Issue 1 June 2011
LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Ensure that the source is compatible with the port and that it is on. Check that the source
is a compatible type (for example, if you are expecting a single-mode fiber signal (either
1310 or 155x nm), check that the source is not a multi-mode fiber signal (typically 850
nm).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Query the source of the signal for a reading of its output power (please refer to source
equipment manufacturer's procedures). If this is not possible, carefully remove the fiber
from the transmit port of the source card and verify the output power using an optical
power meter.
If... Then...
the output power is within acceptable limits, continue with Step 5.
the output power is not within acceptable the problem is with the source. Follow the
limits, instructions on debugging from the source
equipment manufacturer.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
administrative state from UP >DOWN > UP.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
power.
If... Then...
threshold, cleaning procedure, clean the fiber, and
If the LOS condition is still present, the problem may be with the card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-158 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-159
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures Input LOS
LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Input LOS
Severity Critical
Applicability MESH4, RA2P
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Restore span fiber integrity.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-160 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures OMD Input LOS
LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OMD Input LOS

The OMD port on one of the SFC cards has detected a Loss Of Signal. The LOS alarm is
raised if the power measured at the port input drops below a threshold.
Severity Critical
Applicability SFCn, SFDn
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for a LOS against the OMD port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Verify that the fiber is the correct type (multi-mode/single mode) and that the other end of
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
power.
If... Then...
the optical power is below the threshold level using the standard optical fiber jumper
provisioned by the 1354 RM-PhM for the type cleaning procedure, clean the fiber, and
of port measure the power again.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-161
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures OMD Input LOS
LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If... Then...
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
LOSDCM
LOSDCM (From DCM Input LOS)

The From DCM port on one of the amplifier cards has detected a Loss Of Signal. The
LOS alarm is raised if the power measured at the port input drops below a threshold.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-162 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures LOSDCM (From DCM Input LOS)
LOSDCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Severity Critical
Applicability A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, AM2017B, AM2125A,
AM2125B, AM2325A, AM2325B
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for a LOS against the DCM port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Verify that the fiber is the correct type (multi-mode/single mode) and that the other end of
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If... Then...
no active traffic is present on the system remove the fiber from the port where the LOS
is raised and measure the optical power.
the optical power is more than 15 dB below using the standard optical fiber jumper
the level coming out of the amplifier DCM cleaning procedure, clean the fiber, and
port measure the power again.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-163
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures LOSDCM (From DCM Input LOS)
LOSDCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
LOSLDSIG
LOSLDSIG (LD SIG Input LOS)

The SIG port on one of the amplifier cards has detected a Loss Of Signal. The LOS alarm
is raised if the power measured at the port input drops below a threshold.
Severity Critical
Applicability AHPLG, AHPHG, ALPHG, ALPFGT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-164 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures LOSLDSIG (LD SIG Input LOS)
LOSLDSIG
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for a LOS against the SIG port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Remove the fiber from the port where the LOS is raised and measure the optical power.
If... Then...
the optical power is below the threshold of using the standard optical fiber jumper
-3.0 dBm cleaning procedure, clean the fiber, and
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-165
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures LOSLDSIG (LD SIG Input LOS)
LOSLDSIG
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
LOSOCM
LOSOCM (WTOCM Input LOS)

The LOSOCM condition indicates that a input loss of signal has occurred on the reported
WTOCM input port.
Severity Major
Applicability WTOCM
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing the LOSOCM against the
WTOCM input port. At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue
with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Verify the fiber is connected between the WTOCM input port and its associated LD MON
port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Verify there is no existing LOS condition on the associated LD card.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Retrieve power level reading on the local port, verify the power in within the normal
operating range.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-166 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures LOSOCM (WTOCM Input LOS)
LOSOCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Clean the fiber.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Replace the fiber.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
LOS-O
LOS-O (Incoming SUPVY LOS)

The OSC SFP receive port on one of the amplifier cards has detected a Loss Of Signal.
The LOS-O alarm is raised if the SONET framer detects framing errors in the A1/A2
overhead bytes as per the SONET specification
On a fiber span, the OSC mode should match on both ends. If the rates do not match,
LOS-O is raised on one end, and Data Link Down (see “NET” (p. 2-202) is raised on the
other end.
Severity Minor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-167
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures LOS-O (Incoming SUPVY LOS)
LOS-O
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
NOTICE
This procedure details the corrective action for a LOS-O against the OSC port. At the end
of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If it does not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Query for the OSC receive power on the port where the LOS-O condition is present.

port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Ensure that the adjacent node is provisioned for OC3 format of the OSC signal. Also
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If... Then...
the LOS-O is raised and measure the optical
power.
installed measure the power again.
LOS-O condition is still present, the problem
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-168 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures LOS-O (Incoming SUPVY LOS)
LOS-O
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
LOS-OUT
LOS-OUT (Outgoing Loss of Signal) and (Outgoing Channel

Absent)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-169
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures LOS-OUT (Outgoing Loss of Signal) and (Outgoing Channel
LOS-OUT Absent)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The provisioned channel could not be detected at a Wavelength Tracker detect point. The
channel is either missing, operating at a power that is outside the detectable range, or
wavekeys are not being correctly applied at the source OT/SVAC. Assuming that the
Wavelength Tracker information is correctly provisioned, this alarm may be raised if:
• the channel is not launched
• the received channel power is outside of the detectable power sensitivity range.
• the intra-node fiber connections do not match the physical topology.
• the fiber is damaged.
This alarm can also be raised in the following circumstances:
• the OT or SVAC fails to encode the correct wavekeys
• a card capable of wavekey decoding is faulty
Severity Critical
Corrective Action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
trouble point for the service. Resolve issues/alarms at the trouble point. If the alarm
originates on the NE where the service enters the network, ensure that the OT or SVAC is
fibered to the correct port on the OMD or CWR8. The OT or SVAC may be connected
directly to the OMD or CWR8 or through another OT or SVAC card.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-170 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
LOS-OUT Absent)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If resolving upstream alarms does not clear the alarm on the local NE, then the problem
may be with this NE. Find the source of the channel's service and ensure that the add
cross connect is administratively up and that there are no Wavelength Tracker or channel
alarms/conditions for the associated OT or SVAC. If there are, clear those
alarms/conditions.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Retrieve the configured topology upstream from this port to the service's ingress point
into the NE. Ensure that the physical fiber topology matches.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If there are numerous instances of this condition occurring on a particular card, check to
see if these alarms are also occurring on the next downstream card. If they are, then
continue with Step 5. If they are not occurring at the next downstream card, then there
may be a problem with the indicated card. Reset the card, and wait for one minute. If the
alarms do not clear, continue with Step 5.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Verify that the loss in the fiber feeding the port is not higher than expected by comparing
the bulk powers ending and leaving the fiber. If the loss is higher than expected, clean the
fiber ends, and if this does not solve the problem, replace the fiber.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-171
Issue 1 June 2011
LOS-OUT Absent)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
LOS-P
LOS-P (Incoming Payload LOS)

The OT port has detected an Optical Channel Loss of Signal Failure.
• A misconnected, damaged or dirty fiber on the trail between the local OTUk receive
port and the far end transmitter
Note: When a cross-connect is added, the LOS-P alarm is raised for ports A and B,
and then clears after a few seconds.
Severity Critical
Applicability 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 112SX10L, 11DPE12, 11DPE12E,
43STX4, 43STX4P, 4DPA4, AM2017B, AM2125A, AM2125B,
AM2325B
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing the LOS-P declared on an OT
port. At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next
step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-172 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures LOS-P (Incoming Payload LOS)
LOS-P
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If power level is low on the DWDM facing port, identify the associated OCh trail and
verify the power levels along the OCh trail.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Identify the farthest upstream point relative to the far end OTUk port at which power
level falls within the expected range.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Check the alarms/conditions on the node located in Step 3 or the node immediately
upstream from point identified in Step 4.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Correct the problem identified in Step 4.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 If all power levels along the OCh trails fall within the target range, locate the fiber
connected directly to receiver of the port which detects SSF condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Clean the fiber.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 If the problem is detected on the client port of 11STAR1 OT, and the power level is
within the operating range, check for pluggable module alarms.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
LPBKLINE
LPBKLINE (Line [Facility] Loopback Active)

A line loopback is active on the specified port. Loopbacks are user-initiated and may only
be cleared by manually removing them from the port.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-173
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures LPBKLINE (Line [Facility] Loopback Active)
LPBKLINE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: It can take several minutes for transmission to be established on 40G OTs after
removing loopbacks.

11DPE12E, 11STAR1, 11STMM10, 11STGE12, 43SCX4,
43STA1P, 43STX4, 43STX4P, 4DPA2, 4DPA4
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Remove the loopback from the port.
CLI config interface <shelf slot port> loopback line disabled
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
LPBKTERM
LPBKTERM (Diagnostic (Terminal) loopback active)

A terminal loopback is active on the specified port. Loopbacks are user-initiated and may
only be cleared by manually removing them from the port.
Note: It can take several minutes for transmission to be established on 40G OTs after
removing loopbacks.

11DPE12E, 11STAR1, 11STMM10, 11STGE12, 43SCX4,
43STA1P, 43STX4, 43STX4P, 4DPA2, 4DPA4
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-174 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures LPBKTERM (Diagnostic (Terminal) loopback active)
LPBKTERM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Remove the loopback from the port.
CLI config interface <shelf slot port>

loopback terminal disabled
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
LSPOW_ALM_W
LSPOW_ALM_W (Laser Back-Facet Optical Power Cross

Threshold)
Severity Major
Applicability 43STX4P
Corrective Action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-175
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures LSPOW_ALM_W (Laser Back-Facet Optical Power Cross
LSPOW_ALM_W Threshold)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
LSTEMP_ALM_W
LSTEMP_ALM_W (Laser Cooling Current Cross Threshold)
Severity Major
Applicability 43STA1P, 43STX4P
Corrective Action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-176 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures LSSEGR (Remote Client Loss of Synchronization)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LSSEGR
LSSEGR (Remote Client Loss of Synchronization)

OT port has detected Loss of 64B/66B block synchronization on 10GbE facility in
transmit direction.

Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 112SX10L, 11QPA4, 11STAR1,
43SCX4, 43STX4
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing LSSEGR declared on an OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform the steps in the procedure “LANLSS” (p. 2-122) on the far end port.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
MAN
MAN (Manually caused abnormal condition - card in

maintenance) / MAN (Manually caused abnormal condition -
Port in maintenance) / MAN (Logical removal performed on a
timing reference)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-177
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures MAN (Manually caused abnormal condition - card in
MAN maintenance) / MAN (Manually caused abnormal condition -
Port in maintenance) / MAN (Logical removal performed on
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
a timing reference)
The MAN (card in maintenance) condition is raised on a card when the user has
purposefully placed the card into the maintenance state. Entities in maintenance still
provide service but don't report alarms. They monitor for faults and raise non-reported
conditions. The maintenance state provides access to service affecting commands like
port loop-backs.
The MAN (port in maintenance) condition is raised on a specific port on a card when the
user has purposefully placed the port into the maintenance state.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-178 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures MAN (Manually caused abnormal condition - card in
MAN maintenance)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MAN (Manually caused abnormal condition - card in

maintenance)

43STA1P, 43STX4, 43STX4P, 4DPA2, 4DPA4, A2325A, ALPHG,
AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPFGT, AM2017B, AM2125A, AM2125B,
AM2318A, AM2325B, CWR, DCM, ITLB, ITLU, MESH4,
MVAC, OPS, OSCT, RA2P, SFC, SFD, SFD44, SFD44B, SVAC ,
WR, WTOCM
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Manually place the card in service using the following command:
CLI config slot shelf slotstate up
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-179
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures MAN (Manually caused abnormal condition - port in
MAN maintenance)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MAN (Manually caused abnormal condition - port in

maintenance)

Applicability 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 11STAR1, 11STMM10, 11STGE12,
AM2017B, AM2325B, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, ALPFGT,
43STA1P, 43STX4, 43STX4P, 4DPA2, 4DPA4, CWR8, MVAC,
OPS, OSCT, RA2P, SFC, SFD, SVAC, WTOCM
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Manually place the port in service using the following command:
CLI config interface <shelf slot port> state up
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
MAN (Logical removal performed on a timing reference)

The MAN condition occurs when the OT port has detected a MAN at the LINEREF layer,
which indicates that a logical removal was performed on a timing reference.
Severity Minor
To clear the condition, check with the assigning of connection between the LINEREF and
the physical port.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-180 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures MANRESET (Card Manual Reset)
MANRESET
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MANRESET
MANRESET (Card Manual Reset)

The addressed card or slot is performing a manual reset.
The MANRESET condition is issued as a transient condition to inform you that a reset of
a pack has started. There is no corrective action to perform. Any failures on the pack will
be reported after the reset completes.

Service affecting? Yes, if card is carrying service
43STA1P, 43STX4, 43STX4P, 4DPA4, A2325A, AHPHG,
AHPLG, ALPHG, AM2017B, AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2318A,
AM2325B, CWR8, CWR8-88, EC, FLC, MESH4, MT0C, MVAC,
MT0C, OPS, RA2P, SVAC, WR, WTOCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-181
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures MANSWTIMREF (Timing selection was switched by a manual
MANSWTIMREF command to a timing reference)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MANSWTIMREF
MANSWTIMREF (Timing selection was switched by a manual

command to a timing reference)
The MANSWTIMREF condition occurs when OT port detects MANSWTIMREF at the
LINEREF layer. A LINEREF detects MANSWTIMREF when the timing selection is
switched by a manual command to a timing reference.
Severity Minor
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Clear manual switch.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
MANSWTOINT
MANSWTOINT (Manual Switch to Internal Timing )

The OT port has detected a MANSWTOINT at the SYNC layer. A SYNC detects
MANSWTOINT when a manual switch to Internal Timing (forced Free-Running mode)
has occurred.
Severity NA
Applicability SYNC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-182 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures MANSWTOINT (Manual Switch to Internal Timing )
MANSWTOINT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Clear the manual switch.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
MANWKSWBK
MANWKSWBK (Manual switch to working)

This is a standing condition indicating that a manual switch back to the working is active.
The manual switch of working back to working condition occurs when a user initiates a
manual switch to work request within a protection group. A manual switch to working
forces traffic onto the working facility/equipment unless the working facility is in the
Signal-Fail or Signal-Degrade state.
Clearing the manual switch will clear the condition. In the absence of other outstanding
requests, a cleared manual switch back to work will leave the switch position on work.

Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Display the protection group for the associated <shelf slot port>.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-183
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures MANWKSWBK (Manual switch to working)
MANWKSWBK
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
MANWKSWPR
MANWKSWPR (Manual switch to protection)

This is a standing condition indicating a manual switch to protect is active.
The manual switch of working facility/equipment to protection condition is raised when a
user initiates a manual switch to protect request within a protection group. A manual
switch to protect forces traffic onto the protect facility/equipment unless the protect
facility is in the signal fail or signal degrade state. A manual switch to protect also
prevents reversion to the working path from occurring. Clearing the manual switch will
clear the condition.
If reversion is enabled, a switch will occur to the work facility immediately after the
manual switch has cleared.

Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-184 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures MANWKSWPR (Manual switch to protection)
MANWKSWPR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
MISMATCH
MISMATCH (Card Mismatch); MISMATCH (Power Filter

Mismatch); MISMATCH (Shelf Mismatch),
The MISMATCH condition type corrective actions will be divided by their respective
condition text below.
For information on some of the procedures discussed in the following trouble-clearing
procedures, please see the Alcatel-Lucent Product Information and Planning Guide.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-185
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures MISMATCH (Card Mismatch)
MISMATCH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MISMATCH (Card Mismatch)

The Card Mismatch alarm indicates that the card inserted into the affected slot is of a
different type than that which was provisioned. This could occur when there is a card type
mismatch.
Severity Critical
Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCX10, 112SX10L, 11DPE12E, 11DPM12,
43STX4P, 4DPA2, 4DPA4, ALPHG, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPFGT,
AM2017B, AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2318A, DCM, CWR,
ITLB, ITLU, MESH4, MVAC, OPS, OSCT, RA2P, SFC, SFD44,
SFD44B, SVAC, WR, WTOCM
Corrective Action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Display the provisioned card type:
CLI show slot shelf slot

WEBUI In the Equipment Tree, select the desired card slot.
On the Details tab, view the value in the Present/Provisioned field.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Verify from the network plan what type of card is supposed to be in that slot.
If... Then...
it is a frequency dependent card (SFC or SFD) ensure the correct frequency.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-186 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
MISMATCH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If... Then...
it is a DCM card, ensure that it is the correct compensation
distance.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If the inserted card is the incorrect type, remove the card and insert one that matches the
provisioned type for the slot.
If the provisioning is incorrect, then reconfigure to make the provisioning match the card:
CLI 1. config slot <shelf slot port> state down(Enter this
command for all client ports on the card and then the network port.)
2. config slot <shelf slot> state down
3. config slot <shelf slot> type empty
4. config slot <shelf slot> type <correct type>
WEBUI 1. Select the slot of the desired card, and on the Card Properties window,
select Out of Service in the Primary State field, and click Submit.
2. Click the Delete tab, select Delete this card, and click Submit.
3. On the Provision Card window, select the desired card type in the
Provisioned Type field, and click Submit.
If the provisioning is correct and the card is of a matching type, then there is an issue with
the card itself. Continue with Step 4.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-187
Issue 1 June 2011
MISMATCH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-188 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures MISMATCH (Power Filter Mismatch)
MISMATCH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MISMATCH (Power Filter Mismatch)

The Power Filter Mismatch alarm indicates that the two power filters do not have
matching current carrying capacity or do not match the preprovisioned filter type. The
Power Filter Mismatch alarm could also indicate that power filter Wavelength Tracker
function does not match the shelf Wavelength Tracker mode. This alarm can also occur
after a new installation on a PSS-32 drop shelf configuration.
Severity Minor
Applicability PF
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
If... Then...
the Power Filter Mismatch alarm is raised after proceed to Step 7.
a new installation on a PSS-32 drop shelf
configuration,
the Power Filter Mismatch alarm is raised for continue with Step 2.
any other reason,
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Identify the power filter model engineered for the installation.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Equip the correct matching power filters.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Identify whether the PF Wavelength Tracker function matches shelf Wavelength Tracker
mode. (For example, PFDCA does not support Wavelength Tracker.)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Set the Wavelength Tracker mode of the shelf to the correct mode.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Provision the shelf EXPECTED_AMPS parameter with the correct value: 30, 50, or 70
amps.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-189
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures MISMATCH (Power Filter Mismatch)
MISMATCH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Query the shelf for the actual power filters installed in each shelf:
CLI NE# show pf <shelf/slot>
WEBUI Expand the tree structure of the shelf.
Select Slot 19: PF and/or Slot 36: PF. The Details page in the Provision/Info
tab shows the actual power filter details.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Query the shelf for provisioned “expectedamps” value:
CLI NE# show shelf <shelf number>

WEBUI Select the shelf in the tree structure.
The Details page in the Provision/Info tab displays the provisioned
Expected PF value.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 For each PF with MISMATCH alarms, set the “expectedamps” value to the appropriate
power filter type:
CLI NE# config shelf <shelf number> expectedamps <value>

WEBUI Select the shelf in the tree structure.
The Details page in the Provision/Info tab displays the provisioned
Expected PF value.
Select the desired value for Expected PF, and click Submit.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-190 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures MISMATCH (Shelf Mismatch)
MISMATCH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MISMATCH (Shelf Mismatch)

The detected DCM or SFD44 shelf serial number does not match the provisioned serial
number.
Severity Critical
Applicability SHELF
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Review DCM and SFD44 shelf serial numbers and make corrections as needed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Display the shelf list.
CLI show shelf*
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 View the results, and use the following commands as needed:

To change a DCM/SFD44 shelf serial number:
CLI config shelf <shelf> serialnum <string>

WEBUI In the Equipment Tree, select the desired DCM/SFD44 shelf.
Enter the value in the Serial Number field.
Select Delete this Shelf, and click Submit.
To create a new shelf:
CLI config shelf <shelf> type dcm

or
config shelf <shelf> type sfd44
WEBUI In the Equipment Tree, select System.
Click the Create Shelf tab.
Enter the desired values (DCM or SFD44) on this window, and click
Submit.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-191
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures MISMATCH (Shelf Mismatch)
MISMATCH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To delete an existing shelf:
CLI config shelf <shelf> type empty

WEBUI In the Equipment Tree, select the desired shelf (not the Main shelf).
Click the Delete tab.
Select Delete this Shelf, and click Submit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If the correct serial number is provisioned, but the wrong DCM or SFD44 module is
connected, replace the module with one which has the correct serial number.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
MISMATCHMOD
MISMATCH (Pluggable Module Mismatch)

This condition indicates that either the detected shelf identifier does not match the
provisioned shelf identifier, or an pluggable module is installed on an Egress LD.
a
Severity Critical
11STMM10, 11STGE12, 43SCX4, 43STX4, , 4DPA2, 4DPA4,
AM2017B, AM2325B, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, ALPFGT,
OSCT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-192 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures MISMATCH (Pluggable Module Mismatch)
MISMATCHMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If it does not, go to the next step
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Verify the type of pluggable module that is currently inserted into the alarmed card.
If... Then...
the inserted pluggable module is of correct modify the MODULETYPE value.
type by the service record but the
MODULETYPE attribute is not correct,
the inserted pluggable module is of the remove the module and insert one that matches
incorrect type, the expected module type. NOTE: The
pluggable module in LD cards cannot be
replaced without removing the host cards.
the inserted pluggable module is of the correct remove the module and reseat it back into the
type, card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 To clear the pack while it is still in service, do one of the following:

• Change the notification from a standing alarm to a transient condition, or
• Select the proper pluggable module from the supported list.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Remove the pluggable module and replace it with another pluggable module of the same
type. Perform the procedure “Replacing an SFP Module” (p. 3-27).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
MIXEDPFUSED
MIXEDPFUSED (Mixed types of power filters used)

The Mixed types of power filters alarm indicates that two different types of power filters
are provisioned in the shelf.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-193
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures MIXEDPFUSED (Mixed types of power filters used)
MIXEDPFUSED
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Severity Critical
Applicability SHELF
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Identify the power filter model engineered for the installation.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Equip the correct matching power filters.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Ensure the two power filters are the same type.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
MMG
MMG (Mismerge)
The OT port has detected a mismerge at the MEP layer. A MEP detects mismerge when it
receives a CCM frame with a correct MEG level that is, the MEG level is the same as the
MEP's own MEG level) but incorrect MEG ID (indicating that frames from a different
service instance are merged with the service instance represented by the MEP's own MEG
ID). Such a condition is most likely caused by misconfiguration, but could also be caused
by a hardware/software failure in the network.
Severity Major
This alarm is raised when an MEP receives CCM frames with the correct MEG level, but
an incorrect MEG ID. The alarm is cleared when the MEP does not receive CCM frames
with the correct MEG ID.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-194 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures MMG (Mismerge)
MMG
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the peer MAID (MD name and MA Name). The local MAID and remote peer
MAID should be same.
CLI show card 11dpe12e shelf/slot ethoam md1

show card 11dpe12e shelf/slot ethoam md1ma{1-400}
Select Ethernet OAM > Maintenance Domain.
> MEP.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
MOD
MOD (Card degrade - Wavelength Tracker Channel ID

Insertion)
The Wavelength Tracker encoder on the OT or SVAC card has detected an internal fault
on the Wavelength Tracker encoder and notifies the user that the Wavelength Tracker
information is not a reliable monitoring tool. The internal fault can be a problem with the
Wavelength Tracker encoder hardware, or the problem can be low input channel optical
power to the wavelength tracker encoder. The latter is most likely the root cause when a
pluggable SFP EVOA is used for the encoder ports, as in an MVAC port, or VAn port of
an OT pack. Symptoms of this behavior include channels that are incorrectly declared
absent, and/or detected channels powers for this channel instance may not accurately
represent the actual channel power.
Note: Other Wavelength Tracker points downstream may generate alarms.
Severity Minor
43SCX4, 43STA1P, 43STX4, 43STX4P, 4DPA4, MVAC, SVAC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-195
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures MOD (Card degrade - Wavelength Tracker Channel ID
MOD Insertion)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform a warm reset on the card where the MOD condition is raised.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Do the following for MVAC, SVAC or VA ports:

1. Verify that the fiber patch cable(s) between the source optical port and the encoder
port input are not kinked or bent at a tight radius, which could increase optical
insertion loss between components. If any are kinked or bent, gently correct, and then
wait 5 minutes before proceeding to the next step.
2. Verify that the fiber patch cable(s) between the source optical port and the encoder
port input are not dirty or damaged (this step is service affecting). Verifying and
cleaning the fiber connectors requires disconnecting the output of the source optical
port (for example, the L1 port of a 4DPA4 pack). After cleaning or patch cable
replacement, wait 5 minutes to see if the alarm clears.
3. Verify that the output power from the source optical port is as expected given the
interface type. Measuring with an optical power meter is service affecting, as it
requires disconnecting the output of the source optical port. If necessary, replace the
source optical transmitter and wait 5 minutes to see if the alarm clears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-196 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures MOD (Card degrade - Wavelength Tracker Channel ID
MOD Insertion)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
MODOUTOOR
MODOUTOOR (Modulator output power out of range)

The OT port has detected Modulator output power out of range.
Severity Minor
Applicability 11QPA4, 11STAR1
Corrective Action
NOTICE
This procedure details the corrective action for an MODOUTOOR against the OT port. At
the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-197
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures MODOUTOOR (Modulator output power out of range)
MODOUTOOR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
MSIM
MSIM (Multiplex Structure Indication Mismatch)

The MUX OT Line port has detected the mismatch condition of the MSI bytes within the
OTU Signal payload. This may be caused by the following reasons:
• The input OTU signal is severely degraded
• High uncorrectable bit-error-ratio condition
• The input OTU signal has a different multiplex structure
Severity Critical
Applicability 43STX4P
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Retrieve all the alarms reported at OT port. Check if there is a signal degraded alarm
reported, such as DEGOTU. Perform the corrective action for clearing the alarms found.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 After all signal degraded alarms are cleared, retrieve the Digital Wrapper (DW)
performance monitoring group.
CLI show interface card_type shelf slot L1 PM DW

WEBUI Select the affected 43STX4P port, and at the top of the WebUI window, click
Performance.
On the PM Data window, select Digital Wrapper in the PM Group field.
Click Submit.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-198 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures MSIM (Multiplex Structure Indication Mismatch)
MSIM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Check whether uncorrectable FEC bit errors are reported. If so, perform the action for
clearing the signal degraded alarms.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 After all signal degraded alarms are cleared and no uncorrectable bit errors are reported,
check whether the input OTU signal MSI byte is compliant with the received OT card
settings. (The source and destination OTU are generally of the same OTU type.)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
MTCESURV
MTCESURV (Add power control failure)

A card has detected a power control-related equipment failure.
Severity Major
43SCX4, 43STX4, 4DPA4, MVAC, SVAC
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 There are two possible causes of this condition:

• The alarmed card has detected an equipment problem and this means that the
Wavelength Tracker encode power control is compromised. If this occurs during
steady state operation, there is a high probability that the services carried by this card
are unaffected.
• There is a misfibering problem such that a light-emitting fiber has been plugged into
the Tx port of a Wavelength Tracker encoder-equipped transponder card.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-199
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures MTCESURV (Add power control failure)
MTCESURV
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Determine what type of card is reporting the condition.
If... Then...
the card is a transponder card that is equipped check to see that the fibering for that card is
with a Wavelength Tracker encoder, correct. Remove the fiber from the Tx port on
the transponder card. If the condition clears
after 20 seconds, then this is a misfibering
problem.
the card is an SVAC, or if there is no fibering continue with Step 3.
problem on the transponder card,
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Confirm that replacement card supports the same band as the alarmed card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Label all fibers connected to the alarmed card.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Disconnect all fibers on the alarmed card and cap the ends to protect them from dirt and
damage.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Clean and connect all fibers to the replacement card.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Once the software on the card is successfully upgraded (this happens automatically), the
alarm should clear.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
MTCESURVDGR
MTCESURVDGR (Port degrade - wavelength tracker encode

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-200 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures MTCESURVDGR (Port degrade - wavelength tracker encode
MTCESURVDGR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
degrade)
An OT or SVAC card has detected a DSP failure.
Severity Critical
43SCX4, 43STX4, 4DPA4, SVAC
Corrective Action
The OT or SVAC card has detected a DSP failure and this means that the wavelength
tracker encode power control is compromised. If this occurs during steady state operation,
there is a high probability that the services carried by this OT or SVAC are unaffected. To
clear this alarm, replace the card. The card replacement procedure is service affecting and
should be conducted during a maintenance window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Confirm that replacement OT or SVAC card supports the same band as the alarmed OT or
SVAC card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Label all fibers connected to the alarmed OT or SVAC.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Disconnect all fibers on the alarmed OT or SVAC card and cap the ends to protect them
from dirt and damage.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Clean and connect all fibers to the replacement OT or SVAC card.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Once the software on the OT or SVAC card is successfully upgraded (this happens
automatically), the alarm should clear.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-201
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures NET (Link Down; Data Link Down)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NET
NET (Link Down; Data Link Down)

The NET NR condition is raised when the EC (ES1 & ES2) and USRPNL (OAMP, VOIP,
E1 & E2) ports are administratively disabled. When these ports are administratively
enabled and no Ethernet link connectvity is established, these NR conditions would be
reported as MN alarms.
On a fiber span, the OSC mode should match on both ends. If the rates do not match,
LOS-O is raised on one end, and Data Link Down (see “LOS-O” (p. 2-167) is raised on
the other end.
Severity Not reported or Minor

Applicability 11DPE12E, 11STAR1, A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG,
AM2017B, AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2325B, ALPFGT, EC,
FAN, FLC, MT0C, USRPNL
Corrective Action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Trace the source of the NET condition to the associated card and port upstream. Verify
that the source is operationally up by checking the Admin state. If the Admin state is Up,
then toggle the administrative state from UP->DOWN->UP.
EMS Double-click the NE and then on the alarmed card's client receive port.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-202 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
NET
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Remove the fiber from the port where the NET condition is raised.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Check the power using a power meter.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Clean the fiber and the bulkhead connector.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Repeat Step 2 through Step 4 for the other end of the fiber and port where it is connected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Repeat Step 4.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Replace the fiber jumper with a new one.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Perform a warm reset on the card that is the source of the Ethernet signal.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Perform a warm reset on the card where the NET condition is raised.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Perform a cold reset on the card that is the source of the Ethernet signal.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Perform a cold reset on the card where the LINKDOWN condition is raised.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Reseat the card that is the source of the Ethernet signal.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-203
Issue 1 June 2011
NET
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Reseat the card where the NET condition is present

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 Replace the card that is the source of the Ethernet signal.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 Replace the card where the NET condition is present

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check that the source is operational up.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check that the cable/fibre is plugged in correctly.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Check that the other end is plugged into a matching ethernet source (if this is an ALPHG
port, the matching source is another ALPHG port).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Check that cable/fibre is the correct type for the Ethernet port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If a cable/fibre tester is available check that the cable/fibre is correct, otherwise try
another cable/fibre.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Refer to “Reseating a Card” (p. 3-19).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-204 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
NET
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Replace the card with the faulty Ethernet port. Refer to “Replacing System Components”
(p. 3-20).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
NOTALLOWED
NOTALLOWED (Card not allowed)

The NOTALLOWED alarm indicates that the card is not allowed in the shelf or system.
• NE band type does not match the applicable band of the card.
• A card needing WT support is present in the shelf with Wavelength Tracker mode
disabled.
Severity Critical
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Identify that the Wavelength Tracker mode of the shelf is set correctly.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If the Wavelength Tracker mode is disabled, remove the affected card.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
NTPOOSYNC
NTPOOSYNC (Network Time Protocol is enabled, but no NTP

server is reachable)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-205
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures NTPOOSYNC (Network Time Protocol is enabled, but no NTP
NTPOOSYNC server is reachable)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
While NTP is enabled, if all provisioned servers become not reachable or fail to meet
minimum server standards, a NTPOOSYNC condition shall be raised. This alarm shall
clear when the NTP protocol is disabled or NTP server time synchronization is
reestablished.
Once the NE is power cycled, it takes approximately 20-30 minutes to initialize.
Thereafter, time synchronization will be completed, with a maximum delay time of 2-3
minutes.
Note: When configuring NTP servers on an NE network, the provisioned NTP server
IP addresses should be that of external NTP servers, not the IP addresses of GNEs.
Provision appropriate DCNs such that the external NTP servers are reachable from all
NEs within the network. This is especially important in the event of an EC cold reboot
or EC replacement. Do not use an NE as an NTP server by remote NEs.
Severity NA
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Verify provisioned servers are valid and reachable. If not, consult network engineering for
correct server addresses.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform a warm reset on the Equipment Controller that is raising the NTPOOSYNC
condition.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Perform a cold reset on the Equipment Controller that is raising the NTPOOSYNC
condition.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-206 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures NTPOOSYNC (Network Time Protocol is enabled, but no NTP
NTPOOSYNC server is reachable)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Reseat the Equipment Controller that is raising the NTPOOSYNC condition.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Replace the Equipment Controller that is raising the NTPOOSYNC condition. Follow the
return and repair process to return the card to an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
OAPUMPBIASCURRHIGH
OAPUMPBIASCURRHIGH (OA pump laser bias current high)

The OT port has detected Modulator output power out of range.
Severity Major
Applicability AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, A2325A, AM2125A, AM2125B,
MESH4, RA2P
Corrective Action
NOTICE
This procedure details the corrective action for an OAPUMPBIASCURRHIGH against

the LD pack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-207
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures OAPUMPTEMPHIGH (OA pump laser temperature high)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OAPUMPTEMPHIGH
OAPUMPTEMPHIGH (OA pump laser temperature high)

The LD pack has detected pump laser temperature high.
Severity Major
Applicability AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, A2325A, AM2125A, AM2125B,
MESH4, RA2P
Corrective Action
NOTICE
This procedure details the corrective action for an OAPUMPTEMPHIGH against the LD
pack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform the steps in the procedure, “High Temperature Troubleshooting” (p. 3-70).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
OCHCOLLISION
OCHCOLLISION (Channel collision)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-208 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures OCHCOLLISION (Channel collision)
OCHCOLLISION
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Wavelength Tracker has detected more than one instance of the same channel at this port.
This is likely due to a fibering problem or equipment failure upstream from the alarmed
port.
Note: The alarmed port indicates the first occurrence of the collision along the path.
All downstream occurrences are flagged as conditions.
An OCHCOLLISION gets raised when a channel is present but the tones are
unexpected or, a channel is not present but there are more than 2 unexpected tones in
the upper or lower range for this channel.
Severity Critical
Applicability AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, A2325A, AM2017B, AM2125A,
AM2125B, AM2325B, CWR8, CWR8–88A, MESH4, OPS, WR
Corrective Action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Verify whether the expected power for the channels at the port reporting the collision are
set.
CLI Check if the expected power is set for the channel. Type:
config interface shelf/slot/portwavekey in | out
frequencydetail
WEBUI In the Equipment Tree, select the affect port. Click the Wave Keys In or
Wave Keys Out tab.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-209
Issue 1 June 2011
OCHCOLLISION
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Set the value if necessary.
CLI config interface shelf/slot/port wavekey in | out

frequency power value
WEBUI If the Expected Power field is set to Off, select On and click Set Power.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Perform the procedure “Path Power Trace” (p. 3-8) to identify the network path the
particular alarmed channel is traversing.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Determine if there is a NE where an OCHCOLLISION-OUT condition is present.
CLI alm
show condition
WEBUI Reports > Alarm List > Total
Reports > Condition List
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Resolve the OCHCOLLISION-OUT alarm if present by following the steps in the

procedure, “OCHCOLLISION-OUT” (p. 2-211). If this does not correct the problem,
warm reset the alarmed card.
CLI show condition

config card card_type shelf slot reset warm
WEBUI Select Reports > Condition List.
Select the card, click the Reboot tab, select Cold Reboot >Submit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Cold reset the alarmed card.
CLI alm
show condition
config card card_type shelf slot reset cold
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-210 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
OCHCOLLISION
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WEBUI 1. Select Reports > Alarm List > Total.

2. Select Reports > Condition List.
3. Select the card, click the Reboot tab, select Cold Reboot >Submit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
OCHCOLLISION-OUT
OCHCOLLISION-OUT (Channel collision Output Direction)

port.
Note: The alarmed port indicates the first occurrence of the collision along the path.
All downstream occurrences are flagged as conditions.
Severity Critical. Not alarmed at ALPHG ingress.

Service affecting? Yes. No at ALPHG ingress.
AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2325B, CWR8, OSCT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-211
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures OCHCOLLISION-OUT (Channel collision Output Direction)
OCHCOLLISION-OUT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 The trouble point for the alarm is directly upstream of the alarmed point. Retrieve a list of
active alarms on the NE and resolve issues/alarms at the trouble point. Of particular
interest are card or wavelength tracker failures.
CLI alm
show condition
WEBUI Reports > Condition List
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Retrieve the configured fiber topology on the NE:

Ensure that the physical fiber topology in the upstream direction from the alarmed port to
the ingress point into the NE matches the configured topology. Caution A changing the
physical fiber topology of the NE may be service impacting if the fiber is currently
carrying services. It is recommended to wait for a maintenance window before changing
the physical fiber topology of the NE.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-212 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures OCHCOLLISION-OUT (Channel collision Output Direction)
OCHCOLLISION-OUT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Observe on the downstream NE if this is the only card reporting the collision. If so, warm
reset the only alarmed card.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
OCHFDI
OCHFDI (Optical Channel Forward Defect Indication)

During the creation of a wavelength cross connect, the source node of the optical channel
will raise this non reported condition when the output wavelength is not launching at the
correct power or when the optical channel is missing. This condition clears when the
power of the wavelength is launching with the correct power. As the wavelength traverses
the network, subsequent NEs have the Channel FDI present on the ALPHG cards until the
power level of the wavelength reaches the target power. When the target power is
reached, the Channel FDI clears automatically within 5 minutes.
Note: This not-reported condition masks other reported optical channel alarms to
effectively suppress alarms and transient alarms during cross connect setup.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-213
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures OCHFDI (Optical Channel Forward Defect Indication)
OCHFDI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2325B, OSCT, RA2P
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Cleaning the fiber connector of the NE may be service impacting if the fiber is currently
carrying services.
It is recommended to wait for a maintenance window before changing the physical fiber
topology of the NE.
If the OCHFDI condition is exists on a NE for longer than 5 minutes, this means that the
wavelength cannot reach the required target power. This may impact the service in terms
of potential signal quality. In this case, perform the following procedure.
At the end of each step wait to see if the condition clears. If not, continue with the next
step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Observe from the condition statement the location and specifications of the condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Retrieve the listing of cross connects on the NE and determine the service launch points.
CLI show xc brief

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Open a new window and log into the NEs identified in Step 2.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-214 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures OCHFDI (Optical Channel Forward Defect Indication)
OCHFDI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Show the path power trace on the two endpoint of the wavelength service. Determine if
the wavelength has achieved the target output power from the LD pack. Enter the
following commands on both end points to determine if the launch power has been
achieved.
CLI show xc <ID> trace atoz

show xc <ID> trace ztoa
WEBUI 1. Select Connections > Cross-Connects.
2. Select the desired Cross-Connect.
3. Click A-Z Trace or Z-A Trace.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Ensure that the transponder can provide the required power. If the transponder can
provide enough power, clean fiber connectors from the transponder to the OT or SVAC
port to ensure the connections are clean.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
OCHPDI
OCHPDI (Channel Payload Defect Indicator)

During the creation of a wavelength add cross connect, the source node of the optical
channel will raise this non reported condition when the output wavelength is not
launching at the correct power or when the optical channel is missing. This condition
clears when the power of the wavelength is launching with the correct power. As the
wavelength traverses the network, subsequent network elements have the Channel FDI
present on the amplifier cards until the power level of the wavelength reaches the target
power. When the target power is reached, the Channel PDI clears automatically within 5
minutes.
Note: This not-reported condition masks other reported optical channel alarms to
effectively suppress alarms and transient alarms during cross connect setup.
Severity Minor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-215
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures OCHPDI (Channel Payload Defect Indicator)
OCHPDI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Applicability 11STAR1, 11STMM10, 11STGE12, 43STA1P, 43STX4,

43STX4P, 4DPA4, MVAC, SVAC
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Cleaning the fiber connector of the NE may be service impacting if the fiber is currently
carrying services.
It is recommended to wait for a maintenance window before changing the physical fiber
topology of the NE.
If the OCHPDI condition is exists on a NE for longer than 5 minutes, this means that the
wavelength cannot reach the required target power. This may impact the service in terms
of potential signal quality. In this case, perform the following procedure.
At the end of each step wait to see if the condition clears. If not, continue with the next
step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Observe from the condition statement the location and specifications of the condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Retrieve the listing of cross connects on the NE and determine the service launch points.
CLI show xc brief

Select the desired Cross-Connect.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Open a new window and log into the NEs identified in Step 2.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-216 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures OCHPDI (Channel Payload Defect Indicator)
OCHPDI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Show the path power trace on the two endpoints of the wavelength service. Determine if
the wavelength has achieved the target output power from the transponder. Enter the
following commands on both end points to determine if the launch power has been
achieved.
CLI show xc <ID> trace atoz

show xc <ID> trace ztoa
WEBUI 1. Select Connections > Cross-Connects.
2. Select the desired Cross-Connect.
3. Click A-Z Trace or Z-A Trace.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Ensure that the transponder can provide the required power. If the transponder can
provide enough power, clean fiber connectors from the transponder to the OMD or
CWR8 port to ensure the connections are clean.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
OCHKEYDUP
OCHKEYDUP (Duplicate Wave Key)

The NE has detected that another NE in the network is sourcing (heading) an OCh trail
which is using the same wavekeys as one of its own sourced (headed) trails.
The system is designed to prevent this under all normal operating conditions, however,
this situation can happen if the control network was segmented when the OCh trails were
created. If the control network is rejoined and any duplicates are discovered, this alarm
raised. The control network is segmented if the one or more amplifier CN links are down
such that a number of NEs cannot communicate to the remainder of the NEs in the
network.
Having two different OCh trails with the same wavekeys in the same optical network
prevents the ability to distinguish the two OCh trails from each-other with respect to
Wavelength Tracker monitoring capabilities.
Severity Minor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-217
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures OCHKEYDUP (Duplicate Wave Key)
OCHKEYDUP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Applicability 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 43SCX4, 43STA1P, 43STX4, 43STX4P,
4DPA4, MVAC, SVAC, Cross-connect
Corrective Action
The alarm lists the IP address and shelf/slot/port for the other NE sourcing the same OCH
trail name.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Choose one of the connections to be rekeyed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Log into the NE that sources the connection to be rekeyed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 List the cross connects that currently exist on-NE.
CLI show xc brief

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Search the list for the OCh trail in question and record the A-end, Z-end, band and
channel for that connection (you will use this in Step 5).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Rekey the associated connection.
CLI config xc <a-end shelf slot port><z-end <shelf slot

port>band channel rekey
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
OCHKEYOVERLAP
OCHKEYOVERLAP (Wave Key overlap)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-218 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures OCHKEYOVERLAP (Wave Key overlap)
OCHKEYOVERLAP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This NE has detected that the service which is raising this condition has experienced a
provisioning problem. The Wavelength Tracker wavekeys which are configured during
service creation need to be rekeyed. This is a non-service impacting event. Potential
transient Wavelength Tracker wavekey conditions may be created and then cleared as a
result of the rekey operation.
Severity Minor
Applicability 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 43SCX4, 43STA1P, 43STX4, 43STX4P,
4DPA4, MVAC, SVAC ,Cross-connect
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform the procedure “Path Power Trace” (p. 3-8) to identify the endpoints of the service
for the particular alarmed channel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 List the cross connects that currently exist on the endpoint NEs and identify the cross
connects involved with the alarmed power trace.
CLI show xc brief

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Rekey the associated connections identified in Step 2.
CLI config xc <a-end shelf slot port><z-end shelf slot

port>band channel rekey
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
OCHTRAILDUP
OCHTRAILDUP (Duplicate OCH Trail name)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-219
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures OCHTRAILDUP (Duplicate OCH Trail name)
OCHTRAILDUP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The NE has detected that another NE in the network is sourcing an OCh trail which is
using the same OCh trail name as one of its own sourced (headed) trails.
This can happen if the loopback IP address of the sourcing NE was recently changed. In
the case of a loopback IP address change, the condition resolves itself after one hour.
This situation can also happen if one of the following situations occur:
• if the control network was segmented when the OCH trails were created. If the control
network is rejoined then any duplicates are discovered and this alarm is raised. The
control network is segmented if the one or more ALPHG CN links are down such that
a number of NEs cannot communicate to the remainder of the NEs in the network.
• if a database with a duplicate Och-trail is restored on a NE
• if two Och Trails with the identical name are created at the same time within the
network
Having two different OCh-trails with the same name in the same optical network prevents
the ability to distinguish the two OCh-trails from each-other (with respect to Wavelength
Tracker monitoring capabilities).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-220 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures OCHTRAILDUP (Duplicate OCh trail name)
OCHTRAILDUP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCHTRAILDUP (Duplicate OCh trail name)
Severity Minor
Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 112SX10L, 43SCX4, 43STA1P,
43STX4, 43STX4P, 4DPA4, MVAC, SVAC, Cross-connect
Corrective Action
The alarm will list the IP address and shelf, slot, port for the other NE sourcing the same
OCh Trail name.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Confirm that there is a NE with the IP address that is alledgedly sourcing the duplicate
OCh Trail. If the IP address of the sourcing NE was recently changed then this alarm
resolves itself within one hour.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If Step 1 did not resolve the problem, then choose which connection should have a new
name.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Recreate the connection (across the network) for the path. This involves deleting that trail
and recreating it with a different name.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
OCHTRAILUNKNOWN
OCHTRAILUNKNOWN (Unknown OCH Trail for x-connect)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-221
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures OCHTRAILUNKNOWN (Unknown OCH Trail for x-connect)
OCHTRAILUNKNOWN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The NE has not received the OCh trail information for this Cross-Connect from the trail's
head NE. While this condition is asserted, Wavelength Tracker monitoring for this
channel is not active on this NE. This alarm may be raised for the following reasons:
• The head NE X-Connect for this OCh trail may not have been created.
• There may not be proper CN/OSPF connectivity between the NEs to allow for the
distribution of trail information.
Severity Minor
AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2325B, OSCT, RA2P
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Record the exact name used to identify the OCh trail.List the cross connects that currently
exist on-NE:
CLI show xc brief

Search the list for the OCh trail in question. Record the exact name used for the OCh trail
(wreache spaces and case are relevant for a match).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Ensure that the OCh trail name as specified on this NE exactly matches the OCh trail
name as specified on the head NE.List the cross connects that currently exist in the
network.
CLI show ochtrail network
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Search the list for the OCh trail in question. Compare any names for the exact name
recorded in the Step 1.
If... Then...
the name is misspelled, recreate the appropriate connection with the
appropriate name.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-222 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures OCHTRAILUNKNOWN (Unknown OCH Trail for x-connect)
OCHTRAILUNKNOWN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If... Then...
there is no match, continue with Step 4.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Ensure that there is CN/OSPF connectivity at the head end NE. Log into the head end NE.
Check for alarms on any ALPHG links. Resolve any outstanding alarms on the head-end
NE CN links.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Ensure that the OCh trail's head NE cross-connect has been created. Log into the head end
NE for that connection. List the cross-connects that currently exist on this head-end NE:
CLI show xc brief
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Search the list for the OCh trail in question.
If... Then...
a match is not found, create the add connection.
a match is found, continue with Step 7.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Ensure that there is CN/OSPF connectivity at the NE raising the condition. Log into the
NE raising the condition. Check for alarms on any ALPHG links. Resolve any
outstanding alarms on the NE CN links.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
OCHUNKNOWN
OCHUNKNOWN (Channel Unexpected)

Wavelength Tracker has detected an instance of a channel that was not provisioned at an
input port. The provisioning of a service is not yet complete, or there has been a
misfibering. This alarm may be the result of misdirected traffic or it may be a transient
during service creation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-223
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures OCHUNKNOWN (Channel Unexpected)
OCHUNKNOWN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
An OCHUNKNOWN is raised when a channel is detected but no keys have been
provisioned.
Severity Minor
AM2325B, OPS, OSCT, CWR8 , MESH4, WR
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check to ensure that service provisioning is complete for the channel in question.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check that the fiber feeding the detect point is correctly configured in the NE's topology
table and that the physical connection is correct.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If the fiber is external to the NE, ensure that it is the correct one.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If... Then...
other Wavelength Tracker alarms exist on the clear the alarms.
same channel on this or any upstream NE,
the unexpected channel has been launched and clear the alarm.
the Channel absent alarm is present,
any amplifier alarms exist on the NE or any clear the alarms.
upstream NE,
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 A connected fiber may have resulted in the local channel unexpected and the other
channel missing alarms. Examine the network for any channel absent alarms.
CLI show ring alarms [east | west] | <NE Name | NE IP

Address>
Resolve the channel absent alarms first.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-224 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures OCHUNKNOWN (Channel Unexpected)
OCHUNKNOWN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
OCHUNKNOWN-OUT
OCHUNKNOWN-OUT (Channel Unexpected)

Wavelength Tracker has detected an instance of a channel that was not provisioned at the
output of a port. The provisioning of a service is not yet complete, or there has been a
mis-fibering. This alarm may be the result of misdirected traffic or it may be a transient
during service creation.
Severity Minor
AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2325B, CWR8, OSCT
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check to ensure that service provisioning is complete for the channel in question.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check that the fiber feeding the detect point is correctly configured in the NE's topology
table and that the physical connection is correct.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If the fiber is external to the NE, ensure that it is the correct one.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-225
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures OCHUNKNOWN-OUT (Channel Unexpected)
OCHUNKNOWN-OUT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If... Then...
other Wavelength Tracker alarms exist on the clear the alarms.
same channel on this or any upstream NE,
the unexpected channel has been launched and clear the alarm.
the Channel absent alarm is present,
any amplifier alarms exist on the NE or any clear the alarms.
upstream NE,
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 A connected fiber may have resulted in the local channel unexpected and the other
channel missing alarms. Examine the network for any channel absent alarms.
CLI show ring alarms [east | west] | <NE Name | NE IP

Address>
Resolve the channel absent alarms first.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Perform a warm reset the alarmed card.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
OCI
OCI (Open Connection Indication - ODU)

OT port has detected Open Connection Indication condition at ODUk Path layer. This
defect indicates that network operator in an external multi-vendor OTN network has not
provisioned at least one ODUk connection in an OTN switched network. OCI
maintenance signal is not sourced by 1830 PSS network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-226 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures OCI (Open Connection Indication - ODU)
OCI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This may be caused if the network operator in external OTN network has deleted or not
yet provisioned a connection in OTN switched network.
Severity Critical
Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCX10, 112SX10L, 11DPE12, 11QPA4, 11STAR1,
4DPA4
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing an OCI condition declared on an
OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11STAR1 client port to clear the OCI.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
OCIEGR
OCIEGR (Egress Open Connection Indication - ODU)

OT port has detected Open Connection Indication condition at ODUk Path layer. This
defect indicates that network operator in an external multi-vendor OTU network has not
provisioned at least one ODUk connection in an OT switched network. OCI maintenance
signal is not sourced by 1830 PSS network. This may be caused if the network operator in
external OT network has deleted or not yet provisioned a connection in OTU switched
network.
Severity CR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-227
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures OCIEGR (Egress Open Connection Indication - ODU)
OCIEGR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing an OCIEGR condition declared
on an OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
the affected client port to clear the OCI condition.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
OPR
OPR (Channel Optical Power Out of Range)

The OPR condition is raised when the OT or SVAC cannot successfully maintain the
output channel power at the provisioned value. This may be due to a hardware issue on
the OT or SVAC card.
Severity Minor
Applicability 11STAR1, 11STMM10, 11STGE12, 43STA1P, 43STX4,
43STX4P, 4DPA4, MESH4, SVAC, WR
Corrective Action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 If this service has no transponders, troubleshoot the equipment that is connected to the
OT or SVAC card's input port to determine and resolve any issues.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-228 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures OPR (Channel Optical Power Out of Range)
OPR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Retrieve the optical power levels at the receive port of the OT or SVAC card where the
alarm is raised.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If... Then...
the power levels are within the acceptable the problem may be with the card itself.
limits, Proceed to Step 6.
the power levels are not within acceptable continue with Step 4.
limits,
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Thoroughly clean the fiber jumper connected to the receive port of the OT or SVAC card
raising the alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Thoroughly clean the fiber bulkhead connector of the receive port of the OT or SVAC
card raising the alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-229
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures OPR (Channel Optical Power Out of Range)
OPR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
OPRLOSSHIGH
OPRLOSSHIGH (Out of Operational Range – Loss Too High

between DCM Ports of LD)
The OPR Out of Operational Range - Loss Too High alarm is raised when the loss
between the DCM in and out ports of a amplifier is too high.
Severity NA
AM2125B, AM2325B, ALPFGT
Corrective Action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Retrieve the optical power levels at the DCM port of the amplifier card where the alarm is
raised.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-230 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures OPRLOSSHIGH (Out of Operational Range – Loss Too High
OPRLOSSHIGH between DCM Ports of LD)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform a warm reset on the card where the OPR condition is raised.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
OPRLOSSLOW
OPRLOSSLOW (Out of Operational Range - Loss Too Low)

The OPR Out of Operational Range - Loss Too High Low is raised when the loss between
the DCM in and out ports of a amplifier is too low.
Severity Minor
Applicability A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, AM2017B, AM2325B,
ALPFGT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-231
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures OPRLOSSLOW (Out of Operational Range - Loss Too Low)
OPRLOSSLOW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Retrieve the optical power levels at the DCM port of the amplifier card where the alarm is
raised.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-232 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures OPRLOSSLOW (Out of Operational Range - Loss Too Low)
OPRLOSSLOW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
OPRPWRHIGH
OPRPWRHIGH (Out of Operational Range - Input Power Too

High)
The OPR Out of Operational Range - Input Power Too High alarm is raised when the
signal power into the LINE or SIG port of a amplifier is too high.
Severity NA
AM2125B, AM2325B, ALPFGT, OSC, OSCT
Corrective Action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Retrieve the optical power levels at the LINE or SIG port of the LD card where the alarm
is raised.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-233
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures OPRPWRHIGH (Out of Operational Range - Input Power Too
OPRPWRHIGH High)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If... Then...
limits,
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Thoroughly clean the fiber jumper connected to the LINE or SIG port of the amplifier
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Thoroughly clean the fiber bulkhead connector of the LINE or SIG port of the amplifier
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-234 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures OPRPWRLOW (Out of Operational Range - Input Power Too
Low)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OPRPWRLOW
OPRPWRLOW (Out of Operational Range - Input Power Too

Low)
The OPR Out of Operational Range - Loss Too High Low is raised when the loss between
the DCM in and out ports of a amplifier is too low.
Severity NA
AM2125B, AM2325B, ALPFGT, OSC, OSCT
Corrective Action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Retrieve the optical power levels at the LINE or SIG port of the LD card where the alarm
is raised.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If... Then...
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-235
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures OPRPWRLOW (Out of Operational Range - Input Power Too
OPRPWRLOW Low)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If... Then...
limits,
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Thoroughly clean the fiber jumper connected to the LINE or SIG port of the amplifier
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Thoroughly clean the fiber bulkhead connector of the LINE or SIG port of the amplifier
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
OPROOR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-236 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures OPROOR (Optical power received out of range)
OPROOR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OPROOR (Optical power received out of range)

The OT port has detected a received optical power out of range at OCH layer. This defect
indicates that local port has detected that the input optical power is lower or higher than
specified value.
• Power level out of range on the associated OCh trail
Severity Major
This procedure details the corrective action for an OPROOR against the OT port. At the
end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If input power level is lower or higher than the required on the port, identify the
associated OCh trail and verify the power levels along the OCh trail.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
connected directly to receiver of the port which detects OPROOR condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Clean the fiber.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Clean the input port of the OT. If the port is pluggable module, replace the module.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-237
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures OPR-OUT (Outgoing Channel Optical Power Out of Range)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OPR-OUT
OPR-OUT (Outgoing Channel Optical Power Out of Range)

The OPR-OUT condition is raised on cards with a Wavelength Tracker detect point when
the power of the outgoing channel is outside of the provisioned power range. This alarm
may be caused by the introduction of more or less attenuation in the fiber, or by an
amplifier adjust that may have occurred elsewhere in the network, due to fiber repair
activity or network adjustments such as adding or deleting a node.
Severity Minor
AM2125B, AM2325B, CWR8
Corrective Action
Refer to “OPRTX (Channel Power Unstable)” (p. 2-239).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-238 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures OPRTX (Channel Power Unstable)
OPRTX
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OPRTX
OPRTX (Channel Power Unstable)

The OPR Channel Power Unstable alarm is raised on cards with a Wavelength Tracker
detect point when the power is outside of the provisioned power range.
This alarm may be caused by one of the following:
• Introducing more or less attenuation in the fiber
• Adjusting the amplifier, which may have occurred elsewhere in the network, due to
fiber repair activity or network adjustments such as adding or deleting a node
• In the case of FOADM (running in manual mode) when channel power is not adjusted
to the expected power levels
Severity Minor
Applicability 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 43SCX4, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG,
ALPFGT, OPS, OSCT, CWR8, MVAC
Corrective Action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform the procedure “Path Power Trace” (p. 3-8) to determine the power levels
upstream of the alarmed card. Troubleshoot, isolate and identify other alarms or
conditions that would cause the OPR alarm to be raised. Using the appropriate corrective
actions resolve these issues first.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-239
Issue 1 June 2011
OPRTX
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Retrieve the optical power levels at the receive port of the card where the alarm is raised.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If... Then...
limits,
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Thoroughly clean the fiber jumper connected to the receive port of the OT or SVAC card
raising the alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Thoroughly clean the fiber bulkhead connector of the receive port of the OT or SVAC
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-240 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
OPRTX
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
OPRUNACHIEVE
OPRUNACHIEVE (Channel Power Unachievable)

This condition is raised if the present network output power at the OT, SVAC, MVAC or
VAn port is less that the programmed network output power. When this alarm is present
there is a high probability that this service is not being impacted. Therefore, immediate
action is not required. If the port is an SVAC, MVAC or VAn port encoder, there is a high
probability the condition may be a result of low input power due to high loss between
components, or low output power from the source optical interface. This situation should
be investigated as soon as possible.
Severity Major
Applicability 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 11DPE12E, 11QPA4, 11STAR1,
4DPA4, MVAC, SVAC
Corrective Action
NOTICE
This procedure is service affecting and should be conducted during a maintenance
window.
Note: If an OPSA pack is topologically connected between the transponder (OT) and
the encoder port (MVAC or SVAC), then the troubleshooting steps referring to
cleaning and verifying fiber connections should be applied to OPSA ports Sig In and
A Out, B Out as well.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-241
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures OPRUNACHIEVE (Channel Power Unachievable)
OPRUNACHIEVE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Determine the transponder line port that is connected to OT VA port, MVAC port, or
SVAC port.
CLI show interface topology<shelf slot port>

show interface <shelf slot port>
This indicates the expected power, actual power, and what each OT or SVAC port is
connected to.
If the optical line to which the alarmed interface connects is Manual power managed,
enter (CLI) show interface powermgmt sh/sl/[Line|Lineout]
If the Power Management Type is Manual, verify that the output power target set for the
encoder interface is consistent with the output power required by the Engineering
Planning Tool plan for the network. If necessary correct the target output power for the
interface and wait 5 minutes to see if the alarm clears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Visually inspect the fiber connecting the transponder (OT) line port and OT VA, MVAC
or SVAC port. Check that the fiber is not being pinched or bent tightly. Ensure that the
fiber connectors are properly seated at the OT line out port or SVAC In, MVAC In, VA In
port, and any bulkhead connectors (if any) between them.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Using an optical power meter, measure the optical output power of the transponder to
ensure that the output power is within specification. Make this measurement as close as
possible to the output port of the transponder.
If... Then...
the output power is within the acceptable continue with Step 5.
limits,
the output power is not within acceptable the transponder port may be dirty. Clean and
limits, inspect port, and measure the optical output
power of the transponder. Continue with Step
4.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-242 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
OPRUNACHIEVE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If the output power is with acceptable limits, clean and reconnect the transponder and OT
or SVAC and check the alarm status of the shelf. If the output power remains below
specification:
1. Reseat the transponder card. Refer to “Reseating a Card” (p. 3-19).
2. Measure the optical output power of the transponder. If the output power remains
below specification, Replace the card. Refer to “Replacing System Components”
(p. 3-20). Follow the return and repair process in the Customer and Product Support
guide to return the faulty card to an authorized repair center for replacement.
3. If the source transponder for the signal is outside the 1830 PSS (alien channel
transport case) replace the source transponder.
4. If the source optical interface is a replaceable pluggable optical module, replace the
SFP or XFP module (see “Replacing an SFP Module” (p. 3-27) or “Replacing an XFP
Module” (p. 3-30)).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If the encoder is an OT (VA, SVAC or MVAC) port, using an optical power meter,
measure the optical power being received.
If... Then...
the loss over the fiber between the transponder continue with Step 7.
and OT VA/SVAC/MVAC port is reasonable,
the loss over the fiber between the transponder clean, inspect and connect the fiber between
and OT VA/SVAC/MVAC port is higher than the transponder and OT VA/SVAC/MVAC
expected, port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Measure the optical power being received at the OT VA, SVAC or MVAC In port.
If... Then...
the loss over the fiber between the transponder clean and reconnect the transponder and OT
and OT VA/SVAC/MVAC port is reasonable, VA/SVAC/MVAC port and check the alarm
status of the shelf.
the loss over the fiber between the transponder replace the fiber.
and OT VA/SVAC/MVAC port is higher than
expected,
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Clean the OT VA, SVAC or MVAC In port. Clean and reconnect the fiber between the
transponder and OT VA, SVAC or MVAC port. Check the alarm status of the shelf.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-243
Issue 1 June 2011
OPRUNACHIEVE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Measure the optical power being received at the OT VA, SVAC, or MVAC input port to
confirm power is present. If the alarm has not cleared, replace the OT VA port SFP
EVOA, MVAC port SFP EVOA, or SVAC card. Refer to “Replacing System
Components” (p. 3-20).
If the encoder is directly the line port of the OT:
1. Attempt a warm reset of the pack and wait to see if the problem clears.
• CLI: config card card type shelf slot reset warm
• WebUI: Select the card, click the Reboot tab, select Warm Reboot >Submit.
2. Attempt a cold reset of the pack and wait to see if the problem clears.
• CLI: config card card type shelf slot reset cold
• WebUI: Select the card, click the Reboot tab, select Cold Reboot >Submit.
3. Replace the OT card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Follow the return and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return
the faulty card to an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
OPTINTBASE
OPTINTBASE (Optical Intrusion Baseline Needed)

An optical intrusion baseline value other than the default (-1) is needed for proper optical
intrusion detection.
Severity MN
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Note: Only a user with administrative-level privileges can perform this procedure.
In the WebUI, select the affected card in the Equipment Tree.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-244 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures OPTINTBASE (Optical Intrusion Baseline Needed)
OPTINTBASE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click the Optical Intrusion tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select the Baseline Span Loss field, select a valid value (dB), and click Submit.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
OPTINTDET
OPTINTDET (Optical Intrusion — Detected)

Optical intrusion to the line fiber is detected.
Severity MJ
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Note: Only a user with administrative-level privileges can perform this procedure.
In the WebUI, select the affected card in the Equipment Tree.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click the Optical Intrusion tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select the Clear Optical Intrusion Detected Alarm field, and click Submit.
If the span loss has substantially changed, the span loss baseline will need to be adjusted
accordingly (see Step 3).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
OPTINTSUSP
OPTINTSUSP (Optical Intrusion – Monitoring Suspended)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-245
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures OPTINTSUSP (Optical Intrusion – Monitoring Suspended)
OPTINTSUSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Optical intrusion monitoring to the line fiber is suspended due to local or upstream NE
conditions. The alarm could be due to a variety of NE alarms such as NET, LOS-P, APR
and CARDINIT. The OPTINTSUSP alarm clears when the underlying cause clears.
Follow the respective procedure to clear the underlying cause alarms.
Severity MJ
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-246 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures OSCSSF (Server Signal Failure - OSC)
OSCSSF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OSCSSF
OSCSSF (Server Signal Failure - OSC)

The LINE port on one of the ALPHG, AHPHG, AHPLG cards or the OSCSFP port on
one of the ALPFGT, or OSCT cards has detected a Loss Of Signal. The OSCSSF
conditon is raised against the OSC or OSCSFP port when the LOS alarm is raised against
LINE port when the power measured at the port input drops below a threshold.
Severity NR
Applicability ALPHG, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPFGT, AM2017B, AM2125A,
No corrective action is required. Refer to the corrective action for the LINE port LOS
alarm (see “LD Input LOS” (p. 2-153)).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-247
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures PCSGENERATOR (PCS Generator active)
PCSGENERATOR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PCSGENERATOR
PCSGENERATOR (PCS Generator active)

The PCSGENERATOR condition is raised when the by Test signal loopback test is in
progress at the 100GA/D client port.
Severity NA
Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCA1
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
CLI config interface card_type shelf slot
c1 loopback testsignal disabled
WEBUI Select the card. On the Port Loopback Control window, deselect (uncheck)
the Test Signal Loopback Enabled field.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PLM
PLM (Payload Mismatch Indication - ODU)

The OT port has detected a Payload Type Mismatch condition at ODUk Path layer. This
defect indicates that the service and/or mapping types on two ends of the ODUkP link
don’t match. The Payload Type indicator is encoded in the Payload Structure Identifier
field of ODUkP. When expected and received PT values don’t match, a PLM condition is
declared.
This condition is typically declared on both ends of the ODUkP path.
This may be caused due to inconsistent provisioning of service/mapping types on the two
ends of the ODUkP segment (between two 11STAR1 OTs or between 11STAR1 and
11STMM10).
Severity NA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-248 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures PLM (Payload Mismatch Indication - ODU)
PLM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Applicability 11DPE12, 11DPE12E, 11QPA4, 11STAR1, 11STMM10,
43STA1P, 43STX4, 43STX4P, 4DPA4
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing a PLM condition on an OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Identify the far-end peer of the local OT port where the PLM condition exists.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check the service configuration document to determine which signal type and/or mapping
mode is expected to be configured on the ODUkP segment that has PLM condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Modify signal type and/or mapping mode to match the service configuration document
(and match on both ends of the segment).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If the source of one end of the ODUkP segment is in another operator’s network (this
would be the case if there is an OTM-0.2 hand off between 1830 PSS network domain
and client OTN network) contact the operator and resolve the mismatch in setting.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PLMEGR
PLMEGR (Egress Payload Mismatch Indication - ODU)

The OT port has detected a Payload Type Mismatch condition at ODUk Path layer. This
defect indicates that the service and/or mapping types on two ends of the ODUkP link
don’t match. The Payload Type indicator is encoded in the Payload Structure Identifier
field of ODUkP. When expected and received PT values don’t match, a PLM condition is
declared. This condition is typically declared on both ends of the ODUkP path. This may
be caused due to inconsistent provisioning of service/mapping types on the two ends of
the ODUkP segment.
Severity CR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-249
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures PLMEGR (Egress Payload Mismatch Indication - ODU)
PLMEGR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing a PLMEGR condition on an OT
step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Identify the far-end peer of the local OT port where the PLM condition exists.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check the service configuration document to determine which signal type and/or mapping
mode is expected to be configured on the ODUkP segment that has PLM condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Modify signal type and/or mapping mode to match the service configuration document
(and match on both ends of the segment).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If the source of one end of the ODUkP segment is in another operator’s network (this
would be the case if there is an OTM-0.2 hand off between the 1830 PSS network domain
and the client OT network) contact the operator and resolve the mismatch in setting.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRCDRERR
PRCDRERR
This section includes procedures for the following alarms:
• PRCDRERR (Subtended shelf cannot be assigned a shelf id)
• PRCDRERR-TOPO (Invalid topology)
• PRCDRERR-TOPO (Power management topology invalid)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-250 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures PRCDRERR (Subtended shelf cannot be assigned a shelf id)
PRCDRERR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRCDRERR (Subtended shelf cannot be assigned a shelf id)

The maximum supported number of shelves would be exceeded by a newly discovered
shelf. The maximum for universal shelves is 8, the maximum for SFD44 shelves is 8, and
the maximum for DCM shelves is 16. The maximum numbers include all provisioned
shelves, whether physically connected or not.
The network element supports up to seven subtended universal shelves. These are given
subtended shelf IDs two through eight, and the rotary dial on the backplane must be set
equal to the shelf ID.
If a subtended shelf is discovered with an invalid or non-unique rotary dial setting, then
no shelf ID can be assigned to that shelf and this alarm is raised.
Severity Minor
Applicability SHELF
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Review the shelf serial numbers that are assigned to the subtended shelves by displaying
the shelf list.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Display the shelf list.
CLI show shelf*
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 View the results, and use the following commands as needed:

• • Disconnect the control cables to any shelf that should not be connected.
• • If any rotary dial settings are not unique, or not in the range 2-8: disconnect the
control cables to the shelf, correct the rotary dial setting, and reconnect the control
cables.
• To delete an existing shelf:
CLI config shelf <shelf> type empty
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-251
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures PRCDRERR-TOPO (Invalid topology)
PRCDRERR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRCDRERR-TOPO (Invalid topology)

In this release, the system enforces a rule that a valid cross connects must terminate on
one of the following end-points:
• a port marked as "External"
• a port marked as "No-connect"
• a transponder network port
In prior releases, there were no checks in place to prevent cross connects that do not
adhere to these rules. Therefore, if there are any cross connects already in place from a
previous release that do not adhere to the rules, this condition is raised on the NE in this
release after an upgrade from a previous release.
Services that are running over invalid cross connects may continue to operate, in which
case it may be best to wait for a maintenance window before performing this procedure,
or they may be interrupted, in which case a loss of service alarm is raised.
Severity Minor
Applicability COM
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Examine the cross connects on the NE, and look for cross connects that do not conform to
the rules. These cross connects are considered invalid.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Delete the invalid connections. Any service that is running over an invalid cross connect
that is deleted is interrupted.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Recreate valid cross connects for the interrupted services.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-252 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures PRCDRERR-TOPO (Power management topology invalid)
PRCDRERR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRCDRERR-TOPO (Power management topology invalid)

The NE contains an invalid physical topology that prevents automatic power management
from operating. Since physical topology links cannot be changed if a service
(cross-connect) is provisioned across them, and services cannot be provisioned if
topology links are incorrect, this can occur in the following ways:
• This error occurs upon the upgrade of the software to this release. One or more
services were provisioned in a previous software release across a topology that was
valid in that release, but which is invalid in this release due to rule changes for power
management topology.
• A physical topology link on the NE's through-path was changed or deleted when there
were no through services provisioned, but add/drop services were present. The next
time an attempt was made to provision a service, the service provisioning failed (or
the next time a warm restart occurred, an alarm was raised against each of the existing
services).
Severity Minor
Applicability AM2017B, AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2325B, AHPLG, AHPHG,
ALPHG, ALPFGT, OSCT, RA2P
Corrective Action
Referring to the network plan for this NE in this release, review the NE's physical
topology link information and verify that the proper cards are installed and all physical
topology links are correct.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Display the NE's physical topology link information.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Make changes as required to fix all incorrect internal physical topology links.
CLI config interface topology <sh/sl/pt> internal <sh/sl/pt>

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-253
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures PRCDRERR-TOPO (Power management topology invalid)
PRCDRERR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: If services were provisioned in a previous software release across an invalid
physical topology (for example, no ingress amplifier in an auto-power managed
CWR8 NE), these services have to be deleted before the physical topology can be
corrected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Alternatively, you can set the ports involved to operate under manual power management,
but this is not recommended. Contact your service representative before setting any ports
to manual power management.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PWR
PWR
• PWR (Power Filter 1 breaker off or voltage low)
• PWR (Power Filter 2 breaker off or voltage low)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-254 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures PWR (Power Filter 1 breaker off or voltage low) PWR (Power
PWR Filter 2 breaker off or voltage low)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PWR (Power Filter 1 breaker off or voltage low) PWR (Power

Filter 2 breaker off or voltage low)
Either the voltage level of the external DC supply is low or the breaker switch has been
turned off. This alarm is raised if there is no voltage going to the breaker feed or the
voltage is below the threshold (33-35V +/- 1.5V). This could be due to the breaker being
shut off, or due to a problem with the power feed to the breaker card.
Severity Minor
Applicability PF
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the breakers for the alarmed shelf and verify that they are ON.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Using a DC voltmeter, measure the power going to the shelf and verify that it is within
the accepted limits for proper operation (-48 to -52 volts).
If... Then...
the EC reports that a particular PF is faulted, replace the PF.
NOTE: If you do not have a redundant power
filter configuration, this step will be service
affecting.
the EC does report that a particular PF is continue with Step 3.
faulted,
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Perform a warm reset on the Equipment Controller that is raising the PWR condition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-255
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures PWR (Power Filter 1 breaker off or voltage low) PWR (Power
PWR Filter 2 breaker off or voltage low)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Perform a cold reset on the Equipment Controller that is raising the PWR condition.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Reseat the Equipment Controller that is raising the PWR condition.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Replace the Equipment Controller that is raising the PWR condition. Follow the return
and repair process to return the card to an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PWRADJCOMMS
PWRADJFAIL (Inter NE communication timeout blocking power

adjustment)
The Power Adjust Communications condition is raised when the ingress optical line
adjustment algorithm is unable to retrieve information from the upstream optical line to
use in the adjustment calculations. Power adjustments are run during system initial
commissioning, and during in-service power balancing (which can be manually user
triggered, auttriggered, or triggered by the commissioning and power balancing tool). The
most likely source of this condition is the upstream NE is busy processing other requests.
PWRADJCOMMS is a non-reported non-service affecting condition. If the ingress
optical line adjustment was run automatically there is no corrective action required. The
adjustment will be run again at another point in the future. If the auto triggered
adjustment is persistently resulting in PWRADJCOMMS follow the corrective actions
below.
PWRADJFAIL is a related condition: When the ingress adjustment was not run
automatically and an upstream communication timeout occurs, the PWRADJFAIL
condition is raised as a reported condition in addition to the non-reported
PWRADJCOMMS condition. This allows the user to correct the failure, if necessary,
given the context the adjustment was triggered in.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-256 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (Inter NE communication timeout blocking
PWRADJCOMMS power adjustment)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
AM2125B, AM2318A, AM2325B
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Re-run the ingress line adjustment.
CLI config powermgmt ingress shelf slot adjust

WEBUI Select the LD card, and click the Power Adjustment tab.
Ensure that the Perform In-Service Power Adjustment field is selected
(checkbox), and click OK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Repeat Step 1 up to 10 times.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Verify the local NE can communicate with the upstream NE. Correct the communications
problem with the upstream NE before proceeding to the next step. (Refer to procedures
for DCN setup, OSPF setup, and verifying that the OSC channel operates correctly.)
CLI telnet IP address of upstream NE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Repeat Step 1.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If the upstream NE is undergoing discovery by an NMS system, wait for the NMS to
finish discovery, then re-run the ingress line adjustment (see Step 1).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PWRADJFAIL
PWRADJFAIL (Power Adjustment Failure); PWRADJFAIL (No

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-257
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (Power Adjustment Failure); PWRADJFAIL (No
PWRADJFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
through services in appropriate state for adjustment)

The PWRADJFAIL (Power Adjustment Failure) condition is raised when the system is
unable to adequately adjust the power levels. Power adjustments are run during system
initial commissioning and during in-service power balancing. A rebalance is a
user-initiated activity from a user interface and performs adjustments on the OT, LDs,
CWRs, and SVACs. This condition is also raised during an EC reboot, LD warm reboot,
and CWR88 warm reboot when automatic ingress power adjustment is enabled on a
network.
The PWRADJFAIL (No through services in appropriate state for adjustment) condition is
raised when channel powers are not stable and the adjustment cannot be attempted or
there is a problem with power levels fluctuating too rapidly preventing the adjustment
from completing.
Severity Minor
AM2125B, AM2325B, OSC, OSCT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-258 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (Power Adjustment Failure)
PWRADJFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PWRADJFAIL (Power Adjustment Failure)

Corrective Action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
If... Then...
the system is equipped with the continue with Step 2.
SFD40/SFD40B,
the system is not equipped with the proceed to Step 6.
SFD40/SFD40B,
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 On the FOADM terminal with SFD40/SFD40B packs (see “Provisioning an

SFD40/SFD40B in a FOADM node” (p. 3-55)), check the alarm status of the
SFD40/SFD40B.
CLI alm
Note the SFD40/SFD40B status by monitoring the temperature LED of the

SFD40/SFD40B. The SFD40/SFD40B should in service when the temperature and
initialization LEDs turn green. Also check the alarm status on the NE management
software to ensure that the housekeeping cable has been properly connected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If the SFD40/SFD40B has been initialized, and has a temperature alarm, delete all the
optical channel services and turn off OTU lasers connected to SFD40/SFD40B.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-259
Issue 1 June 2011
PWRADJFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To delete optical channel services:
CLI config xc src_shelf/slot/port dest_shelf/slot/port freq

state down
config xc src_shelf/slot/port dest_shelf/slot/port freq
delete
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Perform a cold reset on the SFD40/SFD44B.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 When the temperature alarm is cleared, re-provision the optical channel service and
continue with Step 6.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Check the reason for the failure at the ingress LD card that has raised the PWRADJFAIL
alarm.
CLI config powermgmt ingress| egress shelf slot detail

WEBUI In the Equipment Tree, select the LD card and then its affected port.
Click the Power Management tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 If the reason is a lack of communication to the upstream NE, resolve the communication
issue prior to resolving the PWRADJFAIL alarm. Ensure the NE with the PWRADJFAIL
alarm can communicate with the upstream NE.
CLI telnet IP address of upstream NE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Retrieve the optical power levels at the receive port of the LD card where the alarm is
raised.
CLI show interface <shelf slot port> wave in, out
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-260 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
PWRADJFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click the Wave Keys In/Wave Keys Out tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9
If... Then...
the power levels are within the acceptable perform a power adjust operation at the ingress
limits, Amplifier card or the ALPHG card that has
raised the PWRADJFAIL alarm (continue
withStep 10).
the power levels are not within the acceptable check for kinking of the fiber at various points
limits, upstream of the receive connector on the
alarmed card. Proceed to Step 11.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 CLI config powermgmt ingress | egress shelf slot adjust
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Using the standard optical fiber jumper cleaning procedure, clean the fiber, and measure
the power again. Clean the receive bulkhead connector on the card. If the cleaning/fiber
un-kinking resolves the power levels to the acceptable limits, then go back to Step 9.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Verify that the fiber length and type used in the span immediately upstream of the
alarmed card still match the original specifications according to the network plan. Any
deviation from the specifications, as a result of work done on the span, may require new
network parameters and /or a rebalancing of the network to compensate. Follow the
appropriate procedures in the Alcatel-Lucent User Provisioning Guide to validate the new
parameters of the network.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Perform the “Path Power Trace” (p. 3-8) to determine other possible causes of the
PWRADJFAIL alarm and fix these first.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 Perform a warm reset on the card where the PWRADJFAIL alarm is raised.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-261
Issue 1 June 2011
PWRADJFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 Perform a cold reset on the card.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17 Replace the alarmed card. Refer to “Replacing System Components” (p. 3-20). Follow
the return and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the
faulty card to an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-262 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (No through services in appropriate state for
PWRADJFAIL adjustment)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PWRADJFAIL (No through services in appropriate state for

adjustment)
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 If the adjustment is an ingress adjustment, verify total power is reported at the upstream
line's LINE Out or LINEOUT port (depending on LD type), and at the downstream NE
RA2P output (if equipped) and ingress LD SIG Out or LINEOUT port (depending on LD
type). Troubleshoot the reason total power is missing before returning to this procedure.
Re-run an ingress adjustment after troubleshooting.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If the adjustment is an egress adjustment verify total power is reported at the egress line
LD LINE Out or LINEOUT port (depending on LD type). Troubleshoot the reason total
power is missing before returning to this procedure. Re-run an egress adjustment after
troubleshooting.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Perform the “Path Power Trace” (p. 3-8) to view the power levels of the optical channels
in transmission at the point where the condition is raised.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 With lightpath trace(s) for channels in transmission open, check by periodically

refreshing the lightpath trace data whether optical power levels are stable within 0.5 dB
over a 10 second interval at the ports of the line the PWRADJFAIL was raised against. If
optical power levels vary by more than this amount, wait 5 minutes to see if optical power
control run by other parts of the network will complete and allow channel powers to
stabilize. Then re-run the adjustment.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If the port for which the PWRADJFAIL is raised is monitored by a WTOCM pack, verify
the WTOCM pack is correctly installed, and detecting channels expected at the monitored
port. If necessary complete troubleshooting the WTOCM problems, wait one minute, then
re-run the adjustment.
CLI show interface wtocm sh/sl/In {1-4}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-263
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (No through services in appropriate state for
PWRADJFAIL adjustment)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Verify by visual inspection that fiber connections between the pack ports of the optical
line adjusted. For an ingress adjustment verify the NE's upstream neighbor optical line
optical connection are correctly mated. Mate properly if necessary, wait for one minute,
then re-run the adjustment.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Verify by visual inspection that the fiber patch cables between ports are not damaged. If
any are damaged replace the cables at earliest maintenance window.
Caution: Replacing fiber patch cables is service affecting.
Wait until APR conditions clear, then wait for one minute, then re-run the adjustment.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Verify by field inspection that there are no defects in the fiber plant between an upstream
and downstream NE that could be causing reflections. This step is only applicable to an
ingress adjustment. Make any repairs to the fiber plant required. Wait until APR
conditions clear, then wait for one minute, then re-run the adjustment.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 If power levels remain unstable at a port, and the problem can be localized to one pack,
follow the procedure for a warm reset of a pack. After the reset completes, wait for one
minute, the re-run the adjustment.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
perform a cold reset of a pack.

After the reset completes, wait for APR to clear, wait for one minute, the re-run the
adjustment.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
follow the procedure for replacing a pack. Refer to “Replacing System Components”
to return the faulty card to an authorized repair center for replacement. Re-run the
adjustment.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-264 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJREQ (Power Adjust Required)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PWRADJREQ
PWRADJREQ (Power Adjust Required)

A PWRADJREQ condition is raised when:
• Adding a channel on a non-commissioned network:
For example, a ring network can be commissioned with ASE power adjusts which
require no services to be added to power balance the network. When a service is
added after this type of commissioning is done, the PWRADJREQ alarm will not be
raised.
• Adding a service after an ingress or egress adjust failed because no service was
present or configured at the time:
Once the service has been provisioned, this alarm is raised and an adjustment of the
power is required.
• Reinserting a pack when services are present across the affected topology
• Changing the network EPT parameter values and breaking the line fiber into the
ingress LD
• Clearing a LOS condition on the LD
An ingress adjustment requires an ingress service (drop or through) to complete. An
egress adjustment requires a through service to complete; in the case of a terminal line
only an add path service is required. For a TOADM line both add path and through path
services are required to completely optimize the line; if services are provisioned across
only the add path or through path the PWRADJREQ condition is cleared only for that
path.
Masking of PWRADJREQ: If an event occurs on a network element that would cause
PWRADJREQ to be raised, but there are no channels provisioned at the affected optical
line, the PWRADJREQ condition is masked. The condition will only be raised when a
channel is provisioned that would allow the required SCOT power adjustment to be run to
clear the PWRADJREQ. This means that provisioning of a channel may result in
unmasking of one or more PWRADJREQ conditions.
Severity Minor
Applicability A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, AM2017B, AM2325B,
OSC, OSCT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-265
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJREQ (Power Adjust Required)
PWRADJREQ
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform a power adjust operation at the ingress amplifier card or the ALPHG card that
has raised the PWRADJREQ alarm.
CLI config powermgmt ingress | egress shelf slot
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If... Then...
the adjustment is successful, the PWRADJREQ alarm will be cleared.
Continue with Step 3.
the adjustment fails, the PWRADJFAIL alarm will appear. Proceed
to “PWRADJFAIL” (p. 2-257).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Follow the appropriate procedures in the Alcatel-Lucent User Provisioning Guide to

validate the set parameters of the network per the Network Plan.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PWRMARGIN
PWRMARGIN (Power Adjust Loss Margin Exceeded)

This condition is raised as a result of the gain, required to increase the power level at the
ingress port of an LD amplifier, being close to the maximum value as set by the
Engineering and Planning Tool (EPT). Without the ability to increase the gain any further,
the repair margin has been compromised and any additional loss would result in
power-adjust alarms.
Severity Minor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-266 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRMARGIN (Power Adjust Loss Margin Exceeded)
PWRMARGIN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform the “Path Power Trace” (p. 3-8) to determine if there are any anomalies upstream
of the alarmed card that would cause PWRMARGIN condition to be raised. Look for
excessive losses in fiber jumpers or connectors or signal degrade conditions.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Remove the fiber jumper from the point just before the anomaly and clean the fiber and
the bulkhead connector. Insert the fiber back into the bulkhead connector from which it
was removed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Repeat Step 1 and Step 2 for the path going upstream until all the excessive losses are
resolved.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Verify that the fiber length and type used in the span immediately upstream of the
alarmed card still match the original specifications according to the network plan. This
may require a validation by performing an Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR)
test from the customer patch panel into the fiber plant. Any anomalies detected at this
stage require external intervention by personnel responsible for the maintenance of the
fiber plant.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If the path is within all acceptable power ranges, then it is possible that the gain range
provisioned by the EPT for this amplifier is insufficient to accommodate the unexpected
change in loss in the network. Capture the current operating state of the network, using
the EMS XML network export feature and refer the problem to network planning for
analysis.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PWRMAXGAIN
PWRMAXGAIN (Gain Adjustment Exceeded Max Value)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-267
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRMAXGAIN (Gain Adjustment Exceeded Max Value)
PWRMAXGAIN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PWRMAXGAIN indicates the LD gain setting has been set higher than the maximum
value the EPT designed for this LD. This condition indicates that the loss between the
upstream NE line and the alarmed LD line is higher than expected. While the network can
continue to operate in this condition if sufficient margin exists for the lightpaths using the
LD, it is recommended the condition be corrected as soon as possible.
Severity Minor
AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2325B, OSC, OSCT
Corrective Action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Verify that the span loss preceding the ingress LD Line In is less than the planned
maximum loss. If the loss measured is higher than planned, attempt to clean the
connections to the fiber span and manually trigger an ingress adjustment at the alarmed
line.
Note: After re-connecting the fiber patch cable the user will need to wait for the APR
condition on the line to clear. If the span loss remains too high, network replanning
and re-provisioning of power management attributes may be required before clearing
the alarm is possible.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If the line uses an RA2P amplifier preceding the alarmed LD pack, verify that the RA2P
gain is within the planned limits. Pack attributes at the RA2P Line In port report the
minimum and maximum expected gain from Raman amplification. Compare the gain
value reported by the gain attribute at the RA2P Line In port to the range. If the gain is
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-268 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRMAXGAIN (Gain Adjustment Exceeded Max Value)
PWRMAXGAIN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
less than the minimum there may be a point loss problem between the RA2P Line In port
and the fiber span. Attempt to locate and repair the point loss problem, and manually
trigger an ingress adjustment at the alarmed line.
Note: After reconnecting the fiber patch cable the user will need to wait for the APR
condition on the line to clear. If the Raman amplifier gain problem cannot be resolved,
do not continue this troubleshooting routine, and escalate the problem.
Possible other problems include:
• Connecting to a fiber type of the wrong type compared to plan. This can only be
uncovered by a fiber plant survey by skilled personnel.
• Incorrect point loss assumptions entered into the engineering planning tool at design
time.
Fixing a Raman gain problem may involve network replanning and re-provisioning of
power management attributes prior to attempting to clear the alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If the line uses an RA2P amplifier and the gain from Raman amplification is within the
planned range, verify that the loss between the RA2P Line Out port and the alarmed
ingress LD’s LINEIN port is within the loss range expected for a fiber patch cable. If the
loss is higher than expected attempt to clean the connectors.
Note: Note: After reconnecting the fiber patch cable the user will need to wait for the
APR condition on the line to clear. Reattempt the ingress adjustment for the alarmed
line.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Replace the fiber connecting the alarmed LD LINEIN port to the RA2P LINEOUT port.
Note: After reconnecting the fiber patch cable the user will need to wait for the APR
condition on the line to clear. Reattempt the ingress adjustment for the alarmed line.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Replace the LD card (see “Replacing a Card (General)” (p. 3-22)).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 If the alarm remains, escalate the problem to those responsible for planning the network.
Network replanning and re-provisioning of power management attributes may be required
before clearing the alarm is possible.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-269
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRSUSP- OT or SVAC - (Power management suspended);
PWRSUSP- CWR8 (Power management suspended)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PWRSUSP
PWRSUSP- OT or SVAC - (Power management suspended);

PWRSUSP- CWR8 (Power management suspended)
Power management operations are suspended for the alarmed channel. The main purpose
of this condition is to help debug other problems. For example, if an alarm is present
indicating the power leaving a NE is too low, retrieve all conditions for the NE and check
if the PWRSUSP condition is present.
This condition applies to OT or SVAC add channels or CWR8 thru channels.
For the OT or SVAC:
• The measured loss from the input port to the egress LD is different from the
theoretical loss by 4dB or more. The alarm is raised when the power control loop for
the card attempts to change its power (to get the egress LD channel power to the
correct value) and reaches the 4dB clamp.
For the CWR8:
There are two possible causes for the PWRSUSP alarm on a CWR8 channel. In either
case, the CWR8 power control loop stops controlling the attenuation for that channel
(freezes the attenuation).
1. NE power management has told the CWR8 power control loop to clamp the
attenuation for the channel, and the CWR8 power control wants a channel attenuation
that exceeds the clamp. NE power management will do this if:
• it is unable to communicate with the upstream node to find out if channels are
leaving it at good power, and;
• there is an upstream problem resulting in the channel leaving an NE lower than
expected, or the upstream NE has a wavelength tracker reliability problem at its
egress LD.
2. The wavelength tracker measurements for that channel have become unreliable.

Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCX10, 112SX10L, 11STAR, 11STMM10,
11STGE12, 43SCX4, 43STA1P, 43STX4, 43STX4P, 4DPA4,
MVAC, SVAC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-270 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRSUSP- OT or SVAC - (Power management suspended);
PWRSUSP PWRSUSP- CWR8 (Power management suspended)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
The corrective action depends on Access Identifier (AID). If the AID is:
• For OT or SVAC, continue with the procedure “PWRSUSP - OT or SVAC (Power
management suspended)” (p. 2-272)
• CWR8, go to procedure “PWRSUSP-CWR8 (Power management suspended)”
(p. 2-274)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-271
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRSUSP - OT or SVAC (Power management suspended)
PWRSUSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PWRSUSP - OT or SVAC (Power management suspended)

This alarm is raised when the measured loss from the OT or SVAC input port to the
egress LD is greater than the theoretical loss by 4dB or more. The theoretical loss is
calculated using a combination of port insertion losses stored in the card SEEPs, nominal
connector/patch-cord losses, and also nominal losses calculated during commissioning.
The alarm will be raised when the power control loop for the OT or SVAC attempts to
change its power (to get the egress LD channel power to the correct value) and reaches
the 4dB clamp.
The cause of this condition may be one or more of the following:
• damaged fiber
• dirty fiber
• dirty port (OT, SVAC, or CWR8 port (A, B, C, or D))
Corrective Action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Trace the fiber connecting the alarmed OT or SVAC Line port through the packs
preceding the CWR8 pack or directly to the CWR8 OMD In, or CWR8 CLS (1 to 8) port.
If there is no CWR8 pack for this line trace the fiber connecting the alarmed OT or SVAC
Line port through the packs preceding the LD pack Line Out port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Clean the fiber ends connecting the alarmed OT or SVAC Line port to the next pack
preceding the CWR8 pack. Packs that may be included in the path to the CWR8 include
the OMD44.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If the preceding steps did not clear the alarm clean the CWR8 OMD port or CLS (1 to 8)
port that the channel passes through. If there is no CWR8 pack for this line clean the fiber
connections between the packs up to the egress line at the LD pack Line Out port.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-272 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRSUSP - OT or SVAC (Power management suspended)
PWRSUSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Replace the fiber connecting the alarmed OT or SVAC Line port to the next pack
preceding the CWR8 pack (or CWR8 CLS (1 to 8) port).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Replace the OT or SVAC card. Refer to “Replacing System Components” (p. 3-20).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Replace CWR8 card. Refer to “Replacing System Components” (p. 3-20).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-273
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRSUSP-CWR8 (Power management suspended)
PWRSUSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PWRSUSP-CWR8 (Power management suspended)

This alarm is raised for the CWR8 CLS or Thru ports when nodal power management has
told the CWR8 power control loop to clamp the attenuation for the channel, and the
CWR8 power control wants a channel attenuation that exceeds the clamp.
This alarm is raised for the CWR8 Sig port when the calculations required to calculate the
CWR8 add path VOA setting cannot be completed.
Corrective Action - PWRSUSP CWR8 CLS or Thru port

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check for communications problems with the upstream NE. Reestablish communications
if required.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check for upstream problems with the channel. If there are any, troubleshoot and clear
these alarms.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Check for hardware problems with the local alarmed CWR8. If there are any alarms or
conditions, troubleshoot and clear these alarms.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Corrective Action - PWRSUSP CWR8 Sig port

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check if the WT powers of the alarmed channels are missing at the CWR8 Sig port.
If... Then...
the channels are not missing, proceed to Step 6.
the channels are missing, check the add path topology by inspecting for
fiber kinks or disconnected input to the OMD
or CLS port. If no kinks are found, clean
connections between add path packs. Finally,
determine using a power meter that power is
present at the OMD or CLS add port as
expected.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-274 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
PWRSUSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If checking the add path topology for clean connections between packs did not resolve the
issue, try triggering an egress adjustment at the LD Line port of the egress line to which
the CWR8 Sig port connects.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Perform a warm reset of the CWR8 pack.

CLI config cardcard type shelf slot reset warm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Perform a cold reset of the CWR8 pack.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Replace the CWR8 pack.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Check whether the WT powers of the alarmed channels are missing at the LD Line port of
the egress line that the CWR8 Sig port connects to.
If... Then...
the WT powers of the alarmed channels are determine using the PhM lightpath trace or
missing other method whether excessive loss exists
between the CWR8 Sig port and the egress
line.
the WT powers of the alarmed channels are determine if the fiber is kinked along this path
not missing and fix the problem. If loss is excessive and
the fiber is not kinked try to clean connections
between the CWR8 Sig port and the LD Line
port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Perform a warm reset of the egress line LD pack.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Perform a cold reset of the egress line LD pack.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-275
Issue 1 June 2011
PWRSUSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Replace the egress line LD pack.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PWRTILTSUSP
PWRTILTSUSP (Amplifier gain tilt adjustments suspended)

The PWRTILTSUSP condition indicates that the amplifier gain tilt adjustments have been
suspended.
Severity Minor
Applicability A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, A2325A, AM2017B,
AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2325B
Corrective Action
Note: The PWRTILTSUSP condition notifies the user that alarms present in the
system have caused the automatic adjustments to be suspended.
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing the PWRTILTSUSP condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Identify and correct current transmission or equipment failures in the optical line.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
RAMANSUP
RAMANSUP (Raman Suppress - Line)

The LINE port on externally facing line cards has detected a Loss Of Signal on a line that
has an external Raman Amplifier connected. This RAMANSUP alarm would have an
associated LOS alarm is raised if the power measured at the port input drops below a
threshold.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-276 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures RAMANSUP (Raman Suppress - Line)
RAMANSUP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Severity MJ
Applicability 11DPE12, 11DPE12E, A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG,
AM2017B, AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2325B
No corrective action is required. Refer to the corrective action for the LINE port LOS
alarm (see “LD Input LOS” (p. 2-153)).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-277
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures RCVROPTPROG (Receiver Optimization in Progress)
RCVROPTPROG
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RCVROPTPROG
RCVROPTPROG (Receiver Optimization in Progress)

The Line input port on one of the 40G OT cards is tuning after recovering from an LOS.
After a 40G OT card has initialized successfully, the Tunable Dispersion Compensator
(TDC) and Delay Line Interferometer (DLI) on the line-side receive path will
automatically tune to optimize transmission performance. During the TDC/DLI
optimization, the RCVROPTPROG alarm is raised to notify the user that the pack is
tuning, and transmission is not yet stable. When the TDC/DLI tuning process is
completed, the alarm clears.
Severity Minor
Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 112SX10L, 43SCX4, 43STA1P,
43STX4, 43STX4P
Corrective Action
NOTICE
This procedure details the corrective action for a RCVROPTPROG against the Line port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 If the LOS alarm cleared less than 10 minutes ago wait for the alarm to clear.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Ensure that the administrative state of the port is Admin Up. When it is Up, then toggle
the administrative state from UP > DOWN > UP.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-278 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures RCVROPTPROG (Receiver Optimization in Progress)
RCVROPTPROG
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Remove the fiber from the port where the LOS was raised and measure the optical power.
If the optical power is below the threshold level provisioned by the Photonic Manager for
the type of port, then using standard optical fiber jumper cleaning procedure, clean the
fiber, and measure the power again. If the optical power is within the required limits,
clean the receive connector on the card. If the RCVROPTPROG condition is still present
more than 10 minutes after the LOS clears, the problem may be with the card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
RDI
RDI (Remote Defect Indication)

The OT port has detected a RDI at the MEP layer. A MEP detects RDI when it receives a
CCM frame with the RDI field set.
Severity Major
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-279
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures RDI (Remote Defect Indication)
RDI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The alarm is cleared when the MEP receives a CCM frame where RDI is set to “0.”
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the remote peer MEP alarms. The remote peer MEP alarms trigger RDI on the
local MEP.
CLI alarm
WEBUI Select Reports > Alarm List > Total.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
REMOVEMOD
REMOVEMOD (Pluggable Module Removed)

The REMOVEMOD condition indicates that a pluggable module has been removed.
Severity TC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-280 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures REPLUNTMISS (Card Missing)
REPLUNITMISS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
REPLUNITMISS
REPLUNTMISS (Card Missing)

The card missing condition is raised when a provisioned slot, that has both a programmed
card-type and an Admin state of In-Service, does not have a card in it. The slot has been
provisioned as such and no card has been inserted, or an inserted In-Service card has been
physically removed from that slot.
Severity TC
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
If... Then...
the affected card is a PF in a PSS-16 system, continue with Step 2.
the affected card is not a PF in a PSS-16 proceed to Step 3.
system,
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Although only one PF is required in the 1830 PSS-16, the REPLUNITMISS condition
may occur when only one PF is present. Disable the REPLUNITMISS alarm on the PF
slot that is empty:
CLI config alm attr slot
WEBUI In the Equipment Tree, select System and click the Fault function.
On the Alarmable Conditions window, in the Override Severity column,
select Not Reported for the empty PF slot.
Click Submit.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-281
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures REPLUNTMISS (Card Missing)
REPLUNITMISS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Verify that there is a card in the slot against which the alarm is raised. If no card is
present, insert a card of the provisioned type into the slot. To verify which card type has
been provisioned for the slot:
CLI show slot shelf slot
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If... Then...
a card is present, remove the card and check for damage to the
shelf's backplane pins and to the card's
backplane connector.
damage is found on the shelf's backplane, arrange for repair to the backplane. Do not
attempt to reinsert the card.
damage is found on the card, but not on the send the card for repair. Replace the damaged
backplane, card with another one of the same type, into
the same slot.
no damage is found on either the backplane or replace the card with another one of the same
the card, type into the same slot. If the Card Missing
alarm clears, send the original card for repair.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If... Then...
the shelf has a single Equipment Controller replace the Equipment Controller.
the shelf has redundant Equipment Controllers 1. switch activity
2. replace the Equipment Controller that used
to be active (but is now inactive)
3. switch activity back again
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 If the REPLUNITMISS alarm does not clear, remove the alarmed card and arrange for
repair to the backplane. Follow the return and repair process to return the damaged card
or shelf to an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-282 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures REPLUNTMISS (Pluggable Module Missing)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
REPLUNITMISSMOD
REPLUNTMISS (Pluggable Module Missing)

The optics module (pluggable module) for the port is missing or the card is not able to
successfully detect the presence of the module. The problem could be with the pluggable
module or the card. Typically, this alarm is raised if the pluggable module is not installed
or not properly seated.
Severity Critical (Minor if protected or inactive)

Service affecting? Yes (No, if protected or inactive)
4DPA2, 4DPA4, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, ALPFGT, A2325A,
AM2017B, AM2125A, AM2125B, OSCT
Corrective Action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 If there is no pluggable module in the port where the pluggable module missing condition
is raised, then insert one that is appropriate for that transponder card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-283
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures REPLUNTMISS (Pluggable Module Missing)
REPLUNITMISSMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
connector on the SFP and the receptacle connector on the card where the SFP plugs into
for any damage. If no damage is seen, reinsert the pluggable module into its port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Perform a cold reset of the card on the card where the pluggable module failure is raised.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
RFIEGR
RFIEGR (Remote Client Remote Fault)

The OT port has detected a Remote Fault Identifier (RFI) ordered set on the 10GbE LAN
service transported over the OTUk in the transmit direction.
This may be caused if the remote client equipment is generating RFI ordered sets.
Severity NA
Applicability 11QPA4, 11STAR1, 43STX4
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing RFIEGR declared on an OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-284 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures RFIEGR (Remote Client Remote Fault)
RFIEGR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform the steps in the procedure “LANRFI” (p. 2-123) on the far end port.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
RFIL
RFIL (Remote Fault Indication)

An RFIL condition may be raised on a client or network SDH port of the listed line cards
and may be attributed to a fault on the remote device (the equipment connected to the
client or network port). The remote device is either detecting a problem on its receive link
or has some sort of local fault and is generating an RFI in the downstream direction.

Applicability 11STMM10
Corrective Action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Retrieve alarms and conditions for the local NE that has the RFI-L condition on its
receive port. Examine them and identify faults on the services supporting the devices that
have the RFI-L condition. Resolve any issues with respect to these faults first.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Repeat Step 1 for the far end device. Examine the devices associated with the same
services.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-285
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures RFIL (Remote Fault Indication)
RFIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Perform a warm reset of the card on the local card where the RFIL condition is raised.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Perform a warm reset of the card on the upstream card that is sending the RFIL.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Perform a cold reset of the card on the local card where the RFIL condition is raised.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Perform a cold reset of the card on the upstream card that is sending the RFIL.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Reseat the local card where the RFIL condition is raised. Refer to “Reseating a Card”
(p. 3-19).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Reseat the upstream card that is sending the RFIL. Refer to “Reseating a Card” (p. 3-19).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Replace the alarmed card. Refer to “Replacing System Components” (p. 3-20). Follow
the return and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the
faulty card to an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
SDBER
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-286 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures SDBER (Signal Degrade)
SDBER
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SDBER (Signal Degrade)

The OT port has detected a Signal Degrade Bit Error Rate (SDBER) on the OC-n/STM-n
port of the applicable card. This defect indicates that local OC-nM/STM-n port has
Severity Major
43SCX4
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing the SDBER against the OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Clean the fiber.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-287
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures SDBER (RS) (RS Signal Degrade)
SDBER
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SDBER (RS) (RS Signal Degrade)

The OT port has detected a Signal Degrade Bit Error Rate (SDBER) on the OC-n/STM-n
port of the applicable card. This defect indicates that local OC-nM/STM-n port has
Severity Major
Applicability 11QPA4, 11STAR1, 11STMM10
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Clean the fiber.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
SDEG-O
SDEG-O (SUPVY Signal Degrade)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-288 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures SDEG-O (SUPVY Signal Degrade)
SDEG-O
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The OSC SFP receive port on one of the amplifier cards has detected a signal degrade.
The SDEG-O alarm is raised if the SONET framer detects errors in the as per the SONET
specification
Severity Minor
Corrective Action
NOTICE
This procedure details the corrective action for a SDEG-O against the OSC port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Query for the OSC receive power on the port where the SDEG-O condition is present.

port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-289
Issue 1 June 2011
SDEG-O
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If... Then...
the SDEG-O is raised and measure the optical
power.
installed measure the power again.
SDEG-O condition is still present, the problem
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-290 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
SDEG-O
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
SDEGR
SDEGR (Egress Signal Degrade - ODU)

The OT port has detected a Signal Degrade Bit Error Rate exiting the OT client port.
Severity MJ
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Clean the fiber.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-291
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures SFMISMATCH (Software Version Mismatch)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SFMISMATCH
SFMISMATCH (Software Version Mismatch)

There is software version mismatch.
This alarm may be raised under the following conditions:
• The software (application and boot only, not FPGA) on the alarmed card does not
match the software on the nearest EC card because the card failed to update
successfully
• When all cards are not running the same software release
Severity Critical (all cards except EC)

Major (EC only)
Service affecting? Yes (all cards except EC)
No (EC only)
11DPE12E, 11DPM12, 11QPA4, 11STAR1, 11STMM10,
4DPA4, A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, ALPFGT,
AM2017B, AM2325B, EC, CWR, FLC, MESH4, MT0C, MVAC,
OPS, OSCT, SVAC, WTOCM
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Find the software version number and release number on the EC card. Compare the
corresponding number in the alarmed card. If it is not the same, download the software
from EC to the alarmed card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-292 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures SLTMSIG (Timing reference frequency has moved off the
required accuracy limits (not Protected or Protection not
Available))
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SLTMSIG
SLTMSIG (Timing reference frequency has moved off the

required accuracy limits (not Protected or Protection not
Available))
The SLTMSIG condition occurs when the OT port detects SLTMSIG at the LINEREF
layer. A LINEREF detects SLTMSIG when the timing reference frequency has moved off
the required accuracy limits, (not Protected or Protection not Available).
Severity Minor
To clear the alarm, check the reference frequency offset.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-293
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures SSF (Server Signal Failure - OTU)
SSF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SSF
SSF (Server Signal Failure - OTU)

The OT port has detected an Optical Channel (Och) Server Signal Failure. A condition
that is treated as a Server Signal Failure (i.e., a Loss of Signal, LOS) was detected. Each
of the following conditions is treated as a Server Signal Failure:
• LOS-P (Loss of Signal – OTU)
• LOF (Loss of Frame – OTU)
• LOM (Loss of Multiframe – OTU)

Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 112SX10L, 11DPE12, 11QPA4,
43STX4P, 4DPA4
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing the SSF declared on an OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-294 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures SSF (Server Signal Failure - OTU)
SSF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
connected directly to receiver of the port which detects SSF condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Clean the fiber.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
SSFODU
SSFODU (Server Signal Failure - ODU)

The OT port has detected a Server Signal Failure at the ODUk level. Conditions that can
cause an SSFODU are:
• ODU-AIS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-295
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures SSFODU (Server Signal Failure - ODU)
SSFODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing the SSFODU declared on an OT
step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
connected directly to receiver of the port which detects SSFODU condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Clean the fiber.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-296 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures SSFODU (Server Signal Failure - ODU)
SSFODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
SSFODUEGR
SSFODUEGR (Egress Signal Server Failure - ODU)

The OT port has detected a Server Signal Failure at the ODUk level exiting the client
port. Conditions that can cause an SSFODU are:
• ODU-AIS
Severity NR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-297
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures SSFODUEGR (Egress Signal Server Failure - ODU)
SSFODUEGR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing the SSFODUEGR declared on an
OT port. At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the
next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
connected directly to receiver of the port which detects SSFODUEGR condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Clean the fiber.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 If the problem is detected on the client port of OT, and the power level is within the
operating range, check for pluggable module alarms.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-298 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures SWEQPT (Equipment Controller redundancy is
compromised); SWEQPT (Protection switching equipment
failure)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SWEQPT
SWEQPT (Equipment Controller redundancy is compromised);

SWEQPT (Protection switching equipment failure)
The SWEQPT alarm is raised when the redundant equipment is not able to support a
failure of the working equipment. The condition “SWEQPT (Equipment Controller
redundancy is compromised)” (p. 2-300) is raised when the redundant Equipment
Controller is unable to provide protection whereas the condition “SWEQPT (Protection
Switching Equipment Failure)” (p. 2-304) is raised by the working transponder card when
the mate transponder card is not able to provide protection.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-299
Issue 1 June 2011
SWEQPT compromised)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SWEQPT (Equipment Controller redundancy is compromised)

The inactive controller is unable to provide redundancy protection. In some cases this is a
transitory alarm that occurs as redundant Equipment Controllers discover one another and
synchronize. Typical causes for the persistence of this alarm are:
• irreconcilable database schemas
• cannot support system timing
• system timing is compromised. The inactive controller system timing module is not
reporting the same status as the active controller or is reporting an error that the active
controller does not have.
Reasons that are generally transitory are:
• database not yet fully synched
• TIRS not yet synched
• subshelf link missing
• software loads are not yet synched.
Some or all of these may apply when the alarm is raised.
Severity Minor
Applicability SHELF-1
Corrective Action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Display the logs.
CLI show logs severity (unless the default settings have been changed, the
severity of SWEQPT is minor.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-300 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
SWEQPT compromised)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Look for the log "Equipment Controller redundancy is compromised". The log contains a
demerit descriptor, as seen in Table 2-1, “Corrective Actions for Equipment Controller
Demerits” (p. 2-301).
For each log/demerit that is raised, take the corrective action as listed in the following
table. If a transitional demerit remains for greater than 20 minutes, then proceed with this
procedure.
Table 2-1 Corrective Actions for Equipment Controller Demerits
Demerit Corrective Action

Irreconcilable This demerit is obsolete and is present for backwards compatibility only.
schemas
DB Not Fully This is a transitional demerit that is raised when database synchronization
Synched begins, and clears once the database has been fully synchronized from the
active to the inactive Equipment Controller. Typically no user action is
required, however if the condition persists, perform a warm reset on the
inactive Equipment Controller.
TIRS not No user action is required to clear this demerit. This is a transitional demerit
synched that is raised when routing information synchronization begins and will clear
when the routing information has been fully synchronized from the active to
the inactive controller.
Subshelf link This demerit is raised when the inactive controller has fewer sub-shelf links
that the number of programmed subtended shelves.
User-initiated No user action is required to clear this demerit. This is a demerit that is used
act switch internally upon a user initiated activity switch. It clears automatically and
causes an evaluated, safe activity switch.
No System This demerit is raised when the controller does not support system timing
Timing and a primary and/or secondary timing reference have been provisioned.
This demerit will cause a controller activity switch if the inactive controller
does not have this demerit raised and the active does. See if the System
Timing Not Supported alarm is present and troubleshoot it.
SWL not No user action is required to clear this demerit. This is a transitional demerit
Synched that is raised when the software load synchronization begins and will clear
when the software loads has been fully synchronized from the active to the
inactive controller.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-301
Issue 1 June 2011
SWEQPT compromised)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-1 Corrective Actions for Equipment Controller Demerits (continued)
Demerit Corrective Action

System Timing This demerit is raised when the inactive controller's system timing module is
compromised not reporting the same status as the active controller's system timing module.
1. Wait for 20 seconds because this alarm should clear within 20 seconds
when the inactive system timing module is synchronized to the active
system timing module.
2. Look for system timing related alarms on any controller and
troubleshoot them.
3. If no system timing alarms are present and the demerit is still present,
replace the inactive controller.
System Timing This demerit is raised when a shelf controller determines that there is no
clock lost system timing clock from the master shelf. This demerit will cause a
controller activity switch if the inactive controller does not have this demerit
raised, but the active does.
System Timing This demerit is raised when the controller detects a failure of the circuitry
HW Failure that controls and provides NE-wide timing clocks. This controller must be
replaced.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Perform a warm reset of the card on the inactive card where the alarm is raised.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-302 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
SWEQPT compromised)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-303
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures SWEQPT (Protection Switching Equipment Failure)
SWEQPT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SWEQPT (Protection Switching Equipment Failure)

This condition indicates a problem on the mate card.
Severity Minor
Applicability 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 11DPE12E, 11DPM12, 11STAR,
11STMM10, 11STGE12, 43SCX4, 43STA1P, 43STX4, 43STX4P
Corrective Action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Determine if there are any hardware or software failure alarms for the transponder card
that is inactive and providing protection for the working one. Based on the information
presented, determine the cause of the failure and resolve that issue first using the
appropriate corrective action(s).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform a warm reset of the card of the mate transponder card.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Perform a cold reset of the card of the mate transponder card.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-304 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures SWEQPT (Protection Switching Equipment Failure)
SWEQPT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Reseat the mate transponder card. Refer to “Reseating a Card” (p. 3-19).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Replace the mate transponder card. Refer to “Replacing System Components” (p. 3-20).
Follow the return and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return
the faulty card to an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
SWFTDWN
SWFTDWN (Software Upgrade in Progress)

Indicates that a software upgrade is currently in progress on the NE. This alarm is active
if the NE is being upgraded, or has finished upgrading and is waiting for a command to
commit or to back-out of the upgraded software release.
Severity Minor
Applicability Software Upgrades on all Cards
Corrective Action
The corrective action depends on whether you want to commit the software upgrade, or
back out of the software upgrade. The alarm clears when a commit or a back out is issued
after the software upgrade is complete.
For more details on the upgrade process, refer to the Alcatel-Lucent User Provisioning
Guide.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-305
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures Committing the Software Upgrade
SWFTDWN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Committing the Software Upgrade

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Wait for the software upgrade to complete.
CLI show software progress
Re-enter this command until the system indicates that the software upgrade is complete.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Commit the upgrade.
CLI config software upgrade commit
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-306 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures Backing out the Software Upgrade
SWFTDWN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Backing out the Software Upgrade

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Abort the upgrade.
CLI config software upgrade abort
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Backout of the upgrade.
CLI config software upgrade backout
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
SWMTXMOD
SWMTXMOD
• SWMTXMOD (Switching Matrix Module Failure)
• SWMTXMOD (Y-Cable Switchover Timer Expired)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-307
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures SWMTXMOD (Switching Matrix Module Failure)
SWMTXMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SWMTXMOD (Switching Matrix Module Failure)

This condition is applicable to CWR8 cards when the channels going through the card are
not being routed correctly.
In addition, this condition may apply to line cards in the case where there is optical
splitter protection. Communications is present between the working and protection cards,
however, requests (such as a request to turn the laser off) is not implemented. In this case
this condition is raised against the card that is not complying with the request.
Severity Critical
Applicability CWR8
Corrective Action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform a warm reset on the card where the SWMTXMOD condition is raised.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-308 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures SWMTXMOD (Switching Matrix Module Failure)
SWMTXMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-309
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures SWMTXMOD (Y-Cable Switchover Timer Expired)
SWMTXMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SWMTXMOD (Y-Cable Switchover Timer Expired)
Severity Critical
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform the steps in the procedure “EQPTDGR” (p. 2-75) for the standby card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform the steps in the procedure “EQPTDGR” (p. 2-75) for the active card.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
SWUPGCOMMIT
SWUPGCOMMIT (No committed software load (Autoinstall

disabled))
The SWUPGCOMMIT alarm is raised after the database has been manually cleared or
restored.
Severity Minor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-310 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures SWUPGCOMMIT (No committed software load (Autoinstall
SWUPGCOMMIT disabled))
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 To upgrade to a new release or clear the alarm, the current software load must be
committed. Enter the following command to commit the software:
CLI config software upgrade commit
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
SWUPGFAIL
SWUPGFAIL (Software Upgrade Failed)

The SWUPGFAIL alarm is applicable at the NE-level and/or the card-level. This alarm is
raised when the NE or card fails to upgrade to the designated load.
Severity Minor
Applicability • NE level: SYSTEM
• Card level: 11STAR1, 11STMM10, 11STGE12, ALPHG,
AHPHG, CWR, OPS, SVAC
Corrective Action
NOTICE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-311
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures SWUPGFAIL (Software Upgrade Failed)
SWUPGFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Determine the reason why the NE or card failed to upgrade.
CLI config software upgrade status
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Based on the information provided by the status, as listed in the following table,
determine the cause of the failure and resolve that issue first.
Table 2-2 Software upgrade status and actions
Upgrade
Action
status
Transfer failed This is an internal error indicating a failure between the EC and another
card. Retry the upgrade process.
File access Problem accessing the load file on the EC disk. Retry the upgrade process.
failed
File corruption Retry the upgrade process.
detected during
transfer
Timeout The upgrade timed out. Retry the upgrade process.
Operation in No action required.
progress
Install in No action required.
progress
Transfer in Attempted to do an upgrade while SWL was busy.
progress 1. Wait for the action to complete, or abort the current action (config
software abort).
2. Retry the upgrade process.
Card not found A card was removed while an upgrade was in progress. Retry again (with or
without the missing card).
Card type not The software release does not contain a software load for the card.
found in catalog 1. Check that you are upgrading to the correct software load. Retry with
the correct load.
2. If you are upgrading to the correct load, determine if the card in question
is required for normal operations.
3. If the card is not required, remove the card from the system.
4. If the card is required for normal operation, contact your service
representative.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-312 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
SWUPGFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-2 Software upgrade status and actions (continued)
Upgrade
Action
status
Lost The card experienced a temporary communications problem. Retry the
communication upgrade process.
with target
Flash read failed The card has a problem with one or more of its flash banks.
2. If the retry fails,then replace the card in question
Flash write The card has a problem with one or more of its flash banks.
failed 1. Retry the upgrade process.
2. If the retry fails, then replace the card in question
Flash erase The card has a problem with one or more of its flash banks.
failed 1. Retry the upgrade process.
2. If the retry fails, then replace the card in question.
DB erase failed Retry the upgrade process.
DB read failed Retry the upgrade process.
DB write failed Database access failure.
2. If the retry fails, then replace the EC card in question.
TFTP server ip Set the IP address of the TFTP server.
address not set
Failed to access Retry the upgrade process.
catalog
TFTP server Ensure that the server is up and running correctly.
error
TFTP network There is a problem with the TFTP connectivity.
error 1. Check and correct TFTP server configuration.
2. Check and correct network connectivity.
TFTP timeout There is a problem with the TFTP connectivity.
1. Check and correct TFTP server configuration.
2. Check and correct network connectivity.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-313
Issue 1 June 2011
SWUPGFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Upgrade
Action
status
No upgrade path Attempt to upgrade to a release which is not backwards compatible with the
current release.
1. Upgrade to an intermediate release first.
2. Once the intermediate load is accomplished, retry the upgrade process to
the final upgrade release.
Operation The upgrade was manually aborted. Retry the upgrade process.
aborted
Invalid script The audit was unable to produce a valid upgrade script. Retry the upgrade
process.
Load and bank An attempt was made to load a boot load in an application bank, or vice
are incompatible versa. This is an invalid operation. Application loads can only be loaded into
application banks; boot loads can only be loaded into boot banks. Perform
the upgrade but this time specify the correct bank.
Backup&Restore Set the backup and restore host IP address.
host IP not set
Database backup Retry the upgrade process.
failed
Database restore Retry the upgrade process.
failed
Couldn't find There is a problem with the database backup server, or the connectivity to
database to the server or the database server configuration.
restore 1. Check and correct the database backup server configuration.
2. Check and correct DCN network connectivity. Confirm that the TFTP
server can accept ping commands (config tools ping <TFTP server>).
3. Check and correct the status of database server.
4. Retry the upgrade process once the previous steps are complete.
Attempted Retry the upgrade process.
activate before
load
Bank is empty Retry the upgrade process.
Load not found An attempt was made to activate a bank with an incorrect or missing
on card software load.
1. Reload the software.
2. Activate the load.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-314 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
SWUPGFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Upgrade
Action
status
Load file not A software load file could not be found on the disk. Repeat the upgrade to
found transfer the file from FTP to the disk.
Load could not The correct load could not be activated.
be activated Retry the upgrade process.
Operation Card was reset while upgrade was underway.
interrupted by 1. Wait for the reset of card to complete.
reset
2. Relog into NE (if required).
Software version A commit failed because not all cards were running the same software
mismatch release. This error is not the cause of an upgrade failure alarm.
Repeat the upgrade process.
Activity switch The CCs failed to switch activity, so the upgrade cannot continue.
failed 1. Resolve redundancy issues.
Mate EC unable The inactive EC was unable to take activity, so the upgrade cannot continue.
to take activity 1. Resolve redundancy issues.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Perform a warm reset on the card that failed to upgrade and try the upgrade procedure
again.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Perform a cold reset of the card on the card that failed to upgrade and try the upgrade
procedure again.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-315
Issue 1 June 2011
SWUPGFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Reseat the card that failed to upgrade and try the upgrade procedure again. Refer to
“Reseating a Card” (p. 3-19).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Replace the card that failed to upgrade and try the upgrade procedure again. Refer to
“Replacing System Components” (p. 3-20). Follow the return and repair process in the
Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to an authorized repair
center for replacement.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Contact your service representative.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
SYNCOOS
SYNCOOS (Timing reference failed (Not Protected or

Protection not Available)) / SYNCOOS (Timing reference
failed--system going into holdover)
One of two causes for SYNCOOS:
• The OT port has detected SYNCOOS at the LINEREF layer. A LINEREF detects
SYNCOOS when the timing reference failed, (not Protected or Protection not
Available).
• The OT port has detected an SYNCOOS at the SYNC layer. SYNC detects
SYNCOOS when all available timing references have failed and the system is going
into holdover.
Severity Major
Service affecting? Yes (LINEREFSYS)
No (SYNC)
Applicability LINEREFSYS, SYNC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-316 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures SYNCOOS (Timing reference failed (Not Protected or
SYNCOOS Protection not Available))
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SYNCOOS (Timing reference failed (Not Protected or

Protection not Available))
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-317
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures SYNCOOS (Timing reference failed--system going into
SYNCOOS holdover)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SYNCOOS (Timing reference failed--system going into

holdover)
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the reference status.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
SYNREFFAIL
SYNREFFAIL (Timing reference failed, (not Protected or

Protection not Available))
The OT port has detected an SYNCREFFAIL at the LINEREF layer. A LINEREF detects
SYNCREFFAIL when the timing reference failed, (not Protected or Protection not
Available).
Severity Minor
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-318 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures SYNREFFAIL (Timing reference failed, (not Protected or
SYNREFFAIL Protection not Available))
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
SYNREFUNEQ
SYNREFUNEQ (Timing reference unassigned)

The OT port has detected an SYNCREFUNEQ at the LINEREF layer. A LINEREF
detects SYNCREFUNEQ when the timing reference is unassigned.
Severity Minor
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the reference assignment.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
SYSBOOT
SYSBOOT (Cold Start); SYSBOOT (Warm Start)
Severity Transient Condition

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-319
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures SYSBOOT (Cold Start); SYSBOOT (Warm Start)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
None. This is a normal report caused by user actions.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-320 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures TIM (Trace Identifier Mismatch)
TIM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TIM
TIM (Trace Identifier Mismatch)

The TIM condition is typically raised when the received section trace does not match the
expected section trace. This may be caused by either an error in the provisioning of the
section trace, or an error in the fibering. For the Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch condition
(Network Ports) the cause would be an error in the fibering at the near end or the far end.
This alarm is raised if:
• There is an error in the configuration of the trace at the transmit or receive end (TIM)
• There is an error in the fibering of compatible SONET sources (TIM or TTI
Mismatch)
• The trace is not being generated (TIM or TTI Mismatch)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-321
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures TIM (Client Ports)
TIM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TIM (Client Ports)
Severity Minor
Corrective Action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check that the section trace configuration of the client port is correct:
CLI show interface card <shelf slot port>

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If there are errors in the provisioned section trace correct them.
CLI config interface card <shelf slot port>

sectTrace expectedTrace
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Check the SONET device generating the section trace, connected to the client port that is
raising the TIMS alarm, and verify its configuration. If there are errors in the provisioning
of the section trace transmit state, mode or message, correct them. Refer to that device's
user manual.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-322 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures TIM (Client Ports)
TIM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Verify that the physical fibering between the client port and the SONET device is correct.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Perform a warm reset of the card on which the TIMS condition is raised.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Perform a cold reset of the card on which the TIMS condition is raised.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-323
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch (Network Ports)
TIM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch (Network Ports)
Severity Minor
Applicability 11QPA4, 43STX4, 4DPA4
Corrective Action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Verify that the physical fibering between the network receive port of the transponder and
the output port of the SFD5, SFD44, or SFC2/4/8 is correct.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform the procedure “Determining the Far End of a Service” (p. 3-10) to determine the
NE and location of the transponder at the other end of this service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Verify that the physical fibering between the network transmit port of the transponder and
the input port of the SFD5, SFD44, or SFC2/4/8 is correct.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Perform a warm reset of the card on the local card where the TIM condition is raised. If
the problem does not clear then perform a warm reset on the far-end card associated with
the local card raising the TIM condition.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-324 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch (Network Ports)
TIM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Perform a cold reset of the card on the local card where the TIM condition is raised. If the
problem does not clear then perform a cold reset on the far-end card associated with the
local card raising the TIM condition.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Reseat the alarmed card. If the problem does not clear then reseat the associated far end
card. Refer to “Reseating a Card” (p. 3-19).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Replace the alarmed card. If the problem does not clear then replace the associated
far-end card. Refer to “Replacing System Components” (p. 3-20). Follow the return and
repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to an
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
TIMEGR
TIMEGR (Egress Trail Identifier Mismatch - ODU)

The TIM condition is typically raised when the received section trace does not match the
expected section trace. The TIMEGR alarm is a TIM condition detected exiting the client
port. This may be caused by either an error in the provisioning of the section trace, or an
error in the fibering. For the Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch condition (Network Ports)
the cause would be an error in the fibering at the near end or the far end.
This alarm is raised if:
• There is an error in the configuration of the trace at the transmit or receive end (TIM)
• There is an error in the fibering of compatible SONET sources (TIM or TTI
Mismatch)
• The trace is not being generated (TIM or TTI Mismatch)
Severity CR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-325
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures TIMEGR (Egress Trail Identifier Mismatch - ODU)
TIMEGR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To clear the TIMEGR condition, perform the steps in the procedure, “TIM” (p. 2-321).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-326 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures TIMODU (Trace Identifier Mismatch - ODU)
TIMODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TIMODU
TIMODU (Trace Identifier Mismatch - ODU)

This alarm is raised when the incoming optical channel trail trace message does not match
the expected incoming optical channel trail trace message.
• Mis-fibering
• Improper provisioning
Severity Critical
43STX4P
NOTICE
Failure to follow instructions in this step could result in SERVICE INTERRUPTION.
Notify the person in charge of the optical line so that traffic can be re-routed.
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing the TIMODU alarm declared on
an OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Examine the NE alarm list. Determine the AID of the OT reporting this alarm condition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-327
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures TIMODU (Trace Identifier Mismatch - ODU)
TIMODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check the local office records. Determine if the correct expected ODU trail trace message
for this signal matches the data in the expected incoming ODU trail trace message listed
for the report.
If... Then...
the correct expected ODU trail trace message Continue with Step 3.
for this signal matches the data in the expected
incoming ODU trail trace message listed for
the report
the correct expected ODU trail trace message Proceed to Step 6.
for this signal does not match the data in the
expected incoming ODU trail trace message
listed for the report
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 At the user interface, obtain an updated alarm report.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Trace the fiber jumper connected to the line port of the OT identified in the AID, back to
the source OT. If the jumper fiber is connected to the correct source, go to Step 6.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Use local procedures to connect the fiber jumper to the correct source.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 If the alarm is still listed in the NE alarm list, then at the user interface, enter the correct
expected incoming ODU trail trace message. The TIMODU alarm should clear.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
TRMT
TRMT (Port Transmit Failure)

The Port transmit Failure is valid on 10G network ports and may indicate several different
issues with the transmit port such as transmit lock detect, temperature deviations, transmit
laser failures, and so on.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-328 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures TRMT (Port Transmit Failure)
TRMT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Severity Critical.
Service affecting? Yes.
Applicability 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 11DPE12E, 11STAR, 11STMM10,
11STGE12, 43SCX4, 43STA1P, 43STX4, 43STX4P, MVAC,
SVAC
Corrective Action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-329
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures TRMT (Port Transmit Failure)
TRMT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
TRMTMOD
TRMTMOD (Pluggable Module Transmit Failure)

The Pluggable Module Transmit Failure condition is raised at the pluggable module
equipment and indicates a fault on the transmit port of the pluggable module. This is
usually a laser failure where light is not detected at the transmit port.
Severity Critical.
Service affecting? Yes.
4DPA2, 4DPA4, A23251, AHPHG, AHPLG ALPHG, ALPFGT,
AM2017B, AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2325B, OSCT
Corrective Action
NOTICE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-330 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures TRMTMOD (Pluggable Module Transmit Failure)
TRMTMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
UNG/UNP
UNG/UNP
The OT port has detected a UNG or UNP at the MEP layer.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-331
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures UNG/UNP
UNG/UNP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A MEP detects Unexpected MEP or “unexpected period” when it receives one of the
following:
• CCM frame with a correct MEG level (that is, the MEG level is the same as the
MEP's own MEG level) and a correct MEG ID, but an Unexpected MEP ID which
includes the MEP's own MEP ID
• CCM frame with a correct MEG level (that is, the MEG level is equal to the MEP's
own MEG level), a correct MEG ID, a correct MEP ID, but with period field value
different than the MEP's own CCM transmission period
Determining the unexpected MEP ID is possible when the MEP maintains a list of its peer
MEP IDs. A list of peer MEP IDs must be configured on each MEP during provisioning.
This condition is most likely caused by misconfiguration.
Severity Major
The alarm is cleared when the MEP does not receive CCM frames an expected MEP ID,
or MEP does not receive a CCM frame with an incorrect period field value.
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the peer MAID (MD name and MA Name). The local MAID and remote peer
MAID should be same.
CLI show card 11dpe12e shelf/slot ethoam md1ma{1-400}

remote mepid
show card 11dpe12e shelf/slot ethoam md1ma{1-400} mep
> MEP.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
UNKNOWN
UNKNOWN (Card Unknown)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-332 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures UNKNOWN (Card Unknown)
UNKNOWN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The system does not recognize the inserted card. An unsupported card type, or faulty card
is present. This alarm is raised when a card has been inserted but never establishes
communications with the controller.
Severity Critical
Corrective Action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Verify if the inserted card is supported for the current running release.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If the card is not yet supported in this release and the card is a required type for the NE,
verify that the correct release is running on the NE. Upgrade the NE to the correct release
if it is not to support this card type.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If the NE is running the correct release but the card is not yet supported in that release,
remove the card and replace it with one that is supported by the software running on the
NE.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If the card is supported and the NE is running the correct release, the problem may be
with the card itself.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-333
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures UNKNOWN (Card Unknown)
UNKNOWN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
UNKNOWNMOD
UNKNOWNMOD (Pluggable Module Unknown)

The optics module (pluggable module) inserted in the port is of a type that is not
recognized and the system cannot obtain manufacturing information on the unit. There is
a possibility that the pluggable module is damaged and the card is not able to correctly
identify the module or that there is damage on the card preventing correct identification of
the pluggable module.
Severity Critical (Minor if protected or inactive)

Service affecting? Yes (No, if protected or inactive)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-334 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures UNKNOWNMOD (Pluggable Module Unknown)
UNKNOWNMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4DPA2, 4DPA4, AM2017B, AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2325B,
AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, ALPFGT, OSCT
Corrective Action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 To clear the pack while it is still in service, do one of the following:

• Change the notification from a standing alarm to a transient condition, or
• Change the MODULETYPE provisioning (from "auto" to "user" for unsupported
pluggable modules).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
pluggable module plugs into for any damage. If no damage exists, reinsert the pluggable
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Remove and replace the pluggable module with another unit of the same type. Refer to
“Replacing an SFP Module” (p. 3-27). Take special care when handling the connected
fiber jumpers.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-335
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures UNKNOWNMOD (Pluggable Module Unknown)
UNKNOWNMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Perform a cold reset of the card on the card where the pluggable module defect is raised.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 . If there is no transmission, check that the provisioned signal rate is supported by the
pluggable module that is present. If not, use a different pluggable module, or change the
signal rate provisioning to a value supported by the pluggable module.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
UPM
UPM (GFP User Payload Mismatch)

The OT has detected a GFP User Payload Mismatch.This condition is raised when the
encapsulation mode provisioning for the two OTs on opposite ends of an optical link do
not match
Severity Critical
43SCX4, 4DPA4
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-336 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures UPM (GFP User Payload Mismatch)
UPM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing the GFP User Payload Mismatch
on an OT port. At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with
the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Locate the OT with the UPM defect. Verify the encapsulation mode value.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Locate the OT at the opposite end of the link. Ensure that the provisioning for the
encapsulation mode parameter is the same for each OT.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
URU
URU (Underlying Resource Unavailable)

The URU-OTS conditions indicate that a transmission failure has occurred within the
Ingress, and if equipped, the Egress LD card.
The Underlying Resource Unavailable (URU) condition allows the north bound
monitoring system to detect that a service affecting condition other than LOS-P is present,
including transmission and equipment defects within the OTS or OTU layer. The 1830
PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16/PSS-4 will report LOS-P and URU (URU-OTS and URU-OTU)
at their line facing ports. For OTS, the 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16/PSS-4 correlates the
defects within the LD cards to report the URU-OTS conditions against the external facing
Line port. The LD card Line port is an OTS port type. For the simulated OTU facility this
means correlating the defects on the OT port to report the URU-OTU conditions against
the OTU type OT port.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-337
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures URU-OCH-LOS (Underlying resource unavailable - OTS)
URU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
URU-OCH-LOS (Underlying resource unavailable - OTS)

The URU-OCH-LOS condition is raised when an LOS is detected at the line input port,
not able to support client transmission.
Severity Major
Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 112SX10L, 43SCX4
Corrective Action
Perform corrective action as described in “LOS (Loss of Signal)” (p. 2-148).
URU-OTS-LOS (Underlying resource unavailable - OTS [Loss of

Signal])
Severity NA
Applicability A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, ALPFGT, AM2125A,
AM2125B, AM2325B, AM2017B, OSCT, RA2P
Corrective Action
URU-OTS-RX (Underlying resource unavailable - OTS

[Receive])
Severity NA
Corrective Action
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-338 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures URU-OTS-TX (Underlying resource unavailable - OTS
URU [Transmit])
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
URU-OTS-TX (Underlying resource unavailable - OTS

[Transmit])
Severity Major
Corrective Action
URU-OTU (Underlying resource unavailable - OTU)

The URU-OTU condition notifies the user that a pluggable module failure has occurred
on the OT card.
Severity Major
Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 112SCX10, 112SX10L,
11DPE12, 11QPA4, 11STAR1, 11STGE12, 11STMM10, 43SCX4,
43STA1P, 43STX4, 43STX4P, 4DPA4
Corrective Action
Perform corrective actions for the reported pluggable module conditions on the OT card.
URU-S (Underlying Resource Unavailable - Card Failure)
Severity Major
Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCX10, 112SX10L, 11STAR1, 11STMM10,
4DPA4, A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, ALPFGT,
AM2017B, AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2325B, CWR, FAN, OPS,
OSC, OSCT, PF, RA2P, SFC, SFD, SVAC, USRPNL, WTOCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-339
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures URU-S (Underlying Resource Unavailable - Card Failure)
URU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
Perform corrective actions for the reported card failure conditions on the OT card.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-340 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures USALS (Auto Laser Shutoff Due to Upstream Fault)
USALS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
USALS
USALS (Auto Laser Shutoff Due to Upstream Fault)

USALS is raised when the client port laser is turned off either because the network port of
this card has an optical LOS, or the corresponding client port at the far end of the service
has a fault.

Applicability 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 112SX10L, 11DPE12, 11DPE12E,
11QPA4, 11STAR, 11STMM10, 11STGE12, 43SCX4, 43STA1P,
43STX4, 43STX4P, 4DPA2, 4DPA4
Corrective Action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Determine which network port on the near-end card is associated with the client port that
has raised the USALS condition. Network ports for this product are usually port 1. Look
for LOS, LOC or LOF at the network port or Out of Service type alarms at the associated
client port(s).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Using the applicable procedure for the fault detected in Step 1, clear the fault.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-341
Issue 1 June 2011
USALS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If the desired behavior at the near end client port is to inject an Alarm Indication Signal
(AIS), idle frames, or an invalid signal and not to shut the laser off in reaction to the
upstream fault, issue the following command at the near end to change the LOSProp
(LOS Propagation) setting.
CLI config interface <shelf slot port> losprop injectAISL |

idleFrames | invalidSig
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Using the procedure “Determining the Far End of a Service” (p. 3-10), determine the
nature of the fault at the far end. Look for LOS or Out of Service type alarms at the
associated client port(s).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Using the applicable procedure for the fault detected in Step 4, clear the fault.
If the condition does not clear, perform the following steps on the near end card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-342 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
USALS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Repeat Step 6 to Step 9 for the associated card at the far-end of the service.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
USLOS
USLOS (Upstream Channel Absent)

Wavelength Tracker could not detect the provisioned channel going through the amplifier
and is raising a non-alarmed condition to indicate that that an upstream failure exists.
Possible reasons for this condition may be:
• the channel is missing
• the channel is outside the detectable range
• the Wavekeys are not being correctly applied at the source OT or SVAC
If the channel is missing it could be a provisioning error or fibering error.
Severity Minor
AM2325B, OSCT
Corrective Action
NOTICE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-343
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures USLOS (Upstream Channel Absent)
USLOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step. It
may take several seconds for channel power out of range and channel absent alarms to
clear after each step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Find the source of the channel's service and ensure that the add cross connect is
administratively up and that there are no Wavelength Tracker or channel
alarms/conditions for the associated transponder or SVAC upstream. If there are, clear
those alarms/conditions first before continuing.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Retrieve the configured topology upstream from this port to the service's ingress point to
the NE. Ensure that the physical fiber topology matches.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Verify that the loss in the fiber that is feeding the port is not higher than expected by
comparing the bulk powers ending and leaving the fiber. If the loss is higher than
expected, clean the fiber ends, and if this does not solve the problem, replace the fiber. If
this still does not solve the condition on the amplifier, the problem may be with the card
itself.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Perform a warm reset of the card on the alarmed card.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-344 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures USLOS (Upstream Channel Absent)
USLOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
USOCHCOLLISION
USOCHCOLLISION (Upstream Channel Collision Input Direction)

port.

AM2325B, OSCT
Corrective Action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-345
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures USOCHCOLLISION (Upstream Channel Collision Input
USOCHCOLLISION Direction)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Determine if there is a NE where an OCHCOLLISION-OUT condition is present.
CLI alm
show condition
WEBUI Reports > Alarm List > Total
Reports > Condition List
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Resolve the OCHCOLLISION-OUT condition (if present) by following the procedure

“OCHCOLLISION-OUT” (p. 2-211).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Perform a warm reset of the card on the alarmed card.

v
...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
VCGLOA
VCGLOA (Loss of alignment)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-346 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures VCGLOA (Loss of alignment)
VCGLOA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A loss of alignment has occurred in the virtual concatenation (mapping of a 1GbE signal
from a 11STMM10 client port into 24 STS-1s for 11STMM10 network port
transmission).
The VCGLOA alarm is masked by any higher level SONET section or line alarms, so if
this alarm is present it means that the 11STMM10 is receiving a valid, error-free OC-48
network signal.
Severity Critical
Corrective Action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Verify the end-to-end path of the 11STMM10 circuit to ensure that the card reporting the
alarm is connected to a 11STMM10 on the far end. A possible cause of this alarm is if the
card is connected to another valid OC-48 signal generated by a test set or SONET
interface, but which does not include two GFP encapsulated 1GbE signals. Perform a
warm card reset of the 11STMM10 reporting the alarm.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform a warm reset of the card of the far end 11STMM10 that is connected to the
11STMM10 reporting the alarm.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-347
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures VCGLOA (Loss of alignment)
VCGLOA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Perform a cold reset of the card of the far end 11STMM10 that is connected to the
11STMM10 reporting the alarm.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Reseat the card of the far end 11STMM10 that is connected to the 11STMM10 reporting
the alarm. Refer to “Reseating a Card” (p. 3-19).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Replace the 11STMM10 reporting the alarm. Refer to “Replacing System Components”
to return the faulty card to an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
VCGSSF
VCGSSF (VCG Server Signal Failure)

The OT has detected a VCG Server Signal Failure. This rare condition is raised when the
time slots are incorrect.
Severity Critical
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-348 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures VCGSSF (VCG Server Signal Failure)
VCGSSF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Verify that the time slot information on the 11STMM10 line port and ODU1 are correctly
provisioned on each end of the optical link. If not, use the following CLI commands to
ensure timeslots are provisioned the same:
• Config interface 11STMM10 shelf slot/C{1-10} 1gbe timeslot
line 1 - 4
• Config interface 11stmm10 shelf slot/C{1-10} 1gbe timeslot vts
0 or 1, 4, 7, 10, 13, 16, 19, 22, 25, 28, 31, 34, 37, 40, 43, 46
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
VOLTAGEHIGH
VOLTAGEHIGH [High input voltage defect]

The voltage level of the external DC supply is high. This alarm is raised if there is too
much voltage going to the breaker feed or the voltage is above the threshold. This could
be due to a problem with the power feed to the breaker card.
Severity Critical
OSCT, RA2P, SVAC, USRPNL, WR, WTOCM
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-349
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures VOLTAGEHIGH [High input voltage defect]
VOLTAGEHIGH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
and repair process to return the card to an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
VOLTAGELOW
VOLTAGELOW [Low input voltage defect]

Either the voltage level of the external DC supply is low or the breaker switch has been
turned off. This alarm is raised if there is no voltage going to the breaker feed or the
voltage is below the threshold. This could be due to the breaker being shut off, or due to a
problem with the power feed to the breaker card.
Severity Critical
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-350 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures VOLTAGELOW [Low input voltage defect]
VOLTAGELOW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

ALPHG, ALPFGT, AM2017B, AM2325A, CWR, Equipment
Controller, FLC, MESH4, MT0C, MVAC, OPS, OSCT, RA2P,
SVAC, USRPNL, WR, WTOCM
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the breakers for the alarmed shelf and verify that they are ON.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
and repair process to return the card to an authorized repair center for replacement
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
VTSFDI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-351
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures VTSFDI (VTS Forward Defect Indication)
VTSFDI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VTSFDI (VTS Forward Defect Indication)

The OT has detected a VTS Forward Defect Indication. This condition is raised when a
problem has occurred upstream that causes an APS/PCC failure indication on the Virtual
Time Slot [n] received by the 11DPE12/11DPE12E.
Severity NA
Applicability 11DPE12, 11DPE12E
Corrective action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing the VTSFDI alarm associated
with an 11DPE12/11DPE12E OT port. At the end of each step, wait to see if the fault
clears. If not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Identify the farthest upstream alarm/condition relative to the far end OTU2 port or client
GBE port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Check the OTU2 line port and client GBE port

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Follow the procedure for clearing identified alarm condition.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
VTSOCI
VTSOCI (VTS Open Connection Indication)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-352 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures VTSOCI (VTS Open Connection Indication)
VTSOCI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The OT has detected a Virtual Time Slot Open Connection Indication on an associated
VTS. This condition is raised when the downstream 11DPE12/11DPE12E OT receives an
APS/PCC message indicating an OCI from the upstream OT. The VTSOCI alarm is raised
at the downstream OT on the Virtual Time Slot [n] which has an established connection.
Severity Major
Applicability 11DPE12/11DPE12E
Corrective action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing the VTOCI alarm associated with
an 11DPE12/11DPE12E port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the upstream 11DPE12/11DPE12E OT for any alarms/conditions on any VTS[n]

with electrical connections. This will cause the OT to send an OCI message for the
relevant VTS[n] to the downstream OT. An electrical connection is a provisioned
connection from the VTS[n] to a GbE client port or another line VTS. If such an alarm is
present, go to the procedure for clearing OCI alarms to clear the VTSOCI alarm at the
downstream 11DPE12/11DPE12E OT.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
WKSWBK
WKSWBK (Automatic switch to working)

WKSWBK indicates an automatic protection switch from the “protection side” to the
“working side”. As a result, the working side becomes the active side. This can occur
when a fault is detected on the protection side, or when the user provisions the protection
side to Admin Down. It applies to all protection schemes (Y-cable, OPS, ESNCP) when
the protection group is non-revertive. (Y-cable can be provisioned to either revertive or
non-revertive. OPS and ESNCP are always non-revertive.)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-353
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures WKSWBK (Automatic switch to working)
WKSWBK
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.If
there are no faults against working facility/equipment:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Wait for the wait-to-restore timer to expire.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Determine which side is the working side and which side is the protection side.
CLI show aps
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
CLI config aps group group detail

WEBUI Select the port of the card, and click the Port tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Check the administrative state on the protection side client/line ports.
CLI show interface

If the state is down, the switch may have been caused by user administrative provisioning.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Check for faults on the protection side card, or the protection side client/line ports.
CLI alm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 If... Then...
faults are present, proceed to the appropriate procedure for
clearing the faults.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-354 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures WKSWBK (Automatic switch to working)
WKSWBK
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If... Then...
no faults are present, the switch may have occurred due to a
transient defect that has since cleared. The
action required to clear this condition depends
on whether or not there are outstanding
problems against the working
facility/equipment.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Initiate a manual switch to working.
CLI config aps group group manualSwitchtoWorking
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
CLI config aps group group clearSwitch
If there are faults against protection facility/equipment:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Resolve the fault(s) against protection facility/equipment.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Initiate a lockout of protect.
CLI config aps group <group> lockout
Note: This results in a standing condition for the lockout itself (LOCKOUTOFPR).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-355
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures WKSWPR (Automatic switch to protection)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WKSWPR
WKSWPR (Automatic switch to protection)

This is a standing condition indicating that the protection facility/equipment is active.
This condition is raised only when reversion is enabled.
If the working facility/equipment is error-free then the condition automatically clears
once the wait-to-restore timer has expired.

Corrective Action
The action required to clear this condition depends on whether or not there are
outstanding problems against the working facility/equipment.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.If
there are no faults against working facility/equipment:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Wait for the wait-to-restore timer to expire.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Initiate a manual switch to work.
CLI config aps group group manualSwitchtoWorking
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
CLI config aps group group clearSwitch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-356 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures WKSWPR (Automatic switch to protection)
WKSWPR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If there are faults against working facility/equipment:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Resolve the fault(s) against working facility/equipment.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Initiate a lockout of protect.
CLI config aps group <group> lockout
Note: This results in a standing condition for the lockout itself (LOCKOUTOFPR).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
WTR
WTR (Wait to restore timer in effect)

The OT port has detected WTR at the LINEREF layer. A LINEREF detects WTR when
on a timing reference and defects have cleared and the Wait to Restore timer is in effect.
Severity Minor
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the reference status.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-357
Issue 1 June 2011
Trouble-clearing procedures WTR (Wait to restore timer in effect)
WTR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-358 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
3 Supporting procedures
3
Overview
Purpose
This chapter lists the following supporting procedures for the 1830 Photonic Service
Switch 32/16/4 that are referenced in Chapter 2, “Trouble-clearing procedures”.
Contents
Alarms and Logs 3-4

Viewing Alarms and Logs 3-4
WebUI Procedure 3-5
Configuring alarm severity 3-5
Configuring the Alarm Severity Using the WebUI 3-5
Configuring Alarm Severity Using the 1354 RM-PhM 3-7
Path Power Trace 3-8
Procedure 3-8
Determining the Far End of a Service 3-10
Procedure 3-10
Checking for Services on a Port 3-10
Procedure 3-11
User Panel Switch Settings 3-12
Resolving Ethernet Connectivity Issues 3-12
Database Backup and Restore 3-13
Backing Up a Database 3-13
Restoring a Database 3-14
Firmware 3-14
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-1
Issue 1 June 2011
Supporting procedures Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Selecting a Specific Firmware Version 3-14

Software Upgrades 3-16
Software Download in Network with GNEs and RNEs 3-16
Restoring an NE in DBINVALID State 3-17
Rebooting Components 3-18
Cold Restart of a Pack with Traffic 3-18
Reseating a Card 3-19
Procedure 3-19
Replacing System Components 3-20
Slot Equipage Requirement 3-20
Replacing a Card (General) 3-22
Replacing a 100G A/D CFP 3-25
Replacing a DCM 3-26
Replacing an SFP Module 3-27
Replacing an XFP Module 3-30
Replacing an OSC SFP Module 3-33
Replacing the User Panel 3-35
Replacing an Equipment Controller in a Redundant Shelf 3-40
Replacing an Equipment Controller in a Nonredundant Shelf 3-42
Replacing the Air Filter 3-50
Replacing the Fan 3-53
Provisioning an SFD40/SFD40B in a FOADM node 3-55
Procedure 3-55
Performing loopbacks 3-56
Overview 3-56
Loopback Variation on OTs 3-57
High Temperature Troubleshooting 3-70
High Temperature Threshold Exceeded 3-70
Changing the Equipment Controller Configuration in an NE 3-71
Changing an NE from a Nonredundant to a Redundant Equipment Controller 3-71
Configuration
Changing an NE From a Redundant to a Nonredundant Equipment Controller 3-74
Configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-2 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Card-Specific Troubleshooting 3-76

4DPA4 Signal Rates 3-76
Egress Adjustment Failure and Clock Source (WTOCM and PF) 3-77
Nonredundant PSS-36 and MT0C Clock Source 3-79
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-3
Issue 1 June 2011
Supporting procedures Viewing Alarms and Logs
Alarms and Logs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarms and Logs
Viewing Alarms and Logs

Overview
The 1354 RM-PhM and web interface provide graphical tools for viewing alarms and
logs. The CLI interface provides test-only interfaces. The active alarms list is
automatically updated using the 1354 RM-PhM and web interface. The CLI does not
provide autonomous alarm notification.
You can view the alarms or logs on the NE you are logged in to, or you can view the
alarms on a remote NE. To view alarms and logs using the CLI, see the Alcatel-Lucent
CLI Command Guide. To view alarms and logs using the EMS, see the Alcatel-Lucent
1354RM-PhM EMS Reference Guide.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-4 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Supporting procedures WebUI Procedure
Alarms and Logs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WebUI Procedure
The web interface displays a summary of the active alarms on the NE at the top of the
navigation pane. The active alarm display is refreshed as specified in the session settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the web interface, select a shelf, slot, or port on the Device Tree on the left of the
window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 To view a detailed list of active alarms, click on the active alarm summary display or
select Reports > Alarm List > Total.
Result: The Alarm List is displayed with a detailed list of the active alarms on the NE.
The list of alarms is refreshed automatically. You can refresh the list at any time by
clicking Refresh.
If you want to see alarms of one specific severity type, you can also sort this list by
severity (Critical, Major, or Minor) by selecting the corresponding severity after
Reports > Alarm List.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 To view a detailed list of active conditions, select Reports > Condition List. Scroll to the
right to view the condition types associated with each alarm.
Result: The Condition List is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 To view logs, select Logs > Alarms > Severity Level Alarm Log.
Result: The Alarms Log is displayed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Configuring the Alarm Severity Using the WebUI

Configuring the Alarm Severity for All Entities of the Same Type
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Administration > Alarm Configuration and select the entity type for which you
want to change the alarm configuration.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-5
Issue 1 June 2011
Supporting procedures Configuring the Alarm Severity Using the WebUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The alarm conditions applicable to the selected entity type are displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click on the row containing the alarm condition you want to change.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select the new severity from the drop-down list and click Submit.
The new alarm severity is applied for the selected condition on all of the entities on the
NE that match the selected entity type.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Configuring the Alarm Severity for aSpecific Entity

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select a shelf, slot, or port on the Device Tree.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click Fault.
Result: The Alarmable Conditions are displayed for this entity.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on the row containing the alarm condition you want to change.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Select the new severity from the drop-down list, and click Submit.
Result: The new alarm severity is applied for the selected condition on the selected
entity.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-6 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Supporting procedures Configuring Alarm Severity Using the 1354 RM-PhM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuring Alarm Severity Using the 1354 RM-PhM

You can change the default alarm severity for an alarm condition on a specific entity (for
example a port) or for all entities of the same type. You can configure the alarm severity
using the EMS or web interface. This capability is not available in the CLI.
Configuring Alarm Severity for All Entities of the Same Type

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 To configure the alarm severity for all entities of the same type, go to the Topology View
and select the NE or NEs on which you want to change the alarm severity.
Note: If you do not explicitly select any NEs, the EMS will select all NEs in the
network for configuration. In this case, the EMS will retrieve alarm configuration data
for all of the NEs in the network, which may take a significant amount of time.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select Admin > NE Alarm Severity Configuration.

The EMS retrieves the alarm severity configuration for the selected NEs. This may take
several minutes. The Alarm Severity Configuration window is displayed, listing the
selected NEs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on the Display object type alarm severity assignments icon.

A dialog listing the entity types is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Select the entity type for which you want to change the alarm severity.
A list of condition types applicable to the selected entity is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Double click on the condition type you want to change.

A dialog is displayed showing the current alarm severity override setting.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Change the severity as desired and select Apply.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-7
Issue 1 June 2011
Supporting procedures Configuring Alarm Severity Using the 1354 RM-PhM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuring Alarm Severity for a Specific Entity
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 To configure the alarm severity for a specific entity, from the Management Control panel
(Topology View) and select the NE on which you want to change the alarm severity for a
specific entity.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select Provision > Open Existing Inventory.

Result: The Inventory view is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select the specific entity (card or port) where you want to change the alarm severity.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Select Fault > Alarm Severity Configuration.

The 1354 RM-PhM retrieves the alarm severity configuration for the selected entity. This
may take several minutes.
Result: The Alarm Severity Configuration window is displayed, listing the selected
entity.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Double-click on the condition type you want to change.

Result: The Modify Alarm Severity Configuration is displayed showing the current
alarm severity override setting.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Change the severity as desired and select Apply.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Path Power Trace
Procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-8 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Supporting procedures Procedure
Path Power Trace
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform a power trace of any affected paths.
CLI alm
sh condition
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Locate the first point along the path at which power out of range or absent is observed, or
there is a significant difference between expected and observed power. This point is
referred to as the "First point of concern" in this procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Examine the alarms close to the first point of concern.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Troubleshoot the alarms, concentrating on the points adjacent to the first point of concern.
The problem is most likely located between the first point of concern and the detection
point immediately upstream from it.
Note: It may take several seconds after corrective actions have been applied for
channel missing, channel absent, and power out of range alarms to clear.
1. Ensure that the relevant connection exists and is administratively up at the first point
of concern and at the point immediately upstream from it.
CLI show xc brief
2. Examine the output for the connection of the appropriate band and channel. If the
connection exists then check the admin states of the connection and associated ports.
CLI show xc <shelf/slot/port> <band> <channel> trace
3. If the connection or ports are admin down then the entities must be brought admin up
in order to clear the alarm(s).
To bring a connection admin up:
CLI show xc <shelf/slot/port> <band> <channel> state up
If this does not resolve the problem, go to 4.

4. If this connection terminates on a transponder then confirm that the associated client
port is administratively up.
CLI show interface <shelf/slot/ClientPort>
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-9
Issue 1 June 2011
Path Power Trace
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5. If the client port is admin down then it must be brought admin up in order to clear the
alarm(s).
CLI config interface <shelf/slot/ClientPort>state up
If this does not resolve the issue, go to 6.

6. Check that the programmed topology matches the actual topology.
7. If there are multiple alarms at the same point of interest, attempt to resolve the
amplifier alarms first.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Determining the Far End of a Service
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the OCh Trail name for the near end of the service.
CLI show xc brief
Search for the <shelf/slot/port> corresponding to the card and port in question. This will
provide the information required to proceed to Step 2.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform a trace to determine the far end of the OChTrail.
CLI show interface <shelf/slot port> srvcActivity detail
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Examine the output of Step 2 to determine the far end of the service.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-10 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Look at the activity of services on all ports of the card:
CLI show interface <shelf/slot port> srvcActivity brief
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If any services are marked as Active then this equipment is currently carrying active
services.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 It may be possible to switch all services onto an alternate path if all services are protected.
Examine the output from Step 1. If a service is protected it will have a protection member
listed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If you wish to switch all protected services off this path:

1. Obtain the details of the service activity
CLI show interface <shelf/slot port> srvcActivity detail
This will reveal the nodes that are the endpoints of the service as well as the APS
protection groups.
Repeat items 2 through 5 for each protected service:
2. Log into the one end of the service.
3. Issue a force switch away from the path about to be broken.
4. Log into the other end of the service.
5. Issue a force switch away from the path about to be broken.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 To confirm if all services have been moved off of this equipment

1. Log back into the local node.
2. Look at the activity of services on all ports of the alarmed card.
CLI show interface <shelf/slot/port>srvcActivity brief
3. If any services are marked as Active then this equipment is still carrying active
services.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-11
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Panel Switch Settings
Resolving Ethernet Connectivity Issues

Using Straight-through Cable for Ethernet Connection
If straight-through cable is used for connecting laptop/craft PC to any user panel ports
(OAMP, VOIP, E1 and E2) with autonegotiation disabled, you may experience Ethernet
connectivity problems.
If connecting a PC directly to the OAMP, VOIP, E1 or E2 port, and the port speed and
duplex are set to AUTO, a straight-through or crossover cable may be used. If the port
speed or duplex is set to anything other than AUTO it is necessary to use a crossover
cable
Provisioning Speed/Duplex Mode Values

If the speed/duplex modes in both laptop/craft PC and NE ports (OAMP, VOIP, E1, E2 &
CIT) are provisioned with any values other than listed combinations below, you may
experience Ethernet connectivity problems:
• Auto/Auto on both NE and PC
• 100/Full on both NE and PC
• 10/Half on both NE and PC
To resolve this issue, ensure that the speed/duplex mode provisioned on both NE and PC
ports match exactly. The supported combinations are Auto/Auto, 100/Full, and 10/Half.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-12 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Supporting procedures Backing Up a Database
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Backing Up a Database
Backing Up a Database Using the WebUI
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Administration > Database > Backup and Restore.

Result: The Backup and Restore window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Enter the values for the fields on this window as described in Table 3-1, “Database
Backup and Restore Parameters” (p. 3-13).
Table 3-1 Database Backup and Restore Parameters
Parameter Definition Input Default Value Allowed

Required Values
Protocol File transfer No TFTP TFTP, SFTP
protocol used for
the
backup/restore
request.
Server IP The IP address Yes 0 Valid dotted
Address where the quad
database is
stored.
Directory The path where Yes N/A
the database is
located on the
PC.
Filename The filename of Yes N/A
the database.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click Apply > Backup.

Result: A window is displayed, confirming that the backup process has been initiated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-13
Issue 1 June 2011
Supporting procedures Restoring a Database
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Restoring a Database
Restoring the Database Using the WebUI
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Administration > Database > Backup and Restore.

Result: The Backup and Restore window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Enter the values for the fields on this window as described in Table 3-1, “Database
Backup and Restore Parameters” (p. 3-13).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click Apply > Restore, or if you want to use your previous serial number, click Force
Restore.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Firmware
Selecting a Specific Firmware Version

Having completed the first steps of an in-service software upgrade, you may find that one
or more firmware conditions have been raised against cards in your system. Firmware
upgrades may be available, recommended, or required on these cards depending on the
resulting alarm condition. When you elect not to upgrade the firmware, having
understood the subsequent effect on your operations, use the following procedure to
maintain the current firmware in the cards.
Affected cards will have the following conditions raised against them:
• FWUPGRADEPENDING - Firmware upgrade pending
• FWVERSIONNOTDEFAULT - Firmware version loaded is not the preferred version.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-14 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Supporting procedures Selecting a Specific Firmware Version
Firmware
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure
NOTICE
The following procedure is recommended when you want to avoid a firmware upgrade
and use/retain a specific firmware version.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
CLI show firmware card shelf slot detail
Record the currently active firmware load (from the recently upgraded
release) as active-release
WEBUI Select the card, click the Firmware tab, and view the Active Release field.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Establish a particular release for the instance of the card in your system.
CLI config firmware card shelf slot active-release

WEBUI Enter the desired release in the Provisioned Release field.
The system will reload this specific version rather than the default recommended version
on any subsequent cold reset of that card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
CLI config cardcard type shelf slot reset warm

This action will restart the software on the card (nonservice affecting), clearing the
FWUPGRADEPENDING condition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-15
Issue 1 June 2011
Supporting procedures Selecting a Specific Firmware Version
Firmware
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 The remaining cards will need to be cold-restarted at a time of your choosing to upgrade
to the recommended firmware.
CLI config cardcard type shelf slot reset cold

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Software Upgrades
Software Download in Network with GNEs and RNEs

In a network with GNEs and RNEs, it is recommended that you perform the software
download and activate operations on GNEs first. After the GNEs are successfully
upgraded, perform concurrent software downloads on all RNEs.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-16 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Supporting procedures Restoring an NE in DBINVALID State
Software Upgrades
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Restoring an NE in DBINVALID State

During software upgrade (for example, R2.5.n to R3.0.2) if an RNE raises the
DBINVALID alarm, perform the steps in the following procedure to restore the NE.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the active EC - CIT port get the NE Connectivity.
WEBUI In the Equipment Tree, select EC card > CIT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check the software version. If the DBINVALID alarm was raised in R3.0.2 software, then
configure the software server setting.
CLI sh version
alm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Perform a software upgrade. Select Administration > Software > Upgrade.

Result: The Software Upgrade window is displayed.
CLI Enter the following commands:—

1. config
userid—Configure
protocol—Configure
ip—Configure
detail—Display
root—Configure
software the
software
thesoftware
thethe
userid
server software
server
software download
for information
serveraccessing
download
server
root theprotocol
IPsoftware
directory address
2. ••config
activate—Perform
load—Perform
audit—Determine
Adddownload
the next applicable
software software
serversoftware
steps
upgradeneeded
command activation
transfertotosteps
manual steps
install
the as asasfollows:•
determined
determined
chosen
string release by
by audit
3. ••config
Addaudit
the next applicable
software command
upgrade to the string as follows:•
commit
•
WEBUI Do the following:
1. In the Action field, select Audit. Enter the values in the path for the
release you want to upgrade to (for example, R2.5.n) in the Release
Directory field. Click Apply.
2. In the Action field, select Load. Click Apply.
3. In the Action field, select Activate. Click Apply > Close.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Check the software version and confirm the NE is running R2.5 load
CLI show version
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-17
Issue 1 June 2011
Supporting procedures Restoring an NE in DBINVALID State
Software Upgrades
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Configure the database server setting and restore the valid R2.5 database.
CLI 1. config database server

Add the next applicable command to the string as follows:
• detail—Display software server information
• ip—Configure the remote backup/restore server IP address
• protocol—Configure the remote backup/restore protocol
• userid—Configure the userid for accessing the backup/restore serve
2. config database path
3. config database restore
WEBUI See “Restoring a Database” (p. 3-14) for applicable steps.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 One the database is restored successfully, perform the software upgrade procedure for
R2.5.n to R3.0.2.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Cold Restart of a Pack with Traffic

Performing a cold restart of a transmission-carrying pack is service affecting. Thus, cold
restart is not allowed on packs when they are in-service. (The pack must either be in
maintenance state, or out-of-service.)
The following procedure is a workaround to perform a cold restart on a
transmission-carrying card for special reasons, such as verifying whether transmission
recovers after the restart is completed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Put the card (and ports) into maintenance state before performing the cold restart. In
maintenance state, the cross connects can remain in place, and transmission is still
carried.
CLI For cards: config slot state mt

For ports: config interface state mt
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-18 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Supporting procedures Cold Restart of a Pack with Traffic
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WEBUI Select a card or port on the Equipment Tree.

Set the Primary State field to Maintenance.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform a cold restart of the entire NE, instead of each individual card.
CLI config admin force resetne

reset cold
WEBUI Select the System on the Equipment Tree for the NE.
Click the Reboot tab.
Select Cold Reboot >Submit.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Reseating a Card
Procedure
NOTICE
A card reseat is service impacting if the card is currently carrying services. To discover if
any services are currently carried over a card, perform the procedure “Checking for
Services on a Port” (p. 3-10). If there are services currently carried over the card, it may
be best to wait for a maintenance window before reseating the card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Ensure that all of the fibers connected to the card are labeled.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Remove and cap all of the fibers connected to the card.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Unlock the card latch. Place a thumb or finger on the latch release/locking pin located
behind the latch cover and open the latch by lifting up and out. This will partially unseat
the card from the backplane.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-19
Issue 1 June 2011
Reseating a Card
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Grasp the card by the open latch and slide the card out of the slot an additional 1 cm
(about 1/4 inch) being careful not to pull on any connected fibers on the NE. You will
encounter some resistance while the card is seated on the backplane. Use a gentle pulling
force to unseat the card from the backplane. All of the LEDs on the card will be off when
the card is fully unseated.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Wait for 10 seconds.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Grasp the card by the latch, with the latch in the open position.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Ensure that no fibers from adjacent cards are in the way, and slide the card into the slot.
You will encounter some resistance when the card contacts the backplane. Use gentle
force to fully seat the card on the backplane.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Lock the card into place by closing the latches. As the latches close, they push against the
latching tabs on the shelf or cross member, further seating the card. Continue to close the
latches until they are flush with the card faceplate, locking the card in place.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Once the port LEDs on the card have lit up, uncap, clean, and reconnect the fibers.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Check the card for alarms:
CLI alm
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Slot Equipage Requirement

Blanks are used to cover unused slots to improve cooling air flow. All slots in the shelf
must be occupied with circuit packs or blanks, and all packs must be fully inserted into
the shelf to maintain proper air flow. The shelf must not have an empty slot. Empty slots
or partially inserted cards will decrease air flow across installed circuit packs and will
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-20 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Supporting procedures Slot Equipage Requirement
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
decrease their cooling. Circuit packs could potentially be subject to failure as their
temperatures increases.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-21
Issue 1 June 2011
Supporting procedures Replacing a Card (General)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Replacing a Card (General)

NOTICE
Cooling airflow is critically important for reliable transmission. Every slot in the subrack
requires a circuit pack (card) or circuit pack blank to ensure proper airflow. Do not
remove old cards until new cards are fully prepared for installation. New cards should be
installed within five minutes of old card removal in order to maintain proper airflow and
cooling for the other cards within the subrack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Ensure that the replacement card is unpacked and prepared for immediate installation
before starting any other work.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Set the fan to maximum speed.
CLI config fan maximum

WEBUI FAN > Card Properties > Fan Speed > Maximum
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Ensure that all of the fibers connected to the card are labeled.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Remove and cap all of the fibers connected to the card.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Verify that you have an unobstructed extraction path. Tie back any adjacent fibers that
may be impacted by the card extraction.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Unlock the card latch. Place a thumb or finger on the latch release/locking pin located
behind the latch cover and open the latch by lifting up and out. This will partially unseat
the card from the backplane.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-22 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Grasp the card by the open latch and slide the card out of the slot, being careful not to pull
on any connected fibers on the NE. You will encounter some resistance while the card is
seated on the backplane. Use a gentle pulling force to unseat the card from the backplane.
Slide the card out of the slot. When the card is almost removed, place a hand under the
card to avoid dropping it when it is fully removed from the shelf.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Place the card in an ESD bag and set it aside nearby so that you can immediately continue
with Step 9.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Grasp replacement card with one hand on the faceplate and the other on the bottom of the
card's PCB.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Align the card's PCB with the card guides.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Slide the card along the card guides into the slot. When the card is partially inserted,
grasp the card by the latch, with the latch in the open position.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Ensure that no fibers from adjacent cards are in the way, and slide the card into the slot.
You will encounter some resistance when the card contacts the backplane. Use gentle
force to fully seat the card on the backplane.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Lock the card into place by closing the latches. As the latches close, they push against the
latching tabs on the shelf or cross member, further seating the card. Continue to close the
latches until they are flush with the card faceplate, locking the card in place.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 Set the fan back to normal speed.
CLI config fan normal

WEBUI FAN > Card Properties > Fan Speed > Normal
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 Once the port LEDs on the card have lit up, uncap, clean, and reconnect the fibers.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-23
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16 Check the card for alarms:
CLI alm
Note: If the card software version does not match the NE software version, the card
automatically upgrades to the correct software version. In this case, a software
upgrade alarm will be present.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-24 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Supporting procedures Replacing a 100G A/D CFP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Replacing a 100G A/D CFP

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Remove OT pack from shelf

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Swap CFP. Ensure that the CFP is inserted securely.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Insert OT pack back on shelf. If the opening is tight, pushing the CFP using the screws
may not push the CFP far enough to make contact. You may need to push the CFP from
its faceplate and not the screws.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-25
Issue 1 June 2011
Supporting procedures Replacing a DCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Replacing a DCM
Perform the steps in the following procedure to replace a DCM. NOTE: This procedure is
service affecting.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Set the associated DCM shelf to Unmanaged.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Remove the associated LD (clean scope fiber).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Change the serial number of associated DCM shelf to match the serial number of the
replacement DCM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Remove the old DCM pack and replace with the new DCM pack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Set the associated DCM shelf to Managed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Insert the associated LD pack.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 An alarm is raised , indicating that a required power adjustment is required. Perform the
associated power adjustment.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-26 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Supporting procedures Replacing an SFP Module
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Replacing an SFP Module

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Ensure that all of the fibers connected to the SFP module are labeled.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Remove and cap all of the fibers connected to the SFP module.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Insert SFP extraction tool into SFP.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Gently push in bottom wedge on SFP extraction tool to release SFP retention spring.
Figure 3-1 Push in wedge
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Pull on body of SFP extraction tool to remove SFP.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-27
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-2 Pull out SFP
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Remove SFP from extraction tool by depressing blue locking clips on SFP extraction tool.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Ensure that the specifications for the replacement SFP module (protocol, wavelength, and
reach) match the specifications of the removed SFP module.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Slide the replacement SFP module into the SFP slot. Push on the front of the SFP module
until you hear a "click" sound, indicating the SFP module is securely locked into the SFP
slot.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Uncap, clean, and reinsert the fibers.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-28 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Check the interface for alarms:
CLI alm
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-29
Issue 1 June 2011
Supporting procedures Replacing an XFP Module
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Replacing an XFP Module

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Deprovision the client port.
CLI config port card type shelf slot state down

config port card type shelf slot delete
WEBUI In the Equipment Tree, select the client port.
In the Primary State field, select Out of Service.
Click the Delete tab.
Select Delete this Port, and click Submit
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Ensure that all of the fibers connected to the XFP module are labeled.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Remove and cap all of the fibers connected to the SFP module.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Use the hook on the end of the XFP extractor/LC connector tool (or similar tool) to pull
down the bail on the XFP.
Figure 3-3 XFP bail
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-30 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Use hook on end of XFP extractor/LC connector tool to pull the XFP straight back until
its bail can be grasped by fingers.
Figure 3-4 XFP bail pull
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Grasp the bail with fingers and completely extract XFP module.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Ensure that the specifications for the replacement XFP module (protocol, wavelength, and
reach) match the specifications of the removed SFP module.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Slide the replacement XFP module into the XFP slot. Push on the front of the SFP module
until you hear a "click" sound, indicating the XFP module is securely locked into the XFP
slot.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Uncap, clean, and reinsert the fibers.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
CLI alm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-31
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Reprovision the client port. The Card Inventory report for the pluggable modules will
now display the proper information for the new XFP.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-32 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Supporting procedures Replacing an OSC SFP Module
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Replacing an OSC SFP Module

NOTICE
Note: You must complete this entire replacement procedure within 5 minutes, or a
insert a blank after pulling the LD (ALPHG, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPFGT, or OSCT
pack) from the slot in Step 3.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Ensure that all of the fibers connected to the LD are labeled.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Remove and cap all of the fibers connected to the LD pack.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Remove the LD from the shelf, the OSC SFP is mounted inside the pack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Ensure that all of the OSC fibers connected to the OSC SFP module are labeled.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Remove and cap all of the fibers connected to the OSC SFP module.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Release the latch on the OSC SFP module. The latch used to secure the module in the
OSC SFP port may use either a lever or push-button locking mechanism:
• To release a lever latch, lift the latch 90 degrees so that it is perpendicular to the card
faceplate.
• To release a push button latch, depress the push button located on the side of the OSC
SFP module.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 With the latch in the release position, grasp the OSC SFP module on both sides and
remove it from the OSC SFP slot.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Ensure that the specifications for the replacement OSC SFP module (protocol,
wavelength, and reach) match the specifications of the removed OSC SFP module.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-33
Issue 1 June 2011
Supporting procedures Replacing an OSC SFP Module
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Insert the replacement OSC SFP module into the OSC SFP slot. Push on the front of the
OSC SFP module until you hear a “click” sound, indicating the OSC SFP module is
securely locked into the OSC SFP slot. Be sure that the OS1 and OS2 fibers are correctly
connected to the OS1 or OS2 SFP or XFP ports.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Uncap, clean, and reinsert the OSC fibers.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Reinsert the LD.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Uncap, clean, and reinsert the LD fibers.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
CLI alm
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-34 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Supporting procedures Replacing the User Panel
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Replacing the User Panel

This section contains three procedures:
• To replace the User Panel using the WebUI, go to “Replacing the User Panel Using
the WebUI” (p. 3-35).
• To replace the User Panel using the CLI, go to “Replacing the User Panel Using CLI”
(p. 3-36).
• To replace the User Panel when interrupted by an NE restart, go to “Replacing the
User Panel Interrupted By NE Restart” (p. 3-37).
Replacing the User Panel Using the WebUI

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Save the TID (NE Name), User Panel OADM port details, loopback IP address, and static
routing and gateway information to use if a reboot interrupts this procedure.
• Verify the TID and loopback IP address on the System Properties window (select
System on the Equipment Tree).
• Verify the OAMP on the User Panel on the Port Interface Settings window (select
USRPNL > OAMP on the Equipment Tree).
• Verify the IP routes on the IP Routes window (select Administration > Networking >
IP Routes).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check whether any alarms are present by clicking Alarms.

Result: The Alarm List window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Clear any present database alarms.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Backup the current database to use if a reboot interrupts the procedure.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Optionally, you can view the current User Panel serial number by selecting Reports >
Inventory > Card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Backup the database (see “Backing Up a Database” (p. 3-13)).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Optionally, you can view the new User Panel serial number by selecting Reports >
Inventory > Card.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-35
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Select Administration > Database > User Panel Replacement Update

Result: The USRPNL Replacement Update window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Select the Synchronize USRPNL with NE database field.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Click Apply > Close.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Restore the database (see “Restoring a Database” (p. 3-14)).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Replace the User Panel and make all connections as described in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830
Photonic Service Switch Release 36/32/16 (PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16) 3.6.0 Installation and
System Turn-up Guide.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Backup the database again, now that the User Panel is successfully replaced.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Replacing the User Panel Using CLI

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Save the TID, User Panel OADM port details, loopback IP address, and static routing and
gateway information, or know where to retrieve this information to use if a reboot
interrupts this procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Type the following CLI commands, pressing Enter after each command:
1. show general name
2. show interface loopback
3. show interface usrpnl oamp
4. show general name
Note the IP address and administrative state.
5. show cn routes static
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Check whether any alarms are present by typing alm. Clear any present database alarms.
Then backup the current database to use if a reboot interrupts the procedure.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-36 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Replace the User Panel and make all connections as described in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830
Photonic Service Switch Release 36/32/16 (PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16) 3.6.0 Installation and
System Turn-up Guide.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
If... Then...
the NE automatically reboots perform the steps in the procedure,
“DBINVALID” (p. 2-64), then continue with
Step 6.
To preserve traffic during an NE reboot, the
NE's database should NOT be initialized. After
the reboot, a previously backed up database
should be restored to the NE.
the NE does not automatically reboot continue with Step 6.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 To synchronize the database and new User Panel, type

config database usrpnlrepl
Note: Older versions of the database, can only be restored onto the NE by adding the
word “force“ to the CLI command. For example:
config database restore force
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Type config database restore.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Backup the database again, now that the User Panel is successfully replaced.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Replacing the User Panel Interrupted By NE Restart

If a User Panel is replaced on an NE, but before the user has a chance to successfully
complete the config database usrpnlrepl command, the NE restarts, then the NE
may check the new User Panel contents and not see that it has been commissioned. To
preserve traffic during the NE restart, do not reinitialize the NE database. Instead, restore
a previously backed up database to the NE after the restart.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-37
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Re-provision the NE Name for this NE.

CLI config general name
WEBUI In the Equipment Tree, select System.
In the System Properties window, enter a value in the NE Network Name
field, and click Submit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Re-provision the loopback IP address for this NE.
CLI config interface loopback ip

WEBUI In the System Properties window, enter a value in the Looback IP field, and
click Submit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Re-provision the user panel OAMP port IP address for this NE.
CLI config interface userpanel oamp ip

WEBUI In the Equipment Tree, select the slot containing the USRPNL.
Select the OAMP port.
Enter a value in the OAMP IP field, and click Submit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Re-provision the static routing and gateway information for this NE.
CLI config cn routes static add

WEBUI Select Administration > Networking > IP Routes.
Click Create.
On the Create Static IP Route window, enter values in the Destination IP and
Next Hop fields, and click Apply.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Move the database from a remote server to the NE.
CLI config database restore force
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-38 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WEBUI Select Database > Backup and Restore, and on the Database Backup and
Restore window, click Force Restore.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-39
Issue 1 June 2011
Supporting procedures Replacing an Equipment Controller in a Redundant Shelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Replacing an Equipment Controller in a Redundant Shelf

Replacing an Equipment Controller in a redundant shelf is not service-affecting.
Before you begin this procedure ensure that the following conditions are met:
• The NE is quiet (that is, there are no commands issued to it other than those needed
for this procedure).
• The Equipment Controller you plan to insert into this duplex controller NE, as the
replacement, is approved for duplex controller configurations, Alcatel-Lucent Part
Number (APN) = 8DG59241AB.
To perform this procedure using the WebUI, go to “To replace a Equipment Controller in
a Shelf with Redundant Equipment Controllers Using the WebUI” (p. 3-40).
To perform this procedure using the CLI, go to “To replace a Equipment Controller in a
Shelf with Redundant Equipment Controllers Using the CLI” (p. 3-41).
To replace a Equipment Controller in a Shelf with Redundant Equipment Controllers Using the
WebUI
The Equipment Controller is hot-swappable, allowing in-service replacement. This
procedure is not service-affecting.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Retrieve which Equipment Controller is active. If the Equipment Controller that is to be

replaced is the active Equipment Controller for this shelf, then switch to the other
Equipment Controller. In the Equipment Tree, select the slot containing the Equipment
Controller.
Result: The Card Properties window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click the Protection Switch tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 The EC Protection Software Settings window is displayed.

Note: The Protection Setting field is set to Active.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 To switch the Equipment Controller, select Enable Protection Switch, and click Submit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Unplug any Ethernet or serial cables that are connected to the Equipment Controller to be
replaced.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Remove and replace the card (see “Replacing a Card (General)” (p. 3-22)).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-40 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Supporting procedures Replacing an Equipment Controller in a Redundant Shelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
An activity switch occurs if the removed card is the active Equipment Controller. When
the new Equipment Controller is inserted in the shelf, it is synchronized with the active
Equipment Controller.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Reconnect any Ethernet or serial cables that you removed in Step 5.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
To replace a Equipment Controller in a Shelf with Redundant Equipment Controllers Using the CLI
The Equipment Controller is hot-swappable, allowing in-service replacement. This
procedure is not service-affecting.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Controller.
1. Type show redundancy to determine which Equipment Controller is active on a
shelf.
2. Type config redundancy sw shelf number to switch the other Equipment
Controller to active, if necessary.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Unplug any Ethernet or serial cables that are connected to the Equipment Controller to be
replaced.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Remove and replace the card (see “Replacing a Card (General)” (p. 3-22)).
An activity switch occurs if the removed card is the active Equipment Controller. When
the new Equipment Controller is inserted in the shelf, it is synchronized with the active
Equipment Controller.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Reconnect any Ethernet or serial cables that you removed in Step 2.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-41
Issue 1 June 2011
Supporting procedures Replacing an Equipment Controller in a Nonredundant Shelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Replacing an Equipment Controller in a Nonredundant Shelf

You can operate an NE with a either nonredundant (simplex) or redundant (duplex)
Equipment Controllers per shelf. It is recommended, however, that you operate all shelves
with redundant Equipment Controllers.
Removal of the Equipment Controller does not affect service, but does affect EMS
connectivity, NE communications, and alarm notification.
The procedure for replacing a faulty Equipment Controller in a nonredundant
configuration has two cases:
• Subtending shelves: Disconnect cables from the EC, then extract and replace the
Equipment Controller in the subtending shelf. This causes the Equipment Controller
to automatically load the correct software. This step requires no commands, but works
only on subtending shelves, and only if the main shelf is running the correct
committed software version.
• Main shelf: For replacement of the EC on a simplex controller Main shelf, see “To
replace a Simplex Equipment Controller Using the WebUI” (p. 3-42) and “To Replace
a Simplex Equipment Controller Using CLI” (p. 3-46).
You can also transfer a valid database onto a new Equipment Controller by restoring the
database.
To perform this procedure using the WebUI, go to “To replace a Simplex Equipment
Controller Using the WebUI” (p. 3-42).
To perform this procedure using the CLI, go to “To Replace a Simplex Equipment
Controller Using CLI” (p. 3-46).
To replace a Simplex Equipment Controller Using the WebUI

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Login to the WebUI.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If the database is valid, set up the database server information and back up the database
(see “Backing Up a Database” (p. 3-13)).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Replace the Equipment Controller.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click Alarms.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-42 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Alarm List is displayed. The Equipment Controller will have a
DBINVALID alarm active after the reboot has completed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If... Then...
the Equipment Controller is new from the continue with Step 6
factory,
the Equipment Controller has the current proceed to Step 24.
desired software,
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Select the shelf and slot where the User Panel is located (slot 40). Click the plus sign and
select OAMP.
Result: The Port Interface Settings window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Enter a valid IP address in the IP Address field.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Select System in the Equipment Tree.

Result: The System Properties window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Enter values in the NE Name and Loopback IP Address fields.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Select Administration > Networking > IP Routes.

Result: The IP Routes window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Leave the fields on this window at their default values. Select the Advertise field. Click
Create.
Result: The Create Static IP Route window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Click Apply.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Select Administration > Software > FTP Server.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-43
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The FTP Server Settings window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 Enter the values for the fields on this window as described in Table 3-2, “FTP Server
Parameters” (p. 3-44).
Table 3-2 FTP Server Parameters
Parameter Definition Input Default Value Allowed

Required Values
Server IP The IP address Yes 0 Valid dotted
Address where the quad
database is
stored.
Root Directory The path where Yes N/A
the database is
located on the
PC.
User ID Your user ID Yes N/A
New Password Your password Yes N/A
Confirm Your password Yes N/A
Password retyped for
verification.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 Select Administration > Software > Upgrade.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16 In the Action Type field, select Audit. Click Apply.

Result: When the window is re-displayed, the Status field changes to Completed.
Note: If the release on the Equipment Controller is a higher number that the
release number you are loading onto it, this is a downgrade; you must select the
Force Upgrade option with audit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17 In the Action Type field, select Download. Click Apply.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-44 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Status field changes to In Progress. Wait a few minutes for the software to
download.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18 Click Refresh.
Result: The Status field changes to Completed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
19 In the Action Type field, select Activate. Click Apply.

Result: A warning is displayed, saying that this action is service-affecting (see Figure
3-5, “Service-Affecting Warning Window” (p. 3-45)).
Figure 3-5 Service-Affecting Warning Window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
20 Click OK.
Result: The system will log you out of the NE. Wait a few minutes for the software to
activate.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
21 Login to the NE.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
23 In the Action Type field, select Commit. Click Apply.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
24 To clear the DBINVALID alarm, restore the database (see “Restoring a Database”
(p. 3-14)).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-45
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
25 Click Alarms. The Alarms List is displayed. The SWUPGCOMMIT alarm should not be
present in the Alarm List.
If... Then...
the SWUPGCOMMIT alarm is raised, continue with Step 26.
the SWUPGCOMMIT alarm is not raised, STOP! You are done with this procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
27 In the Action field, select Commit.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
28 Click Apply.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
29 Click Alarms.
Result: The Alarms List is displayed. The SWUPGCOMMIT alarm should not be
present in the Alarm List.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
To Replace a Simplex Equipment Controller Using CLI

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Ensure that you are working with a valid database. Set up the database server information.
Type each command line, and press Enter:
1. Type database server config.
2. config database server ip IP Address, using the IP address where the
database is stored.
3. config database userid, then enter your user ID and password when prompted.
4. config database path directory with the path on the PC where the database is
saved.
5. config database detail to verify your IP address, user ID, and path.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Backup the database by typing:

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-46 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
config database backup
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Replace the Equipment Controller.

The Equipment Controller will have a DBINVALID alarm active after the reboot has
completed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If... Then...
the Equipment Controller is new from the continue with Step 5
factory or does not contain the desired
software release,
the Equipment Controller has the current proceed to Step 13.
desired software,
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 To configure or verify the OAMP port details, type

config interface usrpnl oamp ip IP address/subnet mask.
A warning is displayed:
WARNING: Changing the OAMP ethernet port IP address may result
in a loss of IP connectivity to this and other network elements.
Type yes to confirm the configuration.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 To configure or verify the TID, type config general name NE name.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 To configure or verify the loopback IP address, type

config interface loopback ip loopback IP address/subnet mask.
A warning is displayed:
WARNING: Changing the loopback IP address will result in a warm
reset of this network element.
Type yes to confirm the configuration.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 To configure or verify static routes, type config cn routes default add gateway
default IP address.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-47
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Set up the software server information. Type each command line, and press Enter:
1. config software server ip IP address
2. config software server userid user ID
Enter your password when prompted.
3. config software server root /path
4. config software server detail
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Set up the database server information. Type each command line, and press Enter:
1. Type database server config.
2. config database server ip IP Address, using the IP address where the
database is stored.
3. config database userid, then enter your user ID and password when prompted.
4. config database path directory with the path on the PC where the database is
saved.
5. config database detail to verify your IP address, user ID, and path.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Upgrade the software. Type each command line, and press Enter:
1. config software upgrade manual audit release directory on RFS
no backup enforced. (The release directory would be combined with the
Software server root parameter value to make the path on the Remote File Server
where the software release resides. See also the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service
Switch Release 36/32/16 (PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16) 3.6.0 Installation and System
Turn-up Guide.)
2. config software upgrade manual load
3. Type config software upgrade manual activate.
The system will reboot.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Login to the NE.

Type config software upgrade commit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Telnet to the NE where the Equipment Controller is located.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 Replace the Equipment Controller in the shelf. Wait a few minutes for the Equipment
Controller to initialize.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-48 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 The database server information must be set up to point to the latest database backup for
this NE, which will be pulled down to the NE during a downgrade automatically. (See
Step 1.)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16 Login to the NE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17 Type alm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18 If... Then...
the DBINVALID alarm is raised, restore the database (see “Restoring a
Database” (p. 3-14)).
DBINVALID alarm is not raised, STOP! You are done with this procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
19 Repeat Step 1.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
20 Restore the database. Type config database restore and at the prompt, type yes to
confirm.
The system will reboot.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
21 Login to the NE.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
22 Type alm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
23 If... Then...
the SWUPGCOMMIT alarm is raised, type config software upgrade commit
and wait a few minutes for the alarm to clear.
the SWUPGCOMMIT alarm is not raised, STOP! You are done with this procedure.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-49
Issue 1 June 2011
Supporting procedures Replacing the Air Filter
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Replacing the Air Filter

It is recommended that you replace the air filter on the 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-
16/PSS-4 at approximately 3 month intervals, with a periodicity depending on the
environmental conditions.
Before you begin

Before you begin this procedure, be sure to wear a properly grounded ESD wrist strap.
Procedure
NOTICE
To prevent possible contamination of the EUT when the fan filter is
removed, fans must be temporarily shut down before the replacing the
filter.
It is important that the new fan filter be installed and the fans restarted within 120
seconds to prevent overheating of circuit components.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Unscrew the filter retainer with slot labeling on the lower front of the shelf and slide it
forward (see Figure 3-6, “Unscrew Filter Retainer” (p. 3-51)).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-50 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-6 Unscrew Filter Retainer
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Reach beneath the filter retainer and locate the air filter. Slide the air filter out of the shelf.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Discard the old air filter.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Locate the arrows on the front of the new filter (see Figure 3-7, “New Filter” (p. 3-51)).
Figure 3-7 New Filter
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-51
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 With the arrows pointing up, slide the new filter in and up into place.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Screw the filter retainer back into place (see Figure 3-8, “New Filter Installed” (p. 3-52)).
Figure 3-8 New Filter Installed
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-52 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Supporting procedures Replacing the Fan
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Replacing the Fan

When a fan in the fan tray stops working, the other fans in the tray increase to maximum
speed. It is recommended that you replace the fan within 60 seconds. The fans should
never be removed for longer than two minutes.
Before you begin

Before you begin this procedure, be sure to wear a properly grounded ESD wrist strap.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Ensure that the space in front of the fan unit is completely clear of fibers, cables, and so
on.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Ensure that the new fan unit is completely unpacked and ready to install before removing
old fan unit.
Note: The 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16/PSS-4 circuit packs require constant airflow
for cooling and will overheat quickly with the fan removed. Do not remove the old
fan until you are ready to immediately install the new fan or customer traffic may be
affected.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-53
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-9 Fan Unit
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Clean or replace the air filter prior to replacing fan unit.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Fully loosen the two Phillips head screws at the left and right ends on the front of the fan
unit. (The screws are captured and will not fall out of the fan unit.)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Grasp fan unit handles and slide fan unit straight back until it is free of the sub rack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Insert new fan unit immediately.

Note: The 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16/PSS-4 system cannot operate for more than
60 seconds without a fan unit installed .
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-54 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Gently tighten fan unit screws.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Provisioning an SFD40/SFD40B in a FOADM node
Procedure
Before you begin
Note: Ensure that no optical channel service has been provisioned before the
SFD40/SFD40B has initialized. If optical channel services are present, delete them
(see Step 3).
Note: Before the SFD40/SFD40B is in service, the OTUs connected to the
SFD40/SFD40B should be turned off to avoid channel leakage.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Properly connect the power cables of the SFD40/SFD40B card.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Connect the SFD40/SFD40B card to the amplifier cards with the inventory cable.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Optional: To monitor the SFD40/SFD40B temperature alarms and Input LOS alarm from
the NE management software, connect the SFD40/SD40B card to the User Panel with the
housekeeping cable and IDC block.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Power up the SFD40/SFD40B card, and wait for it to initialize (about 5 to 10 minutes).
Note the SFD40/SFD40B status by monitoring the temperature LED of the
SFD40/SFD40B. The SFD40/SFD40B should in service when the temperature and
initialization LEDs turn green. Also check the alarm status on the NE management
software to ensure that the housekeeping cable has been properly connected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Provision the optical channel service using the NE management software, and set up the
link.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-55
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
NOTICE
Performing loopbacks is service affecting. You must take the card out of service before
performing a loopback test.
None
For information and illustrations of loopbacks refer to the Alcatel-Lucent Product

Information and Planning Guide.
The 11STAR1, 11STMM10, 11STGE12, 43STA1P, 43STX4, 43STX4P and 4DPA4 packs
support the following loopbacks:
• client port line/facility loopback
• client port terminal loopback
• network port line/facility loopback
• network port terminal loopback
Note: Loopbacks may experience packet loss during a warm or cold reset of the card.
It can take several minutes for transmission to be established on 40G OTs after
removing loopbacks.
To create a loopback on a card using the CLI, refer to the Alcatel-Lucent CLI
Command Guide.
Facility/line Loopback on an OTU2 port entity of an OT card will not be transparent
to OTU2 and ODU2 overhead.
While facility/line loopback on an Fiber Channel port of 11STMM10 module is
active, a non-reported LANLSS condition will be present on the port. PM on port with
the loopback will accumulate SEFS during the time loopback is active.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-56 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Supporting procedures Loopback Variation on OTs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Loopback Variation on OTs

Each OT card in the system contains hardware designed to support various client signal
types, line rate and applications specific to each pack. Thus, the transmission path
(including clock architecture) through each card is different. The following diagrams
illustrate the variation of loopbacks on 1830 PSS OTs.
Figure 3-10 112SCX10 – Loopback Position
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-57
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-11 112SCA1 – Loopback Position
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-58 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-12 43STX4/43STX4P – Loopback Position
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-59
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-13 43STA1P – Loopback Position
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-60 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-14 11DPE12 – Loopback Position
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-61
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-15 11DPE12E – Loopback Position
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-62 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-16 11DPM12 – Loopback Position
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-63
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-17 4DPA4 (No FEC) – Loopback Position
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-64 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-18 4DPA4 – Loopback Position
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-65
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-19 11QPA4 – Loopback Position
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-66 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-20 11STAR1 – Loopback Position
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-67
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-21 11STMM10 – Loopback Position
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-68 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-22 11STGE12 – Loopback Position
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-69
Issue 1 June 2011
Supporting procedures High Temperature Threshold Exceeded
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
High Temperature Threshold Exceeded

A high temperature threshold on a card has been exceeded. There may be a fan failure,
fan blockage, site climate control failure, lack of filler cards in empty slots, or a failed
sensor. This alarm is raised when a card is over the specified operating temperature
(measured by temperature sensors on the card).
Note: It may take several minutes for corrective actions to lower the temperature.
Corrective action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If it doesn't, then go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Verify that the fan tray is installed and that no fan tray alarms are present. Correct any
faults found.
CLI show fan * alm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Visually inspect the shelf to confirm that filler cards are installed in all empty slots in the
shelf. This helps ensure proper airflow.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Check for a dirty air filter. Clean or replace it as necessary. Contact your service
representative for replacement filters.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Use a thermometer to measure the ambient air temperature at the intake of the fans. Verify
that the ambient temperature is not abnormally high. If the ambient temperature is too
high, the NE may require additional cooling to bring it back to an acceptable operating
temperature.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Verify if other cards in the shelf report temperatures near their upper limit (within 10 °C).
CLI show card <sh/sl>
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-70 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Supporting procedures High Temperature Threshold Exceeded
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Replace the card. See “Replacing System Components” (p. 3-20). Follow the return and
repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to an
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Changing the Equipment Controller Configuration

in an NE
Changing an NE from a Nonredundant to a Redundant

Equipment Controller Configuration
Before you begin
Before you can change a NE from a nonredundant to a redundant Equipment Controller
configuration, you must ensure that the following conditions are met:
• No unacknowledged alarms exist on the NE.
• The NE is not in the process of completing a software upgrade.
• The NE is not in the process of completing a database backup or restore.
• Ensure that the Equipment Controller you plan to insert for this procedure, is
approved for duplex controller configurations (Alcatel-Lucent Part Number (APN) =
8DG59241AB).
This procedure must be performed on the main shelf of a NE with one universal shelf.
Note: If you pre-provision the redundant Equipment Controller, an alarm is raised to
indicate that the card is missing. Once you install the redundant Equipment
Controller, the alarm is cleared.
To perform this procedure using the WebUI, go to “Changing an NE from a
Nonredundant to a Redundant Equipment Controller configuration Using the WebUI”
(p. 3-72).
To perform this procedure using the CLI, go to “Changing an NE from a Nonredundant to
a Redundant Equipment Controller Configuration Using the CLI” (p. 3-72).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-71
Issue 1 June 2011
Supporting procedures Changing an NE from a Nonredundant to a Redundant
Changing the Equipment Controller Configuration in an NE Equipment Controller Configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Changing an NE from a Nonredundant to a Redundant Equipment Controller configuration Using
the WebUI
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 To check that the NE is running software of Release 1.1.0 or higher, select System in the
Equipment Tree.
Result: The System Properties window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 View the software version in the Active Software Release field.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Backup the NE's database (see “Backing Up a Database” (p. 3-13)).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Install the redundant Equipment Controller into the shelf in slot 18.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Wait a few minutes for the Equipment Controllers to synchronize.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Connect the Equipment Controller cables. Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent Product

Information and Planning Guide.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Changing an NE from a Nonredundant to a Redundant Equipment Controller Configuration Using

the CLI
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 To check that the NE is running software of Release 1.1.0 or higher, type sh version.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 To backup the NE's database, see “Backing Up a Database” (p. 3-13).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Install the redundant Equipment Controller into the shelf in slot 18.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Wait a few minutes for the Equipment Controllers to synchronize.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-72 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Supporting procedures Changing an NE from a Nonredundant to a Redundant
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Connect the Equipment Controller cables, as required. Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent

Product Information and Planning Guide.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-73
Issue 1 June 2011
Supporting procedures Changing an NE From a Redundant to a Nonredundant
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Changing an NE From a Redundant to a Nonredundant

Equipment Controller Configuration
Before you begin
Before you can change a NE from a nonredundant to a redundant Equipment Controller
configuration, you must ensure that the following conditions are met:
• No unacknowledged alarms exist on the NE.
• The NE is not in the process of completing a software upgrade.
• The NE is not in the process of completing a database backup or restore.
• The Equipment Controllers are not synchronizing their databases.
This procedure must be performed on the main shelves of an NE before it is performed on
the subtending shelves of the NE.
To perform this procedure using the WebUI, go to “Changing an NE From a Redundant to
a Nonredundant Equipment Controller Configuration Using the WebUI” (p. 3-74).
To perform this procedure using the CLI, go to “Changing an NE From a Redundant to a
Nonredundant Equipment Controller Configuration Using the CLI” (p. 3-75).
Changing an NE From a Redundant to a Nonredundant Equipment Controller Configuration Using

the WebUI
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Backup the NE's database (see “Backing Up a Database” (p. 3-13)).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If... Then...
the Equipment Controller to be removed is continue with Step 3.
active (the Active LED is green)
the Equipment Controller to be removed is not proceed to Step 8.
active (the Active LED is not lit)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Switch activity from one Equipment Controller to the other. In the Equipment Tree, select
the slot containing the Equipment Controller.
Result: The Card Properties window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click the Protection Switch tab.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-74 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 The EC Protection Software Settings window is displayed. Note the Protection Setting
field.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 To switch the Equipment Controller, select Enable Protection Switch.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Click Submit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Remove any cables that are attached to the Equipment Controller to be removed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Remove the Equipment Controller from the slot.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Select the slot for the Equipment Controller in the Equipment Tree that you removed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Click the Delete tab.

Result: The Delete Card window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Select the Delete this Card field, and click Submit.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Insert an Equipment Controller blank into the empty Equipment Controller slot.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Changing an NE From a Redundant to a Nonredundant Equipment Controller Configuration Using

the CLI
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 To backup the NE's database, see “Backing Up a Database” (p. 3-13).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If... Then...
the Equipment Controller to be removed is continue with Step 3.
active (the Active LED is green)
the Equipment Controller to be removed is not proceed to Step 4.
active (the Active LED is not lit)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-75
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Controller.
1. Type show redundancy to determine which Equipment Controller is active on a
shelf.
2. Type config redundancy sw shelf number to switch the other Equipment
Controller to active, if necessary.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Remove any cables that are attached to the Equipment Controller to be removed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Remove the Equipment Controller from the slot.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Insert an Equipment Controller blank into the empty Equipment Controller slot.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Set to the Equipment Controller to be removed to the administrative state of Down, and
then set the slot to empty by typing the following commands:
1. config slot shelf_slot state down
2. config slot shelf_slot type empty
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Card-Specific Troubleshooting
4DPA4 Signal Rates

If the client port on the 4DPA4 is provisioned to the FE or SDSDI signal type, and the
actual received signal does not match, no alarm is raised.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-76 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Supporting procedures Egress Adjustment Failure and Clock Source (WTOCM and
Card-Specific Troubleshooting PF)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Egress Adjustment Failure and Clock Source (WTOCM and PF)

In the 1830 PSS systems, channel power levels are not reported for a WTOCM monitored
port for all channels, and no channel LOS alarms are raised at the port. Symptoms of
problem channels are provisioned and actually present, but not detected at a port
monitored by WTOCM. There are no other alarms against the WTOCM pack doing the
monitoring function nor LD pack where the power readings are not reported.If this
problem occurs, you will be unable to get wavekey powers from a WTOCM monitored
cross-connect.
A sample lightpath trace for a cross-connect is displayed in Figure 3-23, “Lightpath
Trace” (p. 3-77). Note that channel power is absent. Channel power will be absent for all
channels at this Line port if the problem manifests.
Figure 3-23 Lightpath Trace
The total power at the monitored LD port where the channel powers are missing will
show a power level that is normal (see Figure 3-24, “Total Power at Monitored LD Power
Level” (p. 3-77)):
Figure 3-24 Total Power at Monitored LD Power Level
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-77
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The WTOCM IN port will show no information for the total power at the WTOCM port
and the LD port (see Figure 3-25, “WTOCM and LD Total Power ” (p. 3-78)). Note that
readings normally available from the WTOCM are not reported.
Figure 3-25 WTOCM and LD Total Power
If only one clock source is present in the system and it fails, the FPGA may not recover
properly. The FPGA requires the clocks to be Stratum 3 quality or higher. It is
recommended that you use two PF units for clock and power redundancy.
Note: No alarm conditions are associated with this issue. If you see this issue with the
“Card Failure” or “Card Degrade” alarm, then the issue is likely caused by another
problem. Replacing the card should resolve these alarms (see “Replacing a Card
(General)” (p. 3-22)).
Procedure
NOTICE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-78 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform a cold reset of the WTOCM.
CLI config cardcard type shelf slot reset cold

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Replace the WTOCM pack (see “Replacing a Card (General)” (p. 3-22)).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Nonredundant PSS-36 and MT0C Clock Source

In the PSS-36 the clock source is provided by the MT0C pack. If the MT0C pack is
removed from a nonredundant (simplex) PSS-36 system, service will be affected. Do not
remove the MT0C pack in a nonredundant configuration where traffic is present.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-79
Issue 1 June 2011
Supporting procedures Nonredundant PSS-36 and MT0C Clock Source
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-80 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A access identifier (AID)

A unique identifier used to address equipment slots and ports, as well as facility tributaries, that
are defined for the system architecture.
add/drop multiplexer/multiplexing (ADM)

A high-speed multiplexing function offered by SONET that allows lower-level signals to be added
to or dropped from an optical carrier channel. The connection to the add/drop multiplexer is
through a tributary channel at a lower SONET carrier rate or a specific digital speed (for example,
DS3 or DS1).
ADM
See “add/drop multiplexer/multiplexing” (p. GL-1) for definition.
AHPHG
High Power High Gain DWDM Amplifier. See “ALPHG” (p. GL-2) for related term.
AID
See “access identifier ” (p. GL-1) for definition.
AIM
See “alarm indication message” (p. GL-1) for definition.
AINS
Automatic in-service.
AIS
See “alarm indication signal” (p. GL-1) for definition.
alarm
External notification or display of a failure condition. The indication of failure is towards an
external system interface or via audible or visible indicators.
alarm indication message (AIM)

A return message sent from one network element (NE) to another NE that indicates it has received
a signal that is so degraded that it is raising an alarm.
alarm indication signal (AIS)

A signal sent downstream by an NE to indicate that its incoming signal has failed.
alarm list
A status report that lists active alarms on the NE.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 GL-1
Issue 1 June 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
alarm log
A history of setting and clearing system alarms on the NE.
alarm severity
An attribute that defines the priority of the alarm message. The method in which alarms are
processed depends on their severity.
ALPHG
Low Power High Gain DWDM Amplifier. See “AHPHG ” (p. GL-1) for related term.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

A United States standards body that accredits standards for programming languages,
communications, and networking. ANSI is the U.S. representative in the International
Organization for Standards (ISO).
amplified spontaneous emission (ASE)

Optical noise generated in an erbium-doped fiber amplifier (EDFA) with and without signal input
power.
ANSI
See “American National Standards Institute” (p. GL-2) for definition.
APD
See “avalanche photodiode” (p. GL-3) for definition.
APS
See “automatic protection switching” (p. GL-3) for definition.
APSD
See “automatic power shutdown” (p. GL-3) for definition.
ASE
See “amplified spontaneous emission” (p. GL-2) for definition.
asynchronous
Data that is transmitted without an associated clock signal.
asynchronous transfer mode (ATM)

A fast-packet, connection-oriented, cell-switching technology for broadband signals. ATM is
designed to accommodate any form of data, including voice, facsimile, computer data, video,
image, and multimedia, whether compressed or uncompressed, whether real-time or non-real-time
in nature, and with guaranteed quality of service (QoS).
ATM networks will accept or reject connections based on a user's average and peak bandwidth
requirements, providing flexible and efficient service for LAN-to-LAN, compressed video, and
other applications that involve variable bit rate (VBR) traffic.
ATM
See “asynchronous transfer mode” (p. GL-2) for definition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-2 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
attenuation
The decrease in signal strength along a fiber optic waveguide caused by absorption and scattering.
Attenuation is usually expressed as dB/km.
attenuator
A passive device that reduces the amplitude of a signal without distorting the waveform.
automatic power shutdown (APSD)

A technique (procedure) to automatically shutdown the output power of optical amplifiers to
avoid exposure to hazardous levels.
automatic protection switching (APS)

A network survivability method in which traffic is automatically switched to a protection route
when a failure is detected on a working route.
autonomous message
Message sent by the system to the CIT to notify it of any state change in the system. Autonomous
messages are not responses to a CIT-initiated command. Examples of these messages include
alarms, events (non-alarmed condition), notification of connections that are added or deleted, and
changes in the system database.
avalanche photodiode (APD)

A photodetector that can be regarded as the semiconductor analog to photomultipliers. By
applying a high reverse bias voltage (typically 100-200 V in silicon), an APD shows an internal
current gain effect (around 100) due to impact ionization (avalanche effect).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B back reflection
See “Fresnel reflection” (p. GL-11).
background block errors (BBE)

Errors identified through OTN performance monitoring.
backward defect indication (BDI)

The OT port has detected a Backward Defect Indication at the ODUk Path layer. This defect
indicates that the peer OTUk port has detected condition that is treated as Server Signal Failure.
band optical filter (BOF)

A band-dependent optical card.
bay
An aluminum steel enclosure for rack-mounted equipment. Also know as a rack.
BB
See “broadband” (p. GL-4) for definition.
BBA
See “broadband amplifier” (p. GL-4) for definition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 GL-3
Issue 1 June 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BBE
See “background block errors” (p. GL-3) for definition.
BDI
See “backward defect indication” (p. GL-3) for definition.
BER
See “bit error rate” (p. GL-4) for definition.
bidirectional line switched ring (BLSR)

A survivable SONET transport architecture that protects against cable cuts and node failures by
providing duplicate, geographically diverse paths for each service. Network elements are
interconnected in a closed fiber loop (four fibers for a four-fiber BLSR architecture or two fibers
for a two-fiber BLSR). A service can reach its destination by traveling in either direction around
the ring. Exactly one-half of the bandwidth available between adjacent nodes in each direction is
used for working traffic, with the remaining bandwidth available for protection.
bit error rate (BER)

BER measures how accurately a bitstream is transmitted through a system. It measures how many
bits are received in error, compared to how many bits are sent.
BLSR
See “bidirectional line switched ring” (p. GL-4) for definition.
BOF
See “band optical filter” (p. GL-3) for definition.
broadband (BB)
A technology that refers to the always-open gateway to Internet-connected services delivered at
lightning-fast speeds.
broadband amplifier (BBA)

Optical amplifier that supports broadband technology.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
C CAD
See “channel add/drop card” (p. GL-5) for definition.
central office (CO)

A CO can be a building, a switch, or collection of switches where subscriber lines are joined to
switching equipment that connects the subscribers to each other, other subscribers, and/or long
distance subscribers.
CFR
Code of Federal Regulations.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-4 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
channel
A communications path or the signal sent over that path.
channel add/drop card (CAD)

Used with automatic power management; allows setpoints for a manual transmission line.
channel optical filter (COF)

COF cards facilitate the WaveKey encoding function, employed at service endpoints.
chromatic dispersion
The effect describing the velocity dependence of light travelling through a medium, depending on
its wavelength. For optical telecommunication signals, this effect causes the light pulses to spread
out and the resulting distortion in pulse shape degrades the signal quality.
CIDR
See “classless inter-domain routing” (p. GL-5) for definition.
CIT
See “craft interface terminal” (p. GL-6) for definition.
cladding
Material that surrounds the core of an optical fiber that has a lower index of refraction compared
to that of the core. The lower index of refraction causes the transmitted light to travel down the
core.
classless inter-domain routing (CIDR)
CLEI
See “common language element identifier” (p. GL-5) for definition.
CN
See “control network” (p. GL-6) for definition.
CO
See “central office” (p. GL-4) for definition.
coarse wavelength division multiplexing (CWDM)

CWDM is the method of combining multiple signals on laser beams at various wavelengths for
transmission along fiber optic cables. The number of channels is fewer than in dense wavelength
division multiplexing (DWDM), but more than in standard wavelength division multiplexing
(WDM).
COF
See “channel optical filter” (p. GL-5) for definition.
common language element identifier (CLEI)

CLEI codes enable you to clearly and consistently identify and track virtually every type of
telecommunications equipment. In the United States, these codes are assigned by Telecordia, and
are 10 bytes long.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 GL-5
Issue 1 June 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
connector
A mechanical or optical device that provides a demountable connection between two fibers or a
fiber and a source or detector.
connector variation
The maximum value in dB of the difference in insertion loss between mating optical connectors
(for example, with re-mating and temperature cycling). Also called optical connector variation.
control network (CN)

The portion of the network that carries control and management traffic (for example,
communications between the NEs and between the NEs and the EMS). The control network does
not carry user traffic. The control communications use the SNMP protocol.
core
The central portion of the fiber that transmits light. It is composed of material with a higher index
of refraction than the cladding.
coupler
An optical device that combines or splits power from optical fibers.
coupling ratio/loss (CR)

The ratio/loss of optical power from one output port to the total output power, expressed as a
percentage.
CPE
See “customer premises equipment” (p. GL-6) for definition.
CR
See “coupling ratio/loss” (p. GL-6) for definition.
craft interface terminal (CIT)

A local interface between humans and a NE. It is used to issue commands to the local system or,
by way of a remote login, to another system on the same fiber as the local system.
customer premises equipment (CPE)

Terminal and associated equipment and inside wiring located at a subscriber's premises. The
equipment is connected with the carrier's communication network at the demarcation point.
CWDM
See “coarse wavelength division multiplexing” (p. GL-5) for definition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
D data communication network (DCN)

DCN supports communications between network elements (NEs) and the network management
system (NMS).
DCM
See “dispersion compensation module” (p. GL-7) for definition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-6 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DCN
See “data communication network” (p. GL-6) for definition.
dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM)

A multiplexing technique that uses close spectral spacing of individual optical carrier wavelengths
to reduce the total number of fibers needed to provide a given amount of information-carrying
capacity. The technique takes advantage of desirable transmission characteristics (for example,
minimum dispersion or attenuation) within a given fiber.
DGEF
See “dynamic gain equalization filter” (p. GL-7) for definition.
DHCP
See “dynamic host configuration protocol” (p. GL-7) for definition.
dispersion
The temporal spreading of a light signal in an optical waveguide caused by light signals traveling
at different speeds through a fiber either due to modal or chromatic effects.
dispersion compensation module (DCM)

Spooled fiber used to control excess dispersion found in certain fiber types at pre- and
post-amplification.
distortion
The difference in value between two measurements of a signal (transmitted and received).
DS3
Standard for digital transmission (American National Standard for telecommunications -
Carrier-to-Customer Installation - DS3 Metallic Interface, ANSI T1.404- 1989).
DWDM
See “dense wavelength division multiplexing” (p. GL-7) for definition.
dynamic gain equalization filter (DGEF)

A filter that equalizes the gain of an optical signal.
dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP)

DHCP allows a DHCP server to automatically assign an IP address to a computer's TCP/IP stack
software. The number is taken from a defined range of numbers for a given network.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E earth
The European term for electrical ground.
EC
See “equipment controller” (p. GL-9) for definition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 GL-7
Issue 1 June 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EDFA
See “erbium-doped fiber amplifier” (p. GL-9) for definition.
edge node
A node that connects to external network or customer equipment, as opposed to providing an
interconnection point between other nodes. It is located at the "edge" of the network.
egress
Traffic leaving a network
EIA
See “Electronic Industries Alliance” (p. GL-8) for definition.
electrical variable optical attentuator (eVOA)

Works with the Tap module to provide input for Wavelength Tracker modulation and provides
optical tap for feedback signal to the Wavelength Tracker.
electromagnetic capability (EMC)

EMC is the ability of a device or system to function without error in its intended electromagnetic
environment
electromagnetic interference (EMI)

EMI refers to the emissions (high-energy, electrically induced magnetic fields) from a device or
system that interfere with the normal operation of another device or system.
Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA)

Group that specifies electrical transmission standards. The EIA and TIA have developed
numerous well-known communications standards, including EIA/TIA-232 and EIA/TIA-449.
electrostatic discharge (ESD)

Static electrical energy potentially harmful to circuit packs and humans.
Element Management System (EMS)

The EMS provides an efficient means of managing the equipment and services within a network,
including creating new services, diagnosing faults, and planning for growth. It includes interfaces
to external systems to allow functions such as billing, service orders, and service level agreement
(SLA) management.
EMC
See “electromagnetic capability” (p. GL-8) for definition.
EMI
See “electromagnetic interference” (p. GL-8) for definition.
EMS
See “Element Management System” (p. GL-8) for definition.
EN
European Norm; a German acronym that stands for “Europaïsche Norm.”
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-8 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Engineering rules
A set of rules that determine the system configuration possibilities based on fiber type, OA, rate,
and number of wavelengths. These rules also determine the maximum loss per span that can be
tolerated, the maximum distance between spans allowed, and the maximum number of spans that
can be supported.
equipment controller (EC)

EC is the equipment controller card˙,
erbium-doped fiber amplifier (EDFA)

A type of amplifier with a short length of fiber that has been doped with erbium and spliced into
the operating single-mode fiber (SMF) . A three-port wavelength division multiplexer (WDM) is
used, with one incoming port connected to the operating fiber carrying the primary signal in the
1550-nm window, one incoming port attached to a pump laser operating at 980 nm or 1480 nm,
and the one outgoing port connected to the operating fiber.
ESD
See “electrostatic discharge” (p. GL-8) for definition.
Ethernet LAN
A LAN conformant to the 802.3 IEEE standard. This standard supports communications over
shared media where only one device can transmit while all other devices listen. A collision
detection and handling mechanism is incorporated into the standard. Devices on the LAN
communicate by sending Ethernet packets containing a Media Access Control (MAC) address for
the source and destination. Setting the destination MAC address to all ones supports packet
broadcast to all devices on the LAN.
ETSI
See “European Telecommunications Standards Institute” (p. GL-9) for definition.
European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI)

Located in Sophia-Antipolis, France, ETSI is the European counterpart to ANSI. Its task is to
pave the way for telecommunications integration in the European community as part of the single
European market program. It establishes telecommunication standards for the European
community.
eVOA
See “electrical variable optical attentuator” (p. GL-8) for definition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
F failure
Occurs when a fault cause persists for a certain period of time.
failure in time (FIT)

A unit of failure rate in reliability analysis. One FIT is equivalent to one failure per one billion
operating hours.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 GL-9
Issue 1 June 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
failure rate
The number of failures of a device per unit of time.
FC
See “fiber optic connector” (p. GL-10) for definition.
FCC
See “Federal Communications Commission” (p. GL-10) for definition.
FCS
See “frame check sequence” (p. GL-11) for definition.
FDA
See “Food and Drug Administration” (p. GL-11) for definition.
FDDI
See “fiber distributed data interface” (p. GL-10) for definition.
FDI
See “forward defect indicator” (p. GL-11) for definition.
FEC
See “forward error correction” (p. GL-11) for definition.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC)

The U.S. federal regulatory agency responsible for the regulation of interstate and international
communications by radio, television, wire, satellite, and cable.
Ferrule
A rigid tube that confines or holds a fiber as part of a connector assembly.
fiber distributed data interface (FDDI)

A set of ANSI protocols used for sending digital data over fiber optic cable. FDDI networks are
token-passing networks and support data rates of up to 100 Mbps.
fiber optic cable

A cable containing one or more optical fibers.
fiber optic connector (FC)

A threaded optical connector for single-mode or multimode fiber and applications requiring low
back reflection.
field-programmable gate array (FPGA)

General purpose integrated chip; chip's functions can be programmed by software. FPGAs are
mostly used for rapid development and small or medium quantities production.
file transfer protocol (FTP)

A protocol used for exchanging files over the Internet. FTP uses the Internet's TCP/IP protocols to
enable data transfer. FTP is most commonly used to download/upload a file to/from a server using
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-10 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
the Internet.
FIT
See “failure in time” (p. GL-9) for definition.
FIT rate
The number of device failures in one billion device hours.
flash disk memory module (FMM)

A nonvolatile memory device used to store the installation software generic or the NE database.
flow
Usually refers to the movement of packets within the network (that is, packet flow).
FMM
See “flash disk memory module” (p. GL-11) for definition.
FOADM
Fixed optical add/drop multiplexer/multiplexing.
Food and Drug Administration (FDA)

An agency of the United States Department of Health and Human Services and is responsible for
the safety regulation of most types of foods, dietary supplements, drugs, vaccines, biological
medical products, blood products, medical devices, radiation-emitting devices, veterinary
products, and cosmetics.
forward defect indicator (FDI)

An automatic and fully distributed capability which indicates a failure in a server networking
layer (e.g., Physical Layer). When used with other mechanisms such as CV (Connectivity
Verification), it can indicate defects such as misbranching of LSPs and errors in swapping LSP
label.
forward error correction (FEC)

A technique used for error detection and correction in which the transmitting host computer
includes some number of redundant bits in the payload (data field) of a block or frame of data.
The receiving device uses those bits to detect, isolate and correct any errors created in
transmission. FEC avoids having to retransmit information which incurred errors in network
transit.
FPGA
See “field-programmable gate array” (p. GL-10) for definition.
frame check sequence (FCS)

Extra characters added to a frame for error control purposes. Used in HDLC, Frame Relay, and
other data link layer protocols.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 GL-11
Issue 1 June 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fresnel reflection
A reflection of light that occurs at the air-glass interface at the ends of an optical fiber. See “back
reflection” (p. GL-3) for related term.
FTP
See “file transfer protocol” (p. GL-10) for definition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
G gain
The increase in power and magnitude of a signal.
gateway network element (GNE)

A system node that has a physical attachment to the management system to support the access of
the remote NE. The number of remote NEs a GNE can serve is specified in terms of the number
of OSI stack associations that the GNE can support without running out of local resources.
GbE
See “Gigabit Ethernet” (p. GL-12) for definition.
generic framing protocol (GFP)

Provides a generic mechanism to adapt traffic from higher-layer client signals over an
octet-synchronous transport network. Client signals may be PDU oriented (e.g., PPP/IP or
Ethernet MAC), block oriented (e.g., Fiber Channel or ESCON) or a Constant Bit Rate (CBR)
stream.
GFP
See “generic framing protocol” (p. GL-12) for definition.
Gigabit Ethernet (GBE)

A transmission technology based on the Ethernet frame format and protocol used in local area
networks (LANs) that provides a data rate of one billion bits (one gigabit) per second. Gigabit
Ethernet is defined in the IEEE 802.3 standard and is currently used as the backbone in many
enterprise networks.
glass through-connection
A pair of optical connections between two segments that terminate on the same site.
GNE
See “gateway network element” (p. GL-12) for definition.
graphical user interface (GUI)

A program interface that takes advantage of the computer's graphics capabilities to make the
program easier to use.
grooming
Consolidating or segregating traffic.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-12 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
grooming node
A node on which incoming signals of lower rates are added (or aggregated) into a higher-rate
signal for more efficient transport.
ground
The North American term for electrical earth.
GUI
See “graphical user interface” (p. GL-12) for definition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
I ILA
See “in-line amplifier” (p. GL-13) for definition.
in-line amplifier (ILA)

A repeater used in WDM technology. See “repeater” (p. GL-23) for related term.
ingress
Traffic entering a network.
insertion loss
The loss of power that results from inserting a component, such as a connector or splice, into a
previously continuous path.
International Standards Organization (ISO)

A United Nations agency concerned with international standardization in a broad range of
industrial and technical fields.
International Telecommunications Union (ITU)

An international civil organization established to promote standardized telecommunications on a
worldwide basis.
Internet protocol (IP)

A standard protocol designed for use in interconnected systems of packet-switched computer
communication networks. The Internet Protocol provides for transmitting blocks of data called
datagrams from sources to destinations, where sources and destinations are hosts identified by
fixed-length addresses. The Internet Protocol also provides for fragmentation and reassembly of
long datagrams, if necessary, for transmission through small-packet networks.
Internet protocol security (IPsec)

A developing standard for security at the network or packet processing layer of network
communication. Earlier security approaches have inserted security at the application layer of the
communications model. IPsec is especially useful for implementing virtual private networks and
for remote user access through dial-up connection to private networks.
Internet service provider (ISP)

A company that provides individuals and other companies access to the Internet and other related
services, such as Web site building and virtual hosting.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 GL-13
Issue 1 June 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IP
See “Internet protocol” (p. GL-13) for definition.
IPsec (Internet Protocol Security)

See “Internet protocol security” (p. GL-13) for definition.
ISO
See “International Standards Organization” (p. GL-13) for definition.
ISP
See “Internet service provider” (p. GL-13) for definition.
ITU
See “International Telecommunications Union” (p. GL-13) for definition
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
J jacket
The outer, protective covering of the cable.
jitter
Small and rapid variations in the timing of a waveform due to noise, changes in component
characteristics, supply voltages, or imperfect synchronizing circuits.
jumper
A short fiber optic cable with connectors on both ends.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
L lambda (λ)
The eleventh letter in the Greek alphabet. In optical fiber networking, the term lambda refers to an
individual optical wavelength. See “wavelength” (p. GL-32) for related term.
laser bias current (LBC)

Current that runs through the laser to make it work. LBC is monitored by performance
monitoring. If the current goes beyond a certain threshold, the circuit pack must be replaced.
LBC
See “laser bias current” (p. GL-14) for definition.
LBO
See “line build out” (p. GL-15) for definition.
LC
See “Lucent connector” (p. GL-15) for definition.
LD
See “line driver” (p. GL-15) for definition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-14 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LGX
A SONET device that contains ports for optical fiber connections to an optical network element
(NE). An LGX is used to make and change connections to an NE without changing the cabling on
the NE itself.
line build out (LBO)

Attenuation used to simulate a load.
line driver (LD)

Functional unit (circuit pack) providing the OSI model's physical level interface between a data
link and the exchange.
link state advertisement (LSA)

A broadcast message that advertises a link's current status.
LOF
See “loss of frame” (p. GL-15) for definition.
long reach (LR)

An optic standard that constrains the output power of transmitters and the sensitivity of receivers
for long-haul applications (up to 80 km) without the need for regeneration.
LOS
See “loss of service/loss of signal” (p. GL-15) for definition.
loss
The amount of a signal's power, expressed in dB, that is lost in connectors, splices, or fiber
defects.
loss of frame (LOF)

Loss of frame is detected when the OOF (out-of-frame) anomaly persists for a certain time.
loss of service/loss of signal (LOS)

A condition where the optical input power falls below a certain threshold.
LR
See “long reach” (p. GL-15) for definition.
LSA
See “link state advertisement” (p. GL-15) for definition.
Lucent connector (LC)

Designation for a small-form-factor (SFF) design based on a proven 1.25-mm ceramic ferrule.
This connector uses RJ-style latching. It facilitates high-speed applications with lower power
requirements due to lower insertion loss (0.1 dB typical) and higher return loss (55-dB single
mode).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 GL-15
Issue 1 June 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
M MA
maintenance association
MAC
See “media access control” (p. GL-16) for definition.
management information base (MIB)

A formal description of a set of network objects that can be managed using the Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP). The information is represented in a tree format.
margin
The allowance for attenuation in addition to that explicitly accounted for in system design.
master controller (MC)

The system's master controller (MC) card.
MC
See “master controller” (p. GL-16) for definition.
MD
maintenance domain
mean time between failures (MTBF)

The expected average time between failures usually expressed in hours.
mean time to repair (MTTR)

The average time that it takes until a failure is repaired. MTTR is usually expressed in hours.
media access control (MAC)

The MAC address is a computer's unique hardware number. The MAC address is used by the
media access control sublayer of the data link layer of telecommunications protocols.
MEP
maintenance end point
mesh
A type of network configuration that combines ROADMs to support mesh channel connectivity
between the ROADMs without O-E-O for transmission. It is operated as a single NE with as
many as four degrees (bidirectional DWDM interfaces) that comprise two lines for the east and
two for the west.
MIB
See “management information base” (p. GL-16) for definition.
mid-stage access amplifier (MSA)

An MSA has two amplifier stages between which can be fibered a DCM/DCF card or an external
dispersion compensation unit.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-16 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
modulation
A process that modifies the characteristic of one wave (the carrier) by another wave (the signal).
Examples include amplitude modulation (AM), frequency modulation (FM), and pulse-coded
modulation (PCM).
MSA
See “mid-stage access amplifier” (p. GL-16) for definition.
MTBF
See “mean time between failures” (p. GL-16) for definition.
MTTR
See “mean time to repair” (p. GL-16) for definition.
multimode fiber
An optical fiber that has a core large enough to propagate more than one mode of light. The
typical diameter is 62.5 micrometers.
multiplexer (MUX)
A device that combines two or more signals into a single output.
multiplexing
The process that transmits two or more signals over a single communications channel. Examples
include time-division multiplexing and wavelength-division multiplexing.
MUX
See “multiplexer” (p. GL-17) for definition.
muxponder
A networking device that multiplexes and transponds GbE signals.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
N NE
See “network element” (p. GL-17) for definition.
NEBS
See “Network Equipment Building System requirements” (p. GL-18) for definition.
network element (NE)

Processor-controlled entity of a telecommunications network that primarily provides switching
and transport network functions and contains network operations functions.
For 1830 PSS, a configuration of 1830 PSS equipment at a single site, addressed as a single entity,
and under the control of a single controller (NE). The types of NEs are terminal, ILA (in-line
amplifier), OADM (optical add/drop multiplexer), and ADM (add/drop multiplexer).
Network Element Management System (NMS)

The NMS provides an efficient means of managing the equipment and services within a network,
including creating new services, diagnosing faults, and planning for growth. It has interfaces to
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 GL-17
Issue 1 June 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
external systems to allow functions such as billing, service orders, and service level agreement
(SLA) management.
Network Equipment Building System requirements (NEBS)

Developed by Telcordia, standards that vendors must adhere to if they want to sell equipment to
the Regional Bell Operating Companies (RBOCs) and the Competitive Local Exchange Carriers
(CLECs).
network services
Services that the network provider creates only as infrastructure to support user services. For
example, a VPN network service is used to implement an Ethernet service.
network time protocol (NTP)

Internet protocol used to synchronize time between network equipment.
NMS
See “Network Element Management System” (p. GL-17) for definition.
node
A node (or network element) is a set of one or more 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16/PSS-4 shelves
that are viewed as a single entity by the Network Management System. A node can be any of the
following:
• up to two single optical shelves
• a single electrical shelf
• a single electrical shelf and one or more optical shelves
non-service affecting (NSA)

Refers to a condition that does not impact or interfere with network service.
NSA
See “non-service affecting” (p. GL-18) for definition.
NTP
See “network time protocol” (p. GL-18) for definition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
O OA
See “optical amplifier” (p. GL-19) for definition.
OAMP
Operations, Administration, Maintenance, and Provisioning.
OC-n
See “optical carrier level-n” (p. GL-19) for definition.
Occupational Safety and Health Administration) (OSHA)

OSHA is the main American federal agency charged with the enforcement of safety and health
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-18 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
legislation.
OCHAN or OCh
See “optical channel” (p. GL-20) for definition.
ODU
See “optical demultiplexer” (p. GL-20) for definition.
ODU-k
An optical logical connection with a specific rate. The rate can be either ODU-10G or ODU-40G.
OEO
See “optical-electrical-optical conversion” (p. GL-20) for definition.
OOF
See “out of frame” (p. GL-21) for definition.
Open Systems Interconnection reference model (OSI)

A seven-layer model that pertains to the logical structure for communications networks
standardized by the International Organization for Standardization (ISO). Adherence to the
standard enables any OSI-compliant system to communicate with any other OSI-compliant
system.
Operations Support System (OSS)

A management system supporting a specific management function, such as alarm surveillance or
provisioning, in a carrier network. Many OSSs are large centralized systems running on
mainframes or minicomputers.
OPR
See “OPR” (p. 2-228) for definition.
OPS
See “optical protection switch” (p. GL-20) for definition.
optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM)

An OADM is a network element which allows a WDM transmission link to add or drop optical
signals, without converting the photonic stream into an electrical signal. Insertion and extraction
are done using optical filters or demultiplexers. An OADM can be either non-reconfigurable or
reconfigurable; in the latter case, optical switches need to be used.
optical amplifier (OA)

A device that amplifies an input optical signal without converting it into electrical form.
optical carrier level-n (OC-n)

A carrier rate specified in the SONET standard, where n is a numeric.
optical cell
A number of nodes connected by fiber in a predefined manner to provide route diversity to each
node. The simplest form of optical cell is a ring. Statically allocated wavelengths are assigned
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 GL-19
Issue 1 June 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
within the context of one cell.
optical channel (OCHAN, Och)

An optical wavelength band for WDM optical communications.
optical demultiplexer (ODU)

Value/indicator used for an optical demultiplexer.
optical path protection (OPP)

A protection path is defined when the connection is set up. When a fault is detected on the path,
there is a switch-over from the working path to the protection path to restore the traffic.
optical path restoration (OPR)

A recovery scheme that dynamically finds a protection path when a fault is detected. This method
is usually not capable of matching SDH/SONET recovery time periods (for example, 50 ms).
optical power meter

An instrument that measures the amount of optical power present at the end of a fiber or cable.
optical protection switch (OPS)

An optical circuit pack that provides WDM protection.
optical signal to noise ratio (OSNR)

The ratio between the optical signal power of the data signal and the power of the optical noise
signal.
optical supervisory channel (OSC)

A designated optical channel used to carry communications related to maintenance and
operational functions of the network rather than customer traffic.
The OSC supports the following communications: node-to-node, interworking, client LAN, and
orderwire communication.
optical transponder (OT)

An OT is a circuit pack that performs optical-to-electrical to optical (OEO) conversion.
OTs perform frequency adaptation between 1830 PSS equipment and external equipment that is
not optically compatible with 1830 PSS Transport. OTs also provide 3R functionality (retiming,
reshaping, reamplification) and perform fault management and performance monitoring
(non-intrusive monitoring) on the SONET/SDH and WaveWrapper signal.
optical transport network (OTN)

A fiber-optic network designed to transport customer traffic, such as an SDH or SONET network.
See “Synchronous Digital Hierarchy” (p. GL-28) and “Synchronous Optical Network”
(p. GL-28) for examples.
optical-electrical-optical conversion (OEO)

The process of converting an optical signal to an electrical equivalent and then back to optical
data.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-20 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
orderwire
A section of the supervisory signal that is used for communication between sites.
OSC
See “optical supervisory channel” (p. GL-20) for definition.
OSHA
See “Occupational Safety and Health Administration)” (p. GL-18) for definition.
OSI
See “Open Systems Interconnection reference model” (p. GL-19) for definition.
OSNR
See “optical signal to noise ratio” (p. GL-20) for definition.
OSP
See “outside plant” (p. GL-21) for definition.
OSS
See “Operations Support System” (p. GL-19) for definition.
OT
See “optical transponder” (p. GL-20) for definition.
OTN
See “optical transport network” (p. GL-20) for definition.
out of frame (OOF)

A state in which the frame alignment sequence of an SDH/SONET frame has not been found for
several consecutive frames.
outside plant (OSP)

Refers to outside the central office/building premises.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
P PCS
See “physical coding sublayer” (p. GL-22) for definition.
PDL
See “polarization dependent loss” (p. GL-22) for definition.
PDU
See “protocol data unit” (p. GL-22) for definition.
performance monitoring (PM)

Measures the quality of service and identifies any degrading or marginally operating systems
(before an alarm would be generated).
photonic cross-connect (PXC)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 GL-21
Issue 1 June 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A fiber cross-connect that operates without optical-electrical-optical conversion. It can have one
or more wavelengths on each fiber or port.
photonic protection switch (PPS)

By provisioning of PPS cards (or optical splitters), automatic protection switch (APS) are
automatically created.
physical coding sublayer (PCS)

PCS layer monitoring used for Ethernet/FC ports.
PM
See “performance monitoring” (p. GL-21) for definition.
PMD
See “polarization mode dispersion” (p. GL-22) for definition.
point-to-point transmission
The transmission between two designated stations.
polarization dependent loss (PDL)

Loss of optical power that occurs during the polarization process. Polarized light waves are light
waves in which the vibrations occur in a single plane. The process of transforming unpolarized
light into polarized light is known as polarization (the orientation of the electric and magnetic
field vectors of a propagating electro-magnetic wave).
polarization mode dispersion (PMD)

PMD is an inherent property of all optical media. It is caused by the difference in the propagation
velocities of light in the orthogonal principal polarization states of the transmission medium. The
net effect is that if an optical pulse contains both polarization components, then the different
polarization components will travel at different speeds and arrive at different times, smearing the
received optical signal.
PPS
See “photonic protection switch” (p. GL-22) for definition.
protocol data unit (PDU)

A device used for the information exchange between equal protocol layers.
provisioning
Placing and configuring hardware and software required to activate a telecommunications service
for a customer. If the equipment is in place, provisioning may consist of creating or modifying a
customer record in a database to activate the services.
PXC
See “photonic cross-connect” (p. GL-21) for definition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-22 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Q QoS
See “quality of service” (p. GL-23) for definition.
quality of service (QoS)

A set of performance parameters that characterize the transmission quality over a given virtual
connection.
QoS can be quantitatively indicated by channel or system performance parameters, such as
signal-to-noise ratio, bit error ratio, message throughput rate, and call blocking probability.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
R rack
A rack is the standardized physical framework on which network equipment such as 1830
PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16/PSS-4 shelves are mounted. A rack can contain more than one shelf. Also
called bay frames.
random jitter (RJ)

Random jitter is caused by thermal noise and may be modeled as a Gaussian process. The
peak-to-peak value of RJ is of a probabilistic nature, and thus any specific value requires an
associated probability.
receiver
A terminal device that includes a detector and signal processing electronics. It functions as an
optical-to-electrical converter.
receiver sensitivity
The minimum optical power required at a receiver to deliver traffic at a guaranteed bit error rate
(BER). This parameter is specified back-to-back (without the effects of chromatic dispersion or
OSNR degradation).
reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer (ROADM)

An optical network element with a configuration that can be changed remotely. The main benefit
of this remote reconfigurability is that it reduces Operating Expenditures (OPEX) when operating
a DWDM network. OPEX is reduced because the ROADM eases network provisioning and line
tuning at both the initial installation and any upgrades (to increase the capacity or re-allocate
resources to a new demand matrix).
regeneration
Electrical signal regeneration. Typically, OTUk Section regeneration and ODUk transparency is
implied in this context.
remote network monitoring (RMON)

Provides statistics for remote performance monitoring. Defined in standard RFC 2819.
repeater
A receiver and transmitter set designed to amplify attenuated signals. Repeaters are used to extend
operating range. See “in-line amplifier” (p. GL-13) for related term.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 GL-23
Issue 1 June 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
request for comment (RFC)
A document that describes the specifications of a technology. RFCs are used by the Internet
Engineering Task Force (IETF) and other standards bodies.
restoration domain
A part of the network where traffic restoration is provided in isolation from the rest of the
network.
RFC
See “request for comment” (p. GL-23) for definition.
RIP
See “routing information protocol” (p. GL-24) for definition.
RJ
See “random jitter” (p. GL-23) for definition.
RMON
See “remote network monitoring” (p. GL-23) for definition.
ROADM
See “reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer” (p. GL-23) for definition.
routing information protocol (RIP)

RIP is an interior gateway protocol defined by the IETF (RIPv1 - RFC 1058 and RIPv2 - 2453)
that specifies how routers exchange routing table information. RIP is a routing protocol based on
the distance vector algorithm. With RIP, routers periodically exchange entire tables.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
S SA
See “service affecting” (p. GL-25) for definition.
SAN
See “storage area network” (p. GL-27) for definition.
SC
See “shelf controller” (p. GL-25) for definition.
scattering
The change of direction of light rays or photons after striking small particles. It may also be
regarded as the diffusion of a light beam caused by the inhomogeneity of the transmitting
material.
SCOT
See “software control of transmission” (p. GL-26) for definition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-24 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SDH
See “Synchronous Digital Hierarchy” (p. GL-28) for definition.
secure shell (SSH)

A secure method of transmitting data.
segment
A pair of OSP fibers connecting two sites.
SELV
Safety extra low voltage.
service affecting (SA)

Refers to a condition that impacts or interferes with network service.
Service Level Agreement (SLA)

A contract between a network service provider and a customer that specifies, usually in
measurable terms, what services the network service provider will provide.
services
Within the 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16/PSS-4 system, services can be offered directly to end
customers or be used internally to a network as transport infrastructure.
SFC
See “static filter, CWDM” (p. GL-27) for definition.
SFD
See “static filter, DWDM” (p. GL-27) for definition.
SFP
See “small form-factor pluggable module” (p. GL-26) for definition.
shared risk group (SRG)

A shared risk group is a group of items that are likely to be affected by a single fault. The items
therefore share the risk of experiencing the fault.
shelf
A shelf is a mechanical facility that is in general a housing for circuit packs. Shelves are housed in
Bays.
An 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16/PSS-4 node consists of one or more physical shelves equipped
with cards. The shelf provides a chassis or cage with a backplane that can contain multiple cards.
The shelf is mounted in a rack. Each shelf has a shelf controller card, plus its redundant mate.
Every node has one shelf that has its shelf controllers designated as the master controller for the
node. The node appears as a single point in the network topology to the network management
system. Connections between nodes use network links. See “node” (p. GL-18) for related term.
shelf controller (SC)

The SC card in a 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16/PSS-4 shelf.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 GL-25
Issue 1 June 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
signaling transfer point (STP)
A node in a common channel signalling network with the function of transferring messages from
one signalling link to another and considered exclusively from the viewpoint of the transfer
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)

SNMP is the protocol used to communicate between the 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16/PSS-4
nodes and the NMS. The SNMP traffic is carried over the 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16/PSS-4
control network.
simplex
A single element (for example, a simplex connector is a single-fiber connector).
single-mode fiber (SMF)

A type of fiber which is very small in diameter and allows the light to be reflected in a single way
along the lightguide such that there is coherence in the arrival of the light signal.
site
The termination location of OSP cables. Each site can contain one or more NEs and one or more
glass-through connections.
SLA
See “Service Level Agreement” (p. GL-25) for definition.
small form-factor pluggable module (SFP)

An optical modular, hot-pluggable transceiver (compatible with IEEE-802.3z) designed for use
with small form factor (SFF) connectors, offering high speed and physical compactness. SFP
transceivers perform at data speeds of up to 5 gigabits per second, and possibly higher.
The SFP modules can be easily interchanged, therefore, electro-optical or fiber optic networks can
be upgraded and maintained more conveniently than has been the case with traditional soldered-in
modules. Rather than replacing an entire circuit board containing several soldered-in modules, a
single module can be removed and replaced for repair or upgrading. This can result in a
substantial cost savings, both in maintenance and in upgrading efforts.
SMF
See “single-mode fiber” (p. GL-26) for definition.
SNCP
See “Sub-Network Connection Protocol” (p. GL-28) for definition.
SNMP
See “Simple Network Management Protocol” (p. GL-26) for definition.
software control of transmission (SCOT)

System software that controls the settings of EDFA pumps, VOAs, Raman pumps, DCM pumps,
DGEFs, and blockers in the ROADM NEs.
software generic (SW generic)

The whole software and (static) data associated with a particular NE release.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-26 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SONET
See “Synchronous Optical Network” (p. GL-28) for definition.
SONET wavelength service

The SONET wavelength service provides transport of SONET signals through the 1830
PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16/PSS-4 network.
span
A fiber link between NEs that can be unidirectional or bidirectional, depending on the network
design. Multiple segments in tandem are connected by glass-through connections.
span loss
Loss (in dB) of optical power due to the span transmission medium (includes fiber loss and splice
losses).
splice
A permanent connection of two optical fibers through fusion or mechanical means.
SRG
See “shared risk group” (p. GL-25) for definition.
SSH
See “secure shell” (p. GL-25) for definition.
SSMF
See “standard single-mode fiber” (p. GL-27) for definition.
ST
See “straight-tip connector” (p. GL-28) for definition.
standard single-mode fiber (SSMF)

This is the most common type of fiber deployed. This fiber was designed to provide zero
chromatic dispersion at 1310 nm, to support the early long-haul transmission systems operating at
this wavelength. It has a chromatic dispersion of at most 20 ps/(nm*km) in the 1550 nm
wavelength range and usually around 17 ps/(nm*km).
static filter, CWDM (SFC)

A static filter card used with a CWDM circuit pack.
static filter, DWDM (SFD)

A static filter card used with a DWDM circuit pack.
storage area network (SAN)

A high-speed special-purpose network (or subnetwork) that interconnects different kinds of data
storage devices with associated data servers on behalf of a larger network of users.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 GL-27
Issue 1 June 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
STP
See “signaling transfer point” (p. GL-25) for definition.
straight-tip connector (ST)

Fiber optic connector that uses a bayonet-style coupling rather than a screw-on coupling.
STS, STS-n
See “synchronous transport signal-n” (p. GL-28) for definition.
Sub-Network Connection Protocol (SNCP)

An SDH version of UPSR. See SDH and UPSR.
SW generic
See “software generic” (p. GL-26) for definition.
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)

A family of digital transmission rates used outside of the U.S. and Japan from 51.84 Mb/s to 40
Gb/s that allows the interconnection of transmission products around the world.
SDH is the standard technology for synchronous data transmission on optical media. It is the
international equivalent of Synchronous Optical Network (SONET). Both SDH and SONET
technologies provide faster and less costly network interconnection than traditional
Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy (PDH) equipment.
Synchronous Optical Network (SONET)

A North-American standard developed by Telecordia and adapted by ANSI for the optical
long-distance networks.
SONET is the interface standard for synchronous optical-fiber transmission, applicable to the
physical layer of the OSI reference model. SONET has a basic bit rate of 51.840 mB/s, called
OC-1, that is used to define higher rates (OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, and so on) carried as a channel on
an optical fiber.
synchronous signal
A data signal that is sent along with a clock signal.
synchronous transport signal-n (STS, STS-n)

The basic logical building block signal with a rate of 51.840 Mb/s for an STS-1 signal and a rate
of n times 51.840 Mb/s for an STS-n signal (where n is a numeric).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
T tap
The entry point into a system module.
target identifier (TID)

A provisionable parameter used to identify an NE within a TL1 command.
TCA
See “threshold crossing alert” (p. GL-29) for definition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-28 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCP
See “Transmission Control Protocol” (p. GL-30) for definition.
TCP/IP
A suite of several networking protocols developed for the Internet that provides communication
across interconnected networks, between computers with diverse hardware architectures and
various operating systems. Some examples are FTP, SMTP, and SNMP.
TDM
See “time-division multiplexing” (p. GL-29) for definition.
Telecommunications Management Network (TMN)

A network that interfaces with a telecommunications network at several points to receive
information from, and to control the operation of, the telecommunications network.
thermal noise
Noise resulting from thermally induced random fluctuation in the receiver's load resistance
current.
threshold crossing alert (TCA)

A condition set when a counter exceeds a user-selected high or low threshold. A TCA does not
generate an alarm but is available on demand through the CIT.
TID
See “target identifier” (p. GL-28) for definition.
time-division multiplexing (TDM)

A multiplexing technique whereby two or more channels are derived from a transmission medium
by dividing access to the medium into sequential intervals. Each channel has access to the entire
bandwidth of the medium during its interval. This implies that one transmitter uses one channel to
send several bit streams of information.
TL1 (Transaction language 1)

An OS/NE machine-to-machine language. TL1 messages are expressed as ASCII strings. TL1
messages and syntax are defined by Telecordia.
TMN
See “Telecommunications Management Network” (p. GL-29) for definition.
TOADM
See “tunable optical add/drop multiplexer” (p. GL-30) for definition.
topology
The pattern of interconnections between nodes in a network, such as a ring or hub. A network
topology database contains information regarding each link in the network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 GL-29
Issue 1 June 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
traffic grooming
Traffic can be consolidated, aggregated, or separated to achieve efficiencies of routing.
Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)

A protocol used with the Internet Protocol to send data in the form of message units between
computers over the Internet. While IP handles the actual delivery of the data, TCP keeps track of
the individual units of data (called packets) that a message is divided into for efficient routing
through the Internet.
traps (SNMP)
SNMP traps are unacknowledged events sent from an agent to a manager. In a 1830
PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16/PSS-4 network, the agent is the node and the manager is EMS.
tunable optical add/drop multiplexer (TOADM)

A tunable ROADM that yields the ultimate in operational flexibility, especially when used in
conjunction with transponders with tunable wavelength lasers.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
U UDP
See “user datagram protocol” (p. GL-30) for definition.
UL
See “Underwriters Laboratories” (p. GL-30) for definition.
Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

A U.S. non-profit privately owned and operated product safety testing and certification
organization. Develops standards and test procedures for products, materials, components,
assemblies, tools and equipment, chiefly dealing with product safety.
unidirectional path-switched ring (UPSR)

A survivable, closed loop transport architecture that protects against cable cuts and node failures
by providing duplicate, geographically diverse paths for each service. Adjacent nodes on the ring
are interconnected using a single pair of optical fibers. One fiber transports traffic in one direction
(for example, clockwise), while the second fiber transports traffic in the opposite direction (for
example, counterclockwise). In a UPSR, the source node bridges its outgoing traffic along
opposite directions around the ring (on paths provided by SONET synchronous transport
channels). In contrast to BLSR, a UPSR:
• is path-specific as opposed to line specific
• does not allow extra traffic (because traffic is bridged)
• requires less coordination from source to destination (because the destination network
element can make all its decisions without involving the source)
UPSR
See “unidirectional path-switched ring” (p. GL-30) for definition.
user datagram protocol (UDP)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-30 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A minimal, datagram-oriented, transport network protocol above the IP network layer that does
not guarantee data ordering or delivery. Because it is datagram-oriented, each send operation by
the application results in the transmission of a single IP datagram. This contrasts with the
Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) which is byte stream oriented and guarantees the delivery
and ordering of the bytes sent. Because it is a byte stream oriented, a single send operation may
result in a no IP datagrams (buffering), a single IP datagram, or multiple IP datagrams.
user services
Services that the network provider can sell to their customers, such as Ethernet service.
UTC
Coordinated universal time.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
V variable optical attenuator (VOA)

A device used to set the attenuation of the power received over a fiber to a level required by the
receiving equipment.
VCAT
See “virtual concatenation” (p. GL-31) for definition.
very short reach (VSR)

A SONET/SDH interface that provides a low-cost interconnection solution of less than 300
meters between routers, switches, and DWDM systems.
virtual concatenation (VCAT)

Defines an inverse multiplexing procedure whereby the contiguous bandwidth is broken into
individual Virtual Containers (VC) at the source transmitter and logically represented in a Virtual
Concatenation Group (VCG). VCG members are transported as individual VCs across the
SONET/SDH network and recombined at the destination VCG receiver. While contiguous
concatenation requires concatenation functionality at each network element, virtual concatenation
do not.
virtual time-slot (VTS)

1830 PSS-1 GBE Edge Device has a fixed assignment of 10 Virtual Time Slots to each line port.
VOA
See “variable optical attenuator” (p. GL-31) for definition.
VSR
See “very short reach” (p. GL-31) for definition.
VTS
See “virtual time-slot” (p. GL-31) for definition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 GL-31
Issue 1 June 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
W wave division multiplexing (WDM)

WDM merges optical traffic onto one common fiber, sending several signals through one fiber
with different wavelengths of light. WDM allows flexibility in expanding bandwidth. It reduces
costly mux/demux function, and it reuses existing optical signals.See dense wave division
multiplexing (DWDM).
wave key
A component of the Wavelength Tracker monitoring capability that is used to identify individual
wavelengths through the network.
A wave key is a number between 1 and 2048. Each WDM wavelength in a 1830 PSS-32 network
is uniquely identified by a pair of wave keys.
waveguide
A material medium that confines and guides a propagating electromagnetic wave.
waveguide coupler
A coupler that transfers light between planar waveguides.
wavelength
The distance between points of corresponding phase of two consecutive cycles of a wave,
typically measured in nanometers (nm). The wavelength is related to the propagation velocity and
the frequency. (Also called lambda.)
wavelength growth
A type of growth in which all eight wavelengths are added to a single line before more lines are
added.
Wavelength Tracker monitoring capability

Wavelength Tracker monitoring capability is a patented feature of 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-
16/PSS-4 which allows for the tracking of wavelengths through the 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-
16/PSS-4 network, and for the measuring of the wavelengths' optical power levels at certain
points along their paths.
WaveWrapper
WaveWrapper provides network management functions such as optical-layer performance
monitoring, error correction, and ring protection on a per-wavelength basis.
WDM
See “wave division multiplexing” (p. GL-32) for definition.
WDM demand
The termination points and signal type of a service that is to be carried by the WDM network.
WDM line
A contiguous series of spans terminated by a ROADM at each end. A WDM line can be a single
span or a series of spans joined by the in-line amplifiers (ILAs).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-32 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Web user interface (WebUI)
A computer interface that provides web-based access to the network element (NE).
WebUI
See “Web user interface” (p. GL-32) for definition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
X XFP (10-gigabit small form factor pluggable module)

A pluggable optical transceiver module that combines transmitter and receiver functions in one
compact, flexible, and low cost package format. Up to sixteen XFP modules can be arranged on a
typical rack card, allowing for an unprecedented level of data density. XFP is protocol
independent, are can support OC-192/STM-64, 10 Gigabit Ethernet, 10 Gigabit Fibre Channel,
and G.709 data streams in routers, switches and network cards. Reaches ranging from Very Short
Reach (VSR) to Long Reach (LR) can also be supported.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Y Y-coupler
A coupler that has three waveguide legs joined at the center in a "Y" shape which connects an
input port to two output ports or two input ports to a single output port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Z ZIC (zero installation craft)

An NE-imbedded graphical user interface (GUI) application for local operation and maintenance.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4 GL-33
Issue 1 June 2011
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-34 1830 PSS-36/PSS–32/PSS-16/PSS-4
Issue 1 June 2011

1830 pss16 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

1830 pss16 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Title page

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS

Interference Information: Part 15 of FCC Rules

About this document

Intended audience ................................................................................................................................................................. xxxix

How to use this information product .............................................................................................................................. xxxix

Safety information ........................................................................................................................................................................ xl

Conventions used .......................................................................................................................................................................... xl

Related information ..................................................................................................................................................................... xl

Information product support ................................................................................................................................................... xli

Technical support ........................................................................................................................................................................ xli

How to order ................................................................................................................................................................................. xli

Packaging collection and recovery requirements ........................................................................................................... xlii

Recycling/take-back/disposal of product .......................................................................................................................... xlii

How to comment ....................................................................................................................................................................... xliii

1 Alarm and condition details

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-1

AISL .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-9

AIS - ODU .................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-9

AIS - OTU ................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-10

ALLCHANMISS .................................................................................................................................................................... 1-10

ALLCHANMISSOUT .......................................................................................................................................................... 1-11

AMPDISABLED .................................................................................................................................................................... 1-11

APRLine ................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-12

APRNODE .............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-13

APRSWITCH .......................................................................................................................................................................... 1-14

APRTOPO ............................................................................................................................................................................... 1-14

APRUNAVAIL ....................................................................................................................................................................... 1-15

APRUNAVAILOSC ............................................................................................................................................................. 1-15

APSB .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-16

APSCM ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-16

APSMM ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-17

AUTHFAIL .............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-18

AUTORESET .......................................................................................................................................................................... 1-18

AUTOSWTIMREF ................................................................................................................................................................ 1-20

B1SD ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-20

BASELine ................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-21

BDI .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-22

BDIEGR .................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-23

BDIODU .................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-23

CARDINIT .............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-25

CONFIGFAIL ......................................................................................................................................................................... 1-27

CONTCOM .............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-29

CONTEQPT ............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-31

CONTR ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-32

CONTR-OUT .......................................................................................................................................................................... 1-32

CRDINIT ................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-33

DATAERR ............................................................................................................................................................................... 1-35

DATAFLT ................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-37

DBBKUP-IP ............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-39

DBFL .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-39

DBINVALID ........................................................................................................................................................................... 1-40

DBMEMTRF .......................................................................................................................................................................... 1-40

DBRSTR-IP ............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-41

DBUNSYNC ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1-41

DEGOTU .................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-41

DISCOVERMOD .................................................................................................................................................................. 1-42

DORMANTUSER ................................................................................................................................................................. 1-44

EBER .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-44

EBER-O ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-45

ETHCSF .................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-45

ENV [1-8] .................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-46

EQPT .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-46